diff options
author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2008-06-15 00:46:16 +0000 |
---|---|---|
committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2008-06-15 00:46:16 +0000 |
commit | 310879a3c5868a81753450c3ca110fa3e1515d38 (patch) | |
tree | 7e5443f08778be818dd05fba3f0e97d581b0d5ca /Master/texmf/doc | |
parent | c4a7e2faa4c3a6950b476ee6b0a3bda624b4a78a (diff) |
latex2e-help-texinfo update, unofficial latex reference manual; remove old instances; .info install done by hand
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@8743 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf/doc')
-rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf/doc/info/latex.info | 4309 | ||||
-rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf/doc/info/latex2e.info | 6992 | ||||
-rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex.html | 6090 | ||||
-rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex.pdf | bin | 460963 -> 0 bytes | |||
-rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex2e.html | 6090 | ||||
-rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex2e.pdf | bin | 461229 -> 0 bytes |
6 files changed, 6992 insertions, 16489 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/info/latex.info b/Master/texmf/doc/info/latex.info deleted file mode 100644 index 05e8a79a75c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/info/latex.info +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4309 +0,0 @@ -This is latex.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.7 from latex2e.texi. - -INFO-DIR-SECTION TeX -START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY -* LaTeX2e: (latex). LaTeXe help 1.6. -END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY - - This file documents LaTeX2e, a document preparation system. LaTeX2e -is a macro package for TeX. - - This is edition 1.6 of the LaTeX2e documentation, and is for the -Texinfo that is distributed as part of Version 19 of GNU Emacs. It uses -version 2.134 or later of the texinfo.tex input file. - - This is translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The -pre-translation version was written by George D. Greenwade of Sam -Houston State University. - - The LaTeX 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore -<stg@dcs.ed.ac.uk>. - - The LaTeX2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen -<bullestock@dk-online.dk>. - - Copyright 1988,1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright -1994-1996 Torsten Martinsen. - - Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this -manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are -preserved on all copies. - - Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of -this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that -the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a -permission notice identical to this one. - - Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this -manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified -versions, except that the sections entitled "Distribution" and "General -Public License" may be included in a translation approved by the author -instead of in the original English. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Top, Next: Overview, Prev: (dir), Up: (dir) - - LaTeX2e is a document preparation system implemented as a macro -package for Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program. - - LaTeX was originally conceived by Leslie Lamport. - - This is edition 1.6 of the LaTeX2e documentation. - -* Menu: - - -* Overview:: What is LaTeX? -* Commands:: Commands within a LaTeX document. -* Parameters:: The command line. -* Command Index:: An alphabetical list of LaTeX commands. -* Concept Index:: An alphabetical list of concepts. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Overview, Next: Commands, Prev: Top, Up: Top - -1 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide -*********************************** - -The LaTeX command typesets a file of text using the TeX program and the -LaTeX Macro package for TeX. To be more specific, it processes an input -file containing the text of a document with interspersed commands that -describe how the text should be formatted. It produces at least three -files as output: - - 1. A "Device Independent", or `.dvi' file. This contains commands that - can be translated into commands for a variety of output devices. - You can view the output of LaTeX by using a program such as `xdvi', - which actually uses the `.dvi' file. - - 2. A "transcript" or `.log' file that contains summary information and - diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input file. - - 3. An "auxiliary" or `.aux' file. This is used by LaTeX itself, for - things such as sectioning. - - For a description of what goes on inside TeX, you should consult -`The TeXbook' by Donald E. Knuth, ISBN 0-201-13448-9, published jointly -by the American Mathematical Society and Addison-Wesley Publishing -Company. - - For a description of LaTeX, you should consult: - - `LaTeX: A Document Preparation System', by Leslie Lamport, -Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 2nd edition, 1994. - - `The LaTeX Companion', by Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, and -Alexander Samarin, Addison-Wesley, 1994. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Commands, Next: Parameters, Prev: Overview, Up: Top - -2 Commands -********** - -A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of a `\' -followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter. -Arguments contained in square brackets, `[]', are optional while -arguments contained in braces, `{}', are required. - - NOTE: LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower -case unless explicitly directed to do otherwise. - -* Menu: - -* Counters:: Internal counters used by LaTeX. -* Cross References:: Automatic referencing. -* Definitions:: Define your own commands etc. -* Document Classes:: Some of the various classes available. -* Environments:: Such as enumerate & itemize. -* Footnotes:: How to produce footnotes. -* Layout:: Controlling the page layout. -* Lengths:: The length commands. -* Letters:: The letter class. -* Line & Page Breaking:: How to insert pagebreaks etc. -* Making Paragraphs:: Paragraph commands. -* Margin Notes:: Putting remarks in the margin. -* Math Formulae:: How to create mathematical formulae. -* Modes:: Paragraph, Math or LR modes. -* Page Styles:: Various styles of page layout. -* Sectioning:: How to section properly. -* Spaces & Boxes:: All the associated commands. -* Special Characters:: Special reserved characters. -* Splitting the Input:: Dealing with big files by splitting. -* Starting & Ending:: The formal start & end layouts. -* Table of Contents:: How to create a table of contents. -* Terminal Input/Output:: User interaction. -* Typefaces:: Such as bold, italics etc. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Counters, Next: Cross References, Prev: Commands, Up: Commands - -2.1 Counters -============ - -Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The -name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or -command that produces the number, except with no `\'. (enumi - enumiv -are used for the nested enumerate environment.) Below is a list of the -counters used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control numbering. - - part paragraph figure enumi - chapter subparagraph table enumii - section page footnote enumiii - subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv - subsubsection - -* Menu: - -* \addtocounter:: Add a quantity to a counter. -* \alph:: Print value of a counter using letters. -* \arabic:: Print value of a counter using numerals. -* \fnsymbol:: Print value of a counter using symbols. -* \newcounter:: Define a new counter. -* \refstepcounter:: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. -* \roman:: Print value of a counter using roman numerals. -* \setcounter:: Set the value of a counter. -* \stepcounter:: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. -* \usecounter:: Use a specified counter in a list environment. -* \value:: Use the value of a counter in an expression. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \addtocounter, Next: \alph, Prev: Counters, Up: Counters - -2.1.1 \addtocounter -------------------- - -`\addtocounter{counter}{value}' - - The `\addtocounter' command increments the `counter' by the amount -specified by the `value' argument. The `value' argument can be -negative. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \alph, Next: \arabic, Prev: \addtocounter, Up: Counters - -2.1.2 \alph ------------ - -`\alph{counter}' - - This command causes the value of the `counter' to be printed in -alphabetic characters. The `\alph' command uses lower case alphabetic -alphabetic characters, i.e., `a, b, c...' while the `\Alph' command -uses upper case alphabetic characters, i.e., `A, B, C...'. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \arabic, Next: \fnsymbol, Prev: \alph, Up: Counters - -2.1.3 \arabic -------------- - -`\arabic{counter}' - - The `\arabic' command causes the value of the `counter' to be -printed in Arabic numbers, i.e., `3'. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \fnsymbol, Next: \newcounter, Prev: \arabic, Up: Counters - -2.1.4 \fnsymbol ---------------- - -`\fnsymbol{counter}' - - The `\fnsymbol' command causes the value of the `counter' to be -printed in a specific sequence of nine symbols that can be used for -numbering footnotes. - - NB. `counter' must have a value between 1 and 9 inclusive. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \newcounter, Next: \refstepcounter, Prev: \fnsymbol, Up: Counters - -2.1.5 \newcounter ------------------ - -`\newcounter{foo}[counter]' - - The `\newcounter' command defines a new counter named `foo'. The -counter is initialized to zero. - - The optional argument `[counter]' causes the counter `foo' to be -reset whenever the counter named in the optional argument is -incremented. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \refstepcounter, Next: \roman, Prev: \newcounter, Up: Counters - -2.1.6 \refstepcounter ---------------------- - -`\refstepcounter{counter}' - - The `\refstepcounter' command works like `\stepcounter' *Note -\stepcounter::, except it also defines the current `\ref' value to be -the result of `\thecounter'. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \roman, Next: \stepcounter, Prev: \refstepcounter, Up: Counters - -2.1.7 \roman ------------- - -`\roman{counter}' - - This command causes the value of the `counter' to be printed in -Roman numerals. The `\roman' command uses lower case Roman numerals, -i.e., `i, ii, iii...', while the `\Roman' command uses upper case Roman -numerals, i.e., `I, II, III...'. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \stepcounter, Next: \setcounter, Prev: \roman, Up: Counters - -2.1.8 \stepcounter ------------------- - -`\stepcounter{counter}' - - The `\stepcounter' command adds one to the `counter' and resets all -subsidiary counters. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \setcounter, Next: \usecounter, Prev: \stepcounter, Up: Counters - -2.1.9 \setcounter ------------------ - -`\setcounter{counter}{value}' - - The `\setcounter' command sets the value of the `counter' to that -specified by the `value' argument. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \usecounter, Next: \value, Prev: \setcounter, Up: Counters - -2.1.10 \usecounter ------------------- - -`\usecounter{counter}' - - The `\usecounter' command is used in the second argument of the -`list' environment to allow the counter specified to be used to number -the list items. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \value, Prev: \usecounter, Up: Counters - -2.1.11 \value -------------- - -`\value{counter}' - - The `\value' command produces the value of the `counter' named in -the mandatory argument. It can be used where LaTeX expects an integer -or number, such as the second argument of a `\setcounter' or -`\addtocounter' command, or in: - - \hspace{\value{foo}\parindent} - - It is useful for doing arithmetic with counters. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Cross References, Next: Definitions, Prev: Counters, Up: Commands - -2.2 Cross References -==================== - -One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer -the reader to them, as in "See Figure 3 for more details." - -* Menu: - -* \label:: Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text. -* \pageref:: Refer to a page number. -* \ref:: Refer to a section, figure or similar. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \label, Next: \pageref, Prev: Cross References, Up: Cross References - -2.2.1 \label ------------- - -`\label{key}' - - A `\label' command appearing in ordinary text assigns to the `key' -the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a -numbered environment assigns that number to the `key'. - - A `key' can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or -punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are different. - - To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is -common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a -colon. The prefixes conventionally used are - - * `cha' for chapters - - * `sec' for lower-level sectioning commands - - * `fig' for figures - - * `tab' for tables - - * `eq' for equations - - Thus, a label for a figure would look like `fig:bandersnatch'. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \pageref, Next: \ref, Prev: \label, Up: Cross References - -2.2.2 \pageref --------------- - -`\pageref{key}' - - The `\pageref' command produces the page number of the place in the -text where the corresponding `\label' command appears. ie. where -`\label{key}' appears. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \ref, Prev: \pageref, Up: Cross References - -2.2.3 \ref ----------- - -`\ref{key}' - - The `\ref' command produces the number of the sectional unit, -equation number, ... of the corresponding `\label' command. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Definitions, Next: Document Classes, Prev: Cross References, Up: Commands - -2.3 Definitions -=============== - -* Menu: - -* \newcommand:: Define a new command. -* \newenvironment:: Define a new environment. -* \newtheorem:: Define a new theorem-like environment. -* \newfont:: Define a new font name. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \newcommand, Next: \newenvironment, Prev: Definitions, Up: Definitions - -2.3.1 \newcommand ------------------ - - \newcommand{cmd}[args]{definition} - \newcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition} - \renewcommand{cmd}[args]{definition} - \renewcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition} - - These commands define (or redefine) a command. - -`cmd' - A command name beginning with a `\'. For `\newcommand' it must - not be already defined and must not begin with `\end'; for - `\renewcommand' it must already be defined. - -`args' - An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of the - command being defined. The default is for the command to have no - arguments. - -`def' - If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's - first argument is optional. The default value of the optional - argument is `def'. - -`definition' - The text to be substituted for every occurrence of `cmd'; a - parameter of the form `#n' in `cmd' is replaced by the text of the - nth argument when this substitution takes place. - - - -File: latex.info, Node: \newenvironment, Next: \newtheorem, Prev: \newcommand, Up: Definitions - -2.3.2 \newenvironment ---------------------- - - \newenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef} - \newenvironment{nam}[args][default]{begdef}{enddef} - \renewenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef} - - These commands define or redefine an environment. - -`nam' - The name of the environment. For `\newenvironment' there must be - no currently defined environment by that name, and the command - `\nam' must be undefined. For `\renewenvironment' the environment - must already be defined. - -`args' - An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of the - newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments. - -`default' - If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and `default' - gives the default value for that argument. - -`begdef' - The text substituted for every occurrence of `\begin{nam}'; a - parameter of the form `#n' in `cmd' is replaced by the text of the - nth argument when this substitution takes place. - -`enddef' - The text substituted for every occurrence of `\end{nam}'. It may - not contain any argument parameters. - - - -File: latex.info, Node: \newtheorem, Next: \newfont, Prev: \newenvironment, Up: Definitions - -2.3.3 \newtheorem ------------------ - - \newtheorem{env_name}{caption}[within] - \newtheorem{env_name}[numbered_like]{caption} - - This command defines a theorem-like environment. - -`env_name' - The name of the environment to be defined. A string of letters. - It must not be the name of an existing environment or counter. - -`caption' - The text printed at the beginning of the environment, right before - the number. This may simply say "Theorem", for example. - -`within' - The name of an already defined counter, usually of a sectional - unit. Provides a means of resetting the new theorem counter - *within* the sectional unit. - -`numbered_like' - The name of an already defined theorem-like environment. - - - The `\newtheorem' command may have at most one optional argument. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \newfont, Prev: \newtheorem, Up: Definitions - -2.3.4 \newfont --------------- - -`\newfont{cmd}{font_name}' - - Defines the command name `cmd', which must not be currently defined, -to be a declaration that selects the font named `font_name' to be the -current font. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Document Classes, Next: Environments, Prev: Definitions, Up: Commands - -2.4 Document Classes -==================== - -Valid LaTeX document classes include: - - * article - - * report - - * letter - - * book - - * slides - - Other document classes are often available. *Note Overview::, for -details. They are selected with the following command: - - `\documentclass [options] {class}' - - All the standard classes (except slides) accept the following options -for selecting the typeface size (10 pt is default): - - 10pt, 11pt, 12pt - - All classes accept these options for selecting the paper size -(default is letter): - - a4paper, a5paper, b5paper, letterpaper, legalpaper, executivepaper - - Miscellaneous options: - - * landscape -- selects landscape format. Default is portrait. - - * titlepage, notitlepage -- selects if there should be a separate - title page. - - * leqno -- equation number on left side of equations. Default is - right side. - - * fleqn -- displayed formulas flush left. Default is centred. - - * openbib -- use "open" bibliography format. - - * draft, final -- mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a rule. - Default is final. - - These options are not available with the slides class: - - * oneside, twoside -- selects one- or twosided layout. Default is - oneside, except for the book class. - - * openright, openany -- determines if a chapter should start on a - right-hand page. Default is openright for book. - - * onecolumn, twocolumn -- one or two columns. Defaults to one column. - - The slides class offers the option `clock' for printing the time at -the bottom of each note. - - If you specify more than one option, they must be separated by a -comma. - - Additional packages are loaded by a - - `\usepackage[options]{pkg}' - - command. If you specify more than one package, they must be -separated by a comma. - - Any options given in the `\documentclass' command that are unknown -by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with -`\usepackage'. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Layout, Next: Lengths, Prev: Footnotes, Up: Commands - -2.5 Layout -========== - -Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page. - -* Menu: - -* \flushbottom:: Make all text pages the same height. -* \onecolumn:: Use one-column layout. -* \raggedbottom:: Allow text pages of differing height. -* \twocolumn:: Use two-column layout. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \flushbottom, Next: \onecolumn, Up: Layout - -2.5.1 \flushbottom ------------------- - -The `\flushbottom' declaration makes all text pages the same height, -adding extra vertical space when necessary to fill out the page. - - This is the standard if twocolumn mode is selected. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \onecolumn, Next: \raggedbottom, Prev: \flushbottom, Up: Layout - -2.5.2 \onecolumn ----------------- - -The `\onecolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces -single-column output. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \raggedbottom, Next: \twocolumn, Prev: \onecolumn, Up: Layout - -2.5.3 \raggedbottom -------------------- - -The `\raggedbottom' declaration makes all pages the height of the text -on that page. No extra vertical space is added. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \twocolumn, Prev: \raggedbottom, Up: Layout - -2.5.4 \twocolumn ----------------- - -`\twocolumn[text]' - - The `\twocolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces -two-column output. If the optional `text' argument is present, it is -typeset in one-column mode. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Environments, Next: Footnotes, Prev: Document Classes, Up: Commands - -2.6 Environments -================ - -LaTeX provides a number of different paragraph-making environments. -Each environment begins and ends in the same manner. - - \begin{environment-name} - . - . - . - \end{environment-name} - -* Menu: - -* array:: Math arrays. -* center:: Centred lines. -* description:: Labelled lists. -* enumerate:: Numbered lists. -* eqnarray:: Sequences of aligned equations. -* equation:: Displayed equation. -* figure:: Floating figures. -* flushleft:: Flushed left lines. -* flushright:: Flushed right lines. -* itemize:: Bulleted lists. -* letter:: Letters. -* list:: Generic list environment. -* minipage:: Miniature page. -* picture:: Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles. -* quotation:: Indented environment with paragraph indentation. -* quote:: Indented environment with no paragraph indentation. -* tabbing:: Align text arbitrarily. -* table:: Floating tables. -* tabular:: Align text in columns. -* thebibliography:: Bibliography or reference list. -* theorem:: Theorems, lemmas, etc. -* titlepage:: For hand crafted title pages. -* verbatim:: Simulating typed input. -* verse:: For poetry and other things. - - -File: latex.info, Node: array, Next: center, Prev: Environments, Up: Environments - -2.6.1 array ------------ - - \begin{array}{col1col2...coln} - column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ - . - . - . - \end{array} - - Math arrays are produced with the array environment. It has a single -mandatory argument describing the number of columns and the alignment -within them. Each column, `coln', is specified by a single letter that -tells how items in that row should be formatted. - - * `c' -- for centred - - * `l' -- for flush left - - * `r' -- for flush right - - Column entries must be separated by an `&'. Column entries may -include other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array must be terminated -with the string `\\'. - - Note that the `array' environment can only be used in math mode, so -normally it is used inside an `equation' environment. - - -File: latex.info, Node: center, Next: description, Prev: array, Up: Environments - -2.6.2 center ------------- - - \begin{center} - Text on line 1 \\ - Text on line 2 \\ - . - . - . - \end{center} - - The `center' environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting -of lines that are centred within the left and right margins on the -current page. Each line must be terminated with the string `\\'. - -* Menu: - -* \centering:: The declaration form of the `center' environment. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \centering, Up: center - -2.6.2.1 \centering -.................. - -This declaration corresponds to the `center' environment. This -declaration can be used inside an environment such as `quote' or in a -`parbox'. The text of a figure or table can be centred on the page by -putting a `\centering' command at the beginning of the figure or table -environment. - - Unlike the `center' environment, the `\centering' command does not -start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph -units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the -declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command (of an -environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit. - - -File: latex.info, Node: description, Next: enumerate, Prev: center, Up: Environments - -2.6.3 description ------------------ - - \begin{description} - \item [label] First item - \item [label] Second item - . - . - . - \end{description} - - The `description' environment is used to make labelled lists. The -`label' is bold face and flushed right. - - -File: latex.info, Node: enumerate, Next: eqnarray, Prev: description, Up: Environments - -2.6.4 enumerate ---------------- - - \begin{enumerate} - \item First item - \item Second item - . - . - . - \end{enumerate} - - The `enumerate' environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations -can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also -be nested within other paragraph-making environments. - - Each item of an enumerated list begins with an `\item' command. -There must be at least one `\item' command within the environment. - - The `enumerate' environment uses the `enumi' through `enumiv' -counters (*note Counters::). The type of numbering can be changed by -redefining `\theenumi' etc. - - -File: latex.info, Node: eqnarray, Next: equation, Prev: enumerate, Up: Environments - -2.6.5 eqnarray --------------- - - \begin{eqnarray} - math formula 1 \\ - math formula 2 \\ - . - . - . - \end{eqnarray} - - The `eqnarray' environment is used to display a sequence of -equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column `array' -environment, with consecutive rows separated by `\\' and consecutive -items within a row separated by an `&'. - - An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a -`\nonumber' command. - - The command `\lefteqn' is used for splitting long formulas across -lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of -zero width. - - -File: latex.info, Node: equation, Next: figure, Prev: eqnarray, Up: Environments - -2.6.6 equation --------------- - - \begin{equation} - math formula - \end{equation} - - The `equation' environment centres your equation on the page and -places the equation number in the right margin. - - -File: latex.info, Node: figure, Next: flushleft, Prev: equation, Up: Environments - -2.6.7 figure ------------- - - \begin{figure}[placement] - - body of the figure - - \caption{figure title} - \end{figure} - - Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are -usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page. -Figures will not be split between two pages. - - The optional argument `[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try -to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly -put a float: - - 1. `h' (Here) - at the position in the text where the figure - environment appears. - - 2. `t' (Top) - at the top of a text page. - - 3. `b' (Bottom) - at the bottom of a text page. - - 4. `p' (Page of floats) - on a separate float page, which is a page - containing no text, only floats. - - The standard report and article classes use the default placement -`tbp'. - - The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, -etc. you wish. The `\caption' command allows you to title your figure. - - -File: latex.info, Node: flushleft, Next: flushright, Prev: figure, Up: Environments - -2.6.8 flushleft ---------------- - - \begin{flushleft} - Text on line 1 \\ - Text on line 2 \\ - . - . - . - \end{flushleft} - - The `flushleft' environment allows you to create a paragraph -consisting of lines that are flushed left, to the left-hand margin. -Each line must be terminated with the string `\\'. - -* Menu: - -* \raggedright:: The declaration form of the `flushleft' environment. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \raggedright, Up: flushleft - -2.6.8.1 \raggedright -.................... - -This declaration corresponds to the `flushleft' environment. This -declaration can be used inside an environment such as `quote' or in a -`parbox'. - - Unlike the `flushleft' environment, the `\raggedright' command does -not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats -paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the -declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command (of an -environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit. - - -File: latex.info, Node: flushright, Next: itemize, Prev: flushleft, Up: Environments - -2.6.9 flushright ----------------- - - \begin{flushright} - Text on line 1 \\ - Text on line 2 \\ - . - . - . - \end{flushright} - - The `flushright' environment allows you to create a paragraph -consisting of lines that are flushed right, to the right-hand margin. -Each line must be terminated with the string `\\'. - -* Menu: - -* \raggedleft:: The declaration form of the `flushright' environment. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \raggedleft, Up: flushright - -2.6.9.1 \raggedleft -................... - -This declaration corresponds to the `flushright' environment. This -declaration can be used inside an environment such as `quote' or in a -`parbox'. - - Unlike the `flushright' environment, the `\raggedleft' command does -not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats -paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the -declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command (of an -environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit. - - -File: latex.info, Node: itemize, Next: letter, Prev: flushright, Up: Environments - -2.6.10 itemize --------------- - - \begin{itemize} - \item First item - \item Second item - . - . - . - \end{itemize} - - The `itemize' environment produces a "bulleted" list. Itemizations -can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also -be nested within other paragraph-making environments. - - Each item of an `itemized' list begins with an `\item' command. -There must be at least one `\item' command within the environment. - - The `itemize' environment uses the `itemi' through `itemiv' counters -(*note Counters::). The type of numbering can be changed by redefining -`\theitemi' etc. - - -File: latex.info, Node: letter, Next: list, Prev: itemize, Up: Environments - -2.6.11 letter -------------- - -This environment is used for creating letters. *Note Letters::. - - -File: latex.info, Node: list, Next: minipage, Prev: letter, Up: Environments - -2.6.12 list ------------ - -The `list' environment is a generic environment which is used for -defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in -documents, but often in macros. - - \begin{list}{label}{spacing} - \item First item - \item Second item - . - . - . - \end{list} - - The `{label}' argument specifies how items should be labelled. This -argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the -label. This argument can and usually does contain other LaTeX commands. - - The `{spacing}' argument contains commands to change the spacing -parameters for the list. This argument will most often be null, i.e., -`{}'. This will select all default spacing which should suffice for -most cases. - - -File: latex.info, Node: minipage, Next: picture, Prev: list, Up: Environments - -2.6.13 minipage ---------------- - - \begin{minipage}[position]{width} - text - \end{minipage} - - The `minipage' environment is similar to a `\parbox' command. It -takes the same optional `position' argument and mandatory `width' -argument. You may use other paragraph-making environments inside a -minipage. - - Footnotes in a `minipage' environment are handled in a way that is -particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A -`\footnote' or `\footnotetext' command puts the footnote at the bottom -of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the -`mpfootnote' counter instead of the ordinary `footnote' counter *Note -Counters::. - - NOTE: Don't put one minipage inside another if you are using -footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. - - -File: latex.info, Node: picture, Next: quotation, Prev: minipage, Up: Environments - -2.6.14 picture --------------- - - \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset) - . - . - picture commands - . - . - \end{picture} - - The `picture' environment allows you to create just about any kind -of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You -tell LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their -coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point and -a minus sign -- a number like `5', `2.3' or `-3.1416'. A coordinate -specifies a length in multiples of the unit length `\unitlength', so if -`\unitlength' has been set to `1cm', then the coordinate 2.54 specifies -a length of 2.54 centimetres. You can change the value of -`\unitlength' anywhere you want, using the `\setlength' command, but -strange things will happen if you try changing it inside the picture -environment. - - A position is a pair of coordinates, such as `(2.4,-5)', specifying -the point with x-coordinate `2.4' and y-coordinate `-5'. Coordinates -are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is -normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a -position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the -parentheses serve to delimit the argument. - - The `picture' environment has one mandatory argument, which is a -`position'. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment -produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this -argument's x- and y-coordinates. - - The `picture' environment also has an optional `position' argument, -following the `size' argument, that can change the origin. (Unlike -ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not contained in square -brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of the point at -the lower-left corner of the picture (thereby determining the origin). -For example, if `\unitlength' has been set to `1mm', the command - \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20) - produces a picture of width 100 millimetres and height 200 -millimetres, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose -upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first -draw a picture, you will omit the optional argument, leaving the origin -at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by -shifting everything, you just add the appropriate optional argument. - - The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of -the picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture -really is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the -picture, or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by -LaTeX in determining how much room to leave for it. - - Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the `\put' command. -The command - \put (11.3,-.3){...} - puts the object specified by `...' in the picture, with its -reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for -various objects will be described below. - - The `\put' command creates an "LR box". You can put anything in the -text argument of the `\put' command that you'd put into the argument of -an `\mbox' and related commands. When you do this, the reference point -will be the lower left corner of the box. - - Picture commands: - -* Menu: - -* \circle:: Draw a circle. -* \dashbox:: Draw a dashed box. -* \frame:: Draw a frame around an object. -* \framebox (picture):: Draw a box with a frame around it. -* \line:: Draw a straight line. -* \linethickness:: Set the line thickness. -* \makebox (picture):: Draw a box of the specified size. -* \multiput:: Draw multiple instances of an object. -* \oval:: Draw an ellipse. -* \put:: Place an object at a specified place. -* \shortstack:: Make a pile of objects. -* \vector:: Draw a line with an arrow. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \circle, Next: \dashbox, Up: picture - -2.6.14.1 \circle -................ - -`\circle[*]{diameter}' - - The `\circle' command produces a circle with a diameter as close to -the specified one as possible. If the `*'-form of the command is used, -LaTeX draws a solid circle. - - Note that only circles up to 40 pt can be drawn. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \dashbox, Next: \frame, Prev: \circle, Up: picture - -2.6.14.2 \dashbox -................. - -Draws a box with a dashed line. - - `\dashbox{dash_length}(width,height){...}' - - The `\dashbox' has an extra argument which specifies the width of -each dash. A dashed box looks best when the `width' and `height' are -multiples of the `dash_length'. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \frame, Next: \framebox (picture), Prev: \dashbox, Up: picture - -2.6.14.3 \frame -............... - -`\frame{...}' - - The `\frame' command puts a rectangular frame around the object -specified in the argument. The reference point is the bottom left -corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the frame and the -object. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \framebox (picture), Next: \line, Prev: \frame, Up: picture - -2.6.14.4 \framebox -.................. - -`\framebox(width,height)[position]{...}' - - The `\framebox' command is exactly the same as the `\makebox' -command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that -it creates. - - The `framebox' command produces a rule of thickness `\fboxrule', and -leaves a space `\fboxsep' between the rule and the contents of the box. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \line, Next: \linethickness, Prev: \framebox (picture), Up: picture - -2.6.14.5 \line -.............. - -`\line(x slope,y slope){length}' - - The `\line' command draws a line of the specified `length' and -`slope'. - - Note that LaTeX can only draw lines with slope = x/y, where x and y -have integer values from -6 through 6. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \linethickness, Next: \makebox (picture), Prev: \line, Up: picture - -2.6.14.6 \linethickness -....................... - -`\linethickness{dimension}' - - Declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture -environment to be `dimension', which must be a positive length. It does -not affect the thickness of slanted lines and circles, or the quarter -circles drawn by `\oval' to form the corners of an oval. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \makebox (picture), Next: \multiput, Prev: \linethickness, Up: picture - -2.6.14.7 \makebox -................. - -`\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}' - - The `\makebox' command for the picture environment is similar to the -normal `\makebox' command except that you must specify a `width' and -`height' in multiples of `\unitlength'. - - The optional argument, `[position]', specifies the quadrant that -your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: - - * `t' - Moves the item to the top of the rectangle - - * `b' - Moves the item to the bottom - - * `l' - Moves the item to the left - - * `r' - Moves the item to the right - - *Note \makebox::. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \multiput, Next: \oval, Prev: \makebox (picture), Up: picture - -2.6.14.8 \multiput -.................. - -`\multiput(x coord,y coord)(delta x,delta y){number of copies}{object}' - - The `\multiput' command can be used when you are putting the same -object in a regular pattern across a picture. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \oval, Next: \put, Prev: \multiput, Up: picture - -2.6.14.9 \oval -.............. - -`\oval(width,height)[portion]' - - The `\oval' command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The -optional argument, `[portion]', allows you to select part of the oval. - - * `t' - Selects the top portion - - * `b' - Selects the bottom portion - - * `r' - Selects the right portion - - * `l' - Selects the left portion - - Note that the "corners" of the oval are made with quarter circles -with a maximum radius of 20 pt, so large "ovals" will look more like -boxes with rounded corners. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \put, Next: \shortstack, Prev: \oval, Up: picture - -2.6.14.10 \put -.............. - -`\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }' - - The `\put' command places the item specified by the mandatory -argument at the given coordinates. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \shortstack, Next: \vector, Prev: \put, Up: picture - -2.6.14.11 \shortstack -..................... - -`\shortstack[position]{... \\ ... \\ ...}' - - The `\shortstack' command produces a stack of objects. The valid -positions are: - - * `r' - Moves the objects to the right of the stack - - * `l' - Moves the objects to the left of the stack - - * `c' - Moves the objects to the centre of the stack (default) - - -File: latex.info, Node: \vector, Prev: \shortstack, Up: picture - -2.6.14.12 \vector -................. - -`\vector(x slope,y slope){length}' - - The `\vector' command draws a line with an arrow of the specified -length and slope. The `x' and `y' values must lie between -4 and +4, -inclusive. - - -File: latex.info, Node: quotation, Next: quote, Prev: picture, Up: Environments - -2.6.15 quotation ----------------- - - \begin{quotation} - text - \end{quotation} - - The margins of the `quotation' environment are indented on the left -and the right. The text is justified at both margins and there is -paragraph indentation. Leaving a blank line between text produces a new -paragraph. - - -File: latex.info, Node: quote, Next: tabbing, Prev: quotation, Up: Environments - -2.6.16 quote ------------- - - \begin{quote} - text - \end{quote} - - The margins of the `quote' environment are indented on the left and -the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank line -between text produces a new paragraph. - - -File: latex.info, Node: tabbing, Next: table, Prev: quote, Up: Environments - -2.6.17 tabbing --------------- - - \begin{tabbing} - text \= more text \= still more text \= last text \\ - second row \> \> more \\ - . - . - . - \end{tabbing} - - The `tabbing' environment provides a way to align text in columns. -It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much the way you do -with an ordinary typewriter. - - It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is -constant and known in advance. - - This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the `tabular' -environment. - - The following commands can be used inside a `tabbing' enviroment: - -`\=' - Sets a tab stop at the current position. - -`\>' - Advances to the next tab stop. - -`\<' - This command allows you to put something to the left of the local - margin without changing the margin. Can only be used at the start - of the line. - -`\+' - Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands - one tab stop to the right. - -`\-' - Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands - one tab stop to the left. - -`\'' - Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, - i.e. everything from the most recent `\>', `\<', `\'', `\\', or - `\kill' command, to the right of the previous column, flush - against the current column's tab stop. - -`\`' - Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including - tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last - column because there's no tab stop there. The `\`' command moves - all the text that follows it, up to the `\\' or `\end{tabbing}' - command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing - environment. There must be no `\>' or `\'' command between the - `\`' and the command that ends the line. - -`\kill' - Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like `\\' - except that it throws away the current line instead of producing - output for it. The effect of any `\=', `\+' or `\-' commands in - that line remain in effect. - -`\pushtabs' - Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily - changing tab stop positions in the middle of a `tabbing' - environment. - -`\poptabs' - Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last `\pushtabs'. - -`\a' - In a `tabbing' environment, the commands `\=', `\'' and `\`' do - not produce accents as normal. Instead, the commands `\a=', `\a'' - and `\a`' are used. - - This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format: - - \begin{tabbing} - function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ - \> begin \= \+ \\ - \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\ - fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\ - else \+ \\ - fact := 1; \-\- \\ - end;\\ - \end{tabbing} - - -File: latex.info, Node: table, Next: tabular, Prev: tabbing, Up: Environments - -2.6.18 table ------------- - - \begin{table}[placement] - - body of the table - - \caption{table title} - \end{table} - - Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and -are usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a -page. Tables will not be split between two pages. - - The optional argument `[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try -to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put -a float: - - * `h' : Here - at the position in the text where the table - environment appears. - - * `t' : Top - at the top of a text page. - - * `b' : Bottom - at the bottom of a text page. - - * `p' : Page of floats - on a separate float page, which is a page - containing no text, only floats. - - The standard `report' and `article' classes use the default -placement `[tbp]'. - - The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, -etc., you wish. The `\caption' command allows you to title your table. - - -File: latex.info, Node: tabular, Next: thebibliography, Prev: table, Up: Environments - -2.6.19 tabular --------------- - - \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols} - column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ - . - . - . - \end{tabular} - - or - - \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols} - column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ - . - . - . - \end{tabular*} - - These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of -items, aligned vertically in columns. The mandatory and optional -arguments consist of: - -`width' - Specifies the width of the `tabular*' environment. There must be - rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the - specified width. - -`pos' - Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the - centre of the environment. - - * `t' - align on top row - - * `b' - align on bottom row - -`cols' - Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the - following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and - intercolumn material. - - * `l' - A column of left-aligned items. - - * `r' - A column of right-aligned items. - - * `c' - A column of centred items. - - * `|' - A vertical line the full height and depth of the - environment. - - * `@{text}' - This inserts `text' in every row. An @-expression - suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between - columns; any desired space between the inserted text and the - adjacent items must be included in text. An - `\extracolsep{wd}' command in an @-expression causes an extra - space of width `wd' to appear to the left of all subsequent - columns, until countermanded by another `\extracolsep' - command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space - is not suppressed by an @-expression. An `\extracolsep' - command can be used only in an @-expression in the `cols' - argument. - - * `p{wd}' - Produces a column with each item typeset in a - parbox of width `wd', as if it were the argument of a - `\parbox[t]{wd}' command. However, a `\\' may not appear in - the item, except in the following situations: - 1. inside an environment like `minipage', `array', or - `tabular'. - - 2. inside an explicit `\parbox'. - - 3. in the scope of a `\centering', `\raggedright', or - `\raggedleft' declaration. The latter declarations must - appear inside braces or an environment when used in a - `p'-column element. - - * `*{num}{cols}' - Equivalent to `num' copies of `cols', where - `num' is any positive integer and `cols' is any list of - column-specifiers, which may contain another `*-expression'. - - - - These commands can be used inside a `tabular' environment: - -* Menu: - -* \cline:: Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns. -* \hline:: Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns. -* \multicolumn:: Make an item spanning several columns. -* \vline:: Draw a vertical line. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \cline, Next: \hline, Up: tabular - -2.6.19.1 \cline -............... - -`\cline{i-j}' - - The `\cline' command draws horizontal lines across the columns -specified, beginning in column `i' and ending in column `j', which are -identified in the mandatory argument. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \hline, Next: \multicolumn, Prev: \cline, Up: tabular - -2.6.19.2 \hline -............... - -The `\hline' command will draw a horizontal line the width of the -table. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and -between the rows of the table. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \multicolumn, Next: \vline, Prev: \hline, Up: tabular - -2.6.19.3 \multicolumn -..................... - -`\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}' - - The `\multicolumn' is used to make an entry that spans several -columns. The first mandatory argument, `cols', specifies the number of -columns to span. The second mandatory argument, `pos', specifies the -formatting of the entry; `c' for centred, `l' for flushleft, `r' for -flushright. The third mandatory argument, `text', specifies what text -is to make up the entry. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \vline, Prev: \multicolumn, Up: tabular - -2.6.19.4 \vline -............... - -The `\vline' command will draw a vertical line extending the full -height and depth of its row. An `\hfill' command can be used to move -the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an -@-expression. - - -File: latex.info, Node: thebibliography, Next: theorem, Prev: tabular, Up: Environments - -2.6.20 thebibliography ----------------------- - - \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label} - \bibitem[label]{cite_key} - . - . - . - \end{thebibliography} - - The `thebibliography' environment produces a bibliography or -reference list. In the `article' class, this reference list is -labelled "References"; in the `report' class, it is labelled -"Bibliography". - - * `widest-label': Text that, when printed, is approximately as wide - as the widest item label produces by the `\bibitem' commands. - -* Menu: - -* \bibitem:: Specify a bibliography item. -* \cite:: Refer to a bibliography item. -* \nocite:: Include an item in the bibliography. -* Using BibTeX:: Automatic generation of bibliographies. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \bibitem, Next: \cite, Up: thebibliography - -2.6.20.1 \bibitem -................. - -`\bibitem[label]{cite_key}' - - The `\bibitem' command generates an entry labelled by `label'. If -the `label' argument is missing, a number is generated as the `label', -using the `enumi' counter. The `cite_key' is any sequence of letters, -numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a comma. This command -writes an entry on the `.aux' file containing `cite_key' and the item's -`label'. When this `.aux' file is read by the `\begin{document}' -command, the item's `label' is associated with `cite_key', causing the -reference to `cite_key' by a `\cite' command to produce the associated -`label'. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \cite, Next: \nocite, Prev: \bibitem, Up: thebibliography - -2.6.20.2 \cite -.............. - -`\cite[text]{key_list}' - - The `key_list' argument is a list of citation keys. This command -generates an in-text citation to the references associated with the keys -in `key_list' by entries on the `.aux' file read by the -`\begin{document}' command. - - The optional `text' argument will appear after the citation, i.e. -`\cite[p. 2]{knuth}' might produce `[Knuth, p. 2]'. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \nocite, Next: Using BibTeX, Prev: \cite, Up: thebibliography - -2.6.20.3 \nocite -................ - -`\nocite{key_list}' - - The `\nocite' command produces no text, but writes `key_list', which -is a list of one or more citation keys, on the `.aux' file. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Using BibTeX, Prev: \nocite, Up: thebibliography - -2.6.20.4 Using BibTeX -..................... - -If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if -you need a bibliography of more than a couple of titles) to maintain -your bibliography, you don't use the `thebibliography' environment. -Instead, you include the lines - - \bibliographystyle{style} - \bibliography{bibfile} - - where `style' refers to a file `style.bst', which defines how your -citations will look. The standard styles distributed with BibTeX are: - -`alpha' - Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and - year of publication. - -`plain' - Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric. - -`unsrt' - Like `plain', but entries are in order of citation. - -`abbrv' - Like `plain', but more compact labels. - - In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored to the -demands of various publications. - - The argument to `\bibliography' refers to the file `bibfile.bib', -which should contain your database in BibTeX format. Only the entries -referred to via `\cite' and `\nocite' will be listed in the -bibliography. - - -File: latex.info, Node: theorem, Next: titlepage, Prev: thebibliography, Up: Environments - -2.6.21 theorem --------------- - - \begin{theorem} - theorem text - \end{theorem} - - The `theorem' environment produces "Theorem x" in boldface followed -by your theorem text. - - -File: latex.info, Node: titlepage, Next: verbatim, Prev: theorem, Up: Environments - -2.6.22 titlepage ----------------- - - \begin{titlepage} - text - \end{titlepage} - - The `titlepage' environment creates a title page, i.e. a page with -no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page -to be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. The -`\today' command comes in handy for title pages. - - Note that you can use the `\maketitle' (*note \maketitle::) command -to produce a standard title page. - - -File: latex.info, Node: verbatim, Next: verse, Prev: titlepage, Up: Environments - -2.6.23 verbatim ---------------- - - \begin{verbatim} - text - \end{verbatim} - - The `verbatim' environment is a paragraph-making environment that -gets LaTeX to print exactly what you type in. It turns LaTeX into a -typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same effect that -they would on a typewriter. - -* Menu: - -* \verb:: The macro form of the `verbatim' environment. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \verb, Up: verbatim - -2.6.23.1 \verb -.............. - -`\verb char literal_text char' - - `\verb*char literal_text char' - - Typesets `literal_text' exactly as typed, including special -characters and spaces, using a typewriter (`\tt') type style. There -may be no space between `\verb' or `\verb*' and `char' (space is shown -here only for clarity). The `*-form' differs only in that spaces are -printed as a special character. - - -File: latex.info, Node: verse, Prev: verbatim, Up: Environments - -2.6.24 verse ------------- - - \begin{verse} - text - \end{verse} - - The `verse' environment is designed for poetry, though you may find -other uses for it. - - The margins are indented on the left and the right. Separate the -lines of each stanza with `\\', and use one or more blank lines to -separate the stanzas. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Footnotes, Next: Layout, Prev: Environments, Up: Commands - -2.7 Footnotes -============= - -Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced -with one command, the `\footnote' command. They can also be produced -with two commands, the `\footnotemark' and the `\footnotetext' -commands. See the specific command for information on why you would -use one over the other. - -* Menu: - -* \footnote:: Insert a footnote. -* \footnotemark:: Insert footnote mark only. -* \footnotetext:: Insert footnote text only. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \footnote, Next: \footnotemark, Prev: Footnotes, Up: Footnotes - -2.7.1 \footnote ---------------- - -`\footnote[number]{text}' - - The `\footnote' command places the numbered footnote `text' at the -bottom of the current page. The optional argument, `number', is used -to change the default footnote number. This command can only be used -in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you cannot use it in sectioning commands -like `\chapter', in figures, tables or in a `tabular' environment. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \footnotemark, Next: \footnotetext, Prev: \footnote, Up: Footnotes - -2.7.2 \footnotemark -------------------- - -The `\footnotemark' command puts the footnote `number' in the text. -This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. The text of the -footnote is supplied by the `\footnotetext' command. - - This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote -markers referring to the same footnote by using - - `\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]' - - after the first `\footnote' command. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \footnotetext, Prev: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes - -2.7.3 \footnotetext -------------------- - -`\footnotetext[number]{text}' - - The `\footnotetext' command produces the `text' to be placed at the -bottom of the page. This command can come anywhere after the -`\footnotemark' command. The `\footnotetext' command must appear in -outer paragraph mode. - - The optional argument, `number', is used to change the default -footnote number. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Lengths, Next: Letters, Prev: Layout, Up: Commands - -2.8 Lengths -=========== - -A `length' is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length -as an argument. - -* Menu: - -* \newlength:: Define a new length. -* \setlength:: Set the value of a length. -* \addtolength:: Add a quantity to a length. -* \settodepth:: Set a length to the depth of something. -* \settoheight:: Set a length to the height of something. -* \settowidth:: Set a length to the width of something. -* Predefined lengths:: Lengths that are, like, predefined. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \newlength, Next: \setlength, Prev: Lengths, Up: Lengths - -2.8.1 \newlength ----------------- - -`\newlength{\gnat}' - - The `\newlength' command defines the mandatory argument, `\gnat', as -a `length' command with a value of `0in'. An error occurs if a `\gnat' -command already exists. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \setlength, Next: \addtolength, Prev: \newlength, Up: Lengths - -2.8.2 \setlength ----------------- - -`\setlength{\gnat}{length}' - - The `\setlength' command is used to set the value of a `length' -command. The `length' argument can be expressed in any terms of length -LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (`in'), millimetres (`mm'), points -(`pt'), etc. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \addtolength, Next: \settodepth, Prev: \setlength, Up: Lengths - -2.8.3 \addtolength ------------------- - -`\addtolength{\gnat}{length}' - - The `\addtolength' command increments a "length command" by the -amount specified in the `length' argument. It can be a negative amount. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \settodepth, Next: \settoheight, Prev: \addtolength, Up: Lengths - -2.8.4 \settodepth ------------------ - -`\settodepth{\gnat}{text}' - - The `\settodepth' command sets the value of a `length' command equal -to the depth of the `text' argument. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \settoheight, Next: \settowidth, Prev: \settodepth, Up: Lengths - -2.8.5 \settoheight ------------------- - -`\settoheight{\gnat}{text}' - - The `\settoheight' command sets the value of a `length' command -equal to the height of the `text' argument. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \settowidth, Next: Predefined lengths, Prev: \settoheight, Up: Lengths - -2.8.6 \settowidth ------------------ - -`\settowidth{\gnat}{text}' - - The `\settowidth' command sets the value of a `length' command equal -to the width of the `text' argument. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Predefined lengths, Prev: \settowidth, Up: Lengths - -2.8.7 Predefined lengths ------------------------- - -`\width' - - `\height' - - `\depth' - - `\totalheight' - - These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the -box-making commands *Note Spaces & Boxes::. They specify the natural -width etc. of the text in the box. `\totalheight' equals `\height' + -`\depth'. To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural -size, e.g., say - - `\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}' - - -File: latex.info, Node: Letters, Next: Line & Page Breaking, Prev: Lengths, Up: Commands - -2.9 Letters -=========== - -You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and business. The -`letter' document class is designed to make a number of letters at -once, although you can make just one if you so desire. - - Your `.tex' source file has the same minimum commands as the other -document classes, i.e., you must have the following commands as a -minimum: - - \documentclass{letter} - \begin{document} - ... letters ... - \end{document} - - Each letter is a `letter' environment, whose argument is the name -and address of the recipient. For example, you might have: - - \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St. - \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA} - ... - \end{letter} - - The letter itself begins with the `\opening' command. The text of -the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input. Commands that -make no sense in a letter, like `\chapter', do not work. The letter -closes with a `\closing' command. - - After the `closing', you can have additional material. The `\cc' -command produces the usual "cc: ...". There's also a similar `\encl' -command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands, use `\\' to -separate the items. - - These commands are used with the `letter' class: - -* Menu: - -* \address:: Your return address. -* \cc:: Cc list. -* \closing:: Saying goodbye. -* \encl:: List of enclosed material. -* \location:: Your organisation's address. -* \makelabels:: Making address labels. -* \name:: Your name, for the return address. -* \opening:: Saying hello. -* \ps:: Adding a postscript. -* \signature:: Your signature. -* \startbreaks:: Allow page breaks. -* \stopbreaks:: Disallow page breaks. -* \telephone:: Your phone number. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \address, Next: \cc, Prev: Letters, Up: Letters - -2.9.1 \address --------------- - -`\address{Return address}' - - The return address, as it should appear on the letter and the -envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by `\\' -commands. If you do not make an `\address' declaration, then the -letter will be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard -letterhead. (*Note Overview::, for details on your local -implementation). If you give an `\address' declaration, then the -letter will be formatted as a personal letter. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \cc, Next: \closing, Prev: \address, Up: Letters - -2.9.2 \cc ---------- - -`\cc{Kate Schechter\\Rob McKenna}' - - Generate a list of other persons the letter was sent to. Each name is -printed on a separate line. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \closing, Next: \encl, Prev: \cc, Up: Letters - -2.9.3 \closing --------------- - -`\closing{text}' - - The letter closes with a `\closing' command, i.e., - \closing{Best Regards,} - - -File: latex.info, Node: \encl, Next: \location, Prev: \closing, Up: Letters - -2.9.4 \encl ------------ - -`\encl{CV\\Certificates}' - - Generate a list of enclosed material. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \location, Next: \makelabels, Prev: \encl, Up: Letters - -2.9.5 \location ---------------- - -`\location{address}' - - This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only -appears if the `firstpage' pagestyle is selected. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \makelabels, Next: \name, Prev: \location, Up: Letters - -2.9.6 \makelabels ------------------ - -`\makelabels{number}' - - If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create a sheet -of address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \name, Next: \opening, Prev: \makelabels, Up: Letters - -2.9.7 \name ------------ - -`\name{June Davenport}' - - Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return -address. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \opening, Next: \ps, Prev: \name, Up: Letters - -2.9.8 \opening --------------- - -`\opening{text}' - - The letter begins with the `\opening' command. The mandatory -argument, `text', is whatever text you wish to start your letter, i.e., - \opening{Dear Joe,} - - -File: latex.info, Node: \ps, Next: \signature, Prev: \opening, Up: Letters - -2.9.9 \ps ---------- - -`\ps' - - Use this command before a postscript. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \signature, Next: \startbreaks, Prev: \ps, Up: Letters - -2.9.10 \signature ------------------ - -`\signature{Harvey Swick}' - - Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath -the space for your signature. Items that should go on separate lines -should be separated by `\\' commands. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \startbreaks, Next: \stopbreaks, Prev: \signature, Up: Letters - -2.9.11 \startbreaks -------------------- - -`\startbreaks' - - Used after a `\stopbreaks' command to allow page breaks again. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \stopbreaks, Next: \telephone, Prev: \startbreaks, Up: Letters - -2.9.12 \stopbreaks ------------------- - -`\stopbreaks' - - Inhibit page breaks until a `\startbreaks' command occurs. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \telephone, Prev: \stopbreaks, Up: Letters - -2.9.13 \telephone ------------------ - -`\telephone{number}' - - This is your telephone number. This only appears if the `firstpage' -pagestyle is selected. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Line & Page Breaking, Next: Making Paragraphs, Prev: Letters, Up: Commands - -2.10 Line & Page Breaking -========================= - -The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to -translate your input file into a string of glyphs and spaces. To -produce a printed document, this string must be broken into lines, and -these lines must be broken into pages. In some environments, you do the -line breaking yourself with the `\\' command, but LaTeX usually does it -for you. - -* Menu: - -* \\:: Start a new line. -* \- (hyphenation):: Insert explicit hyphenation. -* \cleardoublepage:: Start a new right-hand page. -* \clearpage:: Start a new page. -* \enlargethispage:: Enlarge the current page a bit. -* \fussy:: Be fussy about line breaking. -* \hyphenation:: Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word. -* \linebreak:: Break the line. -* \newline:: Break the line prematurely. -* \newpage:: Start a new page. -* \nolinebreak:: Don't break the current line. -* \nopagebreak:: Don't make a page break here. -* \pagebreak:: Please make a page break here. -* \sloppy:: Be sloppy about line breaking. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \\, Next: \- (hyphenation), Prev: Line & Page Breaking, Up: Line & Page Breaking - -2.10.1 \\ ---------- - -`\\[*][extra-space]' - - The `\\' command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an -optional argument, `extra-space', that specifies how much extra -vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a -negative amount. - - The `\\*' command is the same as the ordinary `\\' command except -that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \- (hyphenation), Next: \cleardoublepage, Prev: \\, Up: Line & Page Breaking - -2.10.2 \- ---------- - -The `\-' command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that -point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find all -correct hyphenation points. The `\-' command is used for the -exceptional cases. - - Note that when you insert `\-' commands in a word, the word will -only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation -points that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \cleardoublepage, Next: \clearpage, Prev: \- (hyphenation), Up: Line & Page Breaking - -2.10.3 \cleardoublepage ------------------------ - -The `\cleardoublepage' command ends the current page and causes all -figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. -In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand -(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \clearpage, Next: \enlargethispage, Prev: \cleardoublepage, Up: Line & Page Breaking - -2.10.4 \clearpage ------------------ - -The `\clearpage' command ends the current page and causes all figures -and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \enlargethispage, Next: \fussy, Prev: \clearpage, Up: Line & Page Breaking - -2.10.5 \enlargethispage ------------------------ - -`\enlargethispage{size}' - - `\enlargethispage*{size}' - - Enlarge the `\textheight' for the current page by the specified -amount; e.g. `\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one -additional line. - - The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page -as much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit -`\pagebreak'. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \fussy, Next: \hyphenation, Prev: \enlargethispage, Up: Line & Page Breaking - -2.10.6 \fussy -------------- - -`\fussy' - - This declaration (which is the default) makes TeX more fussy about -line breaking. This can avoids too much space between words, but may -produce overfull boxes. - - This command cancels the effect of a previous `\sloppy' command. -*Note \sloppy:: - - -File: latex.info, Node: \hyphenation, Next: \linebreak, Prev: \fussy, Up: Line & Page Breaking - -2.10.7 \hyphenation -------------------- - -`\hyphenation{words}' - - The `\hyphenation' command declares allowed hyphenation points, -where `words' is a list of words, separated by spaces, in which each -hyphenation point is indicated by a `-' character. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \linebreak, Next: \newline, Prev: \hyphenation, Up: Line & Page Breaking - -2.10.8 \linebreak ------------------ - -`\linebreak[number]' - - The `\linebreak' command tells LaTeX to break the current line at -the point of the command. With the optional argument, `number', you -can convert the `\linebreak' command from a demand to a request. The -number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more -insistent the request is. - - The `\linebreak' command causes LaTeX to stretch the line so it -extends to the right margin. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \newline, Next: \newpage, Prev: \linebreak, Up: Line & Page Breaking - -2.10.9 \newline ---------------- - -The `\newline' command breaks the line right where it is. It can only -be used in paragraph mode. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \newpage, Next: \nolinebreak, Prev: \newline, Up: Line & Page Breaking - -2.10.10 \newpage ----------------- - -The `\newpage' command ends the current page. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \nolinebreak, Next: \nopagebreak, Prev: \newpage, Up: Line & Page Breaking - -2.10.11 \nolinebreak --------------------- - -`\nolinebreak[number]' - - The `\nolinebreak' command prevents LaTeX from breaking the current -line at the point of the command. With the optional argument, -`number', you can convert the `\nolinebreak' command from a demand to a -request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the -number, the more insistent the request is. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \nopagebreak, Next: \pagebreak, Prev: \nolinebreak, Up: Line & Page Breaking - -2.10.12 \nopagebreak --------------------- - -`\nopagebreak[number]' - - The `\nopagebreak' command prevents LaTeX from breaking the current -page at the point of the command. With the optional argument, -`number', you can convert the `\nopagebreak' command from a demand to a -request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the -number, the more insistent the request is. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \pagebreak, Next: \sloppy, Prev: \nopagebreak, Up: Line & Page Breaking - -2.10.13 \pagebreak ------------------- - -`\pagebreak[number]' - - The `\pagebreak' command tells LaTeX to break the current page at -the point of the command. With the optional argument, `number', you -can convert the `\pagebreak' command from a demand to a request. The -number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more -insistent the request is. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \sloppy, Prev: \pagebreak, Up: Line & Page Breaking - -2.10.14 \sloppy ---------------- - -`\sloppy' - - This declaration makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. This can -prevent overfull boxes, but may leave too much space between words. - - Lasts until a `\fussy' command is issued. *Note \fussy::. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Making Paragraphs, Next: Margin Notes, Prev: Line & Page Breaking, Up: Commands - -2.11 Making Paragraphs -====================== - -A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines -- lines not -containing even a `%'. A blank line should not appear where a new -paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of -a sectioning command. - -* Menu: - -* \indent:: Indent this paragraph. -* \noindent:: Do not indent this paragraph. -* \par:: Another way of writing a blank line. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \indent, Next: \noindent, Prev: Making Paragraphs, Up: Making Paragraphs - -2.11.1 \indent --------------- - -`\indent' - - This produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of the -paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph indentation where it -would otherwise be suppressed. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \noindent, Next: \par, Prev: \indent, Up: Making Paragraphs - -2.11.2 \noindent ----------------- - -`\noindent' - - When used at the beginning of the paragraph, it suppresses the -paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a -paragraph. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \par, Prev: \noindent, Up: Making Paragraphs - -2.11.3 \par ------------ - -Equivalent to a blank line; often used to make command or environment -definitions easier to read. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Margin Notes, Next: Math Formulae, Prev: Making Paragraphs, Up: Commands - -2.12 Margin Notes -================= - -The command `\marginpar[left]{right}' creates a note in the margin. -The first line will be at the same height as the line in the text where -the `\marginpar' occurs. - - When you only specify the mandatory argument `right', the text will -be placed - - * in the right margin for one-sided layout - - * in the outside margin for two-sided layout - - * in the nearest margin for two-column layout. - - By issuing the command `\reversemarginpar', you can force the -marginal notes to go into the opposite (inside) margin. - - When you specify both arguments, `left' is used for the left margin, -and `right' is used for the right margin. - - The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable -hyphenation by prefixing the first word with a `\hspace{0pt}' command. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Math Formulae, Next: Modes, Prev: Margin Notes, Up: Commands - -2.13 Math Formulae -================== - -There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode: - -`math' - For Formulae that appear right in the text. - -`displaymath' - For Formulae that appear on their own line. - -`equation' - The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an - equation number in the right margin. - - The `math' environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, -but the `displaymath' and `equation' environments can be used only in -paragraph mode. The `math' and `displaymath' environments are used so -often that they have the following short forms: - - \(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math} - - \[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath} - - In fact, the `math' environment is so common that it has an even -shorter form: - - $ ... $ instead of \(...\) - -* Menu: - -* Subscripts & Superscripts:: Also known as exponent or index. -* Math Symbols:: Various mathematical squiggles. -* Spacing in Math Mode:: Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces. -* Math Miscellany:: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Subscripts & Superscripts, Next: Math Symbols, Prev: Math Formulae, Up: Math Formulae - -2.13.1 Subscripts & Superscripts --------------------------------- - -To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type -`_{'exp`}'. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type -`^{'exp`}'. LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of that -stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing when something -has both a subscript and a superscript. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Math Symbols, Next: Spacing in Math Mode, Prev: Subscripts & Superscripts, Up: Math Formulae - -2.13.2 Math Symbols -------------------- - -LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need. The -commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For -example, if you include `$\pi$' in your source, you will get the symbol -"pi" in your output. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Spacing in Math Mode, Next: Math Miscellany, Prev: Math Symbols, Up: Math Formulae - -2.13.3 Spacing in Math Mode ---------------------------- - -In a `math' environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and puts in -the spacing that it thinks is best. LaTeX formats mathematics the way -it's done in mathematics texts. If you want different spacing, LaTeX -provides the following four commands for use in math mode: - - 1. `\;' - a thick space - - 2. `\:' - a medium space - - 3. `\,' - a thin space - - 4. `\!' - a negative thin space - - -File: latex.info, Node: Math Miscellany, Prev: Spacing in Math Mode, Up: Math Formulae - -2.13.4 Math Miscellany ----------------------- - -`\cdots' - Produces a horizontal ellipsis where the dots are raised to the - centre of the line. - -`\ddots' - Produces a diagonal ellipsis. - -`\frac{num}{den}' - Produces the fraction `num' divided by `den'. - -`\ldots' - Produces an ellipsis. This command works in any mode, not just - math mode. - -`\overbrace{text}' - Generates a brace over text. - -`\overline{text}' - Causes the argument text to be overlined. - -`\sqrt[root]{arg}' - Produces the square root of its argument. The optional argument, - `root', determines what root to produce, i.e., the cube root of - `x+y' would be typed as `$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$'. - -`\underbrace{text}' - Generates text with a brace underneath. - -`\underline{text}' - Causes the argument text to be underlined. This command can also - be used in paragraph and LR modes. - -`\vdots' - Produces a vertical ellipsis. - - - -File: latex.info, Node: Modes, Next: Page Styles, Prev: Math Formulae, Up: Commands - -2.14 Modes -========== - -When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three -modes: - - * Paragraph mode - - * Math mode - - * Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short - - LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a -different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. -Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when -LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands. - - "Paragraph mode" is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is in when -processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your text into -lines and breaks the lines into pages. LaTeX is in "math mode" when -it's generating a mathematical formula. In "LR mode", as in paragraph -mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of -words with spaces between them. However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX -keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. -Even if you put a hundred words into an `\mbox', LaTeX would keep -typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then -complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line. - - LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an `\mbox' -command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for -example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box. -There are also several text-producing commands and environments for -making a box that put LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box make by one of -these commands or environments will be called a `parbox'. When LaTeX -is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in "inner -paragraph mode". Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out in, is -called "outer paragraph mode". - - -File: latex.info, Node: Page Styles, Next: Sectioning, Prev: Modes, Up: Commands - -2.15 Page Styles -================ - -The `\documentclass' command determines the size and position of the -page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. - -* Menu: - -* \maketitle:: Generate a title page. -* \pagenumbering:: Set the style used for page numbers. -* \pagestyle:: Change the headings/footings style. -* \thispagestyle:: Change the headings/footings style for this page. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \maketitle, Next: \pagenumbering, Prev: Page Styles, Up: Page Styles - -2.15.1 \maketitle ------------------ - -`\maketitle' - - The `\maketitle' command generates a title on a separate title page -- except in the `article' class, where the title normally goes at the -top of the first page. Information used to produce the title is -obtained from the following declarations: - - *Note Page Styles::, for the commands to give the information. - -* Menu: - -* \author:: Who wrote this stuff? -* \date:: The date the document was created. -* \thanks:: A special form of footnote. -* \title:: How to set the document title. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \author, Next: \date, Prev: \maketitle, Up: \maketitle - -2.15.2 \author --------------- - -`\author{names}' - - The `\author' command declares the author(s), where `names' is a -list of authors separated by `\and' commands. Use `\\' to separate -lines within a single author's entry - for example, to give the -author's institution or address. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \date, Next: \thanks, Prev: \author, Up: \maketitle - -2.15.3 \date ------------- - -`\date{text}' - - The `\date' command declares text to be the document's date. With -no `\date' command, the current date is used. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \thanks, Next: \title, Prev: \date, Up: \maketitle - -2.15.4 \thanks --------------- - -`\thanks{text}' - - The `\thanks' command produces a `\footnote' to the title. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \title, Prev: \thanks, Up: \maketitle - -2.15.5 \title -------------- - -`\title{text}' - - The `\title' command declares `text' to be the title. Use `\\' to -tell LaTeX where to start a new line in a long title. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \pagenumbering, Next: \pagestyle, Prev: \maketitle, Up: Page Styles - -2.15.6 \pagenumbering ---------------------- - -`\pagenumbering{num_style}' - - Specifies the style of page numbers. Possible values of `num_style' -are: - - * `arabic' - Arabic numerals - - * `roman' - Lowercase Roman numerals - - * `Roman' - Uppercase Roman numerals - - * `alph' - Lowercase letters - - * `Alph' - Uppercase letters - - -File: latex.info, Node: \pagestyle, Next: \thispagestyle, Prev: \pagenumbering, Up: Page Styles - -2.15.7 \pagestyle ------------------ - -`\pagestyle{option}' - - The `\pagestyle' command changes the style from the current page on -throughout the remainder of your document. - - The valid options are: - - * `plain' - Just a plain page number. - - * `empty' - Produces empty heads and feet - no page numbers. - - * `headings' - Puts running headings on each page. The document - style specifies what goes in the headings. - - * `myheadings' - You specify what is to go in the heading with the - `\markboth' or the `\markright' commands. - -* Menu: - -* \markboth:: Set left and right headings. -* \markright:: Set right heading only. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \markboth, Next: \markright, Prev: \pagestyle, Up: \pagestyle - -2.15.8 \markboth ----------------- - - \markboth{left head}{right head} - - The `\markboth' command is used in conjunction with the page style -`myheadings' for setting both the left and the right heading. You -should note that a "left-hand heading" is generated by the last -`\markboth' command before the end of the page, while a "right-hand -heading" is generated by the first `\markboth' or `\markright' that -comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before the -page. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \markright, Prev: \markboth, Up: \pagestyle - -2.15.9 \markright ------------------ - - \markright{right head} - - The `\markright' command is used in conjunction with the page style -`myheadings' for setting the right heading, leaving the left heading -unchanged. You should note that a "left-hand heading" is generated by -the last `\markboth' command before the end of the page, while a -"right-hand heading" is generated by the first `\markboth' or -`\markright' that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the -last one before the page. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \thispagestyle, Prev: \pagestyle, Up: Page Styles - -2.15.10 \thispagestyle ----------------------- - -`\thispagestyle{option}' - - The `\thispagestyle' command works in the same manner as the -`\pagestyle' command except that it changes the style for the current -page only. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Sectioning, Next: Spaces & Boxes, Prev: Page Styles, Up: Commands - -2.16 Sectioning -=============== - -Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units. - - * `\part' - - * `\chapter' (report and book class only) - - * `\section' - - * `\subsection' - - * `\subsubsection' - - * `\paragraph' - - * `\subparagraph' - - All sectioning commands take the same general form, i.e., - - `\chapter[optional]{title}' - - In addition to providing the heading in the text, the mandatory -argument of the sectioning command can appear in two other places: - - 1. The table of contents - - 2. The running head at the top of the page - - You may not want the same thing to appear in these other two places -as appears in the text heading. To handle this situation, the -sectioning commands have an `optional' argument that provides the text -for these other two purposes. - - All sectioning commands have `*'-forms that print a title, but do -not include a number and do not make an entry in the table of contents. - - `\appendix' - - The `\appendix' command changes the way sectional units are -numbered. The `\appendix' command generates no text and does not -affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this command is -something like - - \chapter{The First Chapter} - ... - \appendix - \chapter{The First Appendix} - - -File: latex.info, Node: Spaces & Boxes, Next: Special Characters, Prev: Sectioning, Up: Commands - -2.17 Spaces & Boxes -=================== - -All the predefined length parameters (*note Predefined lengths::) can be -used in the arguments of the box-making commands. - -* Menu: - -Horizontal space -* \dotfill:: Stretchable horizontal dots. -* \hfill:: Stretchable horizontal space. -* \hrulefill:: Stretchable horizontal rule. -* \hspace:: Fixed horizontal space. -Vertical space -* \addvspace:: Fixed vertical space. -* \bigskip:: Fixed vertical space. -* \medskip:: Fixed vertical space. -* \smallskip:: Fixed vertical space. -* \vfill:: Stretchable vertical space. -* \vspace:: Fixed vertical space. -Boxes -* \fbox:: Framebox. -* \framebox:: Framebox, adjustable position. -* lrbox:: An environment like \sbox. -* \makebox:: Box, adjustable position. -* \mbox:: Box. -* \newsavebox:: Declare a name for saving a box. -* \parbox:: Box with text in paragraph mode. -* \raisebox:: Raise or lower text. -* \rule:: Lines and squares. -* \savebox:: Like \makebox, but save the text for later use. -* \sbox:: Like \mbox, but save the text for later use. -* \usebox:: Print saved text. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \dotfill, Next: \hfill, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.1 \dotfill ---------------- - -The `\dotfill' command produces a "rubber length" that produces dots -instead of just spaces. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \hfill, Next: \hrulefill, Prev: \dotfill, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.2 \hfill -------------- - -The `\hfill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which can stretch -or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with spaces. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \hrulefill, Next: \hspace, Prev: \hfill, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.3 \hrulefill ------------------ - -The `\hrulefill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which can -stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal -rule. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \hspace, Next: \addvspace, Prev: \hrulefill, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.4 \hspace --------------- - -`\hspace[*]{length}' - - The `\hspace' command adds horizontal space. The length of the -space can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e., -points, inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space -with an `\hspace' command. Adding negative space is like backspacing. - - LaTeX removes horizontal space that comes at the end of a line. If -you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional `*' -argument. Then the space is never removed. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \addvspace, Next: \bigskip, Prev: \hspace, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.5 \addvspace ------------------ - -`\addvspace{length}' - - The `\addvspace' command normally adds a vertical space of height -length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same -point in the output by a previous `\addvspace' command, then this -command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length -of the total vertical space equal to `length'. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \bigskip, Next: \medskip, Prev: \addvspace, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.6 \bigskip ---------------- - -The `\bigskip' command is equivalent to `\vspace{bigskipamount}' where -`bigskipamount' is determined by the document class. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \medskip, Next: \smallskip, Prev: \bigskip, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.7 \medskip ---------------- - -The `\medskip' command is equivalent to `\vspace{medskipamount}' where -`medskipamount' is determined by the document class. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \smallskip, Next: \vfill, Prev: \medskip, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.8 \smallskip ------------------ - -`\smallskip' - - The `\smallskip' command is equivalent to `\vspace{smallskipamount}' -where `smallskipamount' is determined by the document class. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \vfill, Next: \vspace, Prev: \smallskip, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.9 \vfill -------------- - -The `\vfill' fill command produces a rubber length which can stretch or -shrink vertically. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \vspace, Next: \fbox, Prev: \vfill, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.10 \vspace ---------------- - -`\vspace[*]{length}' - - The `\vspace' command adds vertical space. The length of the space -can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e., points, -inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space with an -`\vspace' command. - - LaTeX removes vertical space that comes at the end of a page. If you -don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional `*' -argument. Then the space is never removed. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \fbox, Next: \framebox, Prev: \vspace, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.11 \fbox -------------- - -`\fbox{text}' - - The `\fbox' command is exactly the same as the `\mbox' command, -except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it -creates. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \framebox, Next: lrbox, Prev: \fbox, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.12 \framebox ------------------ - -`\framebox[width][position]{text}' - - The `\framebox' command is exactly the same as the `\makebox' -command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that -it creates. - - The framebox command produces a rule of thickness `\fboxrule', and -leaves a space `\fboxsep' between the rule and the contents of the box. - - -File: latex.info, Node: lrbox, Next: \makebox, Prev: \framebox, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.13 lrbox -------------- - -`\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}' - - This is the environment form of `\sbox'. - - The text inside the environment is saved in the box `cmd', which -must have been declared with `\newsavebox'. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \makebox, Next: \mbox, Prev: lrbox, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.14 \makebox ----------------- - -`\makebox[width][position]{text}' - - The `\makebox' command creates a box just wide enough to contain the -`text' specified. The width of the box is specified by the optional -`width' argument. The position of the text within the box is -determined by the optional `position' argument. - - * `c' -- centred (default) - - * `l' -- flushleft - - * `r' -- flushright - - * `s' -- stretch from left to right margin. The text must contain - stretchable space for this to work. - - *Note \makebox (picture)::. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \mbox, Next: \newsavebox, Prev: \makebox, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.15 \mbox -------------- - -`\mbox{text}' - - The `\mbox' command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text -created by its argument. - - Use this command to prevent text from being split across lines. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \newsavebox, Next: \parbox, Prev: \mbox, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.16 \newsavebox -------------------- - -`\newsavebox{cmd}' - - Declares `cmd', which must be a command name that is not already -defined, to be a bin for saving boxes. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \parbox, Next: \raisebox, Prev: \newsavebox, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.17 \parbox ---------------- - -`\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}' - - A `parbox' is a box whose contents are created in `paragraph' mode. -The `\parbox' has two mandatory arguments: - - * `width' - specifies the width of the parbox, and - - * `text' - the text that goes inside the parbox. - - LaTeX will position a `parbox' so its centre lines up with the -centre of the text line. The optional position argument allows you to -line up either the top or bottom line in the parbox (default is top). - - If the height argument is not given, the box will have the natural -height of the text. - - The inner-pos argument controls the placement of the text inside the -box. If it is not specified, position is used. - - * `t' -- text is placed at the top of the box. - - * `c' -- text is centred in the box. - - * `b' -- text is placed at the bottom of the box. - - * `s' -- stretch vertically. The text must contain vertically - stretchable space for this to work. - - A `\parbox' command is used for a parbox containing a small piece of -text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use any -of the paragraph-making environments inside a `\parbox' argument. For -larger pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making -environment, you should use a `minipage' environment *Note minipage::. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \raisebox, Next: \rule, Prev: \parbox, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.18 \raisebox ------------------ - -`\raisebox{distance}[extend-above][extend-below]{text}' - - The `\raisebox' command is used to raise or lower text. The first -mandatory argument specifies how high the text is to be raised (or -lowered if it is a negative amount). The text itself is processed in -`LR mode'. - - Sometimes it's useful to make LaTeX think something has a different -size than it really does - or a different size than LaTeX would -normally think it has. The `\raisebox' command lets you tell LaTeX how -tall it is. - - The first optional argument, `extend-above', makes LaTeX think that -the text extends above the line by the amount specified. The second -optional argument, `extend-below', makes LaTeX think that the text -extends below the line by the amount specified. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \rule, Next: \savebox, Prev: \raisebox, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.19 \rule -------------- - -`\rule[raise-height]{width}{thickness}' - - The `\rule' command is used to produce horizontal lines. The -arguments are defined as follows: - - * `raise-height' - specifies how high to raise the rule (optional) - - * `width' - specifies the length of the rule (mandatory) - - * `thickness' - specifies the thickness of the rule (mandatory) - - -File: latex.info, Node: \savebox, Next: \sbox, Prev: \rule, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.20 \savebox ----------------- - - \savebox{cmd}[width][pos]{text} - - This command typeset `text' in a box just as for `\makebox'. -However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in bin -`cmd', which must have been declared with `\newsavebox'. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \sbox, Next: \usebox, Prev: \savebox, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.21 \sbox -------------- - -`\sbox{text}' - - This commands typeset `text' in a box just as for `\mbox'. However, -instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in bin `cmd', which -must have been declared with `\newsavebox'. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \usebox, Prev: \sbox, Up: Spaces & Boxes - -2.17.22 \usebox ---------------- - -`\usebox{cmd}' - - Prints the box most recently saved in bin `cmd' by a `\savebox' -command. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Special Characters, Next: Splitting the Input, Prev: Spaces & Boxes, Up: Commands - -2.18 Special Characters -======================= - -The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called -"special printing characters", or simply "special characters". - - # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { } - - Whenever you put one of these special characters into your file, you -are doing something special. If you simply want the character to be -printed just as any other letter, include a `\' in front of the -character. For example, `\$' will produce `$' in your output. - - One exception to this rule is the `\' itself because `\\' has its -own special meaning. A `\' is produced by typing `$\backslash$' in -your file. - - Also, `\~' means `place a tilde accent over the following letter', -so you will probably want to use `\verb' instead. - - In addition, you can access any character of a font once you know its -number by using the `\symbol' command. For example, the character used -for displaying spaces in the `\verb*' command has the code decimal 32, -so it can be typed as `\symbol{32}'. - - You can also specify octal numbers with `'' or hexadecimal numbers -with `"', so the previous example could also be written as -`\symbol{'40}' or `\symbol{"20}'. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Splitting the Input, Next: Starting & Ending, Prev: Special Characters, Up: Commands - -2.19 Splitting the Input -======================== - -A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole -input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into -several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use, -there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type -when you run LaTeX. - -* Menu: - -* \include:: Conditionally include a file. -* \includeonly:: Determine which files are included. -* \input:: Unconditionally include a file. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \include, Next: \includeonly, Prev: Splitting the Input, Up: Splitting the Input - -2.19.1 \include ---------------- - -`\include{file}' - - The `\include' command is used in conjunction with the -`\includeonly' command for selective inclusion of files. The `file' -argument is the first name of a file, denoting `file.tex'. If `file' -is one the file names in the file list of the `\includeonly' command or -if there is no `\includeonly' command, the `\include' command is -equivalent to - - \clearpage \input{file} \clearpage - - except that if the file `file.tex' does not exist, then a warning -message rather than an error is produced. If the file is not in the -file list, the `\include' command is equivalent to `\clearpage'. - - The `\include' command may not appear in the preamble or in a file -read by another `\include' command. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \includeonly, Next: \input, Prev: \include, Up: Splitting the Input - -2.19.2 \includeonly -------------------- - -`\includeonly{'file_list`}' - - The `\includeonly' command controls which files will be read in by -an `\include' command. file_list should be a comma-separated list of -filenames. Each filename must match exactly a filename specified in a -`\include' command. This command can only appear in the preamble. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \input, Prev: \includeonly, Up: Splitting the Input - -2.19.3 \input -------------- - -`\input{file}' - - The `\input' command causes the indicated `file' to be read and -processed, exactly as if its contents had been inserted in the current -file at that point. The file name may be a complete file name with -extension or just a first name, in which case the file `file.tex' is -used. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Starting & Ending, Next: Table of Contents, Prev: Splitting the Input, Up: Commands - -2.20 Starting & Ending -====================== - -Your input file must contain the following commands as a minimum: - - \documentclass{class} - \begin{document} - ... your text goes here ... - \end{document} - - where the `class' selected is one of the valid classes for LaTeX. -*Note Document Classes::, (and *note Overview::), for details of the -various document classes available locally. - - You may include other LaTeX commands between the `\documentclass' -and the `\begin{document}' commands (i.e., in the `preamble'). - - -File: latex.info, Node: Table of Contents, Next: Terminal Input/Output, Prev: Starting & Ending, Up: Commands - -2.21 Table of Contents -====================== - -A table of contents is produced with the `\tableofcontents' command. -You put the command right where you want the table of contents to go; -LaTeX does the rest for you. It produces a heading, but it does not -automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the table -of contents, include a `\newpage' command after the `\tableofcontents' -command. - - There are similar commands `\listoffigures' and `\listoftables' for -producing a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. -Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents. - - NOTE: If you want any of these items to be generated, you cannot have -the `\nofiles' command in your document. - -* Menu: - -* \addcontentsline:: Add an entry to table of contents etc. -* \addtocontents:: Add text directly to table of contents file etc. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \addcontentsline, Next: \addtocontents, Prev: Table of Contents, Up: Table of Contents - -2.21.1 \addcontentsline ------------------------ - -`\addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}' - - The `\addcontentsline' command adds an entry to the specified list -or table where: - - * `file' is the extension of the file on which information is to be - written: `toc' (table of contents), `lof' (list of figures), or - `lot' (list of tables). - - * `sec_unit' controls the formatting of the entry. It should be one - of the following, depending upon the value of the file argument: - 1. `toc' -- the name of the sectional unit, such as part or - subsection. - - 2. `lof' -- figure - - 3. `lot' -- table - - * `entry' is the text of the entry. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \addtocontents, Prev: \addcontentsline, Up: Table of Contents - -2.21.2 \addtocontents ---------------------- - -`\addtocontents{file}{text}' - - The `\addtocontents' command adds text (or formatting commands) -directly to the file that generates the table of contents or list of -figures or tables. - - * `file' is the extension of the file on which information is to be - written: `toc' (table of contents), `lof' (list of figures), or - `lot' (list of tables). - - * `text' is the information to be written. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Terminal Input/Output, Next: Typefaces, Prev: Table of Contents, Up: Commands - -2.22 Terminal Input/Output -========================== - -* Menu: - -* \typein:: Read text from the terminal. -* \typeout:: Write text to the terminal. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \typein, Next: \typeout, Up: Terminal Input/Output - -2.22.1 \typein --------------- - -`\typein[cmd]{msg}' - - Prints `msg' on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and wait for -you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the `cmd' argument -is missing, the typed input is processed as if it had been included in -the input file in place of the `\typein' command. If the `cmd' -argument is present, it must be a command name. This command name is -then defined or redefined to be the typed input. - - -File: latex.info, Node: \typeout, Prev: \typein, Up: Terminal Input/Output - -2.22.2 \typeout ---------------- - -`\typeout{msg}' - - Prints `msg' on the terminal and in the `log' file. Commands in -`msg' that are defined with `\newcommand' or `\renewcommand' are -replaced by their definitions before being printed. - - LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space -and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to `msg'. A `\space' -command in `msg' causes a single space to be printed. A `^^J' in `msg' -prints a newline. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Typefaces, Prev: Terminal Input/Output, Up: Commands - -2.23 Typefaces -============== - -The `typeface' is specified by giving the "size" and "style". A -typeface is also called a "font". - -* Menu: - -* Styles:: Select roman, italics etc. -* Sizes:: Select point size. -* Low-level font commands:: Commands for wizards. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Styles, Next: Sizes, Prev: Typefaces, Up: Typefaces - -2.23.1 \Styles --------------- - -The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX. - - These commands are used like `\textit{italics text}'. The -corresponding command in parenthesis is the "declaration form", which -takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the -next type style command or the end of the current group. - - The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say -`\sffamily\bfseries' to get sans serif boldface. - - You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; e.g. -`\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}'. - -`\textrm (\rmfamily)' - Roman. - -`\textit (\itshape)' - -`\emph' - Emphasis (toggles between \textit and \textrm). - -`\textmd (\mdseries)' - Medium weight (default). The opposite of boldface. - -`\textbf (\bfseries)' - Boldface. - -`\textup (\upshape)' - Upright (default). The opposite of slanted. - -`\textsl (\slshape)' - Slanted. - -`\textsf (\sffamily)' - Sans serif. - -`\textsc (\scshape)' - Small caps. - -`\texttt (\ttfamily)' - Typewriter. - -`\textnormal (\normalfont)' - Main document font. - -`\mathrm' - Roman, for use in math mode. - -`\mathbf' - Boldface, for use in math mode. - -`\mathsf' - Sans serif, for use in math mode. - -`\mathtt' - Typewriter, for use in math mode. - -`\mathit' - Italics, for use in math mode, e.g. variable names with several - letters. - -`\mathnormal' - For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration. - -`\mathcal' - `Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode. - - In addition, the command `\mathversion{bold}' can be used for -switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas. -`\mathversion{normal}' restores the default. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Sizes, Next: Low-level font commands, Prev: Styles, Up: Typefaces - -2.23.2 Sizes ------------- - -The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. - - The commands as listed here are "declaration forms". The scope of the -declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of -the current group. - - You can also use the environment form of these commands; e.g. -`\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'. - -`\tiny' - -`\scriptsize' - -`\footnotesize' - -`\small' - -`\normalsize' - (default) - -`\large' - -`\Large' - -`\LARGE' - -`\huge' - -`\Huge' - - -File: latex.info, Node: Low-level font commands, Prev: Sizes, Up: Typefaces - -2.23.3 Low-level font commands ------------------------------- - -These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and -packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available -ones. For full details, you should consult Chapter 7 of `The LaTeX -Companion'. - -`\fontencoding{enc}' - Select font encoding. Valid encodings include `OT1' and `T1'. - -`\fontfamily{family}' - Select font family. Valid families include: - - * `cmr' for Computer Modern Roman - - * `cmss' for Computer Modern Sans Serif - - * `cmtt' for Computer Modern Typewriter - - and numerous others. - -`\fontseries{series}' - Select font series. Valid series include: - - * `m' Medium (normal) - - * `b' Bold - - * `c' Condensed - - * `bc' Bold condensed - - * `bx' Bold extended - - and various other combinations. - -`\fontshape{shape}' - Select font shape. Valid shapes are: - - * `n' Upright (normal) - - * `it' Italic - - * `sl' Slanted (oblique) - - * `sc' Small caps - - * `ui' Upright italics - - * `ol' Outline - - The two last shapes are not available for most font families. - -`\fontsize{size}{skip}' - Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to; - the second is the `\baselineskip' to use. The unit of both - parameters defaults to pt. A rule of thumb is that the - baselineskip should be 1.2 times the font size. - -`\selectfont' - The changes made by calling the four font commands described above - do not come into effect until `\selectfont' is called. - -`\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}' - Equivalent to calling `\fontencoding', `\fontfamily', - `\fontseries' and `\fontshape' with the given parameters, followed - by `\selectfont'. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Parameters, Next: Concept Index, Prev: Commands, Up: Top - -3 Parameters -************ - -The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; TeX -uses `.tex' as a default file extension. If you omit the input file -entirely, TeX accepts input from the terminal. You specify command -options by supplying a string as a parameter to the command; e.g. - - `latex ``\scrollmode\input foo.tex''' - - will process `foo.tex' without pausing after every error. - - Output files are always created in the current directory. When you -fail to specify an input file name, TeX bases the output names on the -file specification associated with the logical name TEX_OUTPUT, -typically `texput.log'. - - -File: latex.info, Node: Concept Index, Next: Command Index, Prev: Parameters, Up: Top - -Concept Index -************* - - -* Menu: - -* Accessing any character of a font: Special Characters. (line 23) -* Aligning Equations: eqnarray. (line 6) -* Appendix, creating: Sectioning. (line 41) -* Arrays, math: array. (line 6) -* article class: Document Classes. (line 6) -* Author, for titlepage: \author. (line 6) -* Bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 6) -* Bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 6) -* BibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 6) -* book class: Document Classes. (line 6) -* Boxes: Spaces & Boxes. (line 6) -* Cc list: \cc. (line 6) -* Centering text: \centering. (line 6) -* Centering text, environment for: center. (line 6) -* Characters, reserved: Special Characters. (line 6) -* Characters, special: Special Characters. (line 6) -* Classes of document: Document Classes. (line 6) -* Commands, defining new ones: \newcommand. (line 6) -* Computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6) -* Counters, a list of: Counters. (line 6) -* Counters, creating: \newcounter. (line 6) -* Counters, getting the value of: \value. (line 6) -* Counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 6) -* Creating letters: Letters. (line 6) -* Creating pictures: picture. (line 6) -* Creating tables: table. (line 6) -* Cross referencing: Cross References. (line 6) -* Cross referencing using page number: \pageref. (line 6) -* Cross referencing using section number: \ref. (line 6) -* Date, for titlepage: \date. (line 6) -* Defining a new command: \newcommand. (line 6) -* Defining new environments: \newenvironment. (line 6) -* Defining new fonts: \newfont. (line 6) -* Defining new theorems: \newtheorem. (line 6) -* Displaying quoted text: quote. (line 6) -* Displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation. - (line 6) -* Document Classes: Document Classes. (line 6) -* Enclosed material: \encl. (line 6) -* Ending & Starting: Starting & Ending. (line 6) -* Enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 6) -* Environments: Environments. (line 6) -* Environments, defining: \newenvironment. (line 6) -* Equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 6) -* Equations, environment for: equation. (line 6) -* exponent: Math Formulae. (line 32) -* Figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 6) -* Flushing a page: \clearpage. (line 6) -* Font commands, low-level: Low-level font commands. - (line 6) -* Font Sizes: Sizes. (line 6) -* Font Styles: Styles. (line 6) -* Fonts: Typefaces. (line 6) -* Fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 6) -* Footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 6) -* Footnotes, creating: Footnotes. (line 6) -* Formatting Text: \centering. (line 6) -* Formulae, environment for: equation. (line 6) -* Formulae, maths: Math Formulae. (line 6) -* Global options: Document Classes. (line 75) -* Greek letters: Math Symbols. (line 6) -* Hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation. (line 6) -* Hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation). (line 6) -* Indent, forcing: \indent. (line 6) -* Indent, suppressing: \noindent. (line 6) -* Input file, splitting: Splitting the Input. (line 6) -* Input/Output: Terminal Input/Output. - (line 6) -* Inserting figures: figure. (line 6) -* Justification, ragged left: \raggedleft. (line 6) -* Justification, ragged right: \raggedright. (line 6) -* Labelled lists, creating: description. (line 6) -* LaTeX overview: Overview. (line 6) -* Layout commands: Layout. (line 3) -* Left-justifying text: \raggedright. (line 6) -* Left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft. (line 6) -* Left-to-right mode: Modes. (line 6) -* Lengths, adding to: \addtolength. (line 6) -* Lengths, defining a new: \newlength. (line 6) -* Lengths, defining and using: Lengths. (line 6) -* Lengths, predefined: Predefined lengths. (line 6) -* Lengths, setting value of: \setlength. (line 6) -* letter class: Document Classes. (line 6) -* Letters: Letters. (line 6) -* Letters, ending: \closing. (line 6) -* Letters, starting: \opening. (line 6) -* Line Breaking: Line & Page Breaking. (line 6) -* Line breaks: \linebreak. (line 6) -* Lines in tables: tabular. (line 6) -* Lining text up in columns using tab stops: tabbing. (line 6) -* Lining text up in tables: tabular. (line 6) -* Lists of items: itemize. (line 6) -* Lists of items, generic: list. (line 6) -* Lists of items, numbered: enumerate. (line 6) -* Loading additional packages: Document Classes. (line 71) -* Low-level font commands: Low-level font commands. - (line 6) -* LR mode: Modes. (line 6) -* Making a title page: titlepage. (line 6) -* Making paragraphs: Making Paragraphs. (line 6) -* Margin Notes: Margin Notes. (line 6) -* Math Formulae: Math Formulae. (line 6) -* Math mode: Modes. (line 6) -* Math mode, entering: Math Formulae. (line 6) -* Math mode, spacing: Spacing in Math Mode. (line 6) -* Maths Miscellany: Math Miscellany. (line 6) -* Maths symbols: Math Symbols. (line 6) -* Minipage, creating a: minipage. (line 6) -* Modes: Modes. (line 6) -* Multicolumn text: \twocolumn. (line 6) -* New line, starting: \\. (line 6) -* New line, starting (paragraph mode): \newline. (line 6) -* New Page: \newpage. (line 6) -* Notes in the margin: Margin Notes. (line 6) -* Options, global: Document Classes. (line 75) -* Overview of LaTeX: Overview. (line 6) -* Packages, loading: Document Classes. (line 71) -* Page break, forcing: \pagebreak. (line 6) -* Page Breaking: Line & Page Breaking. (line 6) -* Page Formatting: Line & Page Breaking. (line 6) -* Page numbering: \pagenumbering. (line 6) -* Page styles: Page Styles. (line 6) -* Paragraph mode: Modes. (line 6) -* Paragraph, starting a new: \par. (line 6) -* Paragraphs: Making Paragraphs. (line 6) -* Pictures, creating: picture. (line 6) -* Poetry, an environment for: verse. (line 6) -* Predefined lengths: Predefined lengths. (line 6) -* Programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6) -* Quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation. - (line 6) -* Quoted text, displaying: quote. (line 6) -* Ragged left text: \raggedleft. (line 6) -* Ragged left text, environment for: flushright. (line 6) -* Ragged right text: \raggedright. (line 6) -* Ragged right text, environment for: flushleft. (line 6) -* Remarks in the margin: Margin Notes. (line 6) -* report class: Document Classes. (line 6) -* Reserved Characters: Special Characters. (line 6) -* Right-justifying text: \raggedleft. (line 6) -* Right-justifying text, environment for: flushright. (line 6) -* Sectioning: Sectioning. (line 6) -* Simulating typed text: verbatim. (line 6) -* Sizes of text: Sizes. (line 6) -* Space, inserting vertical: \addvspace. (line 6) -* Spaces: Spaces & Boxes. (line 6) -* Spacing, within Math mode: Spacing in Math Mode. (line 6) -* Special Characters: Special Characters. (line 6) -* Splitting the input file: Splitting the Input. (line 6) -* Starting & Ending: Starting & Ending. (line 6) -* Starting on a right-hand page: \cleardoublepage. (line 6) -* Styles of text: Styles. (line 6) -* Styles, page: Page Styles. (line 6) -* Subscript: Subscripts & Superscripts. - (line 6) -* Superscript: Subscripts & Superscripts. - (line 6) -* Symbols: Math Symbols. (line 6) -* Tab stops, using: tabbing. (line 6) -* Table of Contents, creating: Table of Contents. (line 6) -* Tables, creating: table. (line 6) -* Terminal Input/Output: Terminal Input/Output. - (line 6) -* Thanks, for titlepage: \thanks. (line 6) -* Theorems, defining: \newtheorem. (line 6) -* Theorems, typesetting: theorem. (line 6) -* Title making: \maketitle. (line 6) -* Title pages, creating: titlepage. (line 6) -* Title, for titlepage: \title. (line 6) -* Typed text, simulating: verbatim. (line 6) -* Typeface Sizes: Sizes. (line 6) -* Typeface Styles: Styles. (line 6) -* Typefaces: Typefaces. (line 6) -* Using BibTeX: Using BibTeX. (line 6) -* Variables, a list of: Counters. (line 6) -* Verbatim text: \verb. (line 6) -* Vertical space, inserting: \addvspace. (line 6) - - -File: latex.info, Node: Command Index, Prev: Concept Index, Up: Top - -Command Index -************* - - -* Menu: - -* $: Math Formulae. (line 6) -* \!: Spacing in Math Mode. (line 11) -* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 46) -* \(: Math Formulae. (line 6) -* \): Math Formulae. (line 6) -* \+: tabbing. (line 38) -* \,: Spacing in Math Mode. (line 11) -* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 6) -* \- (tabbing): tabbing. (line 42) -* \;: Spacing in Math Mode. (line 11) -* \<: tabbing. (line 33) -* \=: tabbing. (line 27) -* \>: tabbing. (line 30) -* \[: Math Formulae. (line 6) -* \\: \\. (line 6) -* \]: Math Formulae. (line 6) -* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 52) -* \a: tabbing. (line 75) -* \addcontentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 6) -* \address: \address. (line 6) -* \addtocontents: \addtocontents. (line 6) -* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 6) -* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 6) -* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 6) -* \Alph: \alph. (line 6) -* \alph: \alph. (line 6) -* \appendix: Sectioning. (line 41) -* \arabic: \arabic. (line 6) -* \author: \author. (line 6) -* \backslash: Special Characters. (line 23) -* \begin: Environments. (line 6) -* \bfseries: Styles. (line 31) -* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 6) -* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 6) -* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 6) -* \bigskip: \bigskip. (line 6) -* \caption: figure. (line 13) -* \cc: \cc. (line 6) -* \cdots: Math Miscellany. (line 7) -* \centering: \centering. (line 6) -* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 6) -* \circle: \circle. (line 6) -* \cite: \cite. (line 6) -* \cleardoublepage: \cleardoublepage. (line 6) -* \clearpage: \clearpage. (line 6) -* \cline: \cline. (line 6) -* \closing: \closing. (line 6) -* \COLON: Spacing in Math Mode. (line 11) -* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 6) -* \date: \date. (line 6) -* \ddots: Math Miscellany. (line 11) -* \depth: Predefined lengths. (line 10) -* \documentclass: Document Classes. (line 6) -* \dotfill: \dotfill. (line 6) -* \emph: Styles. (line 25) -* \encl: \encl. (line 6) -* \end: Environments. (line 6) -* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 6) -* \fbox: \fbox. (line 6) -* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 6) -* \fnsymbol: \fnsymbol. (line 6) -* \fontencoding: Low-level font commands. - (line 12) -* \fontfamily: Low-level font commands. - (line 15) -* \fontseries: Low-level font commands. - (line 26) -* \fontshape: Low-level font commands. - (line 41) -* \fontsize: Low-level font commands. - (line 58) -* \footnote: \footnote. (line 6) -* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 6) -* \footnotesize: Sizes. (line 20) -* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 6) -* \frac: Math Miscellany. (line 14) -* \frame: \frame. (line 6) -* \framebox <1>: \framebox. (line 6) -* \framebox: \framebox (picture). (line 6) -* \fussy: \fussy. (line 6) -* \height: Predefined lengths. (line 8) -* \hfill: \hfill. (line 6) -* \hline: \hline. (line 6) -* \hrulefill: \hrulefill. (line 6) -* \hspace: \hspace. (line 6) -* \Huge: Sizes. (line 35) -* \huge: Sizes. (line 33) -* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 6) -* \include: \include. (line 6) -* \includeonly: \includeonly. (line 6) -* \indent: \indent. (line 6) -* \input: \input. (line 6) -* \item: itemize. (line 6) -* \itshape: Styles. (line 23) -* \kill: tabbing. (line 61) -* \label: \label. (line 6) -* \LARGE: Sizes. (line 31) -* \Large: Sizes. (line 29) -* \large: Sizes. (line 27) -* \ldots: Math Miscellany. (line 17) -* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 22) -* \line: \line. (line 6) -* \linebreak: \linebreak. (line 6) -* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 6) -* \listoffigures: Table of Contents. (line 13) -* \listoftables: Table of Contents. (line 13) -* \location: \location. (line 6) -* \makebox: \makebox. (line 6) -* \makebox (picture): \makebox (picture). (line 6) -* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 6) -* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 6) -* \markboth: \markboth. (line 6) -* \markright: \markright. (line 6) -* \mathbf: Styles. (line 55) -* \mathcal: Styles. (line 71) -* \mathit: Styles. (line 64) -* \mathnormal: Styles. (line 68) -* \mathrm: Styles. (line 52) -* \mathsf: Styles. (line 58) -* \mathtt: Styles. (line 61) -* \mathversion: Styles. (line 73) -* \mbox: \mbox. (line 6) -* \mdseries: Styles. (line 28) -* \medskip: \medskip. (line 6) -* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 6) -* \multiput: \multiput. (line 6) -* \name: \name. (line 6) -* \newcommand: \newcommand. (line 6) -* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 6) -* \newenvironment: \newenvironment. (line 6) -* \newfont: \newfont. (line 6) -* \newlength: \newlength. (line 6) -* \newline: \newline. (line 6) -* \newpage: \newpage. (line 6) -* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 6) -* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 6) -* \nocite: \nocite. (line 6) -* \nofiles: Table of Contents. (line 18) -* \noindent: \noindent. (line 6) -* \nolinebreak: \nolinebreak. (line 6) -* \nopagebreak: \nopagebreak. (line 6) -* \normalfont: Styles. (line 49) -* \normalsize: Sizes. (line 24) -* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 6) -* \opening: \opening. (line 6) -* \oval: \oval. (line 6) -* \overbrace: Math Miscellany. (line 21) -* \overline: Math Miscellany. (line 24) -* \pagebreak: \pagebreak. (line 6) -* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 6) -* \pageref: \pageref. (line 6) -* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 6) -* \par: \par. (line 6) -* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 6) -* \parbox: \parbox. (line 6) -* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 72) -* \ps: \ps. (line 6) -* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 67) -* \put: \put. (line 6) -* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 6) -* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 6) -* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 6) -* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 6) -* \ref: \ref. (line 6) -* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 6) -* \rmfamily: Styles. (line 20) -* \Roman: \roman. (line 6) -* \roman: \roman. (line 6) -* \rule: \rule. (line 6) -* \savebox: \savebox. (line 6) -* \sbox: \sbox. (line 6) -* \scriptsize: Sizes. (line 18) -* \scshape: Styles. (line 43) -* \selectfont: Low-level font commands. - (line 64) -* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 6) -* \setlength: \setlength. (line 6) -* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 6) -* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 6) -* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 6) -* \sffamily: Styles. (line 40) -* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 6) -* \signature: \signature. (line 6) -* \sloppy: \sloppy. (line 6) -* \slshape: Styles. (line 37) -* \small: Sizes. (line 22) -* \smallskip: \smallskip. (line 6) -* \sqrt: Math Miscellany. (line 27) -* \startbreaks: \startbreaks. (line 6) -* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 6) -* \stopbreaks: \stopbreaks. (line 6) -* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 6) -* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 6) -* \subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 6) -* \symbol: Special Characters. (line 23) -* \tableofcontents: Table of Contents. (line 6) -* \telephone: \telephone. (line 6) -* \textbf: Styles. (line 31) -* \textit: Styles. (line 23) -* \textmd: Styles. (line 28) -* \textnormal: Styles. (line 49) -* \textrm: Styles. (line 20) -* \textsc: Styles. (line 43) -* \textsf: Styles. (line 40) -* \textsl: Styles. (line 37) -* \texttt: Styles. (line 46) -* \textup: Styles. (line 34) -* \thanks: \thanks. (line 6) -* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 6) -* \tiny: Sizes. (line 16) -* \title: \title. (line 6) -* \today: titlepage. (line 13) -* \totalheight: Predefined lengths. (line 12) -* \ttfamily: Styles. (line 46) -* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 6) -* \typein: \typein. (line 6) -* \typeout: \typeout. (line 6) -* \underbrace: Math Miscellany. (line 32) -* \underline: Math Miscellany. (line 35) -* \upshape: Styles. (line 34) -* \usebox: \usebox. (line 6) -* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 6) -* \usefont: Low-level font commands. - (line 68) -* \usepackage: Document Classes. (line 68) -* \value: \value. (line 6) -* \vdots: Math Miscellany. (line 39) -* \vector: \vector. (line 6) -* \verb: \verb. (line 6) -* \vfill: \vfill. (line 6) -* \vline: \vline. (line 6) -* \vspace: \vspace. (line 6) -* \width: Predefined lengths. (line 6) -* ^: Subscripts & Superscripts. - (line 6) -* _: Subscripts & Superscripts. - (line 6) -* array: array. (line 6) -* center: center. (line 6) -* description: description. (line 6) -* enumerate: enumerate. (line 6) -* eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 6) -* equation: equation. (line 6) -* figure: figure. (line 6) -* flushleft: flushleft. (line 6) -* flushright: flushright. (line 6) -* itemize: itemize. (line 6) -* letter: letter. (line 6) -* list: list. (line 6) -* lrbox: lrbox. (line 6) -* minipage: minipage. (line 6) -* picture: picture. (line 6) -* quotation: quotation. (line 6) -* quote: quote. (line 6) -* tabbing: tabbing. (line 6) -* table: table. (line 6) -* tabular: tabular. (line 6) -* thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 6) -* theorem: theorem. (line 6) -* titlepage: titlepage. (line 6) -* verbatim: verbatim. (line 6) -* verse: verse. (line 6) - - - -Tag Table: -Node: Top1653 -Node: Overview2255 -Node: Commands3711 -Node: Counters5316 -Node: \addtocounter6763 -Node: \alph7070 -Node: \arabic7466 -Node: \fnsymbol7702 -Node: \newcounter8066 -Node: \refstepcounter8474 -Node: \roman8807 -Node: \stepcounter9191 -Node: \setcounter9439 -Node: \usecounter9708 -Node: \value10016 -Node: Cross References10466 -Node: \label10901 -Node: \pageref11765 -Node: \ref12061 -Node: Definitions12296 -Node: \newcommand12651 -Node: \newenvironment13756 -Node: \newtheorem14961 -Node: \newfont15869 -Node: Document Classes16160 -Node: Layout18210 -Node: \flushbottom18616 -Node: \onecolumn18919 -Node: \raggedbottom19132 -Node: \twocolumn19387 -Node: Environments19677 -Node: array21042 -Node: center21930 -Node: \centering22448 -Node: description23150 -Node: enumerate23528 -Node: eqnarray24270 -Node: equation24999 -Node: figure25300 -Node: flushleft26377 -Node: \raggedright26891 -Node: flushright27465 -Node: \raggedleft27980 -Node: itemize28553 -Node: letter29282 -Node: list29459 -Node: minipage30294 -Node: picture31191 -Node: \circle35158 -Node: \dashbox35509 -Node: \frame35880 -Node: \framebox (picture)36235 -Node: \line36702 -Node: \linethickness37053 -Node: \makebox (picture)37501 -Node: \multiput38195 -Node: \oval38516 -Node: \put39118 -Node: \shortstack39364 -Node: \vector39801 -Node: quotation40095 -Node: quote40499 -Node: tabbing40848 -Node: table43876 -Node: tabular44958 -Node: \cline48169 -Node: \hline48457 -Node: \multicolumn48744 -Node: \vline49281 -Node: thebibliography49598 -Node: \bibitem50456 -Node: \cite51168 -Node: \nocite51662 -Node: Using BibTeX51944 -Node: theorem53126 -Node: titlepage53411 -Node: verbatim53967 -Node: \verb54456 -Node: verse54909 -Node: Footnotes55306 -Node: \footnote55874 -Node: \footnotemark56378 -Node: \footnotetext56902 -Node: Lengths57363 -Node: \newlength57970 -Node: \setlength58283 -Node: \addtolength58660 -Node: \settodepth58965 -Node: \settoheight59236 -Node: \settowidth59511 -Node: Predefined lengths59788 -Node: Letters60309 -Node: \address62243 -Node: \cc62824 -Node: \closing63063 -Node: \encl63274 -Node: \location63451 -Node: \makelabels63709 -Node: \name63993 -Node: \opening64211 -Node: \ps64501 -Node: \signature64653 -Node: \startbreaks64983 -Node: \stopbreaks65201 -Node: \telephone65412 -Node: Line & Page Breaking65640 -Node: \\66876 -Node: \- (hyphenation)67377 -Node: \cleardoublepage67913 -Node: \clearpage68350 -Node: \enlargethispage68639 -Node: \fussy69152 -Node: \hyphenation69549 -Node: \linebreak69903 -Node: \newline70468 -Node: \newpage70699 -Node: \nolinebreak70883 -Node: \nopagebreak71373 -Node: \pagebreak71865 -Node: \sloppy72334 -Node: Making Paragraphs72662 -Node: \indent73202 -Node: \noindent73525 -Node: \par73812 -Node: Margin Notes74011 -Node: Math Formulae74922 -Node: Subscripts & Superscripts76164 -Node: Math Symbols76655 -Node: Spacing in Math Mode77052 -Node: Math Miscellany77611 -Node: Modes78636 -Node: Page Styles80476 -Node: \maketitle80981 -Node: \author81638 -Node: \date82007 -Node: \thanks82249 -Node: \title82442 -Node: \pagenumbering82680 -Node: \pagestyle83112 -Node: \markboth83869 -Node: \markright84452 -Node: \thispagestyle85027 -Node: Sectioning85326 -Node: Spaces & Boxes86691 -Node: \dotfill88102 -Node: \hfill88302 -Node: \hrulefill88551 -Node: \hspace88822 -Node: \addvspace89428 -Node: \bigskip89905 -Node: \medskip90157 -Node: \smallskip90409 -Node: \vfill90686 -Node: \vspace90898 -Node: \fbox91449 -Node: \framebox91725 -Node: lrbox92178 -Node: \makebox92494 -Node: \mbox93123 -Node: \newsavebox93424 -Node: \parbox93684 -Node: \raisebox95114 -Node: \rule95992 -Node: \savebox96452 -Node: \sbox96801 -Node: \usebox97121 -Node: Special Characters97318 -Node: Splitting the Input98618 -Node: \include99266 -Node: \includeonly100130 -Node: \input100576 -Node: Starting & Ending100985 -Node: Table of Contents101639 -Node: \addcontentsline102626 -Node: \addtocontents103418 -Node: Terminal Input/Output103958 -Node: \typein104237 -Node: \typeout104767 -Node: Typefaces105313 -Node: Styles105701 -Node: Sizes107466 -Node: Low-level font commands108045 -Node: Parameters109901 -Node: Concept Index110622 -Node: Command Index123628 - -End Tag Table diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/info/latex2e.info b/Master/texmf/doc/info/latex2e.info new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..edc546d1656 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/info/latex2e.info @@ -0,0 +1,6992 @@ +This is latex2e.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.12 from +latex2e.texi. + +This document is version 2.0 (June 2008) of an unofficial reference +manual for LaTeX, a document preparation system. LaTeX is a macro +package for TeX. + + This was originally translated from `LATEX.HLP' v1.0a in the VMS +Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by George D. +Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The LaTeX 2.09 version was +written by Stephen Gilmore. The LaTeX2e version was adapted from this +by Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry made further updates and additions, +and gratefully acknowledges using `Hypertext Help with LaTeX', by +Sheldon Green, and the `LaTeX Command Summary' (for LaTeX 2.09) by +L. Botway and C. Biemesderfer (published by the TeX Users Group as +`TeXniques' number 10), as reference material (text was not directly +copied). + + Copyright (C) 2007, 2008 Karl Berry. +Copyright (C) 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore. +Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. + + Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this +manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are +preserved on all copies. + + Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of +this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that +the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a +permission notice identical to this one. + + Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this +manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified +versions. + +INFO-DIR-SECTION TeX +START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY +* LaTeX2e: (latex2e). Unofficial LaTeX reference manual. +END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Top, Next: Overview, Up: (dir) + +LaTeX2e +******* + +This document is version 2.0 (June 2008) of an unofficial reference +manual for LaTeX, a document preparation system. It is intended to +cover LaTeX2e, which has been the standard version of LaTeX for many +years. + + LaTeX is implemented as a macro package for Donald E. Knuth's TeX +typesetting program. LaTeX was originally created by Leslie Lamport; +it is now maintained by a group of volunteers +(`http://latex-project.org'). The official documentation written by +the LaTeX project is available there. Again, the present document is +unofficial and has not been reviewed by the LaTeX maintainers. + +* Menu: + +* Overview:: What is LaTeX? +* Starting & ending:: The standard beginning and end of a document. +* Document classes:: Some of the various classes available. +* Typefaces:: And fonts, such as bold, italics etc. +* Layout:: Controlling the page layout. +* Sectioning:: How to section properly. +* Cross references:: Automatic referencing. +* Environments:: Such as enumerate & itemize. +* Line breaking:: Influencing line breaks. +* Page breaking:: Influencing page breaks. +* Footnotes:: How to produce footnotes. +* Definitions:: Define your own commands etc. +* Counters:: Internal counters used by LaTeX. +* Lengths:: The length commands. +* Making paragraphs:: Paragraph commands. +* Math formulas:: How to create mathematical formulas. +* Modes:: Paragraph, Math or LR modes. +* Page Styles:: Various styles of page layout. +* Spaces:: Horizontal and vertical space. +* Boxes:: Making boxes. +* Special insertions:: Inserting reserved and special characters. +* Splitting the input:: Dealing with big files by splitting. +* Front/back matter:: Tables of contents, glossaries, indexes. +* Letters:: The letter class. +* Terminal Input/Output:: User interaction. +* Command Line:: System-independent command-line behavior. +* Document templates:: Starter templates for various document classes. +* Command Index:: Alphabetical list of LaTeX commands. +* Concept Index:: General index. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Overview, Next: Starting & ending, Prev: Top, Up: Top + +1 Overview of LaTeX +******************* + +The LaTeX command typesets a file of text using the TeX program and the +LaTeX "macro package" for TeX. To be more specific, it processes an +input file containing the text of a document with interspersed commands +that describe how the text should be formatted. It produces at least +three files as output: + + 1. A main output file, which is one of: + + 1. If invoked as `latex', a "Device Independent" (`.dvi') file. + This contains commands that can be translated into commands + for a variety of output devices. You can view such `.dvi' + output of LaTeX by using a program such as `xdvi' (display + directly) or `dvips' (convert to PostScript). + + 2. If invoked as `pdflatex', a "Portable Document Format" + (`.pdf') file. Typically, this is a self-contained file, with + all fonts and images embedded. This can be very useful, but + it does make the output much larger than the `.dvi' produced + from the same document. + + There are other less-common variants of LaTeX (and TeX) as well, + which can produce HTML, XML, and other things. + + 2. A "transcript" or `.log' file that contains summary information and + diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input file. + + 3. An "auxiliary" or `.aux' file. This is used by LaTeX itself, for + things such as sectioning. + + A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of a +`\' followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single +non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets, `[]', are optional +while arguments contained in braces, `{}', are required. + + LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless +explicitly directed to do otherwise. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Starting & ending, Next: Document classes, Prev: Overview, Up: Top + +2 Starting & ending +******************* + +A minimal input file looks like the following: + + \documentclass{CLASS} + \begin{document} + YOUR TEXT + \end{document} + +where the CLASS is a valid document class for LaTeX. *Note Document +classes::, for details of the various document classes available +locally. + + You may include other LaTeX commands between the `\documentclass' +and the `\begin{document}' commands (this area is called the +"preamble"). + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Document classes, Next: Typefaces, Prev: Starting & ending, Up: Top + +3 Document classes +****************** + +The class of a given document is defined with the command: + + \documentclass[OPTIONS]{CLASS} + +The `\documentclass' command must be the first command in a LaTeX +source file. + + Built-in LaTeX document CLASS names are (many other document classes +are available as add-ons; *note Overview::): + + article report book letter slides + + Standard OPTIONS are described below. + +* Menu: + +* Document class options:: Global options. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Document class options, Up: Document classes + +3.1 Document class options +========================== + +You can specify so-called "global options" or "class options" to the +`\documentclass' command by enclosing them in square brackets as usual. +To specify more than one OPTION, separate them with a comma: + + \documentclass[OPTION1,OPTION2,...]{CLASS} + + Here is the list of the standard class options. + + All of the standard classes except `slides' accept the following +options for selecting the typeface size (default is `10pt'): + + 10pt 11pt 12pt + + All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the +paper size (default is `letterpaper'): + + a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper + + Miscellaneous other options: + +`draft, final' + mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is + `final'. + +`fleqn' + Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered. + +`landscape' + Selects landscape format; default is portrait. + +`leqno' + Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the + right side. + +`openbib' + Use "open" bibliography format. + +`titlepage, notitlepage' + Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on + the class. + + These options are not available with the slides class: + +`onecolumn' +`twocolumn' + Typeset in one or two columns; default is `onecolumn'. + +`oneside' +`twoside' + Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is `oneside', except for + the `book' class. + + The `\evensidemargin' (`\oddsidemargin' parameter determines the + distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left side of the + page and the text's left margin. The defaults vary with the paper + size and whether one- or two-side layout is selected. For + one-sided printing the text is centered, for two-sided, + `\oddsidemargin' is 40% of the difference between `\paperwidth' + and `\textwidth' with `\evensidemargin' the remainder. + +`openright' +`openany' + Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default + is `openright' for book. + + The `slides' class offers the option `clock' for printing the time +at the bottom of each note. + + Additional packages are loaded like this: + + \usepackage[OPTIONS]{PKG} + + To specify more than one PKG, you can separate them with a comma, or +use multiple `\usepackage' commands. + + Any options given in the `\documentclass' command that are unknown +by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with +`\usepackage'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Typefaces, Next: Layout, Prev: Document classes, Up: Top + +4 Typefaces +*********** + +Two important aspects of selecting a "font" are specifying a size and a +style. The LaTeX commands for doing this are described here. + +* Menu: + +* Font styles:: Select roman, italics etc. +* Font sizes:: Select point size. +* Low-level font commands:: Select encoding, family, series, shape. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Font styles, Next: Font sizes, Up: Typefaces + +4.1 Font styles +=============== + +The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX. + + These commands are used like `\textit{italic text}'. The +corresponding command in parenthesis is the "declaration form", which +takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the +next type style command or the end of the current group. + + The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say either +`\sffamily\bfseries' or `\bfseries\sffamily' to get bold sans serif. + + You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; for +instance, `\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}'. + +`\textrm (\rmfamily)' + Roman. + +`\textit (\itshape)' + Italics. + +`\emph' + Emphasis (switches between `\textit' and `\textrm'). + +`\textmd (\mdseries)' + Medium weight (default). + +`\textbf (\bfseries)' + Boldface. + +`\textup (\upshape)' + Upright (default). The opposite of slanted. + +`\textsl (\slshape)' + Slanted. + +`\textsf (\sffamily)' + Sans serif. + +`\textsc (\scshape)' + Small caps. + +`\texttt (\ttfamily)' + Typewriter. + +`\textnormal (\normalfont)' + Main document font. + +`\mathrm' + Roman, for use in math mode. + +`\mathbf' + Boldface, for use in math mode. + +`\mathsf' + Sans serif, for use in math mode. + +`\mathtt' + Typewriter, for use in math mode. + +`\mathit' +`(\mit)' + Italics, for use in math mode. + +`\mathnormal' + For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration. + +`\mathcal' + `Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode. + + In addition, the command `\mathversion{bold}' can be used for +switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas. +`\mathversion{normal}' restores the default. + + LaTeX also provides these commands, which unconditionally switch to +the given style, that is, are _not_ cumulative. They are used +differently than the above commands, too: `{\CMD ...}' instead of +`\CMD{...}'. These are two very different things. + +`\bf' + Switch to bold face. + +`\cal' + Switch to calligraphic letters for math. + +`\em' + Emphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics). + +`\it' + Italics. + +`\rm' + Roman. + +`\sc' + Small caps. + +`\sf' + Sans serif. + +`\sl' + Slanted (oblique). + +`\tt' + Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width). + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Font sizes, Next: Low-level font commands, Prev: Font styles, Up: Typefaces + +4.2 Font sizes +============== + +The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. The +table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font size +used (in points) with the `10pt', `11pt', and `12pt' document size +options, respectively (*note Document class options::). + +Command `10pt' `11pt' `12pt' +-------------------------------------------------- +`\tiny' 5 6 6 +`\scriptsize' 7 8 8 +`\footnotesize' 8 9 10 +`\small' 9 10 10.95 +`\normalsize' (default) 10 10.95 12 +`\large' 12 12 14.4 +`\Large' 14.4 14.4 17.28 +`\LARGE' 17.28 17.28 20.74 +`\huge' 20.74 20.74 24.88 +`\Huge' 24.88 24.88 24.88 + + The commands as listed here are "declaration forms". The scope of +the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end +of the current group. You can also use the environment form of these +commands; for instance, `\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Low-level font commands, Prev: Font sizes, Up: Typefaces + +4.3 Low-level font commands +=========================== + +These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and +packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available +ones. + +`\fontencoding{enc}' + Select font encoding. Valid encodings include `OT1' and `T1'. + +`\fontfamily{family}' + Select font family. Valid families include: + + * `cmr' for Computer Modern Roman + + * `cmss' for Computer Modern Sans Serif + + * `cmtt' for Computer Modern Typewriter + + and numerous others. + +`\fontseries{series}' + Select font series. Valid series include: + + * `m' Medium (normal) + + * `b' Bold + + * `c' Condensed + + * `bc' Bold condensed + + * `bx' Bold extended + + and various other combinations. + +`\fontshape{shape}' + Select font shape. Valid shapes are: + + * `n' Upright (normal) + + * `it' Italic + + * `sl' Slanted (oblique) + + * `sc' Small caps + + * `ui' Upright italics + + * `ol' Outline + + The two last shapes are not available for most font families. + +`\fontsize{size}{skip}' + Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to + and the second is the line spacing to use; this is stored in a + parameter named `\baselineskip'. The unit of both parameters + defaults to pt. The default `\baselineskip' for the Computer + Modern typeface is 1.2 times the `\fontsize'. + + The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the + `\baselinestretch' parameter when the type size changes; the + default is 1. However, the best way to "double space" a document, + if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use + the `setspace' package; see + `http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace'. + +`\selectfont' + The changes made by calling the four font commands described above + do not come into effect until `\selectfont' is called. + +`\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}' + The same as invoking `\fontencoding', `\fontfamily', `\fontseries' + and `\fontshape' with the given parameters, followed by + `\selectfont'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Layout, Next: Sectioning, Prev: Typefaces, Up: Top + +5 Layout +******** + +Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page. + +* Menu: + +* \onecolumn:: Use one-column layout. +* \twocolumn:: Use two-column layout. +* \flushbottom:: Make all text pages the same height. +* \raggedbottom:: Allow text pages of differing height. +* Page layout parameters:: \headheight \footskip. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \onecolumn, Next: \twocolumn, Up: Layout + +5.1 `\onecolumn' +================ + +The `\onecolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces +single-column output. This is the default. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \twocolumn, Next: \flushbottom, Prev: \onecolumn, Up: Layout + +5.2 `\twocolumn' +================ + +Synopsis: + + \twocolumn[TEXT1COL] + + The `\twocolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces +two-column output. If the optional TEXT1COL argument is present, it is +typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts. + + These parameters control typesetting in two-column output: + +`\columnsep' + The distance between columns (35pt by default). + +`\columnseprule' + The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so + there is no rule. + +`\columnwidth' + The width of the current column; this is equal to `\textwidth' in + single-column text. + + + These parameters control float behavior in two-column output: + +`\dbltopfraction' + Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be + occupied by floats. Default `.7', can be usefully redefined to + (say) `.9' to avoid going to float pages so soon. + +`\dblfloatpagefraction' + The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by + floats, for a two-column float page. Default `.5'. + +`\dblfloatsep' + Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float + page. Default `12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for `10pt' and `11pt' + documents, `14pt plus2pt minus4pt' for `12pt'. + +`\dbltextfloatsep' + Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a + page and the main text. Default `20pt plus2pt minus4pt'. + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \flushbottom, Next: \raggedbottom, Prev: \twocolumn, Up: Layout + +5.3 `\flushbottom' +================== + +The `\flushbottom' declaration makes all text pages the same height, +adding extra vertical space where necessary to fill out the page. + + This is the default if `twocolumn' mode is selected (*note Document +class options::). + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedbottom, Next: Page layout parameters, Prev: \flushbottom, Up: Layout + +5.4 `\raggedbottom' +=================== + +The `\raggedbottom' declaration makes all pages the natural height of +the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be stretched. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Page layout parameters, Prev: \raggedbottom, Up: Layout + +5.5 Page layout parameters +========================== + +`\headheight' + Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is + `30pt', except in the `book' class, where it varies with the type + size. + +`\headsep' + Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the + top of the main text. Default is `25pt', except in the `book' + class, where it varies with the type size. + +`\footskip' + Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the + baseline of the page footer. Default is `30pt', except in the + `book' class, where it varies with the type size. + +`\linewidth' + Width of the current line; the default varies with the font size, + paper width, two-column mode, etc. For an `article' document in + `10pt', it's set to `345pt'; in two-column mode, that becomes + `229.5pt'. + +`\textheight' + The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies + with the font size, document class, etc. For an `article' or + `report' document in `10pt', it's set to `43\baselineskip'; for + `book', it's `41\baselineskip'. For `11pt', it's + `38\baselineskip' and for `12pt', `36\baselineskip'. + +`\textwidth' + The normal horizontal width of the page body; the default varies as + usual. For an `article' or `report' document, it's `345pt' at + `10pt', `360pt' at `11pt', and `390pt' at `12pt'. For a `book' + document, it's `4.5in' at `10pt', and `5in' at `11pt' or `12pt'. + +`\topmargin' + Space between the top of the TeX page (one inch from the top of the + paper, by default) and the top of the header. The default is + computed based on many other parameters: `\paperheight - 2in - + \headheight - \headsep - \textheight - \footskip', and then + divided by two. + +`\topskip' + Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline + of the first line of text. For the standard clases, the default + is the same as the font size, e.g., `10pt' at `10pt'. + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Sectioning, Next: Cross references, Prev: Layout, Up: Top + +6 Sectioning +************ + +Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units: + +`\part' + +`\chapter' + (report and book class only) + +`\section' + +`\subsection' + +`\subsubsection' + +`\paragraph' + +`\subparagraph' + + All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g., + + \chapter[TOCTITLE]{TITLE} + + In addition to providing the heading TITLE in the main text, the +section title can appear in two other places: + + 1. The table of contents. + + 2. The running head at the top of the page. + + You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text. +To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument +TOCTITLE that, when given, specifies the text for these other places. + + Also, all sectioning commands have `*'-forms that print TITLE as +usual, but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the +table of contents. For instance: + + \section*{Preamble} + + The `\appendix' command changes the way following sectional units +are numbered. The `\appendix' command itself generates no text and +does not affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this command +is something like + + \chapter{A Chapter} + ... + \appendix + \chapter{The First Appendix} + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Cross references, Next: Environments, Prev: Sectioning, Up: Top + +7 Cross references +****************** + +One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer +the reader to them, as in "See Figure 3 for more details." + +* Menu: + +* \label:: Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text. +* \pageref:: Refer to a page number. +* \ref:: Refer to a section, figure or similar. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \label, Next: \pageref, Up: Cross references + +7.1 `\label' +============ + +Synopsis: + + \label{KEY} + + A `\label' command appearing in ordinary text assigns to KEY the +number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a numbered +environment assigns that number to KEY. + + A KEY name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or +punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished. + + To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is +common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a +colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes: + +`ch' + for chapters + +`sec' + for lower-level sectioning commands + +`fig' + for figures + +`tab' + for tables + +`eq' + for equations + + Thus, a label for a figure would look like `fig:snark' or +`fig.snark'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \pageref, Next: \ref, Prev: \label, Up: Cross references + +7.2 `\pageref{KEY}' +=================== + +Synopsis: + + \pageref{KEY} + + The `\pageref'{KEY} command produces the page number of the place in +the text where the corresponding `\label'{KEY} command appears. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \ref, Prev: \pageref, Up: Cross references + +7.3 `\ref{KEY}' +=============== + +Synopsis: + + \ref{KEY} + + The `\ref' command produces the number of the sectional unit, +equation, footnote, figure, ..., of the corresponding `\label' command +(*note \label::). It does not produce any text, such as the word +`Section' or `Figure', just the bare number itself. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Environments, Next: Line breaking, Prev: Cross references, Up: Top + +8 Environments +************** + +LaTeX provides many environments for marking off certain text. Each +environment begins and ends in the same manner: + + \begin{ENVNAME} + ... + \end{ENVNAME} + +* Menu: + +* abstract:: Produce an abstract. +* array:: Math arrays. +* center:: Centred lines. +* description:: Labelled lists. +* displaymath:: Formulas that appear on their own line. +* document:: Enclose the whole document. +* enumerate:: Numbered lists. +* eqnarray:: Sequences of aligned equations. +* equation:: Displayed equation. +* figure:: Floating figures. +* flushleft:: Flushed left lines. +* flushright:: Flushed right lines. +* itemize:: Bulleted lists. +* letter:: Letters. +* list:: Generic list environment. +* math:: In-line math. +* minipage:: Miniature page. +* picture:: Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles. +* quotation:: Indented environment with paragraph indentation. +* quote:: Indented environment with no paragraph indentation. +* tabbing:: Align text arbitrarily. +* table:: Floating tables. +* tabular:: Align text in columns. +* thebibliography:: Bibliography or reference list. +* theorem:: Theorems, lemmas, etc. +* titlepage:: For hand crafted title pages. +* verbatim:: Simulating typed input. +* verse:: For poetry and other things. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: abstract, Next: array, Up: Environments + +8.1 `abstract' +============== + +Synopsis: + \begin{abstract} + ... + \end{abstract} + + Environment for producing an abstract, possibly of multiple +paragraphs. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: array, Next: center, Prev: abstract, Up: Environments + +8.2 `array' +=========== + +Synopsis: + + \begin{array}{TEMPLATE} + COL1 TEXT&COL1 TEXT&COLN}\\ + ... + \end{array} + + Math arrays are produced with the `array' environment, normally +within an `equation' environment (*note equation::). It has a single +mandatory TEMPLATE argument describing the number of columns and the +alignment within them. Each column COL is specified by a single letter +that tells how items in that row should be formatted, as follows: + +`c' + centered + +`l' + flush left + +`r' + flush right + + Column entries are separated by `&'. Column entries may include +other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array is terminated with `\\'. + + In the template, the construct `@{TEXT}' puts TEXT between columns +in each row. + + Here's an example: + + \begin{equation} + \begin{array}{lrc} + left1 & right1 & centered1 \\ + left2 & right2 & centered2 \\ + \end{array} + \end{equation} + + The `\arraycolsep' parameter defines half the width of the space +separating columns; the default is `5pt'. *Note tabular::, for other +parameters which affect formatting in `array' environments, namely +`\arrayrulewidth' and `\arraystretch'. + + The `array' environment can only be used in math mode. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: center, Next: description, Prev: array, Up: Environments + +8.3 `center' +============ + +Synopsis: + + \begin{center} + LINE1 \\ + LINE2 \\ + \end{center} + + The `center' environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting +of lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the +current page. Each line is terminated with the string `\\'. + +* Menu: + +* \centering:: Declaration form of the `center' environment. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \centering, Up: center + +8.3.1 `\centering' +------------------ + +The `\centering' declaration corresponds to the `center' environment. +This declaration can be used inside an environment such as `quote' or +in a `parbox'. Thus, the text of a figure or table can be centered on +the page by putting a `\centering' command at the beginning of the +figure or table environment. + + Unlike the `center' environment, the `\centering' command does not +start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph +units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the +declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command (of an +environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit. + + Here's an example: + + \begin{quote} + \centering + first line \\ + second line \\ + \end{quote} + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: description, Next: displaymath, Prev: center, Up: Environments + +8.4 `description' +================= + +Synopsis: + + \begin{description} + \item [LABEL1] ITEM1 + \item [LABEL2] ITEM2 + ... + \end{description} + + The `description' environment is used to make labelled lists. Each +LABEL is typeset in bold, flush right. The ITEM text may contain +multiple paragraphs. + + Another variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if +you typeset a label in typewriter using `\texttt', you'll get bold +typewriter: `\item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]'. This may be too +bold, among other issues. To get just typewriter, use `\tt', which +resets all other style variations: `\item[{\tt plain typewriter}]'. + + For details about list spacing, see *note itemize::. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: displaymath, Next: document, Prev: description, Up: Environments + +8.5 `displaymath' +================= + +Synopsis: + \begin{displaymath} + MATH + \end{displaymath} + +or + + \[MATH\] + + The `displaymath' environment (`\[...\]' is a synonym) typesets the +MATH text on its own line, centered by default. The global `fleqn' +option makes equations flush left; see *note Document class options::. + + No equation number is added to `displaymath' text; to get an +equation number, use the `equation' environment (*note equation::). + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: document, Next: enumerate, Prev: displaymath, Up: Environments + +8.6 `document' +============== + +The `document' environment encloses the body of a document. It is +required in every LaTeX document. *Note Starting & ending::. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: enumerate, Next: eqnarray, Prev: document, Up: Environments + +8.7 `enumerate' +=============== + +Synopsis: + + \begin{enumerate} + \item ITEM1 + \item ITEM2 + ... + \end{enumerate} + + The `enumerate' environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations +can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also +be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as `itemize' +(*note itemize::) and `description' (*note description::). + + Each item of an enumerated list begins with an `\item' command. +There must be at least one `\item' command within the environment. + + By default, the numbering at each level is done like this: + + 1. 1., 2., ... + + 2. (a), (b), ... + + 3. i., ii., ... + + 4. A., B., ... + + The `enumerate' environment uses the counters `\enumi' through +`\enumiv' counters (*note Counters::). If the optional argument to +`\item' is given, the counter is not incremented for that item. + + The `enumerate' environment uses the commands `\labelenumi' through +`\labelenumiv' to produce the default label. So, you can use +`\renewcommand' to change the labels (*note \newcommand & +\renewcommand::). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase +letters: + + \renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}} + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: eqnarray, Next: equation, Prev: enumerate, Up: Environments + +8.8 `eqnarray' +============== + + \begin{eqnarray} (or `eqnarray*') + FORMULA1 \\ + FORMULA2 \\ + ... + \end{eqnarray} + + The `eqnarray' environment is used to display a sequence of +equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column `array' +environment, with consecutive rows separated by `\\' and consecutive +items within a row separated by an `&'. + + `\\*' can also be used to separate equations, with its normal +meaning of not allowing a page break at that line. + + An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a +`\nonumber' command. Alternatively, The `*'-form of the environment +(`\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}') will omit equation numbering +entirely, while otherwise being the same as `eqnarray'. + + The command `\lefteqn' is used for splitting long formulas across +lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of +zero width. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: equation, Next: figure, Prev: eqnarray, Up: Environments + +8.9 `equation' +============== + +Synopsis: + + \begin{equation} + MATH + \end{equation} + + The `equation' environment starts a `displaymath' environment (*note +displaymath::), e.g., centering the MATH text on the page, and also +places an equation number in the right margin. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: figure, Next: flushleft, Prev: equation, Up: Environments + +8.10 `figure' +============= + + \begin{figure}[PLACEMENT] + FIGBODY + \label{LABEL} + \caption[LOFTITLE]{TEXT} + \end{figure} + + Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are +instead "floated" to a convenient place, such as the top of a page. +Figures will not be split between two pages. + + The optional argument `[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try +to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly +put a float: + + 1. `h' (Here) - at the position in the text where the figure + environment appears. + + 2. `t' (Top) - at the top of a text page. + + 3. `b' (Bottom) - at the bottom of a text page. + + 4. `p' (Page of floats) - on a separate float page, which is a page + containing no text, only floats. + + The standard report and article classes use the default placement +`tbp'. + + The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, +etc. you wish. + + The `\caption' command specifies caption TEXT for the figure. The +caption is numbered by default. If LOFTITLE is present, it is used in +the list of figures instead of TEXT (*note Tables of contents::). + + The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at + the bottom; default `.3'. + +`\floatpagefraction' + The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by + floats; default `.5'. + +`\floatsep' + Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default `12pt + plus2pt minus2pt'. + +`\intextsep' + Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; + default `12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for `10pt' and `11pt' styles, + `14pt plus4pt minus4pt' for `12pt'. + +`\textfloatsep' + Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; + default `20pt plus2pt minus4pt'. + +`\textfraction' + Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too + much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a + different page. The default is `.2'. + +`\topfraction' + Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before + floats; default is `.7'. + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: flushleft, Next: flushright, Prev: figure, Up: Environments + +8.11 `flushleft' +================ + + \begin{flushleft} + LINE1 \\ + LINE2 \\ + ... + \end{flushleft} + + The `flushleft' environment allows you to create a paragraph +consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged +right Each line must be terminated with the string `\\'. + +* Menu: + +* \raggedright:: Declaration form of the `flushleft' environment. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedright, Up: flushleft + +8.11.1 `\raggedright' +--------------------- + +The `\raggedright' declaration corresponds to the `flushleft' +environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such +as `quote' or in a `parbox'. + + Unlike the `flushleft' environment, the `\raggedright' command does +not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph +units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the +declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command that ends the +paragraph unit. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: flushright, Next: itemize, Prev: flushleft, Up: Environments + +8.12 `flushright' +================= + + \begin{flushright} + LINE1 \\ + LINE2 \\ + ... + \end{flushright} + + The `flushright' environment allows you to create a paragraph +consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged +left. Each line must be terminated with the string `\\'. + +* Menu: + +* \raggedleft:: Declaration form of the `flushright' environment. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedleft, Up: flushright + +8.12.1 `\raggedleft' +-------------------- + +The `\raggedleft' declaration corresponds to the `flushright' +environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such +as `quote' or in a `parbox'. + + Unlike the `flushright' environment, the `\raggedleft' command does +not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph +units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the +declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command that ends the +paragraph unit. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: itemize, Next: letter, Prev: flushright, Up: Environments + +8.13 `itemize' +============== + +Synopsis: + + \begin{itemize} + \item ITEM1 + \item ITEM2 + ... + \end{itemize} + + The `itemize' environment produces an "unordered", "bulleted" list. +Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. +They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, +such as `enumerate' (*note enumerate::). + + Each item of an `itemize' list begins with an `\item' command. +There must be at least one `\item' command within the environment. + + By default, the marks at each level look like this: + + 1. * + + 2. -- (bold en-dash) + + 3. * + + 4. . (centered dot, rendered here as a period) + + The `itemize' environment uses the commands `\labelitemi' through +`\labelitemiv' to produce the default label. So, you can use +`\renewcommand' to change the labels. For instance, to have the first +level use diamonds: + + \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$} + + The `\leftmargini' through `\leftmarginvi' parameters define the +distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and the +left margin of the list. By convention, `\leftmargin' is set to the +appropriate `\leftmarginN' when a new level of nesting is entered. + + The defaults vary from `.5em' (highest levels of nesting) to `2.5em' +(first level), and are a bit reduced in two-column mode. This example +greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists: + + \setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em + + Some parameters that affect list formatting: + +`\itemindent' + Extra indentation before each item in a list; default zero. + +`\labelsep' + Space between the label and text of an item; default `.5em'. + +`\labelwidth' + Width of the label; default `2em', or `1.5em' in two-column mode. + +`\listparindent' + Extra indentation added to second and subsequent paragraphs within + a list item; default `0pt'. + +`\rightmargin' + Horizontal distance between the right margin of the list and the + enclosing environment; default `0pt', except in the `quote', + `quotation', and `verse' environments, where it is set equal to + `\leftmargin'. + + + Parameters affecting vertical spacing between list items (rather +loose, by default). + +`\itemsep' + Vertical space between items. The default is `2pt plus1pt + minus1pt' for `10pt' documents, `3pt plus2pt minus1pt' for `11pt', + and `4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt' for `12pt'. + +`\parsep' + Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item. + Defaults are the same as `\itemsep'. + +`\topsep' + Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph. + The default is `4pt plus2pt minus2pt' for `10pt' documents, `6pt + plus2pt minus2pt' for `11pt', and `9pt plus3pt minus5pt' for + `12pt'. + +`\partopsep' + Extra space added to `\topsep' when the list environment starts a + paragraph. The default is `2pt plus1pt minus1pt' for `10pt' + documents, `3pt plus1pt minus1pt' for `11pt', and `3pt plus2pt + minus2pt' for `12pt'. + +`\topsep' + Extra vertical space added before an initial and after a final list + item. Its value is changed with list level and font size changes; + for instance, within a first-level list at `10pt', it is `4pt + plus2pt minus2pt'. + + + Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide +space between items. Here is an example defining an `itemize*' +environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs +within a single item (`\parskip' is not list-specific, *note +\parskip::): + + \newenvironment{itemize*}% + {\begin{itemize}% + \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}% + \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}% + \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}% + {\end{itemize}} + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: letter, Next: list, Prev: itemize, Up: Environments + +8.14 `letter' environment: writing letters +========================================== + +This environment is used for creating letters. *Note Letters::. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: list, Next: math, Prev: letter, Up: Environments + +8.15 `list' +=========== + +The `list' environment is a generic environment which is used for +defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in +documents, but often in macros. + + \begin{list}{LABELING}{SPACING} + \item ITEM1 + \item ITEM2 + ... + \end{list} + + The mandatory LABELING argument specifies how items should be +labelled (unless the optional argument is supplied to `\item'). This +argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the +label. It can and usually does contain other LaTeX commands. + + The mandatory SPACING argument contains commands to change the +spacing parameters for the list. This argument will most often be +empty, i.e., `{}', which leaves the default spacing. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: math, Next: minipage, Prev: list, Up: Environments + +8.16 `math' +=========== + +Synopsis: + + \begin{math} + MATH + \end{math} + + The `math' environment inserts the given MATH within the running +text. `\(...\))' and `$...$' are synonyms. *Note Math formulas::. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: minipage, Next: picture, Prev: math, Up: Environments + +8.17 `minipage' +=============== + + \begin{minipage}[POSITION]{WIDTH} + TEXT + \end{minipage} + + The `minipage' environment typesets its body TEXT in a block that +will not be broken across pages (similar to the `\parbox' command, +*note \parbox::). You may use other paragraph-making environments +inside a minipage (unlike `\parbox'). + + It takes an optional POSITION argument for placing TEXT, and a +mandatory WIDTH argument for specifying the line width. + + By default, paragraphs are not indented in the `minipage' +environment. You can restore indentation with a command such as +`\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}' command. + + Footnotes in a `minipage' environment are handled in a way that is +particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A +`\footnote' or `\footnotetext' command puts the footnote at the bottom +of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the +`\mpfootnote' counter instead of the ordinary `footnote' counter (*note +Counters::). + + However, don't put one minipage inside another if you are using +footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: picture, Next: quotation, Prev: minipage, Up: Environments + +8.18 `picture' +============== + + \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset) + ... PICTURE COMMANDS ... + \end{picture} + + The `picture' environment allows you to create just about any kind +of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You +tell LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their +coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point +and a minus sign--a number like `5', `0.3' or `-3.1416'. A coordinate +specifies a length in multiples of the unit length `\unitlength', so if +`\unitlength' has been set to `1cm', then the coordinate 2.54 specifies +a length of 2.54 centimeters. You should only change the value of +`\unitlength', using the `\setlength' command, outside of a `picture' +environment. + + A position is a pair of coordinates, such as `(2.4,-5)', specifying +the point with x-coordinate `2.4' and y-coordinate `-5'. Coordinates +are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is +normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a +position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the +parentheses serve to delimit the argument. + + The `picture' environment has one mandatory argument, which is a +`position'. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment +produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this +argument's x- and y-coordinates. + + The `picture' environment also has an optional `position' argument, +following the `size' argument, that can change the origin. (Unlike +ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not contained in square +brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of the point at +the lower-left corner of the picture (thereby determining the origin). +For example, if `\unitlength' has been set to `1mm', the command + \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20) + produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200 +millimeters, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose +upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first +draw a picture, you will omit the optional argument, leaving the origin +at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by +shifting everything, you just add the appropriate optional argument. + + The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of +the picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture +really is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the +picture, or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by +LaTeX in determining how much room to leave for it. + + Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the `\put' command. +The command + + \put (11.3,-.3){...} + +puts the object specified by `...' in the picture, with its reference +point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various +objects will be described below. + + The `\put' command creates an "LR box". You can put anything that +can go in an `\mbox' (*note \mbox::) in the text argument of the `\put' +command. When you do this, the reference point will be the lower left +corner of the box. + + The `picture' commands are described in the following sections. + +* Menu: + +* \circle:: Draw a circle. +* \makebox (picture):: Draw a box of the specified size. +* \framebox (picture):: Draw a box with a frame around it. +* \dashbox:: Draw a dashed box. +* \frame:: Draw a frame around an object. +* \line:: Draw a straight line. +* \linethickness:: Set the line thickness. +* \thicklines:: A heavier line thickness. +* \thinlines:: The default line thickness. +* \multiput:: Draw multiple instances of an object. +* \oval:: Draw an ellipse. +* \put:: Place an object at a specified place. +* \shortstack:: Make a pile of objects. +* \vector:: Draw a line with an arrow. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \circle, Next: \makebox (picture), Up: picture + +8.18.1 `\circle' +---------------- + + \circle[*]{DIAMETER} + + The `\circle' command produces a circle with a diameter as close to +the specified one as possible. The `*'-form of the command draws a +solid circle. + + Circles up to 40 pt can be drawn. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \makebox (picture), Next: \framebox (picture), Prev: \circle, Up: picture + +8.18.2 `\makebox' +----------------- + +`\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}' + + The `\makebox' command for the picture environment is similar to the +normal `\makebox' command except that you must specify a `width' and +`height' in multiples of `\unitlength'. + + The optional argument, `[position]', specifies the quadrant that +your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: + + * `t' - Moves the item to the top of the rectangle + + * `b' - Moves the item to the bottom + + * `l' - Moves the item to the left + + * `r' - Moves the item to the right + + *Note \makebox::. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \framebox (picture), Next: \dashbox, Prev: \makebox (picture), Up: picture + +8.18.3 `\framebox' +------------------ + +Synopsis: + + \framebox(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[POS]{...} + + The `\framebox' command is like `\makebox' (see previous section), +except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it +creates. + + The `\framebox' command produces a rule of thickness `\fboxrule', +and leaves a space `\fboxsep' between the rule and the contents of the +box. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \dashbox, Next: \frame, Prev: \framebox (picture), Up: picture + +8.18.4 `\dashbox' +----------------- + +Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis: + + \dashbox{DLEN}(RWIDTH,RHEIGHT)[POS]{TEXT} + + `\dashbox' creates a dashed rectangle around TEXT in a `picture' +environment. Dashes are DLEN units long, and the rectangle has overall +width RWIDTH and height RHEIGHT. The TEXT is positioned at optional +POS. A dashed box looks best when the `rwidth' and `rheight' are +multiples of the `dlen'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \frame, Next: \line, Prev: \dashbox, Up: picture + +8.18.5 `\frame' +--------------- + +Synopsis: + + \frame{TEXT} + + The `\frame' command puts a rectangular frame around TEXT. The +reference point is the bottom left corner of the frame. No extra space +is put between the frame and the object. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \line, Next: \linethickness, Prev: \frame, Up: picture + +8.18.6 `\line' +-------------- + +Synopsis: + + \line(XSLOPE,YSLOPE){LENGTH} + + The `\line' command draws a line with the given LENGTH and slope +XSLOPE/YSLOPE. + + Standard LaTeX can only draw lines with SLOPE = x/y, where x and y +have integer values from -6 through 6. For lines of any slope, not to +mention other shapes, see the `curve2e' and many many other packages on +CTAN. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \linethickness, Next: \thicklines, Prev: \line, Up: picture + +8.18.7 `\linethickness' +----------------------- + +The `\linethickness{DIM}' command declares the thickness of horizontal +and vertical lines in a picture environment to be DIM, which must be a +positive length. + + `\linethickness' does not affect the thickness of slanted lines, +circles, or the quarter circles drawn by `\oval'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \thicklines, Next: \thinlines, Prev: \linethickness, Up: picture + +8.18.8 `\thicklines' +-------------------- + +The `\thicklines' command is an alternate line thickness for horizontal +and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. *note \linethickness:: +and *note \thinlines::. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \thinlines, Next: \multiput, Prev: \thicklines, Up: picture + +8.18.9 `\thinlines' +------------------- + +The `\thinlines' command is the default line thickness for horizontal +and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. *note \linethickness:: +and *note \thicklines::. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \multiput, Next: \oval, Prev: \thinlines, Up: picture + +8.18.10 `\multiput' +------------------- + +Synopsis: + \multiput(X,Y)(DELTA_X,DELTA_Y){N}{OBJ} + + The `\multiput' command copies the object OBJ in a regular pattern +across a picture. OBJ is first placed at position (x,y), then at +(x+\delta x,y+\delta y), and so on, N times. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \oval, Next: \put, Prev: \multiput, Up: picture + +8.18.11 `\oval' +--------------- + +Synopsis: + + \oval(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[PORTION] + + The `\oval' command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The +optional argument PORTION allows you to select part of the oval via the +following: + +`t' + selects the top portion; + +`b' + selects the bottom portion; + +`r' + selects the right portion; + +`l' + selects the left portion. + + The "corners" of the oval are made with quarter circles with a +maximum radius of 20pt, so large "ovals" will look more like boxes with +rounded corners. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \put, Next: \shortstack, Prev: \oval, Up: picture + +8.18.12 `\put' +-------------- + +`\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }' + + The `\put' command places the item specified by the mandatory +argument at the given coordinates. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \shortstack, Next: \vector, Prev: \put, Up: picture + +8.18.13 `\shortstack' +--------------------- + +Synopsis: + + \shortstack[POSITION]{...\\...\\...} + + The `\shortstack' command produces a stack of objects. The valid +positions are: + +`r' + Move the objects to the right of the stack. + +`l' + Move the objects to the left of the stack + +`c' + Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default) + + Objects are separated with `\\'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \vector, Prev: \shortstack, Up: picture + +8.18.14 `\vector' +----------------- + +Synopsis: + + \vector(X-SLOPE,Y-SLOPE){LENGTH} + + The `\vector' command draws a line with an arrow of the specified +length and slope. The x and y values must lie between -4 and +4, +inclusive. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: quotation, Next: quote, Prev: picture, Up: Environments + +8.19 `quotation' +================ + +Synopsis: + + \begin{quotation} + TEXT + \end{quotation} + + The margins of the `quotation' environment are indented on both the +left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a +blank line between text produces a new paragraph. + + Unlike the `quote' environment, each paragraph is indented normally. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: quote, Next: tabbing, Prev: quotation, Up: Environments + +8.20 `quote' +============ + +Snyopsis: + + \begin{quote} + TEXT + \end{quote} + + The margins of the `quote' environment are indented on both the left +and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank +line between text produces a new paragraph. + + Unlike the `quotation' environment, paragraphs are not indented. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: tabbing, Next: table, Prev: quote, Up: Environments + +8.21 `tabbing' +============== + +Synopsis: + + \begin{tabbing} + ROW1COL1 \= ROW1COL2 \= ROW1COL3 \= ROW1COL4 \\ + ROW2COL1 \> \> ROW2COL3 \\ + ... + \end{tabbing} + + The `tabbing' environment provides a way to align text in columns. +It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as was done on +an ordinary typewriter. It is best suited for cases where the width of +each column is constant and known in advance. + + This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the `tabular' +environment. + + The following commands can be used inside a `tabbing' enviroment: + +`\\ tabbing' + End a line. + +`\= (tabbing)' + Sets a tab stop at the current position. + +`\> (tabbing)' + Advances to the next tab stop. + +`\<' + Put following text to the left of the local margin (without + changing the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line. + +`\+' + Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands + one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if necessary. + +`\-' + Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands + one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if necessary. + +`\' (tabbing)' + Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, + i.e. everything from the most recent `\>', `\<', `\'', `\\', or + `\kill' command, to the right of the previous column, flush + against the current column's tab stop. + +`\` (tabbing)' + Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including + tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last + column because there's no tab stop there. The `\`' command moves + all the text that follows it, up to the `\\' or `\end{tabbing}' + command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing + environment. There must be no `\>' or `\'' command between the + `\`' and the command that ends the line. + +`\a (tabbing)' + In a `tabbing' environment, the commands `\=', `\'' and `\`' do + not produce accents as usual (*note Accents::). Instead, the + commands `\a=', `\a'' and `\a`' are used. + +`\kill' + Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like `\\' + except that it throws away the current line instead of producing + output for it. The effect of any `\=', `\+' or `\-' commands in + that line remain in effect. + +`\poptabs' + Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last `\pushtabs'. + +`\pushtabs' + Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily + changing tab stop positions in the middle of a `tabbing' + environment. + +`\tabbingsep' + Distance to left of tab stop moved by `\''. + + + This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format: + + \begin{tabbing} + function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ + \> begin \= \+ \\ + \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\ + fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\ + else \+ \\ + fact := 1; \-\- \\ + end;\\ + \end{tabbing} + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: table, Next: tabular, Prev: tabbing, Up: Environments + +8.22 `table' +============ + +Synopsis: + + \begin{table}[placement] + + body of the table + + \caption{table title} + \end{table} + + Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are +usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page. +Tables will not be split between two pages. + + The optional argument `[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try +to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put +a float: + + * `h': Here - at the position in the text where the table + environment appears. + + * `t': Top - at the top of a text page. + + * `b': Bottom - at the bottom of a text page. + + * `p': Page of floats - on a separate float page, which is a page + containing no text, only floats. + + The standard `report' and `article' classes use the default +placement `[tbp]'. + + The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, +etc., you wish. The `\caption' command allows you to title your table. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: tabular, Next: thebibliography, Prev: table, Up: Environments + +8.23 `tabular' +============== + +Synopsis: + + \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols} + column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ + ... + \end{tabular} + + or + + \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols} + column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ + ... + \end{tabular*} + + These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of +items, aligned vertically in columns. + + `\\' must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, +except for the last, where it is optional--unless an `\hline' command +(to put a rule below the table) follows. + + The mandatory and optional arguments consist of: + +`width' + Specifies the width of the `tabular*' environment. There must be + rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the + specified width. + +`pos' + Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the + centre of the environment. + + * `t' - align on top row + + * `b' - align on bottom row + +`cols' + Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the + following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and + intercolumn material. + + * `l' - A column of left-aligned items. + + * `r' - A column of right-aligned items. + + * `c' - A column of centred items. + + * `|' - A vertical line the full height and depth of the + environment. + + * `@{text}' - This inserts `text' in every row. An @-expression + suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between + columns; any desired space between the inserted text and the + adjacent items must be included in text. An + `\extracolsep{wd}' command in an @-expression causes an extra + space of width `wd' to appear to the left of all subsequent + columns, until countermanded by another `\extracolsep' + command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space + is not suppressed by an @-expression. An `\extracolsep' + command can be used only in an @-expression in the `cols' + argument. + + * `p{wd}' - Produces a column with each item typeset in a + parbox of width `wd', as if it were the argument of a + `\parbox[t]{wd}' command. However, a `\\' may not appear in + the item, except in the following situations: + 1. inside an environment like `minipage', `array', or + `tabular'. + + 2. inside an explicit `\parbox'. + + 3. in the scope of a `\centering', `\raggedright', or + `\raggedleft' declaration. The latter declarations must + appear inside braces or an environment when used in a + `p'-column element. + + * `*{num}{cols}' - Equivalent to `num' copies of `cols', where + `num' is any positive integer and `cols' is any list of + column-specifiers, which may contain another `*-expression'. + + + + Parameters that control formatting: + +`\arrayrulewidth' + Thickness of the rule created by `|', `\hline', and `\vline' in + the `tabular' and `array' environments; the default is `.4pt'. + +`\arraystretch' + Scaling of spacing between rows in the `tabular' and `array' + environments; default is `1',for no scaling. + +`\doublerulesep' + Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by `||' in + the `tabular' and `array' environments; default is `2pt'. + +`\tabcolsep' + Half the width of the space between columns; default is `6pt'. + + + These commands can be used inside a `tabular' environment: + +* Menu: + +* \multicolumn:: Make an item spanning several columns. +* \cline:: Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns. +* \hline:: Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns. +* \vline:: Draw a vertical line. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \multicolumn, Next: \cline, Up: tabular + +8.23.1 `\multicolumn' +--------------------- + +Synopsis: + \multicolumn{COLS}{POS}{TEXT} + + The `\multicolumn' command makes an entry that spans several +columns. The first mandatory argument, COLS, specifies the number of +columns to span. The second mandatory argument, POS, specifies the +formatting of the entry; `c' for centered, `l' for flushleft, `r' for +flushright. The third mandatory argument, TEXT, specifies what text to +put in the entry. + + Here's an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash; +`\multicolumn' is used for the heading: + + \begin{tabular}{r@{--}l} + \multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr + 0x80&0x7FF \cr + 0x800&0xFFFF \cr + 0x10000&0x1FFFF \cr + \end{tabular} + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \cline, Next: \hline, Prev: \multicolumn, Up: tabular + +8.23.2 `\cline' +--------------- + +Synopsis: + + \cline{I-J} + + The `\cline' command draws horizontal lines across the columns +specified, beginning in column I and ending in column J, which are +specified in the mandatory argument. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \hline, Next: \vline, Prev: \cline, Up: tabular + +8.23.3 `\hline' +--------------- + +The `\hline' command draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing +`tabular' or `array' environment. It's most commonly used to draw a +line at the top, bottom, and between the rows of a table. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \vline, Prev: \hline, Up: tabular + +8.23.4 `\vline' +--------------- + +The `\vline' command will draw a vertical line extending the full +height and depth of its row. An `\hfill' command can be used to move +the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an +@-expression. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: thebibliography, Next: theorem, Prev: tabular, Up: Environments + +8.24 `thebibliography' +====================== + +Synopsis: + + \begin{thebibliography}{WIDEST-LABEL} + \bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY} + ... + \end{thebibliography} + + The `thebibliography' environment produces a bibliography or +reference list. + + In the `article' class, this reference list is labelled +"References"; in the `report' class, it is labelled "Bibliography". +You can change the label (in the standard classes) by redefining the +command `\refname'. For instance, this eliminates it entirely: + + \renewcommand{\refname}{} + + The mandatory WIDEST-LABEL argument is text that, when typeset, is +as wide as the widest item label produced by the `\bibitem' commands. +It is typically given as `9' for bibliographies with less than 10 +references, `99' for ones with less than 100, etc. + +* Menu: + +* \bibitem:: Specify a bibliography item. +* \cite:: Refer to a bibliography item. +* \nocite:: Include an item in the bibliography. +* Using BibTeX:: Automatic generation of bibliographies. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \bibitem, Next: \cite, Up: thebibliography + +8.24.1 `\bibitem' +----------------- + +Synopsis: + \bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY} + + The `\bibitem' command generates an entry labelled by LABEL. If the +LABEL argument is missing, a number is automatically generated using +the `enumi' counter. The CITE_KEY is any sequence of letters, numbers, +and punctuation symbols not containing a comma. + + This command writes an entry to the `.aux' file containing the +item's CITE_KEY and label. When the `.aux' file is read by the +`\begin{document}' command, the item's `label' is associated with +`cite_key', causing references to CITE_KEY with a `\cite' command (see +next section) to produce the associated label. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \cite, Next: \nocite, Prev: \bibitem, Up: thebibliography + +8.24.2 `\cite' +-------------- + +Synopsis: + + \cite[SUBCITE]{KEYS + + The KEYS argument is a list of one or more citation keys, separated +by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to the +references associated with KEYS by entries in the `.aux' file. + + The text of the optional SUBCITE argument appears after the +citation. For example, `\cite[p.~314]{knuth}' might produce `[Knuth, +p. 314]'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \nocite, Next: Using BibTeX, Prev: \cite, Up: thebibliography + +8.24.3 `\nocite' +---------------- + +`\nocite{key_list}' + + The `\nocite' command produces no text, but writes `key_list', which +is a list of one or more citation keys, on the `.aux' file. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Using BibTeX, Prev: \nocite, Up: thebibliography + +8.24.4 Using BibTeX +------------------- + +If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if +you need a bibliography of more than a couple of titles) to maintain +your bibliography, you don't use the `thebibliography' environment +(*note thebibliography::). Instead, you include the lines + + \bibliographystyle{BIBSTYLE} + \bibliography{BIBFILE1,BIBFILE2} + + The `\bibliographystyle' command does not produce any output of its +own. Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will be +produced: BIBSTYLE refers to a file BIBSTYLE`.bst', which defines how +your citations will look. The standard STYLE names distributed with +BibTeX are: + +`alpha' + Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and + year of publication. + +`plain' + Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric. + +`unsrt' + Like `plain', but entries are in order of citation. + +`abbrv' + Like `plain', but more compact labels. + + In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored to the +demands of various publications. See +`http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib'. + + The `\bibliography' command is what actually produces the +bibliography. The argument to `\bibliography' refers to files named +`BIBFILE.bib', which should contain your database in BibTeX format. +Only the entries referred to via `\cite' and `\nocite' will be listed +in the bibliography. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: theorem, Next: titlepage, Prev: thebibliography, Up: Environments + +8.25 `theorem' +============== + +Synopsis: + + \begin{theorem} + THEOREM-TEXT + \end{theorem} + + The `theorem' environment produces "Theorem N" in boldface followed +by THEOREM-TEXT, where the numbering possibilities for N are described +under `\newtheorem' (*note \newtheorem::). + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: titlepage, Next: verbatim, Prev: theorem, Up: Environments + +8.26 `titlepage' +================ + +Synopsis: + + \begin{titlepage} + TEXT + \end{titlepage} + + The `titlepage' environment creates a title page, i.e., a page with +no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page +to be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. +The `\today' command may be useful on title pages (*note \today::). + + You can use the `\maketitle' command (*note \maketitle::) to produce +a standard title page without a `titlepage' environment. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: verbatim, Next: verse, Prev: titlepage, Up: Environments + +8.27 `verbatim' +=============== + +Synopsis: + + \begin{verbatim} + LITERAL-TEXT + \end{verbatim} + + The `verbatim' environment is a paragraph-making environment in +which LaTeX produces exactly what you type in; for instance the `\' +character produces a printed `\'. It turns LaTeX into a typewriter +with carriage returns and blanks having the same effect that they would +on a typewriter. + + The `verbatim' uses a monospaced typewriter-like font (`\tt'). + +* Menu: + +* \verb:: The macro form of the `verbatim' environment. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \verb, Up: verbatim + +8.27.1 `\verb' +-------------- + +Synopsis: + + \verbCHARLITERAL-TEXTCHAR + \verb*CHARLITERAL-TEXTCHAR + + The `\verb' command typesets LITERAL-TEXT as it is input, including +special characters and spaces, using the typewriter (`\tt') font. No +spaces are allowed between `\verb' or `\verb*' and the delimiter CHAR, +which begins and ends the verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear +in LITERAL-TEXT. + + The `*'-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a "visible +space" character. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: verse, Prev: verbatim, Up: Environments + +8.28 `verse' +============ + +Synopsis: + + \begin{verse} + LINE1 \\ + LINE2 \\ + ... + \end{verse} + + The `verse' environment is designed for poetry, though you may find +other uses for it. + + The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are +not indented, and the text is not justified. Separate the lines of each +stanza with `\\', and use one or more blank lines to separate the +stanzas. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnotes, Next: Definitions, Prev: Page breaking, Up: Top + +9 Footnotes +*********** + +Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced +with one command, the `\footnote' command. They can also be produced +with two commands, the `\footnotemark' and the `\footnotetext' commands. + +* Menu: + +* \footnote:: Insert a footnote. +* \footnotemark:: Insert footnote mark only. +* \footnotetext:: Insert footnote text only. +* Footnote parameters:: Parameters for footnote formatting. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnote, Next: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes + +9.1 `\footnote' +=============== + +Synopsis: + + \footnote[NUMBER]{TEXT} + + The `\footnote' command places the numbered footnote TEXT at the +bottom of the current page. The optional argument NUMBER changes the +default footnote number. + + This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you +cannot use it in sectioning commands like `\chapter', in figures, +tables or in a `tabular' environment. (See following sections.) + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnotemark, Next: \footnotetext, Prev: \footnote, Up: Footnotes + +9.2 `\footnotemark' +=================== + +With no optional argument, the `\footnotemark' command puts the current +footnote number in the text. This command can be used in inner +paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately, with the +`\footnotetext' command. + + This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote +markers referring to the same footnote with + + \footnotemark[\value{footnote}] + + after the first `\footnote' command. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnotetext, Next: Footnote parameters, Prev: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes + +9.3 `\footnotetext' +=================== + +Synopsis: + + \footnotetext[NUMBER]{TEXT} + + The `\footnotetext' command places TEXT at the bottom of the page as +a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the `\footnotemark' +command. The `\footnotetext' command must appear in outer paragraph +mode. + + The optional argument NUMBER changes the default footnote number. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnote parameters, Prev: \footnotetext, Up: Footnotes + +9.4 Footnote parameters +======================= + +`\footnoterule' + Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the + page's footnotes. Default dimensions: `0.4pt' thick (or wide), and + `0.4\columnwidth' long in the standard document classes (except + slides, where it does not appear). + +`\footnotesep' + The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. + By default, this is set to the normal strut for `\footnotesize' + fonts (*note Font sizes::), therefore there is no extra space + between footnotes. This is `6.65pt' for `10pt', `7.7pt' for + `11pt', and `8.4pt' for `12pt'. + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Definitions, Next: Counters, Prev: Footnotes, Up: Top + +10 Definitions +************** + +LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds. + +* Menu: + +* \newcommand & \renewcommand:: (Re)define a new command. +* \newcounter:: Define a new counter. +* \newlength:: Define a new length. +* \newsavebox:: Define a new box. +* \newenvironment & \renewenvironment:: Define a new environment. +* \newtheorem:: Define a new theorem-like environment. +* \newfont:: Define a new font name. +* \protect:: Using tricky commands. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Next: \newcounter, Up: Definitions + +10.1 `\newcommand' & `\renewcommand' +==================================== + +`\newcommand' and `\renewcommand' define and redefine a command, +respectively. Synopses: + + \newcommand{CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN} + \renewcommand{CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN} + \newcommand{CMD}[NARGS][DEFAULT]{DEFN} + \renewcommand{CMD}[NARGS][DEFAULT]{DEFN} + +CMD + The command name beginning with `\'. For `\newcommand', it must + not be already defined and must not begin with `\end'; for + `\renewcommand', it must already be defined. + +NARGS + An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments + that the command will take. The default is for the command to + have no arguments. + +DEFAULT + If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's + first argument is optional. When the new command is called, the + default value of the optional argument (i.e., if it is not + specified in the call) is the string `def'. + +DEFN + The text to be substituted for every occurrence of `cmd'; a + construct of the form `#N' in DEFN is replaced by the text of the + Nth argument. + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \newcounter, Next: \newlength, Prev: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Up: Definitions + +10.2 `\newcounter' +================== + +Synopsis: + + \newcounter{CNT}[COUNTERNAME] + + The `\newcounter' command defines a new counter named CNT. The new +counter is initialized to zero. + + Given the optional argument `[COUNTERNAME]', CNT will be reset +whenever COUNTERNAME is incremented. + + *Note Counters::, for more information about counters. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \newlength, Next: \newsavebox, Prev: \newcounter, Up: Definitions + +10.3 `\newlength' +================= + +Synopsis: + + \newlength{\ARG} + + The `\newlength' command defines the mandatory argument as a +`length' command with a value of `0in'. The argument must be a control +sequence, as in `\newlength{\foo}'. An error occurs if `\foo' is +already defined. + + *Note Lengths::, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, +and for more information about lengths in general. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \newsavebox, Next: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Prev: \newlength, Up: Definitions + +10.4 `\newsavebox' +================== + +Synopsis: + + \newsavebox{CMD} + + Defines `\CMD', which must be a command name not already defined, to +refer to a new bin for storing boxes. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Next: \newtheorem, Prev: \newsavebox, Up: Definitions + +10.5 `\newenvironment' & `\renewenvironment' +============================================ + +Synopses: + + \newenvironment{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF} + \newenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][DEFAULT]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF} + \renewenvironment{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF} + + These commands define or redefine an environment ENV, that is, +`\begin{ENV} ... \end{ENV}'. + +ENV + The name of the environment. For `\newenvironment', ENV must not + be an existing environment, and the command `\ENV' must be + undefined. For `\renewenvironment', ENV must be the name of an + existing environment. + +NARGS + An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of the + newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments. + +DEFAULT + If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and DEFAULT + gives the default value for that argument. + +BEGDEF + The text expanded at every occurrence of `\begin{ENV}'; a + construct of the form `#N' in BEGDEF is replaced by the text of + the Nth argument. + +ENDDEF + The text expanded at every occurrence of `\end{ENV}'. It may not + contain any argument parameters. + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \newtheorem, Next: \newfont, Prev: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Up: Definitions + +10.6 `\newtheorem' +================== + + \newtheorem{NEWENV}{LABEL}[WITHIN] + \newtheorem{NEWENV}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{LABEL} + + This command defines a theorem-like environment. Arguments: + +NEWENV + The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of + an existing environment or otherwise defined. + +LABEL + The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the + number. For example, `Theorem'. + +NUMBERED_LIKE + (Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like + environment; the new environment will be numbered just like + NUMBERED_LIKE. + +WITHIN + (Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional + unit. The new theorem counter will be reset at the same time as + the WITHIN counter. + + + At most one of NUMBERED_LIKE and WITHIN can be specified, not both. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \newfont, Next: \protect, Prev: \newtheorem, Up: Definitions + +10.7 `\newfont' +=============== + +Synopsis: + + \newfont{CMD}{FONTNAME} + + Defines a control sequence `\CMD', which must not already be +defined, to make FONTNAME be the current font. The file looked for on +the system is named `FONTNAME.tfm'. + + This is a low-level command for setting up to use an individual font. +More commonly, fonts are defined in families through `.fd' files. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \protect, Prev: \newfont, Up: Definitions + +10.8 `\protect' +=============== + +Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and +many more are so-called "fragile" commands. When a fragile command is +used in certain contexts, called "moving arguments", it must be +preceded by `\protect'. In addition, any fragile commands within the +arguments must have their own `\protect'. + + Some examples of moving arguments are `\caption' (*note figure::), +`\thanks' (*note \maketitle::), and expressions in `tabular' and +`array' environments (*note tabular::). + + Commands which are not fragile are called "robust". They must not +be preceded by `\protect'. + + See also: + +`http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html' +`http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect' + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Counters, Next: Lengths, Prev: Definitions, Up: Top + +11 Counters +*********** + +Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The +name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or +command that produces the number, except with no `\'. +(`enumi'-`enumiv' are used for the nested enumerate environment.) +Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document +classes to control numbering. + + part paragraph figure enumi + chapter subparagraph table enumii + section page footnote enumiii + subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv + subsubsection + +* Menu: + +* \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol:: Print value of a counter. +* \usecounter:: Use a specified counter in a list environment. +* \value:: Use the value of a counter in an expression. +* \setcounter:: Set the value of a counter. +* \addtocounter:: Add a quantity to a counter. +* \refstepcounter:: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. +* \stepcounter:: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. +* \day \month \year:: Numeric date values. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Next: \usecounter, Up: Counters + +11.1 `\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters +===================================================================== + +All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for +instance, `\alph{enumi}'. + +`\alph' + prints COUNTER using lowercase letters: `a', `b', ... + +`\Alph' + uses uppercase letters: `A', `B', ... + +`\arabic' + uses Arabic numbers: `1', `2', ... + +`\roman' + uses lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', ... + +`\roman' + uses uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', ... + +`\fnsymbol' + prints the value of COUNTER in a specific sequence of nine symbols + (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of + COUNTER must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. + + The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the + names: + asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel + double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \usecounter, Next: \value, Prev: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Up: Counters + +11.2 `\usecounter{COUNTER}' +=========================== + +Synopsis: + + \usecounter{COUNTER} + + The `\usecounter' command is used in the second argument of the +`list' environment to specify COUNTER to be used to number the list +items. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \value, Next: \setcounter, Prev: \usecounter, Up: Counters + +11.3 `\value{COUNTER}' +====================== + +Synopsis: + + \value{COUNTER} + + The `\value' command produces the value of COUNTER. It can be used +anywhere LaTeX expects a number, for example: + + \setcounter{myctr}{3} + \addtocounter{myctr}{1} + \hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent} + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \setcounter, Next: \addtocounter, Prev: \value, Up: Counters + +11.4 `\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' +================================== + +Synopsis: + + \setcounter{\COUNTER}{VALUE} + + The `\setcounter' command sets the value of \COUNTER to the VALUE +argument. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtocounter, Next: \refstepcounter, Prev: \setcounter, Up: Counters + +11.5 `\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' +==================================== + +The `\addtocounter' command increments COUNTER by the amount specified +by the VALUE argument, which may be negative. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \refstepcounter, Next: \stepcounter, Prev: \addtocounter, Up: Counters + +11.6 `\refstepcounter{COUNTER}' +=============================== + +The `\refstepcounter' command works in the same way as `\stepcounter' +*Note \stepcounter::, except it also defines the current `\ref' value +to be the result of `\thecounter'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \stepcounter, Next: \day \month \year, Prev: \refstepcounter, Up: Counters + +11.7 `\stepcounter{COUNTER}' +============================ + +The `\stepcounter' command adds one to COUNTER and resets all +subsidiary counters. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \day \month \year, Prev: \stepcounter, Up: Counters + +11.8 `\day \month \year': Predefined counters +============================================= + +LaTeX defines counters for the day of the month (`\day', 1-31), month +of the year (`\month', 1-12), and year (`\year', Common Era). When TeX +starts up, they are set to the current values on the system where TeX +is running. They are not updated as the job progresses. + + The related command `\today' produces a string representing the +current day (*note \today::). + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Lengths, Next: Making paragraphs, Prev: Counters, Up: Top + +12 Lengths +********** + +A `length' is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length +as an argument. + +* Menu: + +* \setlength:: Set the value of a length. +* \addtolength:: Add a quantity to a length. +* \settodepth:: Set a length to the depth of something. +* \settoheight:: Set a length to the height of something. +* \settowidth:: Set a length to the width of something. +* Predefined lengths:: Lengths that are, like, predefined. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \setlength, Next: \addtolength, Up: Lengths + +12.1 `\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}' +============================== + +The `\setlength' sets the value of \LEN to the VALUE argument, which +can be expressed in any units that LaTeX understands, i.e., inches +(`in'), millimeters (`mm'), points (`pt'), big points (`bp', etc. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtolength, Next: \settodepth, Prev: \setlength, Up: Lengths + +12.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT} +=============================== + +The `\addtolength' command increments a "length command" \LEN by the +amount specified in the AMOUNT argument, which may be negative. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \settodepth, Next: \settoheight, Prev: \addtolength, Up: Lengths + +12.3 `\settodepth' +================== + +`\settodepth{\gnat}{text}' + + The `\settodepth' command sets the value of a `length' command equal +to the depth of the `text' argument. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \settoheight, Next: \settowidth, Prev: \settodepth, Up: Lengths + +12.4 `\settoheight' +=================== + +`\settoheight{\gnat}{text}' + + The `\settoheight' command sets the value of a `length' command +equal to the height of the `text' argument. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \settowidth, Next: Predefined lengths, Prev: \settoheight, Up: Lengths + +12.5 `\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}' +============================== + +The `\settowidth' command sets the value of the command \LEN to the +width of the TEXT argument. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Predefined lengths, Prev: \settowidth, Up: Lengths + +12.6 Predefined lengths +======================= + +`\width' + + `\height' + + `\depth' + + `\totalheight' + + These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the +box-making commands (*note Boxes::). They specify the natural width +etc. of the text in the box. `\totalheight' equals `\height' + +`\depth'. To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural +size, e.g., say + + `\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}' + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Line breaking, Next: Page breaking, Prev: Environments, Up: Top + +13 Line breaking +**************** + +The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to +translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To +produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines +(and these lines must be broken into pages). + + LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in some +environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the `\\' command, +and you can always manually force breaks. + +* Menu: + +* \\:: Start a new line. +* \obeycr & \restorecr:: Make each input line start a new output line. +* \newline:: Break the line +* \- (hyphenation):: Insert explicit hyphenation. +* \fussy:: Be fussy about line breaking. +* \hyphenation:: Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word. +* \linebreak & \nolinebreak:: Forcing & avoiding line breaks. +* \sloppy:: Be sloppy about line breaking. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \\, Next: \obeycr & \restorecr, Up: Line breaking + +13.1 `\\'[*][MORESPACE] +======================= + +The `\\' command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an optional +argument, MORESPACE, that specifies how much extra vertical space is to +be inserted before the next line. This can be a negative amount. + + The `\\*' command is the same as the ordinary `\\' command except +that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \obeycr & \restorecr, Next: \newline, Prev: \\, Up: Line breaking + +13.2 `\obeycr' & `\restorecr' +============================= + +The `\obeycr' command makes a return in the input file (`^^M', +internally) the same as `\\' (followed by `\relax'). So each new line +in the input will also be a new line in the output. + + `\restorecr' restores normal line-breaking behavior. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \newline, Next: \- (hyphenation), Prev: \obeycr & \restorecr, Up: Line breaking + +13.3 `\newline' +=============== + +The `\newline' command breaks the line at the present point, with no +stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph +mode. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \- (hyphenation), Next: \fussy, Prev: \newline, Up: Line breaking + +13.4 `\-' (discretionary hyphen) +================================ + +The `\-' command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that +point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find +most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an +incorrect one. The `\-' command is used for the exceptional cases. + + When you insert `\-' commands in a word, the word will only be +hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points +that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \fussy, Next: \hyphenation, Prev: \- (hyphenation), Up: Line breaking + +13.5 `\fussy' +============= + +The declaration `\fussy' (which is the default) makes TeX picky about +line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between words, at +the cost of an occasional overfull box. + + This command cancels the effect of a previous `\sloppy' command +(*note \sloppy::. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \sloppy, Prev: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, Up: Line breaking + +13.6 `\sloppy' +============== + +The declaration `\sloppy' makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. +This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing. + + Lasts until a `\fussy' command is issued (*note \fussy::). + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \hyphenation, Next: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, Prev: \fussy, Up: Line breaking + +13.7 `\hyphenation' +=================== + +Synopsis: + + \hyphenation{WORD-ONE WORD-TWO} + + The `\hyphenation' command declares allowed hyphenation points with +a `-' character in the given words. The words are separated by spaces. +TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no inflections are +tried. Multiple `\hyphenation' commands accumulate. Some examples +(the default TeX hyphenation patterns misses the hyphenations in these +words): + + \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases} + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, Next: \sloppy, Prev: \hyphenation, Up: Line breaking + +13.8 `\linebreak' & `\nolinebreak' +================================== + +Synopses: + + \linebreak[PRIORITY] + \nolinebreak[PRIORITY] + + By default, the `\linebreak' (`\nolinebreak') command forces +(prevents) a line break at the current position. For `\linebreak', the +spaces in the line are stretched out so that it extends to the right +margin as usual. + + With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the command +from a demand to a request. The PRIORITY must be a number from 0 to 4. +The higher the number, the more insistent the request. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Page breaking, Next: Footnotes, Prev: Line breaking, Up: Top + +14 Page breaking +**************** + +LaTeX starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has +accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, but +sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. + +* Menu: + +* \cleardoublepage:: Start a new right-hand page. +* \clearpage:: Start a new page. +* \newpage:: Start a new page. +* \enlargethispage:: Enlarge the current page a bit. +* \pagebreak & \nopagebreak:: Forcing & avoiding page breaks. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \cleardoublepage, Next: \clearpage, Up: Page breaking + +14.1 `\cleardoublepage' +======================= + +The `\cleardoublepage' command ends the current page and causes all +figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. +In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand +(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \clearpage, Next: \newpage, Prev: \cleardoublepage, Up: Page breaking + +14.2 `\clearpage' +================= + +The `\clearpage' command ends the current page and causes all figures +and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \newpage, Next: \enlargethispage, Prev: \clearpage, Up: Page breaking + +14.3 `\newpage' +=============== + +The `\newpage' command ends the current page, but does not clear floats +(see `\clearpage' above). + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \enlargethispage, Next: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak, Prev: \newpage, Up: Page breaking + +14.4 `\enlargethispage' +======================= + +`\enlargethispage{size}' + + `\enlargethispage*{size}' + + Enlarge the `\textheight' for the current page by the specified +amount; e.g. `\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one +additional line. + + The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page +as much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit +`\pagebreak'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak, Prev: \enlargethispage, Up: Page breaking + +14.5 `\pagebreak' & `\nopagebreak' +================================== + +Synopses: + + \pagebreak[PRIORITY] + \nopagebreak[PRIORITY] + + By default, the `\pagebreak' (`\nopagebreak') command forces +(prevents) a page break at the current position. For `\linebreak', the +vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it +extends to the normal bottom margin. + + With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the +`\pagebreak' command from a demand to a request. The number must be a +number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the +request is. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Making paragraphs, Next: Math formulas, Prev: Lengths, Up: Top + +15 Making paragraphs +******************** + +A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines--lines not +containing even a `%'. A blank line should not appear where a new +paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of +a sectioning command. + +* Menu: + +* \indent:: Indent this paragraph. +* \noindent:: Do not indent this paragraph. +* \parskip:: Space added before paragraphs. +* Marginal notes:: Putting remarks in the margin. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \indent, Next: \noindent, Up: Making paragraphs + +15.1 `\indent' +============== + +`\indent' produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of +the `\parindent' length, the normal paragraph indentation. It is used +to add paragraph indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed. + + The default value for `\parindent' is `1em' in two-column mode, +otherwise `15pt' for `10pt' documents, `17pt' for `11pt', and `1.5em' +for `12pt'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \noindent, Next: \parskip, Prev: \indent, Up: Making paragraphs + +15.2 `\noindent' +================ + +When used at the beginning of the paragraph, `\noindent' suppresses any +paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a +paragraph. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \parskip, Next: Marginal notes, Prev: \noindent, Up: Making paragraphs + +15.3 `\parskip' +=============== + +`\parskip' is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added +before each paragraph. The default is `0pt plus1pt'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Marginal notes, Prev: \parskip, Up: Making paragraphs + +15.4 Marginal notes +=================== + +Synopsis: + + \marginpar[LEFT]{RIGHT} + + The `\marginpar' command creates a note in the margin. The first +line of the note will have the same baseline as the line in the text +where the `\marginpar' occurs. + + When you only specify the mandatory argument RIGHT, the text will be +placed + + * in the right margin for one-sided layout; + + * in the outside margin for two-sided layout; + + * in the nearest margin for two-column layout. + + The command `\reversemarginpar' places subsequent marginal notes in +the opposite (inside) margin. `\normalmarginpar' places them in the +default position. + + When you specify both arguments, LEFT is used for the left margin, +and RIGHT is used for the right margin. + + The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable +hyphenation there by beginning the node with `\hspace{0pt}'. + + These parameters affect the formatting of the note: + +`\marginparpush' + Minimum vertical space between notes; default `7pt' for `12pt' + documents, `5pt' else. + +`\marginparsep' + Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default + `11pt' for `10pt' documents, `10pt' else. + +`\marginparwidth' + Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided `10pt' document + is `90pt', `83pt' for `11pt', and `68pt' for `12pt'; `17pt' more + in each case for a two-sided document. In two column mode, the + default is `48pt'. + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Math formulas, Next: Modes, Prev: Making paragraphs, Up: Top + +16 Math formulas +**************** + +There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode: + +`math' + For formulas that appear right in the text. + +`displaymath' + For formulas that appear on their own line. + +`equation' + The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an + equation number in the right margin. + + The `math' environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, +but the `displaymath' and `equation' environments can be used only in +paragraph mode. The `math' and `displaymath' environments are used so +often that they have the following short forms: + + \(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math} + \[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath} + + In fact, the `math' environment is so common that it has an even +shorter form: + + $ ... $ instead of \(...\) + + The `\boldmath' command changes math letters and symbols to be in a +bold font. It is used _outside_ of math mode. Conversely, the +`\unboldmath' command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; it +too is used _outside_ of math mode. + + The `\displaystyle' declaration forces the size and style of the +formula to be that of `displaymath', e.g., with limits above and below +summations. For example + $\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $ + +* Menu: + +* Subscripts & Superscripts:: Also known as exponent or index. +* Math symbols:: Various mathematical squiggles. +* Math functions:: Math function names like sin and exp. +* Math accents:: Accents in math. +* Spacing in math mode:: Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces. +* Math Miscellany:: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Subscripts & Superscripts, Next: Math symbols, Up: Math formulas + +16.1 Subscripts & Superscripts +============================== + +To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type +`_{'exp`}'. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type +`^{'exp`}'. LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of that +stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing when something +has both a subscript and a superscript. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Math symbols, Next: Math functions, Prev: Subscripts & Superscripts, Up: Math formulas + +16.2 Math symbols +================= + +LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need. +The commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For +example, if you include `$\pi$' in your source, you will get the pi +symbol (\pi) in your output. + +`\|' + \| + +`\aleph' + \aleph + +`\alpha' + \alpha + +`\amalg' + \amalg (binary operation) + +`\angle' + \angle + +`\approx' + \approx (relation) + +`\ast' + \ast (binary operation) + +`\asymp' + \asymp (relation) + +`\backslash' + \ (delimiter) + +`\beta' + \beta + +`\bigcap' + \bigcap + +`\bigcirc' + \bigcirc (binary operation) + +`\bigcup' + \bigcup + +`\bigodot' + \bigodot + +`\bigoplus' + \bigoplus + +`\bigotimes' + \bigotimes + +`\bigtriangledown' + \bigtriangledown (binary operation) + +`\bigtriangleup' + \bigtriangleup (binary operation) + +`\bigsqcup' + \bigsqcup + +`\biguplus' + \biguplus + +`\bigcap' + \bigvee + +`\bigwedge' + \bigwedge + +`\bot' + \bot + +`\bowtie' + \bowtie (relation) + +`\Box' + (square open box symbol) + +`\bullet' + \bullet (binary operation) + +`\cap' + \cap (binary operation) + +`\cdot' + \cdot (binary operation) + +`\chi' + \chi + +`\circ' + \circ (binary operation) + +`\clubsuit' + \clubsuit + +`\cong' + \cong (relation) + +`\coprod' + \coprod + +`\cup' + \cup (binary operation) + +`\dagger' + \dagger (binary operation) + +`\dashv' + \dashv (relation) + +`\ddagger' + \dagger (binary operation) + +`\Delta' + \Delta + +`\delta' + \delta + +`\Diamond' + bigger \diamond + +`\diamond' + \diamond (binary operation) + +`\diamondsuit' + \diamondsuit + +`\div' + \div (binary operation) + +`\doteq' + \doteq (relation) + +`\downarrow' + \downarrow (delimiter) + +`\Downarrow' + \Downarrow (delimiter) + +`\ell' + \ell + +`\emptyset' + \emptyset + +`\epsilon' + \epsilon + +`\equiv' + \equiv (relation) + +`\eta' + \eta + +`\exists' + \exists + +`\flat' + \flat + +`\forall' + \forall + +`\frown' + \frown (relation) + +`\Gamma' + \Gamma + +`\gamma' + \gamma + +`\ge' + \ge + +`\geq' + \geq (relation) + +`\gets' + \gets + +`\gg' + \gg (relation) + +`\hbar' + \hbar + +`\heartsuit' + \heartsuit + +`\hookleftarrow' + \hookleftarrow + +`\hookrightarrow' + \hookrightarrow + +`\iff' + \iff + +`\Im' + \Im + +`\in' + \in (relation) + +`\infty' + \infty + +`\int' + \int + +`\iota' + \iota + +`\Join' + condensed bowtie symbol (relation) + +`\kappa' + \kappa + +`\Lambda' + \Lambda + +`\lambda' + \lambda + +`\land' + \land + +`\langle' + \langle (delimiter) + +`\lbrace' + \lbrace (delimiter) + +`\lbrack' + \lbrack (delimiter) + +`\lceil' + \lceil (delimiter) + +`\le' + \le + +`\leadsto' + +`\Leftarrow' + \Leftarrow + +`\leftarrow' + \leftarrow + +`\leftharpoondown' + \leftharpoondown + +`\leftharpoonup' + \leftharpoonup + +`\Leftrightarrow' + \Leftrightarrow + +`\leftrightarrow' + \leftrightarrow + +`\leq' + \leq (relation) + +`\lfloor' + \lfloor (delimiter) + +`\lhd' + (left-pointing arrow head) + +`\ll' + \ll (relation) + +`\lnot' + \lnot + +`\longleftarrow' + \longleftarrow + +`\longleftrightarrow' + \longleftrightarrow + +`\longmapsto' + \longmapsto + +`\longrightarrow' + \longrightarrow + +`\lor' + \lor + +`\mapsto' + \mapsto + +`\mho' + +`\mid' + \mid (relation) + +`\models' + \models (relation) + +`\mp' + \mp (binary operation) + +`\mu' + \mu + +`\nabla' + \nabla + +`\natural' + \natural + +`\ne' + \ne + +`\nearrow' + \nearrow + +`\neg' + \neg + +`\neq' + \neq (relation) + +`\ni' + \ni (relation) + +`\not' + Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=. + +`\notin' + \ni + +`\nu' + \nu + +`\nwarrow' + \nwarrow + +`\odot' + \odot (binary operation) + +`\oint' + \oint + +`\Omega' + \Omega + +`\omega' + \omega + +`\ominus' + \ominus (binary operation) + +`\oplus' + \oplus (binary operation) + +`\oslash' + \oslash (binary operation) + +`\otimes' + \otimes (binary operation) + +`\owns' + \owns + +`\parallel' + \parallel (relation) + +`\partial' + \partial + +`\perp' + \perp (relation) + +`\phi' + \phi + +`\Pi' + \Pi + +`\pi' + \pi + +`\pm' + \pm (binary operation) + +`\prec' + \prec (relation) + +`\preceq' + \preceq (relation) + +`\prime' + \prime + +`\prod' + \prod + +`\propto' + \propto (relation) + +`\Psi' + \Psi + +`\psi' + \psi + +`\rangle' + \rangle (delimiter) + +`\rbrace' + \rbrace (delimiter) + +`\rbrack' + \rbrack (delimiter) + +`\rceil' + \rceil (delimiter) + +`\Re' + \Re + +`\rfloor' + \rfloor + +`\rhd' + (binary operation) + +`\rho' + \rho + +`\Rightarrow' + \Rightarrow + +`\rightarrow' + \rightarrow + +`\rightharpoondown' + \rightharpoondown + +`\rightharpoonup' + \rightharpoonup + +`\rightleftharpoons' + \rightleftharpoons + +`\searrow' + \searrow + +`\setminus' + \setminus (binary operation) + +`\sharp' + \sharp + +`\Sigma' + \Sigma + +`\sigma' + \sigma + +`\sim' + \sim (relation) + +`\simeq' + \simeq (relation) + +`\smallint' + \smallint + +`\smile' + \smile (relation) + +`\spadesuit' + \spadesuit + +`\sqcap' + \sqcap (binary operation) + +`\sqcup' + \sqcup (binary operation) + +`\sqsubset' + (relation) + +`\sqsubseteq' + \sqsubseteq (relation) + +`\sqsupset' + (relation) + +`\sqsupseteq' + \sqsupseteq (relation) + +`\star' + \star (binary operation) + +`\subset' + \subset (relation) + +`\subseteq' + \subseteq (relation) + +`\succ' + \succ (relation) + +`\succeq' + \succeq (relation) + +`\sum' + \sum + +`\supset' + \supset (relation) + +`\supseteq' + \supseteq (relation) + +`\surd' + \surd + +`\swarrow' + \swarrow + +`\tau' + \tau + +`\theta' + \theta + +`\times' + \times (binary operation) + +`\to' + \to + +`\top' + \top + +`\triangle' + \triangle + +`\triangleleft' + \triangleleft (binary operation) + +`\triangleright' + \triangleright (binary operation) + +`\unlhd' + left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) + +`\unrhd' + right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) + +`\Uparrow' + \Uparrow (delimiter) + +`\uparrow' + \uparrow (delimiter) + +`\Updownarrow' + \Updownarrow (delimiter) + +`\updownarrow' + \updownarrow (delimiter) + +`\uplus' + \uplus (binary operation) + +`\Upsilon' + \Upsilon + +`\upsilon' + \upsilon + +`\varepsilon' + \varepsilon + +`\varphi' + \varphi + +`\varpi' + \varpi + +`\varrho' + \varrho + +`\varsigma' + \varsigma + +`\vartheta' + \vartheta + +`\vdash' + \vdash (relation) + +`\vee' + \vee (binary operation) + +`\Vert' + \Vert (delimiter) + +`\vert' + \vert (delimiter) + +`\wedge' + \wedge (binary operation) + +`\wp' + \wp + +`\wr' + \wr (binary operation) + +`\Xi' + \Xi + +`\xi' + \xi + +`\zeta' + \zeta + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Math functions, Next: Math accents, Prev: Math symbols, Up: Math formulas + +16.3 Math functions +=================== + +These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper +spacing. + +`\arccos' + \arccos + +`\arcsin' + \arcsin + +`\arctan' + \arctan + +`\arg' + \arg + +`\bmod' + Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y) + +`\cos' + \cos + +`\cosh' + \cosh + +`\cot' + \cos + +`\coth' + \cosh + +`\csc' + \csc + +`\deg' + \deg + +`\det' + \deg + +`\dim' + \dim + +`\exp' + \exp + +`\gcd' + \gcd + +`\hom' + \hom + +`\inf' + \inf + +`\ker' + \ker + +`\lg' + \lg + +`\lim' + \lim + +`\liminf' + \liminf + +`\limsup' + \limsup + +`\ln' + \ln + +`\log' + \log + +`\max' + \max + +`\min' + \min + +`\pmod' + parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1) + +`\Pr' + \Pr + +`\sec' + \sec + +`\sin' + \sin + +`\sinh' + \sinh + +`\sup' + \sup + +`\tan' + \tan + +`\tanh' + \tanh + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Math accents, Next: Spacing in math mode, Prev: Math functions, Up: Math formulas + +16.4 Math accents +================= + +LaTeX provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters in +math. These are different from accents in normal text (*note +Accents::). + +`\acute' + Math acute accent: \acutex. + +`\breve' + Math breve accent: \brevex. + +`\check' + Math ha'c<ek (check) accent: \checkx. + +`\ddot' + Math dieresis accent: \ddotx. + +`\dot' + Math dot accent: \dotx. + +`\grave' + Math grave accent: \gravex. + +`\hat' + Math hat (circumflex) accent: \hatx. + +`\imath' + Math dotless i. + +`\jmath' + Math dotless j. + +`\tilde' + Math tilde accent: \tildex. + +`\vec' + Math vector symbol: \vecx. + +`\widehat' + Math wide hat accent: \widehatx+y. + +`\widehat' + Math wide tilde accent: \widetildex+y. + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Spacing in math mode, Next: Math Miscellany, Prev: Math accents, Up: Math formulas + +16.5 Spacing in math mode +========================= + +In a `math' environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and puts in +the spacing according to the normal rules for mathematics texts. If +you want different spacing, LaTeX provides the following commands for +use in math mode: + +`\;' + A thick space (5\over18\,quad). + +`\:' +`\>' + Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad). + +`\,' + A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode. + +`\!' + A negative thin space (-1\over6\,quad). + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Math Miscellany, Prev: Spacing in math mode, Up: Math formulas + +16.6 Math Miscellany +==================== + +`\*' + A "discretionary" multiplication symbol, at which a line break is + allowed. + +`\cdots' + A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the + line. + +`\ddots' + A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots. + +`\frac{num}{den}' + Produces the fraction `num' divided by `den'. + +`\left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2' + The two delimiters need not match; `.' acts as a null delimiter, + producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the + math in between. Example: `\left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]'. + +`\overbrace{TEXT}' + Generates a brace over TEXT. For example, \overbracex+\cdots+x^k + \rm\;times. + +`\overline{TEXT}' + Generates a horizontal line over TEX. For exampe, \overlinex+y. + +`\sqrt[ROOT]{arg}' + Produces the representation of the square root of ARG. The + optional argument ROOT determines what root to produce. For + example, the cube root of `x+y' would be typed as + `$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$'. + +`\stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}' + Puts TEXT above RELATION. For example, + `\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}'. + +`\underbrace{math}' + Generates MATH with a brace underneath. + +`\underline{text}' + Causes TEXT, which may be either math mode or not, to be + underlined. + +`\vdots' + Produces a vertical ellipsis. + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Modes, Next: Page Styles, Prev: Math formulas, Up: Top + +17 Modes +******** + +When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three +modes: + + * Paragraph mode + + * Math mode + + * Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short + + LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a +different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. +Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when +LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands. + + "Paragraph mode" is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is in when +processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your text into +lines and breaks the lines into pages. LaTeX is in "math mode" when +it's generating a mathematical formula. In "LR mode", as in paragraph +mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of +words with spaces between them. However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX +keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. +Even if you put a hundred words into an `\mbox', LaTeX would keep +typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then +complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line. + + LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an `\mbox' +command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for +example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box. +There are also several text-producing commands and environments for +making a box that put LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box make by one of +these commands or environments will be called a `parbox'. When LaTeX +is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in "inner +paragraph mode". Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out in, is +called "outer paragraph mode". + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Page Styles, Next: Spaces, Prev: Modes, Up: Top + +18 Page Styles +************** + +The `\documentclass' command determines the size and position of the +page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. + +* Menu: + +* \maketitle:: Generate a title page. +* \pagenumbering:: Set the style used for page numbers. +* \pagestyle:: Change the headings/footings style. +* \thispagestyle:: Change the headings/footings style for this page. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \maketitle, Next: \pagenumbering, Up: Page Styles + +18.1 `\maketitle' +================= + +The `\maketitle' command generates a title on a separate title +page--except in the `article' class, where the title is placed at the +top of the first page. Information used to produce the title is +obtained from the following declarations: + +`\author{NAME \and NAME2}' + The `\author' command declares the document author(s), where the + argument is a list of authors separated by `\and' commands. Use + `\\' to separate lines within a single author's entry--for + example, to give the author's institution or address. + +`\date{TEXT}' + The `\date' command declares TEXT to be the document's date. With + no `\date' command, the current date (*note \today::) is used. + +`\thanks{TEXT}' + The `\thanks' command produces a `\footnote' to the title, usually + used for credit acknowledgements. + +`\title{TEXT}' + The `\title' command declares TEXT to be the title of the + document. Use `\\' to force a line break, as usual. + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \pagenumbering, Next: \pagestyle, Prev: \maketitle, Up: Page Styles + +18.2 `\pagenumbering' +===================== + +Synopsis: + + \pagenumbering{STYLE} + + Specifies the style of page numbers, according to STYLE: + +`arabic' + arabic numerals + +`roman' + lowercase Roman numerals + +`Roman' + uppercase Roman numerals + +`alph' + lowercase letters + +`Alph' + uppercase letters + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \pagestyle, Next: \thispagestyle, Prev: \pagenumbering, Up: Page Styles + +18.3 `\pagestyle' +================= + +Synopsis: + + \pagestyle{STYLE} + + The `\pagestyle' command specifies how the headers and footers are +typeset from the current page onwards. Values for STYLE: + +`plain' + Just a plain page number. + +`empty' + Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers. + +`headings' + Put running headers on each page. The document style specifies + what goes in the headers. + +`myheadings' + Custom headers, specified via the `\markboth' or the `\markright' + commands. + + + Here are the descriptions of `\markboth' and `\markright': + +`\markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}' + Sets both the left and the right heading. A "left-hand heading" + (LEFT) is generated by the last `\markboth' command before the end + of the page, while a "right-hand heading" (RIGHT is generated by + the first `\markboth' or `\markright' that comes on the page if + there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page. + +`\markright{RIGHT}' + Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged. + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \thispagestyle, Prev: \pagestyle, Up: Page Styles + +18.4 `\thispagestyle{STYLE}' +============================ + +The `\thispagestyle' command works in the same manner as the +`\pagestyle' command (see previous section) except that it changes to +STYLE for the current page only. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Spaces, Next: Boxes, Prev: Page Styles, Up: Top + +19 Spaces +********* + +LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. + + Another space-producing command is `\,' to produce a "thin" space +(usually 1/6quad). It can be used in text mode, but is more often +useful in math mode (*note Spacing in math mode::). + +* Menu: + +Horizontal space +* \hspace:: Fixed horizontal space. +* \SPACE:: Normal interword space. +* \AT:: Ending a sentence. +* \thinspace:: One-sixth of an em. +* \/:: Per-character italic correction. +* \hfill:: Stretchable horizontal space. +* \hrulefill:: Stretchable horizontal rule. +* \dotfill:: Stretchable horizontal dots. + +Vertical space +* \addvspace:: Add arbitrary vertical space if needed. +* \bigskip \medskip \smallskip:: Fixed vertical spaces. +* \vfill:: Infinitely stretchable vertical space. +* \vspace:: Add arbitrary vertical space. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \hspace, Next: \SPACE, Up: Spaces + +19.1 `\hspace' +============== + +Synopsis: + + \hspace[*]{LENGTH} + + The `\hspace' command adds horizontal space. The LENGTH argument +can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands: points, inches, +etc. It is a rubber length. You can add both negative and positive +space with an `\hspace' command; adding negative space is like +backspacing. + + LaTeX normally removes horizontal space that comes at the beginning +or end of a line. To preserve this space, use the optional `*' form. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \hfill, Next: \hrulefill, Prev: \/, Up: Spaces + +19.2 `\hfill' +============= + +The `\hfill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which has no +natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as needed. + + The `\fill' parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, the +glue value `0pt plus1fill'); thus, `\hspace\fill' is equivalent to +`\hfill'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \SPACE, Next: \AT, Prev: \hspace, Up: Spaces + +19.3 `\SPACE' +============= + +The `\ ' (space) command produces a normal interword space. It's +useful after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example +`Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental'. It is +also often used after control sequences, as in `\TeX\ is a nice system.' + + In normal circumstances, `\'<tab> and `\'<newline> are equivalent to +`\ '. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \AT, Next: \thinspace, Prev: \SPACE, Up: Spaces + +19.4 `\@' +========= + +The `\@' command makes the following punctuation character end a +sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after a +capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without `\@': + + ... in C\@. Pascal, though ... + ... in C. Pascal, though ... + +produces + + ... in C. Pascal, though ... ... in C. Pascal, though ... + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \thinspace, Next: \/, Prev: \AT, Up: Spaces + +19.5 `\thinspace' +================= + +`\thinspace' produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that is +1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as in +'". + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \/, Next: \hfill, Prev: \thinspace, Up: Spaces + +19.6 `\/' +========= + +The `\/' command produces an "italic correction". This is a small +space defined by the font designer for a given character, to avoid the +character colliding with whatever follows. The italic f character +typically has a large italic correction value. + + If the following character is a period or comma, it's not necessary +to insert an italic correction, since those punctuation symbols have a +very small height. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as +normal letters, it can help. Compare f: f; (in the TeX output, the `f's +are nicely separated) with f: f;. + + Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic +correction. Compare pdfTeX (in the TeX output, there is a small space +after the `f') with pdfTeX. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \hrulefill, Next: \dotfill, Prev: \hfill, Up: Spaces + +19.7 `\hrulefill' +================= + +The `\hrulefill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which can +stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal +rule. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \dotfill, Next: \addvspace, Prev: \hrulefill, Up: Spaces + +19.8 `\dotfill' +=============== + +The `\dotfill' command produces a "rubber length" that fills with dots +instead of just white space. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \addvspace, Next: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Prev: \dotfill, Up: Spaces + +19.9 `\addvspace' +================= + +`\addvspace{length}' + + The `\addvspace' command normally adds a vertical space of height +length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same +point in the output by a previous `\addvspace' command, then this +command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length +of the total vertical space equal to `length'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Next: \vfill, Prev: \addvspace, Up: Spaces + +19.10 `\bigskip \medskip \smallskip' +==================================== + +These commands produce a given amount of space. + +`\bigskip' + The same as `\vspace{bigskipamount}', ordinarily about one line + space (with stretch and shrink). + +`\medskip' + The same as `\vspace{medskipamount}', ordinarily about half of a + line space (with stretch and shrink). + +`\smallskip' + The same as `\vspace{smallskipamount}', ordinarily about a quarter + of a line space (with stretch and shrink). + + + The `\...amount' parameters are determined by the document class. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \vfill, Next: \vspace, Prev: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Up: Spaces + +19.11 `\vfill' +============== + +The `\vfill' fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which can +stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It's equivalent to +`\vspace{\fill}' (*note \hfill::). + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \vspace, Prev: \vfill, Up: Spaces + +19.12 `\vspace[*]{LENGTH}' +========================== + +Synopsis: + + \vspace[*]{LENGTH} + + The `\vspace' command adds the vertical space LENGTH, i.e., a rubber +length. LENGTH can be negative or positive. + + Ordinarily, LaTeX removes vertical space added by `\vspace' at the +top or bottom of a page. With the optional `*' argument, the space is +not removed. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Boxes, Next: Special insertions, Prev: Spaces, Up: Top + +20 Boxes +******** + +All the predefined length parameters (*note Predefined lengths::) can be +used in the arguments of the box-making commands. + +* Menu: + +* \mbox:: Horizontal boxes. +* \fbox and \framebox:: Put a frame around a box. +* lrbox:: An environment like \sbox. +* \makebox:: Box, adjustable position. +* \parbox:: Box with text in paragraph mode. +* \raisebox:: Raise or lower text. +* \savebox:: Like \makebox, but save the text for later use. +* \sbox:: Like \mbox, but save the text for later use. +* \usebox:: Print saved text. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \mbox, Next: \fbox and \framebox, Up: Boxes + +20.1 `\mbox{TEXT}' +================== + +The `\mbox' command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text +created by its argument. The TEXT is not broken into lines, so it can +be used to prevent hyphenation. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \fbox and \framebox, Next: lrbox, Prev: \mbox, Up: Boxes + +20.2 `\fbox' and `\framebox' +============================ + +Synopses: + + \fbox{TEXT} + \framebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT} + + The `\fbox' and `\framebox' commands are like `\mbox', except that +they put a frame around the outside of the box being created. + + In addition, the `\framebox' command allows for explicit +specification of the box width with the optional WIDTH argument (a +dimension), and positioning with the optional POSITION argument. Both +commands produce a rule of thickness `\fboxrule' (default `.4pt'), and +leave a space of `\fboxsep' (default `3pt') between the rule and the +contents of the box. + + *Note \framebox (picture)::, for the `\framebox' command in the +`picture' environment. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: lrbox, Next: \makebox, Prev: \fbox and \framebox, Up: Boxes + +20.3 `lrbox' +============ + +`\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}' + + This is the environment form of `\sbox'. + + The text inside the environment is saved in the box `cmd', which +must have been declared with `\newsavebox'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \makebox, Next: \parbox, Prev: lrbox, Up: Boxes + +20.4 `\makebox' +=============== + +Synopsis: + + \makebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT} + + The `\makebox' command creates a box just wide enough to contain the +TEXT specified. The width of the box is specified by the optional +WIDTH argument. The position of the text within the box is determined +by the optional POSITION argument, which may take the following values: + +`c' + Centered (default). + +`l' + Flush left. + +`r' + Flush right. + +`s' + Stretch (justify) across entire WIDTH; TEXT must contain + stretchable space for this to work. + + `\makebox' is also used within the picture environment *note +\makebox (picture)::. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \parbox, Next: \raisebox, Prev: \makebox, Up: Boxes + +20.5 `\parbox' +============== + +Synopsis: + + \parbox[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH}{TEXT} + + The `\parbox' command produces a box whose contents are created in +`paragraph' mode. It should be used to make a box small pieces of +text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use any +paragraph-making environments inside a `\parbox' argument. For larger +pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making +environment, you should use a `minipage' environment (*note minipage::). + + `\parbox' has two mandatory arguments: + +WIDTH + the width of the parbox; + +TEXT + the text that goes inside the parbox. + + The optional POSITION argument allows you to align either the top or +bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding text +(default is top). + + The optional HEIGHT argument overrides the natural height of the box. + + The INNER-POS argument controls the placement of the text inside the +box, as follows; if it is not specified, POSITION is used. + +`t' + text is placed at the top of the box. + +`c' + text is centered in the box. + +`b' + text is placed at the bottom of the box. + +`s' + stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable + space for this to work. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \raisebox, Next: \savebox, Prev: \parbox, Up: Boxes + +20.6 `\raisebox' +================ + +Synopsis: + + \raisebox{distance}[HEIGHT][DEPTH]{text} + + The `\raisebox' command raises or lowers TEXT. The first mandatory +argument specifies how high TEXT is to be raised (or lowered if it is a +negative amount). TEXT itself is processed in LR mode. + + The optional arguments HEIGHT and DEPTH are dimensions. If they are +specified, LaTeX treats TEXT as extending a certain distance above the +baseline (height) or below (depth), ignoring its natural height and +depth. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \savebox, Next: \sbox, Prev: \raisebox, Up: Boxes + +20.7 `\savebox' +=============== + +Synopsis: + + \savebox{\BOXCMD}[WIDTH][POS]{TEXT} + + This command typeset TEXT in a box just as with `\makebox' (*note +\makebox::), except that instead of printing the resulting box, it +saves it in the box labeled \BOXCMD, which must have been declared with +`\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::). + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \sbox, Next: \usebox, Prev: \savebox, Up: Boxes + +20.8 `\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}' +=========================== + +Synopsis: + + \sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT} + + `\sbox' types TEXT in a box just as with `\mbox' (*note \mbox::) +except that instead of the resulting box being included in the normal +output, it is saved in the box labeled \BOXCMD. \BOXCMD must have been +previously declared with `\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::). + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \usebox, Prev: \sbox, Up: Boxes + +20.9 `\usebox{\BOXCMD' +====================== + +Synopsis: + + \usebox{\BOXCMD} + + `\usebox' producesthe box most recently saved in the bin \BOXCMD by +a `\savebox' command (*note \savebox::). + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Special insertions, Next: Splitting the input, Prev: Boxes, Up: Top + +21 Special insertions +********************* + +LaTeX provides commands for inserting characters that have a special +meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type. + +* Menu: + +* Reserved characters:: Inserting # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { } +* Text symbols:: Inserting other non-letter symbols in text. +* Accents:: Inserting accents. +* Non-English characters:: Inserting other non-English characters. +* \rule:: Inserting lines and rectangles. +* \today:: Inserting today's date. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Reserved characters, Next: Text symbols, Up: Special insertions + +21.1 Reserved characters +======================== + +The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called +"reserved characters" or "special characters". + + # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { } + + Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, LaTeX +will do something special. If you simply want the character to be +printed as itself, include a `\' in front of the character. For +example, `\$' will produce `$' in your output. + + One exception to this rule is `\' itself, because `\\' has its own +special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by typing +`$\backslash$' in your file, and a typewriter `\' is produced by using +`\' in a verbatim command (*note verbatim::). + + Also, `\~' and `\^' place tilde and circumflex accents over the +following letter, as in o~ and o^ (*note Accents::); to get a +standalone `~' or `^', you can again use a verbatim command. + + Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you +know its number by using the `\symbol' command. For example, the +visible space character used in the `\verb*' command has the code +decimal 32, so it can be typed as `\symbol{32}'. + + You can also specify octal numbers with `'' or hexadecimal numbers +with `"', so the previous example could also be written as +`\symbol{'40}' or `\symbol{"20}'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Text symbols, Next: Accents, Prev: Reserved characters, Up: Special insertions + +21.2 Text symbols +================= + +LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in +running text. + +`\copyright' + The copyright symbol, (C). + +`\dag' + The dagger symbol (in text). + +`\ddag' + The double dagger symbol (in text). + +`\LaTeX' + The LaTeX logo. + +`\ldots' + An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `...'. This command + also works in math mode. + +`\lq' + Left (opening) quote: `. + +`\P' + Paragraph sign (pilcrow). + +`\pounds' + English pounds sterling. + +`\rq' + Right (closing) quote: '. + +`\S' + Section symbol. + +`\TeX' + The TeX logo. + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Accents, Next: Non-English characters, Prev: Text symbols, Up: Special insertions + +21.3 Accents +============ + +LaTeX has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages, +through the `babel' package and related support. This section does not +attempt to cover all that support. It merely the core LaTeX commands +for creating accented characters. + +`\"' + Produces an umlaut, as in o". + +`\'' + Produces an acute accent, as in o'. In the `tabbing' environment, + pushes current column to the right of the previous column (*note + tabbing::). + +`\.' + Produces a dot accent over the following, as in o.. + +`\=' + Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o=. + +`\^' + Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in o^. + +`\`' + Produces a grave accent over the following, as in o`. In the + `tabbing' environment, move following text to the right margin + (*note tabbing::). + +`\~' + Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in n~. + +`\b' + Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. + +`\bar' + Produces a macron accent over the following, as in o=. + +`\c' + Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in + +`\d' + Produces a dot accent under the following, as in .o. + +`\H' + Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in + o''. + +`\i' + Produces a dotless i, as in `i'. + +`\j' + Produces a dotless j, as in `j'. + +`\t' + Produces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['. + +`\u' + Produces a breve accent, as in `o('. + +`\v' + Produces a ha'c<ek (check) accent, as in `o<'. + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Non-English characters, Next: \rule, Prev: Accents, Up: Special insertions + +21.4 Non-English characters +=========================== + +Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting characters commonly +used in languages other than English. + +`\aa' +`\AA' + aa and AA. + +`\ae' +`\AE' + ae and AE. + +`\l' +`\L' + /l and /L. + +`\o' +`\O' + /o and /O. + +`\oe' +`\OE' + oe and OE. + +`\ss' + ss. + + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \rule, Next: \today, Prev: Non-English characters, Up: Special insertions + +21.5 `\rule' +============ + +Synopsis: + + \rule[RAISE]{WIDTH}{THICKNESS} + + The `\rule' command produces "rules", that is, lines or rectangles. +The arguments are: + +RAISE + How high to raise the rule (optional). + +WIDTH + The length of the rule (mandatory). + +THICKNESS + The thickness of the rule (mandatory). + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \today, Prev: \rule, Up: Special insertions + +21.6 `\today' +============= + +The `\today' command produces today's date, in the format `MONTH DD, +YYYY'; for example, `July 4, 1976'. It uses the predefined counters +`\day', `\month', and `\year' (*note \day \month \year::) to do this. +It is not updated as the program runs. + + The `datetime' package, among others, can produce a wide variety of +other date formats. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Splitting the input, Next: Front/back matter, Prev: Special insertions, Up: Top + +22 Splitting the input +********************** + +A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole +input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into +several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use, +there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type +when you run LaTeX. + +* Menu: + +* \include:: Conditionally include a file. +* \includeonly:: Determine which files are included. +* \input:: Unconditionally include a file. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \include, Next: \includeonly, Up: Splitting the input + +22.1 `\include' +=============== + +Synopsis: + + \include{FILE} + + If no `\includeonly' command is present, the `\include' command +executes `\clearpage' to start a new page (*note \clearpage::), then +reads FILE, then does another `\clearpage'. + + Given an `\includeonly' command, the `\include' actions are only run +if FILE is listed as an argument to `\includeonly'. See the next +section. + + The `\include' command may not appear in the preamble or in a file +read by another `\include' command. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \includeonly, Next: \input, Prev: \include, Up: Splitting the input + +22.2 \`includeonly' +=================== + +Synopsis: + + \includeonly{FILE1,FILE2,...} + + The `\includeonly' command controls which files will be read by +subsequent `\include' commands. The list of filenames is +comma-separated. Each FILE must exactly match a filename specified in a +`\include' command for the selection to be effective. + + This command can only appear in the preamble. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \input, Prev: \includeonly, Up: Splitting the input + +22.3 \input +=========== + +Synopsis: + + \input{FILE} + + The `\input' command causes the specified FILE to be read and +processed, as if its contents had been inserted in the current file at +that point. + + If FILE does not end in `.tex' (e.g., `foo' or `foo.bar'), it is +first tried with that extension (`foo.tex' or `foo.bar.tex'). If that +is not found, the original FILE is tried (`foo' or `foo.bar'). + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Front/back matter, Next: Letters, Prev: Splitting the input, Up: Top + +23 Front/back matter +******************** + +* Menu: + +* Tables of contents:: +* Glossaries:: +* Indexes:: + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Tables of contents, Next: Glossaries, Up: Front/back matter + +23.1 Tables of contents +======================= + +A table of contents is produced with the `\tableofcontents' command. +You put the command right where you want the table of contents to go; +LaTeX does the rest for you. A previous run must have generated a +`.toc' file. + + The `\tableofcontents' command produces a heading, but it does not +automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the table +of contents, write a `\newpage' command after the `\tableofcontents' +command. + + The analagous commands `\listoffigures' and `\listoftables' produce +a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. Everything works +exactly the same as for the table of contents. + + The command `\nofiles' overrides these commands, and _prevents_ any +of these lists from being generated. + +* Menu: + +* \addcontentsline:: Add an entry to table of contents etc. +* \addtocontents:: Add text directly to table of contents file etc. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \addcontentsline, Next: \addtocontents, Up: Tables of contents + +23.1.1 \addcontentsline +----------------------- + +The `\addcontentsline' command adds an entry to the specified list or +table where: + +EXT + The extension of the file on which information is to be written, + typically one of: `toc' (table of contents), `lof' (list of + figures), or `lot' (list of tables). + +UNIT + The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the + following, matching the value of the EXT argument: + + `toc' + The name of the sectional unit: `part', `chapter', `section', + `subsection', `subsubsection'. + + `lof' + For the list of figures. + + `lot' + For the list of tables. + +ENTRY + The actual text of the entry. + + What is written to the `.EXT' file is the command +`\contentsline{UNIT}{NAME}'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtocontents, Prev: \addcontentsline, Up: Tables of contents + +23.1.2 \addtocontents +--------------------- + +The `\addtocontents' command adds text (or formatting commands) +directly to the `.'EXT file that generates the table of contents or +lists of figures or tables. + +EXT + The extension of the file on which information is to be written: + `toc' (table of contents), `lof' (list of figures), or `lot' (list + of tables). + +TEXT + The text to be written. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Glossaries, Next: Indexes, Prev: Tables of contents, Up: Front/back matter + +23.2 Glossaries +=============== + +The command `\makeglossary' enables creating glossaries. + + The command `\glossary{TEXT}' writes a glossary entry for TEXT to an +auxiliary file with the `.glo' extension. + + Specifically, what gets written is the command +`\glossaryentry{TEXT}{PAGENO}', where PAGENO is the current `\thepage' +value. + + The `glossary' package on CTAN provides support for fancier +glossaries. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Indexes, Prev: Glossaries, Up: Front/back matter + +23.3 Indexes +============ + +The command `\makeindex' enables creating indexes. + + The command `\index{TEXT}' writes a glossary entry for TEXT to an +auxiliary file with the `.idx' extension. + + Specifically, what gets written is the command +`\indexentry{TEXT}{PAGENO}', where PAGENO is the current `\thepage' +value. + + The rubber length `\indexspace' is inserted before each new letter +in the index; its default value is `10pt plus5pt minus3pt'. + + The `.idx' file can then be sorted with an external command, +typically `makeindex' or `xindy', resulting in a `.ind' file, which can +then be used to typeset the index. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Letters, Next: Terminal Input/Output, Prev: Front/back matter, Up: Top + +24 Letters +********** + +You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and business. The +`letter' document class is designed to make a number of letters at +once, although you can make just one if you so desire. + + Your `.tex' source file has the same minimum commands as the other +document classes, i.e., you must have the following commands as a +minimum: + + \documentclass{letter} + \begin{document} + ... letters ... + \end{document} + + Each letter is a `letter' environment, whose argument is the name +and address of the recipient. For example, you might have: + + \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St. + \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA} + ... + \end{letter} + + The letter itself begins with the `\opening' command. The text of +the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input. Commands that +make no sense in a letter, like `\chapter', do not work. The letter +closes with a `\closing' command. + + After the `closing', you can have additional material. The `\cc' +command produces the usual "cc: ...". There's also a similar `\encl' +command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands, use `\\' to +separate the items. + + These commands are used with the `letter' class. + +* Menu: + +* \address:: Your return address. +* \cc:: Cc list. +* \closing:: Saying goodbye. +* \encl:: List of enclosed material. +* \location:: Your organisation's address. +* \makelabels:: Making address labels. +* \name:: Your name, for the return address. +* \opening:: Saying hello. +* \ps:: Adding a postscript. +* \signature:: Your signature. +* \startbreaks:: Allow page breaks. +* \stopbreaks:: Disallow page breaks. +* \telephone:: Your phone number. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \address, Next: \cc, Up: Letters + +24.1 \address{RETURN-ADDRESS} +============================= + +The `\address' specifies the return address of a letter, as it should +appear on the letter and the envelope. Separate lines of the address +should be separated by `\\' commands. + + If you do not make an `\address' declaration, then the letter will +be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard letterhead. +(*Note Overview::, for details on your local implementation). If you +give an `\address' declaration, then the letter will be formatted as a +personal letter. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \cc, Next: \closing, Prev: \address, Up: Letters + +24.2 `\cc' +========== + +Synopsis: + + \cc{NAME1\\NAME2} + + Produce a list of NAMEs the letter was copied to. Each name is +printed on a separate line. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \closing, Next: \encl, Prev: \cc, Up: Letters + +24.3 `\closing' +=============== + +Synopsis: + + \closing{text} + + A letter closes with a `\closing' command, for example, + \closing{Best Regards,} + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \encl, Next: \location, Prev: \closing, Up: Letters + +24.4 `\encl' +============ + +Synopsis: + + \encl{LINE1\\LINE2} + + Declare a list of one more enclosures. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \location, Next: \makelabels, Prev: \encl, Up: Letters + +24.5 `\location' +================ + +`\location{address}' + + This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only +appears if the `firstpage' pagestyle is selected. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \makelabels, Next: \name, Prev: \location, Up: Letters + +24.6 `\makelabels' +================== + +`\makelabels{number}' + + If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create a sheet +of address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \name, Next: \opening, Prev: \makelabels, Up: Letters + +24.7 `\name' +============ + +`\name{June Davenport}' + + Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return +address. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \opening, Next: \ps, Prev: \name, Up: Letters + +24.8 `\opening{TEXT}' +===================== + +Synopsis: + + \opening{TEXT} + + A letter begins with the `\opening' command. The mandatory +argument, TEXT, is whatever text you wish to start your letter. For +instance: + + \opening{Dear Joe,} + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \ps, Next: \signature, Prev: \opening, Up: Letters + +24.9 `\ps' +========== + +Use the `\ps' command to start a postscript in a letter, after +`\closing'. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \signature, Next: \startbreaks, Prev: \ps, Up: Letters + +24.10 `\signature{TEXT}' +======================== + +Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the +space for your signature. `\\' starts a new line within TEXT as usual. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \startbreaks, Next: \stopbreaks, Prev: \signature, Up: Letters + +24.11 `\startbreaks' +==================== + +`\startbreaks' + + Used after a `\stopbreaks' command to allow page breaks again. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \stopbreaks, Next: \telephone, Prev: \startbreaks, Up: Letters + +24.12 `\stopbreaks' +=================== + +`\stopbreaks' + + Inhibit page breaks until a `\startbreaks' command occurs. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \telephone, Prev: \stopbreaks, Up: Letters + +24.13 `\telephone' +================== + +`\telephone{number}' + + This is your telephone number. This only appears if the `firstpage' +pagestyle is selected. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Terminal Input/Output, Next: Command Line, Prev: Letters, Up: Top + +25 Terminal Input/Output +************************ + +* Menu: + +* \typein:: Read text from the terminal. +* \typeout:: Write text to the terminal. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \typein, Next: \typeout, Up: Terminal Input/Output + +25.1 `\typein[CMD]{MSG}' +======================== + +Synopsis: + + \typein[\CMD]{MSG} + + `\typein' prints MSG on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and +wait for you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the +optional \CMD argument is omitted, the typed input is processed as if +it had been included in the input file in place of the `\typein' +command. If the \CMD argument is present, it must be a command name. +This command name is then defined or redefined to be the typed input. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: \typeout, Prev: \typein, Up: Terminal Input/Output + +25.2 `\typeout{MSG}' +==================== + +Synopsis: + + \typeout{MSG} + + Prints `msg' on the terminal and in the `log' file. Commands in +`msg' that are defined with `\newcommand' or `\renewcommand' (among +others) are replaced by their definitions before being printed. + + LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space +and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to `msg'. A `\space' +command in `msg' causes a single space to be printed, independent of +surrounding spaces. A `^^J' in `msg' prints a newline. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Command Line, Next: Document templates, Prev: Terminal Input/Output, Up: Top + +26 Command Line +*************** + +The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; TeX +uses `.tex' as a default file extension. If you omit the input file +entirely, TeX accepts input from the terminal. You specify command +options by supplying a string as a parameter to the command; e.g. + + latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex' + +will process `foo.tex' without pausing after every error. + + If LaTeX stops in the middle of the document and gives you a `*' +prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type `\stop' (and return) and +it will prematurely end the document. + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Document templates, Next: Command Index, Prev: Command Line, Up: Top + +Appendix A Document templates +***************************** + +Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will +be useful. + +* Menu: + +* book template:: +* beamer template:: +* tugboat template:: + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: book template, Next: beamer template, Up: Document templates + +A.1 `book' template +=================== + +\documentclass{book} +\title{Book Class Template} +\author{Alex Author} + +\begin{document} +\maketitle + +\chapter{First} +Some text. + +\chapter{Second} +Some other text. + +\section{A subtopic} +The end. +\end{document} + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: beamer template, Next: tugboat template, Prev: book template, Up: Document templates + +A.2 `beamer' template +===================== + +The `beamer' class creates slides presentations. + +\documentclass{beamer} + +\title{Beamer Class template} +\author{Alex Author} +\date{July 31, 2007} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +% without [fragile], any {verbatim} code gets mysterious errors. +\begin{frame}[fragile] + \frametitle{First Slide} + +\begin{verbatim} + This is \verbatim! +\end{verbatim} + +\end{frame} + +\end{document} + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: tugboat template, Prev: beamer template, Up: Document templates + +A.3 `tugboat' template +====================== + +`TUGboat' is the journal of the TeX Users Group, +`http://tug.org/TUGboat'. + +\documentclass{ltugboat} % ltugproc for proceedings + +\usepackage{graphicx} +\usepackage{ifpdf} +\ifpdf + \usepackage[breaklinks,colorlinks,linkcolor=black,citecolor=black, + urlcolor=black]{hyperref} +\else + \usepackage{url} +\fi + +\begin{document} + +\title{Example \TUB\ Regular Article} + +% repeat info for each author. +\author{First Last} +\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country} +\netaddress{user (at) example dot org} +\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/} + +\maketitle + +% The abstract comes after \maketitle in ltugboat. +\begin{abstract} +This is an example article for a regular \TUB{} issue. +\end{abstract} + +\section{Introduction} + +This is an example article for \TUB, from +\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}. + +We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the hyperref +package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output). \TUB\ is produced +using \acro{PDF} files exclusively, nowadays. + +The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others: + +{\small +\begin{verbatim} +\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW +\BibTeX \CandT \CTAN \DTD \DVItoVDU \HTML +\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \JoT \LAMSTeX \LaTeXe +\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \pcMF \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas +\PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS +\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG +\tug \UG \UNIX \VAX \VorTeX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE + +\Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag +\careof \thinskip + +\acro{FRED} -> {\sc fred} % please use! +\cs{fred} -> \fred +\env{fred} -> \begin{fred} +\meta{fred} -> <fred> +\nth{n} -> 1st, 2nd, ... +\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4 +\booktitle{Book of Fred} +\end{verbatim} +} + +For more information, see the ltubguid document at: +\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tugboat} + +Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions. + + +\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style +\nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty +\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX + + +\makesignature % not in ltugproc +\end{document} + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Concept Index, Prev: Command Index, Up: Top + +Concept Index +************* + + +* Menu: + +* * prompt: Command Line. (line 15) +* *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 38) +* .glo file: Glossaries. (line 8) +* .idx file: Indexes. (line 8) +* .ind file: Indexes. (line 18) +* abstracts: abstract. (line 6) +* accents: Accents. (line 6) +* accents, mathematical: Math accents. (line 6) +* accessing any character of a font: Reserved characters. (line 25) +* acute accent: Accents. (line 15) +* acute accent, math: Math accents. (line 11) +* ae ligature: Non-English characters. + (line 15) +* aligning Equations: eqnarray. (line 6) +* alignment via tabbing: tabbing. (line 6) +* appendix, creating: Sectioning. (line 44) +* aring: Non-English characters. + (line 11) +* arrays, math: array. (line 6) +* author, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 12) +* bar-over accent: Accents. (line 23) +* bar-under accent: Accents. (line 37) +* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 6) +* bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 6) +* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 6) +* black boxes, omitting: Document class options. + (line 27) +* bold font: Font styles. (line 84) +* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 18) +* boxes: Boxes. (line 6) +* breaking lines: Line breaking. (line 6) +* breaking pages: Page breaking. (line 6) +* breve accent: Accents. (line 62) +* breve accent, math: Math accents. (line 14) +* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 87) +* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 6) +* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 87) +* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 6) +* cedilla accent: Accents. (line 43) +* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 6) +* centering text, environment for: center. (line 6) +* characters, accented: Accents. (line 6) +* characters, non-English: Non-English characters. + (line 6) +* characters, reserved: Reserved characters. (line 6) +* check accent: Accents. (line 65) +* check accent, math: Math accents. (line 17) +* circumflex accent: Accents. (line 26) +* circumflex accent, math: Math accents. (line 29) +* class options: Document class options. + (line 6) +* classes of documents: Document classes. (line 6) +* closing letters: \closing. (line 6) +* closing quote: Text symbols. (line 35) +* code, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6) +* command Line: Command Line. (line 6) +* commands, defining new ones: \newcommand & \renewcommand. + (line 6) +* computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6) +* copyright symbol: Text symbols. (line 10) +* counters, a list of: Counters. (line 6) +* counters, defining new: \newcounter. (line 6) +* counters, getting value of: \value. (line 6) +* counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 6) +* creating letters: Letters. (line 6) +* creating pictures: picture. (line 6) +* creating tables: table. (line 6) +* credit footnote: \maketitle. (line 22) +* cross references: Cross references. (line 6) +* cross referencing with page number: \pageref. (line 6) +* cross referencing, symbolic: \ref. (line 6) +* dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 13) +* date, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 18) +* datetime package: \today. (line 11) +* defining a new command: \newcommand & \renewcommand. + (line 6) +* defining new environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment. + (line 6) +* defining new fonts: \newfont. (line 6) +* defining new theorems: \newtheorem. (line 6) +* definitions: Definitions. (line 6) +* description lists, creating: description. (line 6) +* discretionary multiplication: Math Miscellany. (line 7) +* displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation. + (line 6) +* displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quote. + (line 6) +* document class options: Document class options. + (line 6) +* document classes: Document classes. (line 6) +* document templates: Document templates. (line 6) +* dot accent: Accents. (line 20) +* dot over accent, math: Math accents. (line 23) +* dot-over accent: Accents. (line 20) +* dot-under accent: Accents. (line 46) +* dotless i: Accents. (line 53) +* dotless i, math: Math accents. (line 32) +* dotless j: Accents. (line 56) +* dotless j, math: Math accents. (line 35) +* double dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 16) +* double dot accent, math: Math accents. (line 20) +* ellipsis: Text symbols. (line 22) +* emphasis: Font styles. (line 26) +* enclosure list: \encl. (line 6) +* ending & starting: Starting & ending. (line 6) +* enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 6) +* environments: Environments. (line 6) +* environments, defining: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment. + (line 6) +* equation number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6) +* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 20) +* equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 6) +* equations, environment for: equation. (line 6) +* es-zet German letter: Non-English characters. + (line 30) +* exponent: Subscripts & Superscripts. + (line 6) +* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6) +* figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 22) +* figures, inserting: figure. (line 6) +* fixed-width font: Font styles. (line 108) +* flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage. (line 6) +* font commands, low-level: Low-level font commands. + (line 6) +* font sizes: Font sizes. (line 6) +* font styles: Font styles. (line 6) +* fonts: Typefaces. (line 6) +* fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 6) +* footer style: \pagestyle. (line 6) +* footer, parameters for: Page layout parameters. + (line 6) +* footnote number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6) +* footnote parameters: Footnote parameters. (line 6) +* footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 22) +* footnotes, creating: Footnotes. (line 6) +* formulas, environment for: equation. (line 6) +* formulas, math: Math formulas. (line 6) +* fragile commands: \protect. (line 6) +* functions, math: Math functions. (line 6) +* global options: Document class options. + (line 6) +* glossaries: Glossaries. (line 6) +* grave accent: Accents. (line 29) +* grave accent, math: Math accents. (line 26) +* greek letters: Math symbols. (line 6) +* ha'c<ek accent, math: Math accents. (line 17) +* hacek accent: Accents. (line 65) +* hat accent: Accents. (line 26) +* hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 29) +* header style: \pagestyle. (line 6) +* header, parameters for: Page layout parameters. + (line 6) +* hungarian umlaut accent: Accents. (line 49) +* hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation. (line 6) +* hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation). (line 6) +* hyphenation, preventing: \mbox. (line 6) +* in-line formulas: math. (line 6) +* indent, forcing: \indent. (line 6) +* indent, suppressing: \noindent. (line 6) +* indentation of paragraphs, in minipage: minipage. (line 18) +* indexes: Indexes. (line 6) +* input file: Splitting the input. (line 6) +* input/Output: Terminal Input/Output. + (line 6) +* inserting figures: figure. (line 6) +* italic font: Font styles. (line 93) +* justification, ragged left: \raggedleft. (line 6) +* justification, ragged right: \raggedright. (line 6) +* Knuth, Donald E.: Top. (line 11) +* labelled lists, creating: description. (line 6) +* Lamport, Leslie: Top. (line 11) +* LaTeX logo: Text symbols. (line 19) +* LaTeX overview: Overview. (line 6) +* LaTeX Project team: Top. (line 11) +* layout commands: Layout. (line 6) +* layout, page parameters for: Page layout parameters. + (line 6) +* left quote: Text symbols. (line 26) +* left-justifying text: \raggedright. (line 6) +* left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft. (line 6) +* left-to-right mode: Modes. (line 6) +* lengths, adding to: \addtolength. (line 6) +* lengths, defining and using: Lengths. (line 6) +* lengths, defining new: \newlength. (line 6) +* lengths, predefined: Predefined lengths. (line 6) +* lengths, setting: \setlength. (line 6) +* letters: Letters. (line 6) +* letters, accented: Accents. (line 6) +* letters, ending: \closing. (line 6) +* letters, non-English: Non-English characters. + (line 6) +* letters, starting: \opening. (line 6) +* line break, forcing: \\. (line 6) +* line breaking: Line breaking. (line 6) +* line breaks, forcing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak. + (line 6) +* line breaks, preventing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak. + (line 6) +* lines in tables: tabular. (line 6) +* lining text up in columns using tab stops: tabbing. (line 6) +* lining text up in tables: tabular. (line 6) +* list items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 6) +* lists of items: itemize. (line 6) +* lists of items, generic: list. (line 6) +* lists of items, numbered: enumerate. (line 6) +* loading additional packages: Document class options. + (line 74) +* logo, LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 19) +* logo, TeX: Text symbols. (line 41) +* low-level font commands: Low-level font commands. + (line 6) +* lR mode: Modes. (line 6) +* macron accent: Accents. (line 23) +* makeindex program: Indexes. (line 18) +* making a title page: titlepage. (line 6) +* making paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 6) +* marginal notes: Marginal notes. (line 6) +* math accents: Math accents. (line 6) +* math formulas: Math formulas. (line 6) +* math functions: Math functions. (line 6) +* math Miscellany: Math Miscellany. (line 6) +* math mode: Modes. (line 6) +* math mode, entering: Math formulas. (line 6) +* math mode, spacing: Spacing in math mode. + (line 6) +* math symbols: Math symbols. (line 6) +* minipage, creating a: minipage. (line 6) +* modes: Modes. (line 6) +* monospace font: Font styles. (line 108) +* moving arguments: \protect. (line 6) +* multicolumn text: \twocolumn. (line 6) +* multiplication symbol, discretionary line break: Math Miscellany. + (line 7) +* nested \include, not allowed: \include. (line 18) +* new commands, defining: \newcommand & \renewcommand. + (line 6) +* new line, output as input: \obeycr & \restorecr. + (line 6) +* new line, starting: \\. (line 6) +* new line, starting (paragraph mode): \newline. (line 6) +* new page, starting: \newpage. (line 6) +* non-English characters: Non-English characters. + (line 6) +* notes in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 6) +* null delimiter: Math Miscellany. (line 21) +* numbered items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 6) +* oblique font: Font styles. (line 105) +* oe ligature: Non-English characters. + (line 27) +* one-column output: \onecolumn. (line 6) +* opening quote: Text symbols. (line 26) +* options, document class: Document class options. + (line 6) +* options, global: Document class options. + (line 81) +* oslash: Non-English characters. + (line 23) +* overbar accent: Accents. (line 23) +* overdot accent, math: Math accents. (line 23) +* overview of LaTeX: Overview. (line 6) +* packages, loading: Document class options. + (line 74) +* page break, forcing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak. + (line 6) +* page break, preventing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak. + (line 6) +* page breaking: Page breaking. (line 6) +* page layout parameters: Page layout parameters. + (line 6) +* page number, cross referencing: \pageref. (line 6) +* page numbering style: \pagenumbering. (line 6) +* page styles: Page Styles. (line 6) +* paragraph indentation, in minipage: minipage. (line 18) +* paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation. (line 6) +* paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting: quote. (line 6) +* paragraph mode: Modes. (line 6) +* paragraph sign: Text symbols. (line 29) +* paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 6) +* parameters, page layout: Page layout parameters. + (line 6) +* pictures, creating: picture. (line 6) +* pilcrow: Text symbols. (line 29) +* poetry, an environment for: verse. (line 6) +* polish l: Non-English characters. + (line 19) +* postscript, in letters: \ps. (line 6) +* pounds symbol: Text symbols. (line 32) +* preamble, defined: Starting & ending. (line 17) +* predefined lengths: Predefined lengths. (line 6) +* prompt, *: Command Line. (line 15) +* quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation. + (line 6) +* quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quote. + (line 6) +* ragged left text: \raggedleft. (line 6) +* ragged left text, environment for: flushright. (line 6) +* ragged right text: \raggedright. (line 6) +* ragged right text, environment for: flushleft. (line 6) +* redefining environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment. + (line 6) +* remarks in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 6) +* reserved characters: Reserved characters. (line 6) +* right quote: Text symbols. (line 35) +* right-justifying text: \raggedleft. (line 6) +* right-justifying text, environment for: flushright. (line 6) +* robust commands: \protect. (line 16) +* roman font: Font styles. (line 96) +* running header and footer: Page layout parameters. + (line 6) +* running header and footer style: \pagestyle. (line 6) +* sans serif font: Font styles. (line 102) +* script letters for math: Font styles. (line 87) +* section number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6) +* section symbol: Text symbols. (line 38) +* sectioning: Sectioning. (line 6) +* setspace package: Low-level font commands. + (line 63) +* setting counters: \setcounter. (line 6) +* sharp S letters: Non-English characters. + (line 30) +* simulating typed text: verbatim. (line 6) +* sizes of text: Font sizes. (line 6) +* slanted font: Font styles. (line 105) +* small caps font: Font styles. (line 99) +* space, inserting vertical: \addvspace. (line 6) +* spaces: Spaces. (line 6) +* spacing within math mode: Spacing in math mode. + (line 6) +* special characters: Non-English characters. + (line 6) +* splitting the input file: Splitting the input. (line 6) +* starting & ending: Starting & ending. (line 6) +* starting a new page: \newpage. (line 6) +* starting a new page and clearing floats: \clearpage. (line 6) +* starting on a right-hand page: \cleardoublepage. (line 6) +* sterling symbol: Text symbols. (line 32) +* stretch, omitting vertical: \raggedbottom. (line 6) +* styles of text: Font styles. (line 6) +* styles, page: Page Styles. (line 6) +* subscript: Subscripts & Superscripts. + (line 6) +* superscript: Subscripts & Superscripts. + (line 6) +* symbols, math: Math symbols. (line 6) +* tab stops, using: tabbing. (line 6) +* table of contents entry, manually adding: \addcontentsline. (line 6) +* table of contents, creating: Tables of contents. (line 6) +* tables, creating: table. (line 6) +* terminal Input/Output: Terminal Input/Output. + (line 6) +* TeX logo: Text symbols. (line 41) +* text symbols: Text symbols. (line 6) +* thanks, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 22) +* theorems, defining: \newtheorem. (line 6) +* theorems, typesetting: theorem. (line 6) +* tie-after accent: Accents. (line 59) +* tilde accent: Accents. (line 34) +* tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 38) +* title pages, creating: titlepage. (line 6) +* title, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 26) +* titles, making: \maketitle. (line 6) +* two-column output: \twocolumn. (line 6) +* typed text, simulating: verbatim. (line 6) +* typeface sizes: Font sizes. (line 6) +* typeface styles: Font styles. (line 6) +* typefaces: Typefaces. (line 6) +* typewriter font: Font styles. (line 108) +* typewriter labels in lists: description. (line 18) +* umlaut accent: Accents. (line 12) +* unordered lists: itemize. (line 6) +* using BibTeX: Using BibTeX. (line 6) +* variables, a list of: Counters. (line 6) +* vector symbol, math: Math accents. (line 41) +* verbatim text: verbatim. (line 6) +* verbatim text, inline: \verb. (line 6) +* vertical space: \addvspace. (line 6) +* vertical space before paragraphs: \parskip. (line 6) +* visible space: \verb. (line 17) +* wide hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 44) +* wide tile accent, math: Math accents. (line 47) +* xindy program: Indexes. (line 18) + + +File: latex2e.info, Node: Command Index, Next: Concept Index, Prev: Document templates, Up: Top + +Command Index +************* + + +* Menu: + +* $: Math formulas. (line 26) +* 10pt option: Document class options. + (line 14) +* 11pt option: Document class options. + (line 14) +* 12pt option: Document class options. + (line 14) +* @{...}: array. (line 31) +* \" (umlaut accent): Accents. (line 12) +* \#: Reserved characters. (line 11) +* \$: Reserved characters. (line 11) +* \%: Reserved characters. (line 11) +* \&: Reserved characters. (line 11) +* \' (acute accent): Accents. (line 15) +* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 45) +* \(: Math formulas. (line 18) +* \): Math formulas. (line 18) +* \*: Math Miscellany. (line 6) +* \+: tabbing. (line 37) +* \,: Spacing in math mode. + (line 19) +* \-: tabbing. (line 41) +* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 6) +* \. (dot-over accent): Accents. (line 20) +* \/: \/. (line 6) +* \:: Spacing in math mode. + (line 16) +* \;: Spacing in math mode. + (line 12) +* \<: tabbing. (line 33) +* \= (macron accent): Accents. (line 23) +* \= (tabbing): tabbing. (line 27) +* \> <1>: Spacing in math mode. + (line 16) +* \>: tabbing. (line 31) +* \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 30) +* \@: \AT. (line 6) +* \[: Math formulas. (line 18) +* \\ (for \shortstack objects): \shortstack. (line 22) +* \\ (for array): array. (line 28) +* \\ (for center): center. (line 13) +* \\ (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 12) +* \\ (for flushright): flushright. (line 12) +* \\ for \author: \maketitle. (line 12) +* \\ for \title: \maketitle. (line 26) +* \\ for flushleft: flushleft. (line 12) +* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 32) +* \\ for tabular: tabular. (line 23) +* \\ for verse: verse. (line 17) +* \\ force line break: \\. (line 6) +* \\ tabbing: tabbing. (line 24) +* \\* (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 17) +* \]: Math formulas. (line 18) +* \^: Reserved characters. (line 21) +* \^ (circumflex accent): Accents. (line 26) +* \_: Reserved characters. (line 11) +* \` (grave accent): Accents. (line 29) +* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 51) +* \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 60) +* \a' (acute accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 61) +* \a= (macron accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 61) +* \a` (grave accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 61) +* \AA (AA): Non-English characters. + (line 11) +* \aa (aa): Non-English characters. + (line 11) +* \acute: Math accents. (line 10) +* \addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}: \addcontentsline. (line 6) +* \address: \address. (line 6) +* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: \addtocontents. (line 6) +* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 6) +* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 6) +* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 6) +* \AE (AE): Non-English characters. + (line 15) +* \ae (ae): Non-English characters. + (line 15) +* \aleph: Math symbols. (line 14) +* \Alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. + (line 12) +* \alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. + (line 9) +* \Alph example: enumerate. (line 42) +* \alpha: Math symbols. (line 17) +* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 20) +* \and for \author: \maketitle. (line 12) +* \angle: Math symbols. (line 23) +* \appendix: Sectioning. (line 44) +* \approx: Math symbols. (line 26) +* \arabic: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. + (line 15) +* \arccos: Math functions. (line 9) +* \arcsin: Math functions. (line 12) +* \arctan: Math functions. (line 15) +* \arg: Math functions. (line 18) +* \arraycolsep: array. (line 43) +* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 90) +* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 94) +* \ast: Math symbols. (line 29) +* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 32) +* \author{NAME \and NAME2}: \maketitle. (line 11) +* \b (bar-under accent): Accents. (line 37) +* \backslash <1>: Reserved characters. (line 16) +* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 35) +* \bar (macron, bar-over accent): Accents. (line 40) +* \baselineskip: Low-level font commands. + (line 57) +* \baselinestretch: Low-level font commands. + (line 63) +* \begin: Environments. (line 6) +* \beta: Math symbols. (line 38) +* \bf: Font styles. (line 83) +* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 32) +* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 6) +* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 6) +* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 6) +* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 41) +* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 44) +* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 47) +* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 50) +* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 53) +* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 56) +* \bigskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip. + (line 9) +* \bigskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip. + (line 9) +* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 65) +* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 59) +* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 62) +* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 68) +* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 74) +* \bmod: Math functions. (line 21) +* \boldmath: Math formulas. (line 31) +* \bot: Math symbols. (line 77) +* \bottomfraction: figure. (line 40) +* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 80) +* \Box: Math symbols. (line 83) +* \breve: Math accents. (line 13) +* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 86) +* \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 43) +* \cal: Font styles. (line 86) +* \cap: Math symbols. (line 89) +* \caption: figure. (line 36) +* \cc: \cc. (line 6) +* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 92) +* \cdots: Math Miscellany. (line 10) +* \centering: \centering. (line 6) +* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 10) +* \check: Math accents. (line 16) +* \chi: Math symbols. (line 95) +* \circ: Math symbols. (line 98) +* \circle: \circle. (line 6) +* \cite: \cite. (line 6) +* \cleardoublepage: \cleardoublepage. (line 6) +* \clearpage: \clearpage. (line 6) +* \cline: \cline. (line 6) +* \closing: \closing. (line 6) +* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 101) +* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 16) +* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 19) +* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 23) +* \cong: Math symbols. (line 104) +* \contentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 31) +* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 107) +* \copyright: Text symbols. (line 9) +* \cos: Math functions. (line 24) +* \cosh: Math functions. (line 27) +* \cot: Math functions. (line 30) +* \coth: Math functions. (line 33) +* \csc: Math functions. (line 36) +* \cup: Math symbols. (line 110) +* \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 46) +* \dag: Text symbols. (line 12) +* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 113) +* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 6) +* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 116) +* \date{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 17) +* \day: \day \month \year. (line 6) +* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 35) +* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 39) +* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 44) +* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 30) +* \ddag: Text symbols. (line 15) +* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 119) +* \ddot: Math accents. (line 19) +* \ddots: Math Miscellany. (line 14) +* \deg: Math functions. (line 39) +* \delta: Math symbols. (line 125) +* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 122) +* \depth: Predefined lengths. (line 10) +* \det: Math functions. (line 42) +* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 131) +* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 128) +* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 134) +* \dim: Math functions. (line 45) +* \displaystyle: Math formulas. (line 36) +* \div: Math symbols. (line 137) +* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 6) +* \dot: Math accents. (line 22) +* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 140) +* \dotfill: \dotfill. (line 6) +* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 98) +* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 146) +* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 143) +* \ell: Math symbols. (line 149) +* \em: Font styles. (line 89) +* \emph: Font styles. (line 26) +* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 152) +* \encl: \encl. (line 6) +* \end: Environments. (line 6) +* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 6) +* \enumi: enumerate. (line 32) +* \enumii: enumerate. (line 32) +* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 32) +* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 32) +* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 155) +* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 158) +* \eta: Math symbols. (line 161) +* \evensidemargin: Document class options. + (line 55) +* \exists: Math symbols. (line 164) +* \exp: Math functions. (line 48) +* \fbox: \fbox and \framebox. (line 6) +* \fboxrule <1>: \fbox and \framebox. (line 16) +* \fboxrule: \framebox (picture). (line 14) +* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox and \framebox. (line 16) +* \fboxsep: \framebox (picture). (line 14) +* \fill: \hfill. (line 9) +* \flat: Math symbols. (line 167) +* \floatpagefraction: figure. (line 43) +* \floatsep: figure. (line 47) +* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 6) +* \fnsymbol: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. + (line 24) +* \fontencoding: Low-level font commands. + (line 11) +* \fontfamily: Low-level font commands. + (line 14) +* \fontseries: Low-level font commands. + (line 25) +* \fontshape: Low-level font commands. + (line 40) +* \fontsize: Low-level font commands. + (line 57) +* \footnote: \footnote. (line 6) +* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 6) +* \footnoterule: Footnote parameters. (line 6) +* \footnotesep: Footnote parameters. (line 12) +* \footnotesize: Font sizes. (line 11) +* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 6) +* \footskip: Page layout parameters. + (line 16) +* \forall: Math symbols. (line 170) +* \frac: Math Miscellany. (line 18) +* \frac{num}{den}: Math Miscellany. (line 17) +* \frame: \frame. (line 6) +* \framebox <1>: \fbox and \framebox. (line 6) +* \framebox: \framebox (picture). (line 6) +* \frown: Math symbols. (line 173) +* \fussy: \fussy. (line 6) +* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 179) +* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 176) +* \gcd: Math functions. (line 51) +* \ge: Math symbols. (line 182) +* \geq: Math symbols. (line 185) +* \gets: Math symbols. (line 188) +* \gg: Math symbols. (line 191) +* \glossary: Glossaries. (line 8) +* \glossaryentry: Glossaries. (line 11) +* \grave: Math accents. (line 25) +* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents. (line 49) +* \hat: Math accents. (line 28) +* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 194) +* \headheight: Page layout parameters. + (line 6) +* \headsep: Page layout parameters. + (line 11) +* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 197) +* \height: Predefined lengths. (line 8) +* \hfill: \hfill. (line 6) +* \hline: \hline. (line 6) +* \hom: Math functions. (line 54) +* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 200) +* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 203) +* \hrulefill: \hrulefill. (line 6) +* \hspace: \hspace. (line 6) +* \Huge: Font sizes. (line 11) +* \huge: Font sizes. (line 11) +* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 6) +* \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 53) +* \iff: Math symbols. (line 206) +* \Im: Math symbols. (line 209) +* \imath: Math accents. (line 31) +* \in: Math symbols. (line 212) +* \include: \include. (line 6) +* \includeonly: \includeonly. (line 6) +* \indent: \indent. (line 6) +* \index: Indexes. (line 8) +* \indexentry: Indexes. (line 11) +* \inf: Math functions. (line 57) +* \infty: Math symbols. (line 215) +* \input: \input. (line 6) +* \int: Math symbols. (line 218) +* \intextsep: figure. (line 51) +* \iota: Math symbols. (line 221) +* \it: Font styles. (line 92) +* \item <1>: itemize. (line 6) +* \item <2>: enumerate. (line 19) +* \item: description. (line 14) +* \itemindent: itemize. (line 52) +* \itemsep: itemize. (line 75) +* \itshape: Font styles. (line 23) +* \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 56) +* \jmath: Math accents. (line 34) +* \Join: Math symbols. (line 224) +* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 227) +* \ker: Math functions. (line 60) +* \kill: tabbing. (line 65) +* \L (/L): Non-English characters. + (line 19) +* \l (/l): Non-English characters. + (line 19) +* \label: \label. (line 6) +* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 36) +* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 36) +* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 36) +* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 36) +* \labelitemi: itemize. (line 32) +* \labelitemii: itemize. (line 32) +* \labelitemiii: itemize. (line 32) +* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 32) +* \labelsep: itemize. (line 55) +* \labelwidth: itemize. (line 58) +* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 233) +* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 230) +* \land: Math symbols. (line 236) +* \langle: Math symbols. (line 239) +* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 11) +* \Large: Font sizes. (line 11) +* \large: Font sizes. (line 11) +* \LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 18) +* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 242) +* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 245) +* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 248) +* \ldots: Text symbols. (line 21) +* \le: Math symbols. (line 251) +* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 254) +* \left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2: Math Miscellany. (line 20) +* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 259) +* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 256) +* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 25) +* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 262) +* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 265) +* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 39) +* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 39) +* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 39) +* \leftmarginiii: itemize. (line 39) +* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 39) +* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 39) +* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 39) +* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 271) +* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 268) +* \leq: Math symbols. (line 274) +* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 277) +* \lg: Math functions. (line 63) +* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 280) +* \lim: Math functions. (line 66) +* \liminf: Math functions. (line 69) +* \limsup: Math functions. (line 72) +* \line: \line. (line 6) +* \linebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak. + (line 6) +* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 6) +* \linewidth: Page layout parameters. + (line 21) +* \listoffigures: Tables of contents. (line 16) +* \listoftables: Tables of contents. (line 16) +* \listparindent: itemize. (line 61) +* \ll: Math symbols. (line 283) +* \ln: Math functions. (line 75) +* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 286) +* \location: \location. (line 6) +* \log: Math functions. (line 78) +* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 289) +* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 292) +* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 295) +* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 298) +* \lor: Math symbols. (line 301) +* \lq: Text symbols. (line 25) +* \makebox: \makebox. (line 6) +* \makebox (picture): \makebox (picture). (line 6) +* \makeglossary: Glossaries. (line 6) +* \makeindex: Indexes. (line 6) +* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 6) +* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 6) +* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 304) +* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 6) +* \marginparpush: Marginal notes. (line 35) +* \marginparsep: Marginal notes. (line 39) +* \marginparwidth: Marginal notes. (line 43) +* \markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 30) +* \markright{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 37) +* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 56) +* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 72) +* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 69) +* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 53) +* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 59) +* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 62) +* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 74) +* \max: Math functions. (line 81) +* \mbox: \mbox. (line 6) +* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 29) +* \medskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip. + (line 13) +* \medskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip. + (line 13) +* \mho: Math symbols. (line 307) +* \mid: Math symbols. (line 309) +* \min: Math functions. (line 84) +* \models: Math symbols. (line 312) +* \month: \day \month \year. (line 6) +* \mp: Math symbols. (line 315) +* \mu: Math symbols. (line 318) +* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 6) +* \multiput: \multiput. (line 6) +* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 321) +* \name: \name. (line 6) +* \natural: Math symbols. (line 324) +* \ne: Math symbols. (line 327) +* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 330) +* \neg: Math symbols. (line 333) +* \neq: Math symbols. (line 336) +* \newcommand: \newcommand & \renewcommand. + (line 6) +* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 6) +* \newenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment. + (line 6) +* \newfont: \newfont. (line 6) +* \newlength: \newlength. (line 6) +* \NEWLINE: \SPACE. (line 6) +* \newline: \newline. (line 6) +* \newpage: \newpage. (line 6) +* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 6) +* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 6) +* \ni: Math symbols. (line 339) +* \nocite: \nocite. (line 6) +* \nofiles: Tables of contents. (line 20) +* \noindent: \noindent. (line 6) +* \nolinebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak. + (line 6) +* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 20) +* \nopagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak. + (line 6) +* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 50) +* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 23) +* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 11) +* \not: Math symbols. (line 342) +* \notin: Math symbols. (line 345) +* \nu: Math symbols. (line 348) +* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 351) +* \O (/O): Non-English characters. + (line 23) +* \o (/o): Non-English characters. + (line 23) +* \obeycr: \obeycr & \restorecr. + (line 6) +* \oddsidemargin: Document class options. + (line 55) +* \odot: Math symbols. (line 354) +* \OE (OE): Non-English characters. + (line 27) +* \oe (oe): Non-English characters. + (line 27) +* \oint: Math symbols. (line 357) +* \omega: Math symbols. (line 363) +* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 360) +* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 366) +* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 6) +* \opening: \opening. (line 6) +* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 369) +* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 372) +* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 375) +* \oval: \oval. (line 6) +* \overbrace{TEXT}: Math Miscellany. (line 25) +* \overline{TEXT}: Math Miscellany. (line 29) +* \owns: Math symbols. (line 378) +* \P: Text symbols. (line 28) +* \pagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak. + (line 6) +* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 6) +* \pageref: \pageref. (line 6) +* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 6) +* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 19) +* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 381) +* \parbox: \parbox. (line 6) +* \parindent <1>: \indent. (line 6) +* \parindent: minipage. (line 18) +* \parsep: itemize. (line 80) +* \parskip: \parskip. (line 6) +* \parskip example: itemize. (line 103) +* \part: Sectioning. (line 8) +* \partial: Math symbols. (line 384) +* \partopsep: itemize. (line 90) +* \perp: Math symbols. (line 387) +* \phi: Math symbols. (line 390) +* \pi: Math symbols. (line 396) +* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 393) +* \pm: Math symbols. (line 399) +* \pmod: Math functions. (line 87) +* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 71) +* \pounds: Text symbols. (line 31) +* \Pr: Math functions. (line 90) +* \prec: Math symbols. (line 402) +* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 405) +* \prime: Math symbols. (line 408) +* \prod: Math symbols. (line 411) +* \propto: Math symbols. (line 414) +* \protect: \protect. (line 6) +* \ps: \ps. (line 6) +* \psi: Math symbols. (line 420) +* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 417) +* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 74) +* \put: \put. (line 6) +* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 6) +* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 6) +* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 6) +* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 6) +* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 423) +* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 426) +* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 429) +* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 432) +* \Re: Math symbols. (line 435) +* \ref: \ref. (line 6) +* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 6) +* \renewenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment. + (line 6) +* \restorecr: \obeycr & \restorecr. + (line 6) +* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 23) +* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 438) +* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 441) +* \rho: Math symbols. (line 444) +* \right: Math Miscellany. (line 21) +* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 450) +* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 447) +* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 453) +* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 456) +* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 459) +* \rightmargin: itemize. (line 65) +* \rm: Font styles. (line 95) +* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 20) +* \roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. + (line 18) +* \rq: Text symbols. (line 34) +* \rule: \rule. (line 6) +* \S: Text symbols. (line 37) +* \savebox: \savebox. (line 6) +* \sbox: \sbox. (line 6) +* \sc: Font styles. (line 98) +* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 11) +* \scshape: Font styles. (line 44) +* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 462) +* \sec: Math functions. (line 93) +* \section: Sectioning. (line 13) +* \selectfont: Low-level font commands. + (line 71) +* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 6) +* \setlength: \setlength. (line 6) +* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 465) +* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 6) +* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 6) +* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 6) +* \sf: Font styles. (line 101) +* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 41) +* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 468) +* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 6) +* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 474) +* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 471) +* \signature: \signature. (line 6) +* \sim: Math symbols. (line 477) +* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 480) +* \sin: Math functions. (line 96) +* \sinh: Math functions. (line 99) +* \sl: Font styles. (line 104) +* \slshape: Font styles. (line 38) +* \small: Font sizes. (line 11) +* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 483) +* \smallskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip. + (line 17) +* \smallskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip. + (line 17) +* \smile: Math symbols. (line 486) +* \SPACE: \SPACE. (line 6) +* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 489) +* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 492) +* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 495) +* \sqrt[ROOT]{arg}: Math Miscellany. (line 32) +* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 498) +* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 501) +* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 504) +* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 507) +* \ss (ss): Non-English characters. + (line 30) +* \stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}: Math Miscellany. (line 38) +* \star: Math symbols. (line 510) +* \startbreaks: \startbreaks. (line 6) +* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 6) +* \stop: Command Line. (line 15) +* \stopbreaks: \stopbreaks. (line 6) +* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 21) +* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 15) +* \subset: Math symbols. (line 513) +* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 516) +* \subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 17) +* \succ: Math symbols. (line 519) +* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 522) +* \sum: Math symbols. (line 525) +* \sup: Math functions. (line 102) +* \supset: Math symbols. (line 528) +* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 531) +* \surd: Math symbols. (line 534) +* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 537) +* \symbol: Reserved characters. (line 25) +* \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 59) +* \TAB: \SPACE. (line 6) +* \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 79) +* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 102) +* \tableofcontents: Tables of contents. (line 6) +* \tan: Math functions. (line 105) +* \tanh: Math functions. (line 108) +* \tau: Math symbols. (line 540) +* \telephone: \telephone. (line 6) +* \TeX: Text symbols. (line 40) +* \textbf: Font styles. (line 32) +* \textfloatsep: figure. (line 56) +* \textfraction: figure. (line 60) +* \textheight: Page layout parameters. + (line 27) +* \textit: Font styles. (line 23) +* \textmd: Font styles. (line 29) +* \textnormal: Font styles. (line 50) +* \textrm: Font styles. (line 20) +* \textsc: Font styles. (line 44) +* \textsf: Font styles. (line 41) +* \textsl: Font styles. (line 38) +* \texttt: Font styles. (line 47) +* \textup: Font styles. (line 35) +* \textwidth: Page layout parameters. + (line 34) +* \thanks{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 21) +* \theta: Math symbols. (line 543) +* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 6) +* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 6) +* \thinspace: \thinspace. (line 6) +* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 6) +* \tilde: Math accents. (line 37) +* \times: Math symbols. (line 546) +* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 11) +* \title{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 25) +* \to: Math symbols. (line 549) +* \today: \today. (line 6) +* \top: Math symbols. (line 552) +* \topfraction: figure. (line 65) +* \topmargin: Page layout parameters. + (line 40) +* \topsep: itemize. (line 84) +* \topskip: Page layout parameters. + (line 47) +* \totalheight: Predefined lengths. (line 12) +* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 555) +* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 558) +* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 561) +* \tt: Font styles. (line 107) +* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 47) +* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 6) +* \typein: \typein. (line 6) +* \typeout: \typeout. (line 6) +* \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 62) +* \unboldmath: Math formulas. (line 31) +* \underbrace{math}: Math Miscellany. (line 42) +* \underline{text}: Math Miscellany. (line 45) +* \unitlength: picture. (line 10) +* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 564) +* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 567) +* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 573) +* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 570) +* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 579) +* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 576) +* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 582) +* \upshape: Font styles. (line 35) +* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 588) +* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 585) +* \usebox: \usebox. (line 6) +* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 6) +* \usefont: Low-level font commands. + (line 75) +* \usepackage: Document class options. + (line 74) +* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 65) +* \value: \value. (line 6) +* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 591) +* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 594) +* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 597) +* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 600) +* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 603) +* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 606) +* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 609) +* \vdots: Math Miscellany. (line 49) +* \vec: Math accents. (line 40) +* \vector: \vector. (line 6) +* \vee: Math symbols. (line 612) +* \verb: \verb. (line 6) +* \vert: Math symbols. (line 618) +* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 615) +* \vfill: \vfill. (line 6) +* \vline: \vline. (line 6) +* \vspace: \vspace. (line 6) +* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 621) +* \widehat: Math accents. (line 43) +* \width: Predefined lengths. (line 6) +* \wp: Math symbols. (line 624) +* \wr: Math symbols. (line 627) +* \xi: Math symbols. (line 633) +* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 630) +* \year: \day \month \year. (line 6) +* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 636) +* \{: Reserved characters. (line 11) +* \|: Math symbols. (line 11) +* \}: Reserved characters. (line 11) +* \~: Reserved characters. (line 21) +* \~ (tilde accent): Accents. (line 34) +* ^: Subscripts & Superscripts. + (line 6) +* _: Subscripts & Superscripts. + (line 6) +* a4paper option: Document class options. + (line 19) +* a5paper option: Document class options. + (line 19) +* abstract environment: abstract. (line 6) +* array environment: array. (line 6) +* article class: Document classes. (line 13) +* b5paper option: Document class options. + (line 19) +* book class: Document classes. (line 13) +* center environment: center. (line 6) +* description environment: description. (line 6) +* displaymath environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6) +* displaymath environment: displaymath. (line 6) +* document environment: document. (line 6) +* draft option: Document class options. + (line 24) +* enumerate environment: enumerate. (line 6) +* eqnarray environment: eqnarray. (line 6) +* equation environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6) +* equation environment: equation. (line 6) +* executivepaper option: Document class options. + (line 19) +* figure: figure. (line 6) +* final option: Document class options. + (line 24) +* fleqn option: Document class options. + (line 24) +* flushleft environment: flushleft. (line 6) +* flushright environment: flushright. (line 6) +* itemize environment: itemize. (line 6) +* landscape option: Document class options. + (line 24) +* legalpaper option: Document class options. + (line 19) +* leqno option: Document class options. + (line 24) +* letter: letter. (line 6) +* letter class: Document classes. (line 13) +* letterpaper option: Document class options. + (line 19) +* list: list. (line 6) +* lR box: picture. (line 62) +* lrbox: lrbox. (line 6) +* math environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6) +* math environment: math. (line 6) +* minipage environment: minipage. (line 6) +* notitlepage option: Document class options. + (line 24) +* onecolumn option: Document class options. + (line 49) +* oneside option: Document class options. + (line 49) +* openany option: Document class options. + (line 49) +* openbib option: Document class options. + (line 24) +* openright option: Document class options. + (line 49) +* picture: picture. (line 6) +* quotation: quotation. (line 6) +* quote: quote. (line 6) +* report class: Document classes. (line 13) +* slides class: Document classes. (line 13) +* tabbing environment: tabbing. (line 6) +* table: table. (line 6) +* tabular environment: tabular. (line 6) +* thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 6) +* theorem environment: theorem. (line 6) +* titlepage environment: titlepage. (line 6) +* titlepage option: Document class options. + (line 24) +* twocolumn option: Document class options. + (line 49) +* twoside option: Document class options. + (line 49) +* verbatim environment: verbatim. (line 6) +* verse environment: verse. (line 6) + + + +Tag Table: +Node: Top1693 +Node: Overview3875 +Node: Starting & ending5743 +Node: Document classes6305 +Node: Document class options6881 +Node: Typefaces9473 +Node: Font styles9915 +Node: Font sizes12241 +Node: Low-level font commands13476 +Node: Layout15704 +Node: \onecolumn16173 +Node: \twocolumn16386 +Node: \flushbottom17891 +Node: \raggedbottom18253 +Node: Page layout parameters18539 +Node: Sectioning20630 +Node: Cross references21954 +Node: \label22385 +Node: \pageref23250 +Node: \ref23549 +Node: Environments23939 +Node: abstract25394 +Node: array25635 +Node: center26966 +Node: \centering27443 +Node: description28283 +Node: displaymath29097 +Node: document29664 +Node: enumerate29921 +Node: eqnarray31213 +Node: equation32223 +Node: figure32596 +Node: flushleft34802 +Node: \raggedright35287 +Node: flushright35846 +Node: \raggedleft36334 +Node: itemize36891 +Node: letter40693 +Node: list40931 +Node: math41755 +Node: minipage42057 +Node: picture43275 +Node: \circle47268 +Node: \makebox (picture)47601 +Node: \framebox (picture)48300 +Node: \dashbox48790 +Node: \frame49317 +Node: \line49643 +Node: \linethickness50112 +Node: \thicklines50533 +Node: \thinlines50843 +Node: \multiput51145 +Node: \oval51511 +Node: \put52128 +Node: \shortstack52376 +Node: \vector52852 +Node: quotation53158 +Node: quote53614 +Node: tabbing54046 +Node: table57209 +Node: tabular58287 +Node: \multicolumn62221 +Node: \cline63019 +Node: \hline63339 +Node: \vline63653 +Node: thebibliography63966 +Node: \bibitem65106 +Node: \cite65837 +Node: \nocite66337 +Node: Using BibTeX66621 +Node: theorem68113 +Node: titlepage68499 +Node: verbatim69100 +Node: \verb69727 +Node: verse70277 +Node: Footnotes70771 +Node: \footnote71315 +Node: \footnotemark71831 +Node: \footnotetext72398 +Node: Footnote parameters72882 +Node: Definitions73611 +Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand74326 +Node: \newcounter75541 +Node: \newlength76009 +Node: \newsavebox76521 +Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment76828 +Node: \newtheorem78095 +Node: \newfont79061 +Node: \protect79541 +Node: Counters80405 +Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol81646 +Node: \usecounter82691 +Node: \value83053 +Node: \setcounter83438 +Node: \addtocounter83729 +Node: \refstepcounter84025 +Node: \stepcounter84370 +Node: \day \month \year84621 +Node: Lengths85166 +Node: \setlength85735 +Node: \addtolength86077 +Node: \settodepth86372 +Node: \settoheight86647 +Node: \settowidth86926 +Node: Predefined lengths87190 +Node: Line breaking87704 +Node: \\88762 +Node: \obeycr & \restorecr89232 +Node: \newline89636 +Node: \- (hyphenation)89926 +Node: \fussy90536 +Node: \sloppy90934 +Node: \hyphenation91261 +Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak91887 +Node: Page breaking92556 +Node: \cleardoublepage93164 +Node: \clearpage93571 +Node: \newpage93847 +Node: \enlargethispage94082 +Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak94607 +Node: Making paragraphs95300 +Node: \indent95872 +Node: \noindent96344 +Node: \parskip96630 +Node: Marginal notes96888 +Node: Math formulas98407 +Node: Subscripts & Superscripts100191 +Node: Math symbols100658 +Node: Math functions107472 +Node: Math accents108416 +Node: Spacing in math mode109281 +Node: Math Miscellany109913 +Node: Modes111335 +Node: Page Styles113168 +Node: \maketitle113662 +Node: \pagenumbering114734 +Node: \pagestyle115151 +Node: \thispagestyle116293 +Node: Spaces116599 +Node: \hspace117659 +Node: \hfill118219 +Node: \SPACE118615 +Node: \AT119082 +Node: \thinspace119543 +Node: \/119802 +Node: \hrulefill120634 +Node: \dotfill120900 +Node: \addvspace121124 +Node: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip121616 +Node: \vfill122295 +Node: \vspace122600 +Node: Boxes123030 +Node: \mbox123749 +Node: \fbox and \framebox124036 +Node: lrbox124836 +Node: \makebox125153 +Node: \parbox125869 +Node: \raisebox127202 +Node: \savebox127799 +Node: \sbox128214 +Node: \usebox128663 +Node: Special insertions128921 +Node: Reserved characters129565 +Node: Text symbols130967 +Node: Accents131686 +Node: Non-English characters133321 +Node: \rule133751 +Node: \today134178 +Node: Splitting the input134623 +Node: \include135264 +Node: \includeonly135851 +Node: \input136342 +Node: Front/back matter136833 +Node: Tables of contents137038 +Node: \addcontentsline138066 +Node: \addtocontents138948 +Node: Glossaries139448 +Node: Indexes139967 +Node: Letters140668 +Node: \address142608 +Node: \cc143213 +Node: \closing143449 +Node: \encl143682 +Node: \location143874 +Node: \makelabels144136 +Node: \name144424 +Node: \opening144646 +Node: \ps144971 +Node: \signature145154 +Node: \startbreaks145437 +Node: \stopbreaks145659 +Node: \telephone145874 +Node: Terminal Input/Output146106 +Node: \typein146371 +Node: \typeout146952 +Node: Command Line147575 +Node: Document templates148270 +Node: book template148585 +Node: beamer template148928 +Node: tugboat template149466 +Node: Concept Index151691 +Node: Command Index179292 + +End Tag Table diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex.html b/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2b69c317200..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6090 +0,0 @@ -<html lang="en"> -<head> -<title>Untitled</title> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html"> -<meta name="description" content="Untitled"> -<meta name="generator" content="makeinfo 4.7"> -<link title="Top" rel="top" href="#Top"> -<link href="http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/" rel="generator-home" title="Texinfo Homepage"> -<!-- -This file documents LaTeX2e, a document preparation system. LaTeX2e is a -macro package for TeX. - -This is edition 1.6 of the LaTeX2e documentation, and is for the Texinfo -that is distributed as part of Version 19 of GNU Emacs. It uses version -2.134 or later of the texinfo.tex input file. - -This is translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The -pre-translation version was written by George D. Greenwade of Sam -Houston State University. - -The LaTeX 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore <stg@dcs.ed.ac.uk>. - -The LaTeX2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen -<bullestock@dk-online.dk>. - -Copyright 1988,1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc. -Copyright 1994-1996 Torsten Martinsen. - -Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of -this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice -are preserved on all copies. - - -Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this -manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire -resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission -notice identical to this one. - -Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual -into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions, -except that the sections entitled ``Distribution'' and ``General Public -License'' may be included in a translation approved by the author instead -of in the original English.--> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css"> -<style type="text/css"><!-- - pre.display { font-family:inherit } - pre.format { font-family:inherit } - pre.smalldisplay { font-family:inherit; font-size:smaller } - pre.smallformat { font-family:inherit; font-size:smaller } - pre.smallexample { font-size:smaller } - pre.smalllisp { font-size:smaller } - span.sc { font-variant:small-caps } - span.roman { font-family: serif; font-weight: normal; } ---></style> -</head> -<body> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Top"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Overview">Overview</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#dir">(dir)</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#dir">(dir)</a> -<br> -</div> - - <p>LaTeX2e is a document preparation system implemented as a macro package -for Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program. - - <p>LaTeX was originally conceived by Leslie Lamport. - - <p>This is edition 1.6 of the LaTeX2e documentation. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#Overview">Overview</a>: What is LaTeX? -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#Commands">Commands</a>: Commands within a LaTeX document. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#Parameters">Parameters</a>: The command line. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#Command-Index">Command Index</a>: An alphabetical list of LaTeX commands. -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#Concept-Index">Concept Index</a>: An alphabetical list of concepts. - - </ul> - -<!-- **************************************** --> -<!-- ************** OVERVIEW **************** --> -<!-- **************************************** --> -<!-- LEVEL1 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Overview"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Commands">Commands</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Top">Top</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h2 class="chapter">1 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide</h2> - -<p><a name="index-Overview-of-LaTeX-1"></a><a name="index-LaTeX-overview-2"></a> -The LaTeX command typesets a file of text using the TeX program and the -LaTeX Macro package for TeX. To be more specific, it processes an input -file containing the text of a document with interspersed commands that -describe how the text should be formatted. It produces at least three -files as output: - - <ol type=1 start=1> -<li>A “Device Independent”, or <span class="file">.dvi</span> file. This contains commands that -can be translated into commands for a variety of output devices. You -can view the output of LaTeX by using a program such as <code>xdvi</code>, -which actually uses the <span class="file">.dvi</span> file. -<li>A “transcript” or <span class="file">.log</span> file that contains summary information and -diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input file. -<li>An “auxiliary” or <span class="file">.aux</span> file. This is used by LaTeX itself, for -things such as sectioning. - </ol> - - <p>For a description of what goes on inside TeX, you should consult -<cite>The TeXbook</cite> by Donald E. Knuth, ISBN 0-201-13448-9, published -jointly by the American Mathematical Society and Addison-Wesley -Publishing Company. - - <p>For a description of LaTeX, you should consult: - - <p><cite>LaTeX: A Document Preparation System</cite>, by Leslie Lamport, -Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 2nd edition, 1994. - - <p><cite>The LaTeX Companion</cite>, by Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, and -Alexander Samarin, Addison-Wesley, 1994. - -<!-- **************************************** --> -<!-- ************** COMMANDS **************** --> -<!-- **************************************** --> -<!-- LEVEL1 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Commands"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Parameters">Parameters</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Overview">Overview</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h2 class="chapter">2 Commands</h2> - -<p>A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of a -<code>\</code> followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single -non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets, <code>[]</code>, are -optional while arguments contained in braces, <code>{}</code>, are required. - - <p>NOTE: LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case -unless explicitly directed to do otherwise. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#Counters">Counters</a>: Internal counters used by LaTeX. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>: Automatic referencing. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>: Define your own commands etc. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a>: Some of the various classes available. -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#Environments">Environments</a>: Such as enumerate & itemize. -<li><a accesskey="6" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>: How to produce footnotes. -<li><a accesskey="7" href="#Layout">Layout</a>: Controlling the page layout. -<li><a accesskey="8" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>: The length commands. -<li><a accesskey="9" href="#Letters">Letters</a>: The letter class. -<li><a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a>: How to insert pagebreaks etc. -<li><a href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>: Paragraph commands. -<li><a href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a>: Putting remarks in the margin. -<li><a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>: How to create mathematical formulae. -<li><a href="#Modes">Modes</a>: Paragraph, Math or LR modes. -<li><a href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>: Various styles of page layout. -<li><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a>: How to section properly. -<li><a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a>: All the associated commands. -<li><a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a>: Special reserved characters. -<li><a href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>: Dealing with big files by splitting. -<li><a href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting & Ending</a>: The formal start & end layouts. -<li><a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>: How to create a table of contents. -<li><a href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a>: User interaction. -<li><a href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>: Such as bold, italics etc. -</ul> - -<!-- *************************************** --> -<!-- **** Command's LEVEL2 Starts Here. **** --> -<!-- *************************************** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ******* Counters ******** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Counters"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Commands">Commands</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.1 Counters</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Counters_002c-a-list-of-3"></a><a name="index-Variables_002c-a-list-of-4"></a> -Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The -name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or -command that produces the number, except with no <code>\</code>. (enumi - -enumiv are used for the nested enumerate environment.) Below is a list -of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control -numbering. - -<pre class="example"> part paragraph figure enumi - chapter subparagraph table enumii - section page footnote enumiii - subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv - subsubsection -</pre> - <ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005caddtocounter">\addtocounter</a>: Add a quantity to a counter. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005calph">\alph</a>: Print value of a counter using letters. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005carabic">\arabic</a>: Print value of a counter using numerals. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cfnsymbol">\fnsymbol</a>: Print value of a counter using symbols. -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>: Define a new counter. -<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a>: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. -<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005croman">\roman</a>: Print value of a counter using roman numerals. -<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>: Set the value of a counter. -<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. -<li><a href="#_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a>: Use a specified counter in a list environment. -<li><a href="#_005cvalue">\value</a>: Use the value of a counter in an expression. -</ul> - -<!-- ******************* --> -<!-- ** \addtocounter ** --> -<!-- ******************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005caddtocounter"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005calph">\alph</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Counters">Counters</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.1 \addtocounter</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005caddtocounter-5"></a> -<code>\addtocounter{counter}{value}</code> - - <p>The <code>\addtocounter</code> command increments the <code>counter</code> by the -amount specified by the <code>value</code> argument. The <code>value</code> -argument can be negative. - -<!-- ************ --> -<!-- ** \alph *** --> -<!-- ************ --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005calph"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005carabic">\arabic</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddtocounter">\addtocounter</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.2 \alph</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005calph-6"></a><a name="index-_005cAlph-7"></a> -<code>\alph{counter}</code> - - <p>This command causes the value of the <code>counter</code> to be printed in -alphabetic characters. The <code>\alph</code> command uses lower case -alphabetic alphabetic characters, i.e., <code>a, b, c...</code> while the -<code>\Alph</code> command uses upper case alphabetic characters, i.e., -<code>A, B, C...</code>. - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- ** \arabic *** --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005carabic"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfnsymbol">\fnsymbol</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005calph">\alph</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.3 \arabic</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005carabic-8"></a> -<code>\arabic{counter}</code> - - <p>The <code>\arabic</code> command causes the value of the <code>counter</code> to be -printed in Arabic numbers, i.e., <code>3</code>. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \fnsymbol ** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cfnsymbol"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005carabic">\arabic</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.4 \fnsymbol</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cfnsymbol-9"></a> -<code>\fnsymbol{counter}</code> - - <p>The <code>\fnsymbol</code> command causes the value of the <code>counter</code> to -be printed in a specific sequence of nine symbols that can be used for -numbering footnotes. - - <p>NB. <code>counter</code> must have a value between 1 and 9 inclusive. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- ** \newcounter ** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewcounter"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfnsymbol">\fnsymbol</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.5 \newcounter</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewcounter-10"></a><a name="index-Counters_002c-creating-11"></a> -<code>\newcounter{foo}[counter]</code> - - <p>The <code>\newcounter</code> command defines a new counter named <code>foo</code>. -The counter is initialized to zero. - - <p>The optional argument <code>[counter]</code> causes the counter <code>foo</code> to -be reset whenever the counter named in the optional argument is -incremented. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- ** \refstepcounter ** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005crefstepcounter"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005croman">\roman</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.6 \refstepcounter</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005crefstepcounter-12"></a> -<code>\refstepcounter{counter}</code> - - <p>The <code>\refstepcounter</code> command works like <code>\stepcounter</code> -See <a href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>, except it also defines the current <code>\ref</code> -value to be the result of <code>\thecounter</code>. - -<!-- ************ --> -<!-- ** \roman ** --> -<!-- ************ --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005croman"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.7 \roman</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005croman-13"></a><a name="index-_005cRoman-14"></a> -<code>\roman{counter}</code> - - <p>This command causes the value of the <code>counter</code> to be printed in -Roman numerals. The <code>\roman</code> command uses lower case Roman -numerals, i.e., <code>i, ii, iii...</code>, while the <code>\Roman</code> command -uses upper case Roman numerals, i.e., <code>I, II, III...</code>. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- ** \stepcounter ** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cstepcounter"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005croman">\roman</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.8 \stepcounter</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cstepcounter-15"></a> -<code>\stepcounter{counter}</code> - - <p>The <code>\stepcounter</code> command adds one to the <code>counter</code> and -resets all subsidiary counters. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- ** \setcounter ** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csetcounter"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.9 \setcounter</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csetcounter-16"></a><a name="index-Counters_002c-setting-17"></a> -<code>\setcounter{counter}{value}</code> - - <p>The <code>\setcounter</code> command sets the value of the <code>counter</code> to -that specified by the <code>value</code> argument. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- ** \usecounter ** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cusecounter"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvalue">\value</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.10 \usecounter</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cusecounter-18"></a> -<code>\usecounter{counter}</code> - - <p>The <code>\usecounter</code> command is used in the second argument of the -<code>list</code> environment to allow the counter specified to be used to -number the list items. - -<!-- ************ --> -<!-- ** \value ** --> -<!-- ************ --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cvalue"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.11 \value</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cvalue-19"></a><a name="index-Counters_002c-getting-the-value-of-20"></a> -<code>\value{counter}</code> - - <p>The <code>\value</code> command produces the value of the <code>counter</code> named -in the mandatory argument. It can be used where LaTeX expects an -integer or number, such as the second argument of a <code>\setcounter</code> -or <code>\addtocounter</code> command, or in: - -<pre class="example"> \hspace{\value{foo}\parindent} -</pre> - <p>It is useful for doing arithmetic with counters. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** Cross References *** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Cross-References"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Counters">Counters</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.2 Cross References</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Cross-referencing-21"></a> -One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer -the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.” - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005clabel">\label</a>: Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a>: Refer to a page number. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cref">\ref</a>: Refer to a section, figure or similar. -</ul> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \label ************* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005clabel"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.2.1 \label</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005clabel-22"></a> -<code>\label{key}</code> - - <p>A <code>\label</code> command appearing in ordinary text assigns to the -<code>key</code> the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing -inside a numbered environment assigns that number to the <code>key</code>. - - <p>A <code>key</code> can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or -punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are different. - - <p>To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is -common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a -colon. The prefixes conventionally used are - - <ul> -<li><code>cha</code> -for chapters -<li><code>sec</code> -for lower-level sectioning commands -<li><code>fig</code> -for figures -<li><code>tab</code> -for tables -<li><code>eq</code> -for equations -</ul> - - <p>Thus, a label for a figure would look like <code>fig:bandersnatch</code>. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \pageref *********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cpageref"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cref">\ref</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005clabel">\label</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.2.2 \pageref</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cpageref-23"></a><a name="index-Cross-referencing-using-page-number-24"></a> -<code>\pageref{key}</code> - - <p>The <code>\pageref</code> command produces the page number of the place in the -text where the corresponding <code>\label</code> command appears. ie. where -<code>\label{key}</code> appears. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \ref *************** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cref"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.2.3 \ref</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cref-25"></a><a name="index-Cross-referencing-using-section-number-26"></a> -<code>\ref{key}</code> - - <p>The <code>\ref</code> command produces the number of the sectional unit, -equation number, ... of the corresponding <code>\label</code> command. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** Definitions ******** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Definitions"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.3 Definitions</h3> - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a>: Define a new command. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a>: Define a new environment. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a>: Define a new theorem-like environment. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a>: Define a new font name. -</ul> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \newcommand ******** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewcommand"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.3.1 \newcommand</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewcommand-27"></a><a name="index-Commands_002c-defining-new-ones-28"></a><a name="index-Defining-a-new-command-29"></a> -<pre class="example"> \newcommand{cmd}[args]{definition} - \newcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition} - \renewcommand{cmd}[args]{definition} - \renewcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition} -</pre> - <p>These commands define (or redefine) a command. - - <dl> -<dt><code>cmd</code><dd>A command name beginning with a <code>\</code>. For <code>\newcommand</code> it -must not be already defined and must not begin with <code>\end</code>; for -<code>\renewcommand</code> it must already be defined. - - <br><dt><code>args</code><dd>An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of the command -being defined. The default is for the command to have no arguments. - - <br><dt><code>def</code><dd>If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's first -argument is optional. The default value of the optional argument is -<code>def</code>. - - <br><dt><code>definition</code><dd>The text to be substituted for every occurrence of <code>cmd</code>; a -parameter of the form <code>#n</code> in <code>cmd</code> is replaced by the text of -the nth argument when this substitution takes place. - - </dl> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \newenvironment **** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewenvironment"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.3.2 \newenvironment</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewenvironment-30"></a><a name="index-Environments_002c-defining-31"></a><a name="index-Defining-new-environments-32"></a> -<pre class="example"> \newenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef} - \newenvironment{nam}[args][default]{begdef}{enddef} - \renewenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef} -</pre> - <p>These commands define or redefine an environment. - - <dl> -<dt><code>nam</code><dd>The name of the environment. For <code>\newenvironment</code> there must be -no currently defined environment by that name, and the command -<code>\nam</code> must be undefined. For <code>\renewenvironment</code> the -environment must already be defined. - - <br><dt><code>args</code><dd>An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of -the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments. - - <br><dt><code>default</code><dd>If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and <code>default</code> -gives the default value for that argument. - - <br><dt><code>begdef</code><dd>The text substituted for every occurrence of <code>\begin{nam}</code>; a -parameter of the form <code>#n</code> in <code>cmd</code> is replaced by the text of -the nth argument when this substitution takes place. - - <br><dt><code>enddef</code><dd>The text substituted for every occurrence of <code>\end{nam}</code>. It may -not contain any argument parameters. - - </dl> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \newtheorem ******** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewtheorem"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.3.3 \newtheorem</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewtheorem-33"></a><a name="index-Theorems_002c-defining-34"></a><a name="index-Defining-new-theorems-35"></a> -<pre class="example"> \newtheorem{env_name}{caption}[within] - \newtheorem{env_name}[numbered_like]{caption} -</pre> - <p>This command defines a theorem-like environment. - - <dl> -<dt><code>env_name</code><dd>The name of the environment to be defined. A string of letters. It must -not be the name of an existing environment or counter. - - <br><dt><code>caption</code><dd>The text printed at the beginning of the environment, right before the -number. This may simply say “Theorem”, for example. - - <br><dt><code>within</code><dd>The name of an already defined counter, usually of a sectional unit. -Provides a means of resetting the new theorem counter <strong>within</strong> -the sectional unit. - - <br><dt><code>numbered_like</code><dd>The name of an already defined theorem-like environment. - - </dl> - - <p>The <code>\newtheorem</code> command may have at most one optional argument. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \newfont *********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewfont"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.3.4 \newfont</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewfont-36"></a><a name="index-Fonts_002c-new-commands-for-37"></a><a name="index-Defining-new-fonts-38"></a> -<code>\newfont{cmd}{font_name}</code> - - <p>Defines the command name <code>cmd</code>, which must not be currently -defined, to be a declaration that selects the font named -<code>font_name</code> to be the current font. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** Document Classes **** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Document-Classes"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Environments">Environments</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.4 Document Classes</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Document-Classes-39"></a><a name="index-Classes-of-document-40"></a><a name="index-article-class-41"></a><a name="index-report-class-42"></a><a name="index-book-class-43"></a><a name="index-letter-class-44"></a><a name="index-_005cdocumentclass-45"></a> -Valid LaTeX document classes include: - - <ul> -<li>article -<li>report -<li>letter -<li>book -<li>slides -</ul> - - <p>Other document classes are often available. See <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>, for details. -They are selected with the following command: - - <p><code>\documentclass [options] {class}</code> - - <p>All the standard classes (except slides) accept the following options -for selecting the typeface size (10 pt is default): - - <p>10pt, 11pt, 12pt - - <p>All classes accept these options for selecting the paper size (default -is letter): - - <p>a4paper, a5paper, b5paper, letterpaper, legalpaper, executivepaper - - <p>Miscellaneous options: - - <ul> -<li>landscape — selects landscape format. Default is portrait. -<li>titlepage, notitlepage — selects if there should be a separate title -page. -<li>leqno — equation number on left side of equations. Default is right side. -<li>fleqn — displayed formulas flush left. Default is centred. -<li>openbib — use “open” bibliography format. -<li>draft, final — mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a rule. -Default is final. -</ul> - - <p>These options are not available with the slides class: - - <ul> -<li>oneside, twoside — selects one- or twosided layout. Default is -oneside, except for the book class. -<li>openright, openany — determines if a chapter should start on a -right-hand page. Default is openright for book. -<li>onecolumn, twocolumn — one or two columns. Defaults to one column. -</ul> - - <p>The slides class offers the option <code>clock</code> for printing the time at -the bottom of each note. - - <p>If you specify more than one option, they must be separated by a comma. - - <p>Additional packages are loaded by a - - <p><code>\usepackage[options]{pkg}</code> -<a name="index-_005cusepackage-46"></a> -command. If you specify more than one package, they must be separated by -a comma. -<a name="index-Packages_002c-loading-47"></a><a name="index-Loading-additional-packages-48"></a> -Any options given in the <code>\documentclass</code> command that are unknown -by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with -<code>\usepackage</code>. -<a name="index-Global-options-49"></a><a name="index-Options_002c-global-50"></a> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Layout"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<p><a name="index-Layout-commands-51"></a> - -<h3 class="section">2.5 Layout</h3> - -<p>Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a>: Make all text pages the same height. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a>: Use one-column layout. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a>: Allow text pages of differing height. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a>: Use two-column layout. -</ul> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \flushbottom ******* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cflushbottom"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Layout">Layout</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.5.1 \flushbottom</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cflushbottom-52"></a> -The <code>\flushbottom</code> declaration makes all text pages the same -height, adding extra vertical space when necessary to fill out the page. - - <p>This is the standard if twocolumn mode is selected. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \onecolumn ********* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005conecolumn"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Layout">Layout</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.5.2 \onecolumn</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005conecolumn-53"></a> -The <code>\onecolumn</code> declaration starts a new page and produces -single-column output. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \raggedbottom ****** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005craggedbottom"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Layout">Layout</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.5.3 \raggedbottom</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005craggedbottom-54"></a> -The <code>\raggedbottom</code> declaration makes all pages the height of the -text on that page. No extra vertical space is added. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \twocolumn ********* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ctwocolumn"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Layout">Layout</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.5.4 \twocolumn</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005ctwocolumn-55"></a><a name="index-Multicolumn-text-56"></a> -<code>\twocolumn[text]</code> - - <p>The <code>\twocolumn</code> declaration starts a new page and produces -two-column output. If the optional <code>text</code> argument is present, it -is typeset in one-column mode. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** Environments ******* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Environments"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.6 Environments</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Environments-57"></a><a name="index-_005cbegin-58"></a><a name="index-_005cend-59"></a> -LaTeX provides a number of different paragraph-making environments. -Each environment begins and ends in the same manner. - -<pre class="example"> \begin{environment-name} - . - . - . - \end{environment-name} -</pre> - <ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#array">array</a>: Math arrays. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#center">center</a>: Centred lines. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#description">description</a>: Labelled lists. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>: Numbered lists. -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a>: Sequences of aligned equations. -<li><a accesskey="6" href="#equation">equation</a>: Displayed equation. -<li><a accesskey="7" href="#figure">figure</a>: Floating figures. -<li><a accesskey="8" href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>: Flushed left lines. -<li><a accesskey="9" href="#flushright">flushright</a>: Flushed right lines. -<li><a href="#itemize">itemize</a>: Bulleted lists. -<li><a href="#letter">letter</a>: Letters. -<li><a href="#list">list</a>: Generic list environment. -<li><a href="#minipage">minipage</a>: Miniature page. -<li><a href="#picture">picture</a>: Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles. -<li><a href="#quotation">quotation</a>: Indented environment with paragraph indentation. -<li><a href="#quote">quote</a>: Indented environment with no paragraph indentation. -<li><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a>: Align text arbitrarily. -<li><a href="#table">table</a>: Floating tables. -<li><a href="#tabular">tabular</a>: Align text in columns. -<li><a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>: Bibliography or reference list. -<li><a href="#theorem">theorem</a>: Theorems, lemmas, etc. -<li><a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a>: For hand crafted title pages. -<li><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>: Simulating typed input. -<li><a href="#verse">verse</a>: For poetry and other things. -</ul> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** array ************** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="array"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#center">center</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Environments">Environments</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.1 array</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Arrays_002c-math-60"></a><a name="index-array-61"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{array}{col1col2...coln} - column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ - . - . - . - \end{array} -</pre> - <p>Math arrays are produced with the array environment. It has a single -mandatory argument describing the number of columns and the alignment -within them. Each column, <code>coln</code>, is specified by a single letter -that tells how items in that row should be formatted. - - <ul> -<li><code>c</code> — for centred -<li><code>l</code> — for flush left -<li><code>r</code> — for flush right -</ul> - - <p>Column entries must be separated by an <code>&</code>. Column entries may -include other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array must be terminated -with the string <code>\\</code>. - - <p>Note that the <code>array</code> environment can only be used in math mode, so -normally it is used inside an <code>equation</code> environment. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** center ************* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="center"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#description">description</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#array">array</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.2 center</h4> - -<p><a name="index-center-62"></a><a name="index-Centering-text_002c-environment-for-63"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{center} - Text on line 1 \\ - Text on line 2 \\ - . - . - . - \end{center} -</pre> - <p>The <code>center</code> environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of -lines that are centred within the left and right margins on the current -page. Each line must be terminated with the string <code>\\</code>. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005ccentering">\centering</a>: The declaration form of the <code>center</code> environment. -</ul> - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- ** \centering *** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ccentering"></a>Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#center">center</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.2.1 \centering</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005ccentering-64"></a><a name="index-Centering-text-65"></a><a name="index-Formatting-Text-66"></a> -This declaration corresponds to the <code>center</code> environment. This -declaration can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code> or in -a <code>parbox</code>. The text of a figure or table can be centred on the -page by putting a <code>\centering</code> command at the beginning of the -figure or table environment. - - <p>Unlike the <code>center</code> environment, the <code>\centering</code> command does -not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph -units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the -declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code> command (of an -environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** description ******** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="description"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#center">center</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.3 description</h4> - -<p><a name="index-description-67"></a><a name="index-Labelled-lists_002c-creating-68"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{description} - \item [label] First item - \item [label] Second item - . - . - . - \end{description} -</pre> - <p>The <code>description</code> environment is used to make labelled lists. The -<code>label</code> is bold face and flushed right. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** enumerate ********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="enumerate"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#description">description</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.4 enumerate</h4> - -<p><a name="index-enumerate-69"></a><a name="index-Lists-of-items_002c-numbered-70"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{enumerate} - \item First item - \item Second item - . - . - . - \end{enumerate} -</pre> - <p>The <code>enumerate</code> environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations -can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also -be nested within other paragraph-making environments. - - <p>Each item of an enumerated list begins with an <code>\item</code> command. -There must be at least one <code>\item</code> command within the environment. - - <p>The <code>enumerate</code> environment uses the <code>enumi</code> through -<code>enumiv</code> counters (see <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>). The type of numbering can be -changed by redefining <code>\theenumi</code> etc. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** eqnarray *********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="eqnarray"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#equation">equation</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.5 eqnarray</h4> - -<p><a name="index-eqnarray-71"></a><a name="index-Equations_002c-aligning-72"></a><a name="index-Aligning-Equations-73"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{eqnarray} - math formula 1 \\ - math formula 2 \\ - . - . - . - \end{eqnarray} -</pre> - <p>The <code>eqnarray</code> environment is used to display a sequence of -equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column -<code>array</code> environment, with consecutive rows separated by <code>\\</code> -and consecutive items within a row separated by an <code>&</code>. - - <p>An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a -<code>\nonumber</code> command. - - <p><a name="index-_005clefteqn-74"></a> -The command <code>\lefteqn</code> is used for splitting long formulas across -lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of -zero width. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** equation *********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="equation"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#figure">figure</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.6 equation</h4> - -<p><a name="index-equation-75"></a><a name="index-Equations_002c-environment-for-76"></a><a name="index-Formulae_002c-environment-for-77"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{equation} - math formula - \end{equation} -</pre> - <p>The <code>equation</code> environment centres your equation on the page and places -the equation number in the right margin. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** figure ************* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="figure"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#equation">equation</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.7 figure</h4> - -<p><a name="index-figure-78"></a><a name="index-Inserting-figures-79"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{figure}[placement] - - body of the figure - - \caption{figure title} - \end{figure} -</pre> - <p><a name="index-_005ccaption-80"></a>Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are -usually “floated” to a convenient place, like the top of a page. -Figures will not be split between two pages. - - <p>The optional argument <code>[placement]</code> determines where LaTeX will try -to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly -put a float: - - <ol type=1 start=1> -<li><code>h</code> (Here) - at the position in the text where the figure -environment appears. -<li><code>t</code> (Top) - at the top of a text page. -<li><code>b</code> (Bottom) - at the bottom of a text page. -<li><code>p</code> (Page of floats) - on a separate float page, which is a page -containing no text, only floats. - </ol> - - <p>The standard report and article classes use the default placement -<code>tbp</code>. - - <p>The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, etc. -you wish. The <code>\caption</code> command allows you to title your figure. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** flushleft ********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="flushleft"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#flushright">flushright</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#figure">figure</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.8 flushleft</h4> - -<p><a name="index-flushleft-81"></a><a name="index-Left_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for-82"></a><a name="index-Ragged-right-text_002c-environment-for-83"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{flushleft} - Text on line 1 \\ - Text on line 2 \\ - . - . - . - \end{flushleft} -</pre> - <p>The <code>flushleft</code> environment allows you to create a paragraph -consisting of lines that are flushed left, to the left-hand margin. -Each line must be terminated with the string <code>\\</code>. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a>: The declaration form of the <code>flushleft</code> environment. -</ul> - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- * \raggedright ** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005craggedright"></a>Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#flushleft">flushleft</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.8.1 \raggedright</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005craggedright-84"></a><a name="index-Ragged-right-text-85"></a><a name="index-Left_002djustifying-text-86"></a><a name="index-Justification_002c-ragged-right-87"></a> -This declaration corresponds to the <code>flushleft</code> environment. This -declaration can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code> or in -a <code>parbox</code>. - - <p>Unlike the <code>flushleft</code> environment, the <code>\raggedright</code> command -does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats -paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the -declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code> command (of an -environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** flushright ********* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="flushright"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#itemize">itemize</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.9 flushright</h4> - -<p><a name="index-flushright-88"></a><a name="index-Ragged-left-text_002c-environment-for-89"></a><a name="index-Right_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for-90"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{flushright} - Text on line 1 \\ - Text on line 2 \\ - . - . - . - \end{flushright} -</pre> - <p>The <code>flushright</code> environment allows you to create a paragraph -consisting of lines that are flushed right, to the right-hand margin. -Each line must be terminated with the string <code>\\</code>. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a>: The declaration form of the <code>flushright</code> environment. -</ul> - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- * \raggedleft *** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005craggedleft"></a>Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#flushright">flushright</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.9.1 \raggedleft</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005craggedleft-91"></a><a name="index-Ragged-left-text-92"></a><a name="index-Justification_002c-ragged-left-93"></a><a name="index-Right_002djustifying-text-94"></a> -This declaration corresponds to the <code>flushright</code> environment. This -declaration can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code> or in -a <code>parbox</code>. - - <p>Unlike the <code>flushright</code> environment, the <code>\raggedleft</code> command -does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats -paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the -declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code> command (of an -environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** itemize ************ --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="itemize"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#letter">letter</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#flushright">flushright</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.10 itemize</h4> - -<p><a name="index-itemize-95"></a><a name="index-_005citem-96"></a><a name="index-Lists-of-items-97"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{itemize} - \item First item - \item Second item - . - . - . - \end{itemize} -</pre> - <p>The <code>itemize</code> environment produces a “bulleted” list. Itemizations -can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also -be nested within other paragraph-making environments. - - <p>Each item of an <code>itemized</code> list begins with an <code>\item</code> command. -There must be at least one <code>\item</code> command within the environment. - - <p>The <code>itemize</code> environment uses the <code>itemi</code> through -<code>itemiv</code> counters (see <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>). The type of numbering can be -changed by redefining <code>\theitemi</code> etc. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** letter ************ --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="letter"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#list">list</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#itemize">itemize</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.11 letter</h4> - -<p><a name="index-letter-98"></a> -This environment is used for creating letters. See <a href="#Letters">Letters</a>. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** list *************** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="list"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#minipage">minipage</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#letter">letter</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.12 list</h4> - -<p><a name="index-list-99"></a><a name="index-Lists-of-items_002c-generic-100"></a> -The <code>list</code> environment is a generic environment which is used for -defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in -documents, but often in macros. - -<pre class="example"> \begin{list}{label}{spacing} - \item First item - \item Second item - . - . - . - \end{list} -</pre> - <p>The <code>{label}</code> argument specifies how items should be labelled. -This argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the -label. This argument can and usually does contain other LaTeX commands. - - <p>The <code>{spacing}</code> argument contains commands to change the spacing -parameters for the list. This argument will most often be null, i.e., -<code>{}</code>. This will select all default spacing which should suffice -for most cases. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** minipage *********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="minipage"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#picture">picture</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#list">list</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.13 minipage</h4> - -<p><a name="index-minipage-101"></a><a name="index-Footnotes-in-figures-102"></a><a name="index-Figures_002c-footnotes-in-103"></a><a name="index-Minipage_002c-creating-a-104"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{minipage}[position]{width} - text - \end{minipage} -</pre> - <p>The <code>minipage</code> environment is similar to a <code>\parbox</code> command. -It takes the same optional <code>position</code> argument and mandatory -<code>width</code> argument. You may use other paragraph-making environments -inside a minipage. - - <p>Footnotes in a <code>minipage</code> environment are handled in a way that is -particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A -<code>\footnote</code> or <code>\footnotetext</code> command puts the footnote at -the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it -uses the <code>mpfootnote</code> counter instead of the ordinary -<code>footnote</code> counter See <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>. - - <p>NOTE: Don't put one minipage inside another if you are using footnotes; -they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** picture ************ --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="picture"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#quotation">quotation</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#minipage">minipage</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.14 picture</h4> - -<p><a name="index-picture-105"></a><a name="index-Creating-pictures-106"></a><a name="index-Pictures_002c-creating-107"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset) - . - . - picture commands - . - . - \end{picture} -</pre> - <p>The <code>picture</code> environment allows you to create just about any kind -of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You -tell LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their -coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point and -a minus sign — a number like <code>5</code>, <code>2.3</code> or <code>-3.1416</code>. A -coordinate specifies a length in multiples of the unit length -<code>\unitlength</code>, so if <code>\unitlength</code> has been set to <code>1cm</code>, -then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimetres. You -can change the value of <code>\unitlength</code> anywhere you want, using the -<code>\setlength</code> command, but strange things will happen if you try -changing it inside the picture environment. - - <p>A position is a pair of coordinates, such as <code>(2.4,-5)</code>, specifying -the point with x-coordinate <code>2.4</code> and y-coordinate <code>-5</code>. -Coordinates are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, -which is normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that -when a position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; -the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. - - <p>The <code>picture</code> environment has one mandatory argument, which is a -<code>position</code>. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment -produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this -argument's x- and y-coordinates. - - <p>The <code>picture</code> environment also has an optional <code>position</code> -argument, following the <code>size</code> argument, that can change the -origin. (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not -contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the -coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture -(thereby determining the origin). For example, if <code>\unitlength</code> -has been set to <code>1mm</code>, the command -<pre class="example"> \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20) -</pre> - <p>produces a picture of width 100 millimetres and height 200 -millimetres, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose -upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first -draw a picture, you will omit the optional argument, leaving the origin -at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by -shifting everything, you just add the appropriate optional argument. - - <p>The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the -picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is; -LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or even -off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by LaTeX in determining -how much room to leave for it. - - <p>Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the <code>\put</code> -command. The command -<pre class="example"> \put (11.3,-.3){...} -</pre> - <p>puts the object specified by <code>...</code> in the picture, with its -reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for -various objects will be described below. - - <p>The <code>\put</code> command creates an <dfn>LR box</dfn>. You can put anything -in the text argument of the <code>\put</code> command that you'd put into the -argument of an <code>\mbox</code> and related commands. When you do this, the -reference point will be the lower left corner of the box. - - <p>Picture commands: - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005ccircle">\circle</a>: Draw a circle. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a>: Draw a dashed box. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cframe">\frame</a>: Draw a frame around an object. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>: Draw a box with a frame around it. -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005cline">\line</a>: Draw a straight line. -<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a>: Set the line thickness. -<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>: Draw a box of the specified size. -<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005cmultiput">\multiput</a>: Draw multiple instances of an object. -<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005coval">\oval</a>: Draw an ellipse. -<li><a href="#_005cput">\put</a>: Place an object at a specified place. -<li><a href="#_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a>: Make a pile of objects. -<li><a href="#_005cvector">\vector</a>: Draw a line with an arrow. -</ul> - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \circle ***** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ccircle"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.1 \circle</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005ccircle-108"></a> -<code>\circle[*]{diameter}</code> - - <p>The <code>\circle</code> command produces a circle with a diameter as close to -the specified one as possible. If the <code>*</code>-form of the command is -used, LaTeX draws a solid circle. - - <p>Note that only circles up to 40 pt can be drawn. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \dashbox **** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cdashbox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cframe">\frame</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccircle">\circle</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.2 \dashbox</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cdashbox-109"></a> -Draws a box with a dashed line. - - <p><code>\dashbox{dash_length}(width,height){...}</code> - - <p>The <code>\dashbox</code> has an extra argument which specifies the width of -each dash. A dashed box looks best when the <code>width</code> and -<code>height</code> are multiples of the <code>dash_length</code>. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \frame ****** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cframe"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.3 \frame</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cframe-110"></a> -<code>\frame{...}</code> - - <p>The <code>\frame</code> command puts a rectangular frame around the object -specified in the argument. The reference point is the bottom left -corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the frame and the -object. - -<!-- ************************** --> -<!-- *** \framebox (picture) ** --> -<!-- ************************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cline">\line</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cframe">\frame</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.4 \framebox</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cframebox-111"></a> -<code>\framebox(width,height)[position]{...}</code> - - <p>The <code>\framebox</code> command is exactly the same as the <code>\makebox</code> -command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that -it creates. - - <p>The <code>framebox</code> command produces a rule of thickness -<code>\fboxrule</code>, and leaves a space <code>\fboxsep</code> between the rule -and the contents of the box. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \line ******* --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cline"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.5 \line</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cline-112"></a> -<code>\line(x slope,y slope){length}</code> - - <p>The <code>\line</code> command draws a line of the specified <code>length</code> and -<code>slope</code>. - - <p>Note that LaTeX can only draw lines with slope = x/y, where x and y -have integer values from -6 through 6. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- * \linethickness * --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005clinethickness"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cline">\line</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.6 \linethickness</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005clinethickness-113"></a> -<code>\linethickness{dimension}</code> - - <p>Declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture -environment to be <code>dimension</code>, which must be a positive length. It -does not affect the thickness of slanted lines and circles, or the -quarter circles drawn by <code>\oval</code> to form the corners of an oval. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- *** \makebox (picture) ** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmultiput">\multiput</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.7 \makebox</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029-114"></a> -<code>\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}</code> - - <p>The <code>\makebox</code> command for the picture environment is similar to -the normal <code>\makebox</code> command except that you must specify a -<code>width</code> and <code>height</code> in multiples of <code>\unitlength</code>. - - <p>The optional argument, <code>[position]</code>, specifies the quadrant that -your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: - - <ul> -<li><code>t</code> - Moves the item to the top of the rectangle -<li><code>b</code> - Moves the item to the bottom -<li><code>l</code> - Moves the item to the left -<li><code>r</code> - Moves the item to the right -</ul> - - <p>See <a href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \multiput *** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmultiput"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005coval">\oval</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.8 \multiput</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmultiput-115"></a> -<code>\multiput(x coord,y coord)(delta x,delta y){number of copies}{object}</code> - - <p>The <code>\multiput</code> command can be used when you are putting the same -object in a regular pattern across a picture. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \oval ***** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005coval"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cput">\put</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmultiput">\multiput</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.9 \oval</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005coval-116"></a> -<code>\oval(width,height)[portion]</code> - - <p>The <code>\oval</code> command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The -optional argument, <code>[portion]</code>, allows you to select part of the -oval. - - <ul> -<li><code>t</code> - Selects the top portion -<li><code>b</code> - Selects the bottom portion -<li><code>r</code> - Selects the right portion -<li><code>l</code> - Selects the left portion -</ul> - - <p>Note that the “corners” of the oval are made with quarter circles with -a maximum radius of 20 pt, so large “ovals” will look more like boxes -with rounded corners. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \put ******** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cput"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005coval">\oval</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.10 \put</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cput-117"></a> -<code>\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }</code> - - <p>The <code>\put</code> command places the item specified by the mandatory -argument at the given coordinates. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \shortstack * --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cshortstack"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvector">\vector</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cput">\put</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.11 \shortstack</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cshortstack-118"></a> -<code>\shortstack[position]{... \\ ... \\ ...}</code> - - <p>The <code>\shortstack</code> command produces a stack of objects. The valid -positions are: - - <ul> -<li><code>r</code> - Moves the objects to the right of the stack -<li><code>l</code> - Moves the objects to the left of the stack -<li><code>c</code> - Moves the objects to the centre of the stack (default) -</ul> - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \vector ***** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cvector"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.12 \vector</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cvector-119"></a> -<code>\vector(x slope,y slope){length}</code> - - <p>The <code>\vector</code> command draws a line with an arrow of the specified -length and slope. The <code>x</code> and <code>y</code> values must lie between -4 -and +4, inclusive. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** quotation ********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="quotation"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#quote">quote</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#picture">picture</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.15 quotation</h4> - -<p><a name="index-quotation-120"></a><a name="index-Quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation_002c-displaying-121"></a><a name="index-Displaying-quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation-122"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{quotation} - text - \end{quotation} -</pre> - <p>The margins of the <code>quotation</code> environment are indented on the left -and the right. The text is justified at both margins and there is -paragraph indentation. Leaving a blank line between text produces a new -paragraph. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** quote ************** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="quote"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#tabbing">tabbing</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#quotation">quotation</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.16 quote</h4> - -<p><a name="index-quote-123"></a><a name="index-Quoted-text_002c-displaying-124"></a><a name="index-Displaying-quoted-text-125"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{quote} - text - \end{quote} -</pre> - <p>The margins of the <code>quote</code> environment are indented on the left and -the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank line -between text produces a new paragraph. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** tabbing ************ --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="tabbing"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#table">table</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#quote">quote</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.17 tabbing</h4> - -<p><a name="index-tabbing-126"></a><a name="index-Tab-stops_002c-using-127"></a><a name="index-Lining-text-up-in-columns-using-tab-stops-128"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{tabbing} - text \= more text \= still more text \= last text \\ - second row \> \> more \\ - . - . - . - \end{tabbing} -</pre> - <p>The <code>tabbing</code> environment provides a way to align text in columns. -It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much the way you do -with an ordinary typewriter. - - <p>It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is constant -and known in advance. - - <p>This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the <code>tabular</code> -environment. - - <p>The following commands can be used inside a <code>tabbing</code> enviroment: - - <dl> -<dt><code>\=</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_003d-129"></a> -Sets a tab stop at the current position. - - <br><dt><code>\></code><dd><a name="index-_005c_003e-130"></a> -Advances to the next tab stop. - - <br><dt><code>\<</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_003c-131"></a> -This command allows you to put something to the left of the -local margin without changing the margin. -Can only be used at the start of the line. - - <br><dt><code>\+</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_002b-132"></a> -Moves the left margin of the next and all the -following commands one tab stop to the right. - - <br><dt><code>\-</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_002d-_0028tabbing_0029-133"></a> -Moves the left margin of the next and all the -following commands one tab stop to the left. - - <br><dt><code>\'</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_0027-_0028tabbing_0029-134"></a> -Moves everything that you have typed so far in the -current column, i.e. everything from the most recent <code>\></code>, -<code>\<</code>, <code>\'</code>, <code>\\</code>, or <code>\kill</code> command, to the right -of the previous column, flush against the current column's tab stop. - - <br><dt><code>\`</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_0060-_0028tabbing_0029-135"></a> -Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab -stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last column -because there's no tab stop there. The <code>\`</code> command moves all the -text that follows it, up to the <code>\\</code> or <code>\end{tabbing}</code> -command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing -environment. There must be no <code>\></code> or <code>\'</code> command between -the <code>\`</code> and the command that ends the line. - - <br><dt><code>\kill</code><dd><a name="index-_005ckill-136"></a> -Sets tab stops without producing -text. Works just like <code>\\</code> except that it throws away the -current line instead of producing output for it. The effect of any -<code>\=</code>, <code>\+</code> or <code>\-</code> commands in that line remain in -effect. - - <br><dt><code>\pushtabs</code><dd><a name="index-_005cpushtabs-137"></a> -Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for -temporarily changing tab stop positions in the middle of a -<code>tabbing</code> environment. - - <br><dt><code>\poptabs</code><dd><a name="index-_005cpoptabs-138"></a> -Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last <code>\pushtabs</code>. - - <br><dt><code>\a</code><dd><a name="index-_005ca-139"></a> -In a <code>tabbing</code> environment, the commands <code>\=</code>, <code>\'</code> and -<code>\`</code> do not produce accents as normal. Instead, the commands -<code>\a=</code>, <code>\a'</code> and <code>\a`</code> are used. -</dl> - - <p>This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format: - -<pre class="example"> \begin{tabbing} - function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ - \> begin \= \+ \\ - \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\ - fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\ - else \+ \\ - fact := 1; \-\- \\ - end;\\ - \end{tabbing} -</pre> - <!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** table ************** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="table"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#tabular">tabular</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#tabbing">tabbing</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.18 table</h4> - -<p><a name="index-table-140"></a><a name="index-Tables_002c-creating-141"></a><a name="index-Creating-tables-142"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{table}[placement] - - body of the table - - \caption{table title} - \end{table} -</pre> - <p>Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are -usually “floated” to a convenient place, like the top of a page. -Tables will not be split between two pages. - - <p>The optional argument <code>[placement]</code> determines where LaTeX will try -to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put -a float: - - <ul> -<li><code>h</code> : Here - at the position in the text where the table -environment appears. -<li><code>t</code> : Top - at the top of a text page. -<li><code>b</code> : Bottom - at the bottom of a text page. -<li><code>p</code> : Page of floats - on a separate float page, which is a page -containing no text, only floats. -</ul> - - <p>The standard <code>report</code> and <code>article</code> classes use the default -placement <code>[tbp]</code>. - - <p>The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, etc., -you wish. The <code>\caption</code> command allows you to title your table. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** tabular ************ --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="tabular"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#table">table</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.19 tabular</h4> - -<p><a name="index-tabular-143"></a><a name="index-Lines-in-tables-144"></a><a name="index-Lining-text-up-in-tables-145"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols} - column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ - . - . - . - \end{tabular} -</pre> - <p>or - -<pre class="example"> \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols} - column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ - . - . - . - \end{tabular*} -</pre> - <p>These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of -items, aligned vertically in columns. The mandatory and optional -arguments consist of: - - <dl> -<dt><code>width</code><dd>Specifies the width of the <code>tabular*</code> environment. There must be -rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the specified -width. -<br><dt><code>pos</code><dd>Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre of -the environment. - - <ul> -<li><code>t</code> - align on top row -<li><code>b</code> - align on bottom row -</ul> - - <br><dt><code>cols</code><dd>Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the -following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and -intercolumn material. - - <ul> -<li><code>l</code> - A column of left-aligned items. -<li><code>r</code> - A column of right-aligned items. -<li><code>c</code> - A column of centred items. -<li><code>|</code> - A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment. -<li><code>@{text}</code> - This inserts <code>text</code> in every row. An @-expression -suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any -desired space between the inserted text and the adjacent items must be -included in text. An <code>\extracolsep{wd}</code> command in an -@-expression causes an extra space of width <code>wd</code> to appear to the -left of all subsequent columns, until countermanded by another -<code>\extracolsep</code> command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this -extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An -<code>\extracolsep</code> command can be used only in an @-expression in the -<code>cols</code> argument. -<li><code>p{wd}</code> - Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of -width <code>wd</code>, as if it were the argument of a <code>\parbox[t]{wd}</code> -command. However, a <code>\\</code> may not appear in the item, except in the -following situations: - <ol type=1 start=1> -<li>inside an environment like <code>minipage</code>, <code>array</code>, or <code>tabular</code>. -<li>inside an explicit <code>\parbox</code>. -<li>in the scope of a <code>\centering</code>, <code>\raggedright</code>, or <code>\raggedleft</code> -declaration. The latter declarations must appear inside braces or an -environment when used in a <code>p</code>-column element. - </ol> -<li><code>*{num}{cols}</code> - Equivalent to <code>num</code> copies of -<code>cols</code>, where <code>num</code> is any positive integer and <code>cols</code> is -any list of column-specifiers, which may contain another -<code>*-expression</code>. - - </ul> - - </dl> - - <p>These commands can be used inside a <code>tabular</code> environment: - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005ccline">\cline</a>: Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005chline">\hline</a>: Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a>: Make an item spanning several columns. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cvline">\vline</a>: Draw a vertical line. -</ul> - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \cline **** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ccline"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chline">\hline</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#tabular">tabular</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.19.1 \cline</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005ccline-146"></a> -<code>\cline{i-j}</code> - - <p>The <code>\cline</code> command draws horizontal lines across the columns -specified, beginning in column <code>i</code> and ending in column <code>j</code>, -which are identified in the mandatory argument. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \hline **** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005chline"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccline">\cline</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#tabular">tabular</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.19.2 \hline</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005chline-147"></a> -The <code>\hline</code> command will draw a horizontal line the width of the -table. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and -between the rows of the table. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- ** \multicolumn * --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmulticolumn"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvline">\vline</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chline">\hline</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#tabular">tabular</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.19.3 \multicolumn</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmulticolumn-148"></a> -<code>\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\multicolumn</code> is used to make an entry that spans several -columns. The first mandatory argument, <code>cols</code>, specifies the -number of columns to span. The second mandatory argument, <code>pos</code>, -specifies the formatting of the entry; <code>c</code> for centred, <code>l</code> -for flushleft, <code>r</code> for flushright. The third mandatory argument, -<code>text</code>, specifies what text is to make up the entry. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \vline **** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cvline"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#tabular">tabular</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.19.4 \vline</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cvline-149"></a> -The <code>\vline</code> command will draw a vertical line extending the full -height and depth of its row. An <code>\hfill</code> command can be used to -move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an -@-expression. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** thebibliography **** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="thebibliography"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#theorem">theorem</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#tabular">tabular</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.20 thebibliography</h4> - -<p><a name="index-thebibliography-150"></a><a name="index-Bibliography_002c-creating-_0028manually_0029-151"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label} - \bibitem[label]{cite_key} - . - . - . - \end{thebibliography} -</pre> - <p>The <code>thebibliography</code> environment produces a bibliography or -reference list. In the <code>article</code> class, this reference list is -labelled “References”; in the <code>report</code> class, it is labelled -“Bibliography”. - - <ul> -<li><code>widest-label</code>: Text that, when printed, is approximately as wide -as the widest item label produces by the <code>\bibitem</code> commands. -</ul> - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a>: Specify a bibliography item. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005ccite">\cite</a>: Refer to a bibliography item. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cnocite">\nocite</a>: Include an item in the bibliography. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a>: Automatic generation of bibliographies. -</ul> - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \bibitem **** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cbibitem"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ccite">\cite</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.20.1 \bibitem</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cbibitem-152"></a> -<code>\bibitem[label]{cite_key}</code> - - <p>The <code>\bibitem</code> command generates an entry labelled by <code>label</code>. -If the <code>label</code> argument is missing, a number is generated as the -<code>label</code>, using the <code>enumi</code> counter. The <code>cite_key</code> is -any sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing -a comma. This command writes an entry on the <span class="file">.aux</span> file -containing <code>cite_key</code> and the item's <code>label</code>. When this -<span class="file">.aux</span> file is read by the <code>\begin{document}</code> command, the -item's <code>label</code> is associated with <code>cite_key</code>, causing the -reference to <code>cite_key</code> by a <code>\cite</code> command to produce the -associated <code>label</code>. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \cite ******* --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ccite"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnocite">\nocite</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.20.2 \cite</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005ccite-153"></a> -<code>\cite[text]{key_list}</code> - - <p>The <code>key_list</code> argument is a list of citation keys. This command -generates an in-text citation to the references associated with the keys -in <code>key_list</code> by entries on the <span class="file">.aux</span> file read by the -<code>\begin{document}</code> command. - - <p>The optional <code>text</code> argument will appear after the citation, -i.e. <code>\cite[p. 2]{knuth}</code> might produce `[Knuth, p. 2]'. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \nocite ***** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnocite"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccite">\cite</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.20.3 \nocite</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnocite-154"></a> -<code>\nocite{key_list}</code> - - <p>The <code>\nocite</code> command produces no text, but writes <code>key_list</code>, -which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the <span class="file">.aux</span> file. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- *** Using BibTeX ***** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Using-BibTeX"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnocite">\nocite</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.20.4 Using BibTeX</h5> - -<p><a name="index-Using-BibTeX-155"></a><a name="index-BibTeX_002c-using-156"></a><a name="index-Bibliography_002c-creating-_0028automatically_0029-157"></a><a name="index-_005cbibliographystyle-158"></a><a name="index-_005cbibliography-159"></a> -If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if -you need a bibliography of more than a couple of titles) to maintain -your bibliography, you don't use the <code>thebibliography</code> -environment. Instead, you include the lines - -<pre class="example"> \bibliographystyle{style} - \bibliography{bibfile} -</pre> - <p>where <code>style</code> refers to a file <code>style.bst</code>, which defines how -your citations will look. The standard styles distributed with BibTeX -are: - - <dl> -<dt><code>alpha</code><dd>Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of -publication. -<br><dt><code>plain</code><dd>Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric. -<br><dt><code>unsrt</code><dd>Like <code>plain</code>, but entries are in order of citation. -<br><dt><code>abbrv</code><dd>Like <code>plain</code>, but more compact labels. -</dl> - - <p>In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored to the -demands of various publications. - - <p>The argument to <code>\bibliography</code> refers to the file -<code>bibfile.bib</code>, which should contain your database in BibTeX -format. Only the entries referred to via <code>\cite</code> and <code>\nocite</code> -will be listed in the bibliography. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** theorem ************ --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="theorem"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#titlepage">titlepage</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.21 theorem</h4> - -<p><a name="index-theorem-160"></a><a name="index-Theorems_002c-typesetting-161"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{theorem} - theorem text - \end{theorem} -</pre> - <p>The <code>theorem</code> environment produces “Theorem x” in boldface followed -by your theorem text. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** titlepage ********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="titlepage"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#theorem">theorem</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.22 titlepage</h4> - -<p><a name="index-titlepage-162"></a><a name="index-Making-a-title-page-163"></a><a name="index-Title-pages_002c-creating-164"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{titlepage} - text - \end{titlepage} -</pre> - <p>The <code>titlepage</code> environment creates a title page, i.e. a page with no -printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page to be -numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. The -<code>\today</code> command comes in handy for title pages. -<a name="index-_005ctoday-165"></a> -Note that you can use the <code>\maketitle</code> (see <a href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>) command to -produce a standard title page. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** verbatim *********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="verbatim"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#verse">verse</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#titlepage">titlepage</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.23 verbatim</h4> - -<p><a name="index-verbatim-166"></a><a name="index-Simulating-typed-text-167"></a><a name="index-Typed-text_002c-simulating-168"></a><a name="index-Programs_002c-typesetting-169"></a><a name="index-Computer-programs_002c-typesetting-170"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{verbatim} - text - \end{verbatim} -</pre> - <p>The <code>verbatim</code> environment is a paragraph-making environment that -gets LaTeX to print exactly what you type in. It turns LaTeX into a -typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same effect that -they would on a typewriter. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cverb">\verb</a>: The macro form of the <code>verbatim</code> environment. -</ul> - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \verb ******* --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cverb"></a>Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#verbatim">verbatim</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.23.1 \verb</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cverb-171"></a><a name="index-Verbatim-text-172"></a> - - <p><code>\verb char literal_text char</code> - - <p><code>\verb*char literal_text char</code> - - <p>Typesets <code>literal_text</code> exactly as typed, including special -characters and spaces, using a typewriter (<code>\tt</code>) type style. -There may be no space between <code>\verb</code> or <code>\verb*</code> and -<code>char</code> (space is shown here only for clarity). The <code>*-form</code> -differs only in that spaces are printed - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** verse ************** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="verse"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.24 verse</h4> - -<p><a name="index-verse-173"></a><a name="index-Poetry_002c-an-environment-for-174"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{verse} - text - \end{verse} -</pre> - <p>The <code>verse</code> environment is designed for poetry, though you may find -other uses for it. - - <p>The margins are indented on the left and the right. Separate the lines -of each stanza with <code>\\</code>, and use one or more blank lines to -separate the stanzas. - -<!-- ************************************ --> -<!-- **** LEVEL2 Starts Here again. **** --> -<!-- ************************************ --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** Footnotes ********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Footnotes"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Layout">Layout</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Environments">Environments</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.7 Footnotes</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Footnotes_002c-creating-175"></a> -Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be -produced with one command, the <code>\footnote</code> command. They can also -be produced with two commands, the <code>\footnotemark</code> and the -<code>\footnotetext</code> commands. See the specific command for information -on why you would use one over the other. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cfootnote">\footnote</a>: Insert a footnote. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a>: Insert footnote mark only. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</a>: Insert footnote text only. -</ul> - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \footnote ******* --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cfootnote"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.7.1 \footnote</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cfootnote-176"></a> -<code>\footnote[number]{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\footnote</code> command places the numbered footnote <code>text</code> at -the bottom of the current page. The optional argument, <code>number</code>, -is used to change the default footnote number. This command can only be -used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you cannot use it in sectioning -commands like <code>\chapter</code>, in figures, tables or in a <code>tabular</code> -environment. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \footnotemark *** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cfootnotemark"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfootnote">\footnote</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.7.2 \footnotemark</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cfootnotemark-177"></a> -The <code>\footnotemark</code> command puts the footnote <code>number</code> in the -text. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. The text of -the footnote is supplied by the <code>\footnotetext</code> command. - - <p>This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote markers -referring to the same footnote by using - - <p><code>\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]</code> - - <p>after the first <code>\footnote</code> command. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \footnotetext *** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cfootnotetext"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.7.3 \footnotetext</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cfootnotetext-178"></a> -<code>\footnotetext[number]{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\footnotetext</code> command produces the <code>text</code> to be placed -at the bottom of the page. This command can come anywhere after the -<code>\footnotemark</code> command. The <code>\footnotetext</code> command must -appear in outer paragraph mode. - - <p>The optional argument, <code>number</code>, is used to change the default -footnote number. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ******* Lengths ********* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Lengths"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Letters">Letters</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Layout">Layout</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.8 Lengths</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Lengths_002c-defining-and-using-179"></a> -A <code>length</code> is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a -length as an argument. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cnewlength">\newlength</a>: Define a new length. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a>: Set the value of a length. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a>: Add a quantity to a length. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a>: Set a length to the depth of something. -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a>: Set a length to the height of something. -<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a>: Set a length to the width of something. -<li><a accesskey="7" href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a>: Lengths that are, like, predefined. -</ul> - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \newlength ****** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewlength"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.8.1 \newlength</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewlength-180"></a><a name="index-Lengths_002c-defining-a-new-181"></a> -<code>\newlength{\gnat}</code> - - <p>The <code>\newlength</code> command defines the mandatory argument, -<code>\gnat</code>, as a <code>length</code> command with a value of <code>0in</code>. An -error occurs if a <code>\gnat</code> command already exists. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \setlength ****** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csetlength"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewlength">\newlength</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.8.2 \setlength</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csetlength-182"></a><a name="index-Lengths_002c-setting-value-of-183"></a> -<code>\setlength{\gnat}{length}</code> - - <p>The <code>\setlength</code> command is used to set the value of a -<code>length</code> command. The <code>length</code> argument can be expressed in -any terms of length LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (<code>in</code>), -millimetres (<code>mm</code>), points (<code>pt</code>), etc. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \addtolength **** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005caddtolength"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.8.3 \addtolength</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005caddtolength-184"></a><a name="index-Lengths_002c-adding-to-185"></a> -<code>\addtolength{\gnat}{length}</code> - - <p>The <code>\addtolength</code> command increments a “length command” by the -amount specified in the <code>length</code> argument. It can be a negative -amount. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \settodepth ***** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csettodepth"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.8.4 \settodepth</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csettodepth-186"></a> -<code>\settodepth{\gnat}{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\settodepth</code> command sets the value of a <code>length</code> command -equal to the depth of the <code>text</code> argument. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \settoheight ***** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csettoheight"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.8.5 \settoheight</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csettoheight-187"></a> -<code>\settoheight{\gnat}{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\settoheight</code> command sets the value of a <code>length</code> command -equal to the height of the <code>text</code> argument. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \settowidth ***** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csettowidth"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.8.6 \settowidth</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csettowidth-188"></a> -<code>\settowidth{\gnat}{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\settowidth</code> command sets the value of a <code>length</code> command -equal to the width of the <code>text</code> argument. - -<!-- ***************************** --> -<!-- **** Predefined lengths ***** --> -<!-- ***************************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Predefined-lengths"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.8.7 Predefined lengths</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Lengths_002c-predefined-189"></a><a name="index-Predefined-lengths-190"></a> -<code>\width</code> -<a name="index-_005cwidth-191"></a> -<code>\height</code> -<a name="index-_005cheight-192"></a> -<code>\depth</code> -<a name="index-_005cdepth-193"></a> -<code>\totalheight</code> -<a name="index-_005ctotalheight-194"></a> -These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making -commands See <a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a>. They specify the natural width etc. of -the text in the box. <code>\totalheight</code> equals <code>\height</code> + -<code>\depth</code>. To make a box with the text stretched to double the -natural size, e.g., say - - <p><code>\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}</code> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ******* Letters ********* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Letters"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.9 Letters</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Letters-195"></a><a name="index-Creating-letters-196"></a> -You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and business. The -<code>letter</code> document class is designed to make a number of letters at -once, although you can make just one if you so desire. - - <p>Your <span class="file">.tex</span> source file has the same minimum commands as the other -document classes, i.e., you must have the following commands as a -minimum: - -<pre class="example"> \documentclass{letter} - \begin{document} - ... letters ... - \end{document} -</pre> - <p>Each letter is a <code>letter</code> environment, whose argument is the name -and address of the recipient. For example, you might have: - -<pre class="example"> \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St. - \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA} - ... - \end{letter} -</pre> - <p>The letter itself begins with the <code>\opening</code> command. The text of -the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input. Commands that -make no sense in a letter, like <code>\chapter</code>, do not work. The letter -closes with a <code>\closing</code> command. - - <p>After the <code>closing</code>, you can have additional material. The -<code>\cc</code> command produces the usual “cc: ...”. There's also a similar -<code>\encl</code> command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands, -use <code>\\</code> to separate the items. - - <p>These commands are used with the <code>letter</code> class: - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005caddress">\address</a>: Your return address. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005ccc">\cc</a>: Cc list. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a>: Saying goodbye. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cencl">\encl</a>: List of enclosed material. -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005clocation">\location</a>: Your organisation's address. -<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a>: Making address labels. -<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005cname">\name</a>: Your name, for the return address. -<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005copening">\opening</a>: Saying hello. -<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005cps">\ps</a>: Adding a postscript. -<li><a href="#_005csignature">\signature</a>: Your signature. -<li><a href="#_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a>: Allow page breaks. -<li><a href="#_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a>: Disallow page breaks. -<li><a href="#_005ctelephone">\telephone</a>: Your phone number. -</ul> - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- ** \address ** --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005caddress"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ccc">\cc</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Letters">Letters</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.1 \address</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005caddress-197"></a> -<code>\address{Return address}</code> - - <p>The return address, as it should appear on the letter and the envelope. -Separate lines of the address should be separated by <code>\\</code> commands. -If you do not make an <code>\address</code> declaration, then the letter will -be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard letterhead. -(See <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>, for details on your local implementation). If you -give an <code>\address</code> declaration, then the letter will be formatted -as a personal letter. - -<!-- ************* --> -<!-- ** \cc ****** --> -<!-- ************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ccc"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddress">\address</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.2 \cc</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005ccc-198"></a><a name="index-Cc-list-199"></a> -<code>\cc{Kate Schechter\\Rob McKenna}</code> - - <p>Generate a list of other persons the letter was sent to. Each name is -printed on a separate line. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \closing ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cclosing"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cencl">\encl</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccc">\cc</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.3 \closing</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cclosing-200"></a><a name="index-Letters_002c-ending-201"></a> -<code>\closing{text}</code> - - <p>The letter closes with a <code>\closing</code> command, i.e., -<pre class="example"> \closing{Best Regards,} -</pre> - <!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \encl ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cencl"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005clocation">\location</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.4 \encl</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cencl-202"></a><a name="index-Enclosed-material-203"></a> -<code>\encl{CV\\Certificates}</code> - - <p>Generate a list of enclosed material. - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- * \location ** --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005clocation"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cencl">\encl</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.5 \location</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005clocation-204"></a> -<code>\location{address}</code> - - <p>This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only appears -if the <code>firstpage</code> pagestyle is selected. - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- * \makelabels * --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmakelabels"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cname">\name</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005clocation">\location</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.6 \makelabels</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmakelabels-205"></a> -<code>\makelabels{number}</code> - - <p>If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create a sheet of -address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \name ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cname"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005copening">\opening</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.7 \name</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cname-206"></a> -<code>\name{June Davenport}</code> - - <p>Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return -address. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \opening ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005copening"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cps">\ps</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cname">\name</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.8 \opening</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005copening-207"></a><a name="index-Letters_002c-starting-208"></a> -<code>\opening{text}</code> - - <p>The letter begins with the <code>\opening</code> command. The mandatory -argument, <code>text</code>, is whatever text you wish to start your letter, -i.e., -<pre class="example"> \opening{Dear Joe,} -</pre> - <!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \ps ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cps"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csignature">\signature</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005copening">\opening</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.9 \ps</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cps-209"></a> -<code>\ps</code> - - <p>Use this command before a postscript. - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- * \signature * --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csignature"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cps">\ps</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.10 \signature</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csignature-210"></a> -<code>\signature{Harvey Swick}</code> - - <p>Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the -space for your signature. Items that should go on separate lines should -be separated by <code>\\</code> commands. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \startbreaks ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cstartbreaks"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csignature">\signature</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.11 \startbreaks</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cstartbreaks-211"></a> -<code>\startbreaks</code> - - <p>Used after a <code>\stopbreaks</code> command to allow page breaks again. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \stopbreaks ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cstopbreaks"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ctelephone">\telephone</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.12 \stopbreaks</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cstopbreaks-212"></a> -<code>\stopbreaks</code> - - <p>Inhibit page breaks until a <code>\startbreaks</code> command occurs. - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- * \telephone * --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ctelephone"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.13 \telephone</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005ctelephone-213"></a> -<code>\telephone{number}</code> - - <p>This is your telephone number. This only appears if the -<code>firstpage</code> pagestyle is selected. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- * Line & Page Breaking ** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Line-_0026-Page-Breaking"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Letters">Letters</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.10 Line & Page Breaking</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Page-Breaking-214"></a><a name="index-Line-Breaking-215"></a><a name="index-Page-Formatting-216"></a> -The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to -translate your input file into a string of glyphs and spaces. To -produce a printed document, this string must be broken into lines, and -these lines must be broken into pages. In some environments, you do the -line breaking yourself with the <code>\\</code> command, but LaTeX usually -does it for you. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005c_005c">\\</a>: Start a new line. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a>: Insert explicit hyphenation. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a>: Start a new right-hand page. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a>: Start a new page. -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a>: Enlarge the current page a bit. -<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a>: Be fussy about line breaking. -<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a>: Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word. -<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a>: Break the line. -<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a>: Break the line prematurely. -<li><a href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a>: Start a new page. -<li><a href="#_005cnolinebreak">\nolinebreak</a>: Don't break the current line. -<li><a href="#_005cnopagebreak">\nopagebreak</a>: Don't make a page break here. -<li><a href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a>: Please make a page break here. -<li><a href="#_005csloppy">\sloppy</a>: Be sloppy about line breaking. -</ul> - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ****** \\ ******** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005c_005c"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.1 \\</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005c_005c-217"></a><a name="index-New-line_002c-starting-218"></a> -<code>\\[*][extra-space]</code> - - <p>The <code>\\</code> command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an -optional argument, <code>extra-space</code>, that specifies how much extra -vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a -negative amount. - - <p>The <code>\\*</code> command is the same as the ordinary <code>\\</code> command -except that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- ** \- (hyphenation) ** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005c_005c">\\</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.2 \-</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029-219"></a><a name="index-Hyphenation_002c-forcing-220"></a> -The <code>\-</code> command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that -point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find all -correct hyphenation points. The <code>\-</code> command is used for the -exceptional cases. - - <p>Note that when you insert <code>\-</code> commands in a word, the word will -only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation -points that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen. - -<!-- ******************** --> -<!-- * \cleardoublepage * --> -<!-- ******************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ccleardoublepage"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.3 \cleardoublepage</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005ccleardoublepage-221"></a><a name="index-Starting-on-a--right_002dhand-page-222"></a> -The <code>\cleardoublepage</code> command ends the current page and causes all -figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. -In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand -(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \clearpage **** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cclearpage"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.4 \clearpage</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cclearpage-223"></a><a name="index-Flushing-a-page-224"></a> -The <code>\clearpage</code> command ends the current page and causes all -figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \enlargethispage ** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cenlargethispage"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.5 \enlargethispage</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cenlargethispage-225"></a><a name="index-Enlarge-current-page-226"></a> -<code>\enlargethispage{size}</code> - - <p><code>\enlargethispage*{size}</code> - - <p>Enlarge the <code>\textheight</code> for the current page by the specified -amount; e.g. <code>\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}</code> will allow one -additional line. - - <p>The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as -much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit -<code>\pagebreak</code>. - -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cfussy"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.6 \fussy</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cfussy-227"></a> -<code>\fussy</code> - - <p>This declaration (which is the default) makes TeX more fussy about line -breaking. This can avoids too much space between words, but may produce -overfull boxes. - - <p>This command cancels the effect of a previous <code>\sloppy</code> command. <a href="#_005csloppy">\sloppy</a> - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \hyphenation ** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005chyphenation"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.7 \hyphenation</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005chyphenation-228"></a><a name="index-Hyphenation_002c-defining-229"></a> -<code>\hyphenation{words}</code> - - <p>The <code>\hyphenation</code> command declares allowed hyphenation points, -where <code>words</code> is a list of words, separated by spaces, in which -each hyphenation point is indicated by a <code>-</code> character. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \linebreak **** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005clinebreak"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.8 \linebreak</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005clinebreak-230"></a><a name="index-Line-breaks-231"></a> -<code>\linebreak[number]</code> - - <p>The <code>\linebreak</code> command tells LaTeX to break the current line at -the point of the command. With the optional argument, <code>number</code>, -you can convert the <code>\linebreak</code> command from a demand to a -request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the -number, the more insistent the request is. - - <p>The <code>\linebreak</code> command causes LaTeX to stretch the line so it -extends to the right margin. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \newline ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewline"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.9 \newline</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewline-232"></a><a name="index-New-line_002c-starting-_0028paragraph-mode_0029-233"></a> -The <code>\newline</code> command breaks the line right where it is. It can -only be used in paragraph mode. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \newpage ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewpage"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnolinebreak">\nolinebreak</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.10 \newpage</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewpage-234"></a><a name="index-New-Page-235"></a> -The <code>\newpage</code> command ends the current page. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- * \nolinebreak *** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnolinebreak"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnopagebreak">\nopagebreak</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.11 \nolinebreak</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnolinebreak-236"></a> -<code>\nolinebreak[number]</code> - - <p>The <code>\nolinebreak</code> command prevents LaTeX from breaking the current -line at the point of the command. With the optional argument, -<code>number</code>, you can convert the <code>\nolinebreak</code> command from a -demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The -higher the number, the more insistent the request is. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \nopagebreak ** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnopagebreak"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnolinebreak">\nolinebreak</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.12 \nopagebreak</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnopagebreak-237"></a> -<code>\nopagebreak[number]</code> - - <p>The <code>\nopagebreak</code> command prevents LaTeX from breaking the current -page at the point of the command. With the optional argument, -<code>number</code>, you can convert the <code>\nopagebreak</code> command from a -demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The -higher the number, the more insistent the request is. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \pagebreak **** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cpagebreak"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csloppy">\sloppy</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnopagebreak">\nopagebreak</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.13 \pagebreak</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cpagebreak-238"></a><a name="index-Page-break_002c-forcing-239"></a> -<code>\pagebreak[number]</code> - - <p>The <code>\pagebreak</code> command tells LaTeX to break the current page at -the point of the command. With the optional argument, <code>number</code>, -you can convert the <code>\pagebreak</code> command from a demand to a -request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the -number, the more insistent the request is. - -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csloppy"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.14 \sloppy</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csloppy-240"></a> -<code>\sloppy</code> - - <p>This declaration makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. This can -prevent overfull boxes, but may leave too much space between words. - - <p>Lasts until a <code>\fussy</code> command is issued. <a href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a>. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- *** Making Paragraphs *** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Making-Paragraphs"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.11 Making Paragraphs</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Making-paragraphs-241"></a><a name="index-Paragraphs-242"></a> -A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines — lines not -containing even a <code>%</code>. A blank line should not appear where a new -paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of -a sectioning command. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cindent">\indent</a>: Indent this paragraph. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a>: Do not indent this paragraph. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cpar">\par</a>: Another way of writing a blank line. -</ul> - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \indent ******* --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cindent"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.11.1 \indent</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cindent-243"></a><a name="index-Indent_002c-forcing-244"></a> -<code>\indent</code> - - <p>This produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of the -paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph indentation where it -would otherwise be suppressed. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \noindent ***** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnoindent"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpar">\par</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cindent">\indent</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.11.2 \noindent</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnoindent-245"></a><a name="index-Indent_002c-suppressing-246"></a> -<code>\noindent</code> - - <p>When used at the beginning of the paragraph, it suppresses the paragraph -indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \par ********** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cpar"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.11.3 \par</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cpar-247"></a><a name="index-Paragraph_002c-starting-a-new-248"></a> -Equivalent to a blank line; often used to make command or environment -definitions easier to read. - -<!-- ******************** --> -<!-- *** Margin Notes *** --> -<!-- ******************** --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Margin-Notes"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.12 Margin Notes</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Margin-Notes-249"></a><a name="index-Notes-in-the-margin-250"></a><a name="index-Remarks-in-the-margin-251"></a> -The command <code>\marginpar[left]{right}</code> creates a note in the margin. -The first line will be at the same height as the line in the text where -the <code>\marginpar</code> occurs. - - <p>When you only specify the mandatory argument <code>right</code>, the text will -be placed - - <ul> -<li>in the right margin for one-sided layout -<li>in the outside margin for two-sided layout -<li>in the nearest margin for two-column layout. -</ul> - - <p>By issuing the command <code>\reversemarginpar</code>, you can force the marginal -notes to go into the opposite (inside) margin. - - <p>When you specify both arguments, <code>left</code> is used for the left -margin, and <code>right</code> is used for the right margin. - - <p>The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable -hyphenation by prefixing the first word with a <code>\hspace{0pt}</code> -command. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** Math Formulae ****** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Math-Formulae"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Modes">Modes</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.13 Math Formulae</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Math-Formulae-252"></a><a name="index-Formulae_002c-maths-253"></a><a name="index-Math-mode_002c-entering-254"></a><a name="index-_005c_0028-255"></a><a name="index-_005c_0029-256"></a><a name="index-_005c_005b-257"></a><a name="index-_005c_005d-258"></a><a name="index-_0024-259"></a> -There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode: - - <dl> -<dt><code>math</code><dd>For Formulae that appear right in the text. -<br><dt><code>displaymath</code><dd>For Formulae that appear on their own line. -<br><dt><code>equation</code><dd>The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation -number in the right margin. -</dl> - - <p>The <code>math</code> environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, -but the <code>displaymath</code> and <code>equation</code> environments can be used -only in paragraph mode. The <code>math</code> and <code>displaymath</code> -environments are used so often that they have the following short forms: - -<pre class="example"> \(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math} - - \[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath} -</pre> - <p>In fact, the <code>math</code> environment is so common that it has an even -shorter form: - -<pre class="example"> $ ... $ instead of \(...\) -</pre> - <p><a name="index-exponent-260"></a> - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts & Superscripts</a>: Also known as exponent or index. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a>: Various mathematical squiggles. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a>: Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a>: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else. -</ul> - -<!-- ***************************** --> -<!-- * Subscripts & Superscripts * --> -<!-- ***************************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.13.1 Subscripts & Superscripts</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Superscript-261"></a><a name="index-Subscript-262"></a><a name="index-_005f-263"></a><a name="index-_005e-264"></a> -To get an expression <i>exp</i> to appear as a subscript, you just type -<code>_{</code><i>exp</i><code>}</code>. To get <i>exp</i> to appear as a superscript, you type -<code>^{</code><i>exp</i><code>}</code>. LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of -that stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing when -something has both a subscript and a superscript. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** Math Symbols ** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Math-Symbols"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts & Superscripts</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.13.2 Math Symbols</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Maths-symbols-265"></a><a name="index-Symbols-266"></a><a name="index-Greek-letters-267"></a> - -<!-- ************************ --> -<!-- * Spacing in Math Mode * --> -<!-- ************************ --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Spacing-in-Math-Mode"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.13.3 Spacing in Math Mode</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Spacing_002c-within-Math-mode-268"></a><a name="index-Math-mode_002c-spacing-269"></a> - - <p>In a <code>math</code> environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and puts -in the spacing that it thinks is best. LaTeX formats mathematics the -way it's done in mathematics texts. If you want different spacing, -LaTeX provides the following four commands for use in math mode: - - <p><a name="index-_005c_003b-270"></a><a name="index-_005cCOLON-271"></a><a name="index-_005c_002c-272"></a><a name="index-_005c_0021-273"></a> - <ol type=1 start=1> -<li><code>\;</code> - a thick space -<li><code>\:</code> - a medium space -<li><code>\,</code> - a thin space -<li><code>\!</code> - a negative thin space - </ol> - -<!-- ******************* --> -<!-- * Math Miscellany * --> -<!-- ******************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Math-Miscellany"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.13.4 Math Miscellany</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Maths-Miscellany-274"></a> - <dl> -<dt><code>\cdots</code><dd><a name="index-_005ccdots-275"></a>Produces a horizontal ellipsis where the dots are raised to the centre -of the line. - - <br><dt><code>\ddots</code><dd><a name="index-_005cddots-276"></a>Produces a diagonal ellipsis. - - <br><dt><code>\frac{num}{den}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfrac-277"></a>Produces the fraction <code>num</code> divided by <code>den</code>. - - <br><dt><code>\ldots</code><dd><a name="index-_005cldots-278"></a>Produces an ellipsis. This command works in -any mode, not just math mode. - - <br><dt><code>\overbrace{text}</code><dd><a name="index-_005coverbrace-279"></a>Generates a brace over text. - - <br><dt><code>\overline{text}</code><dd><a name="index-_005coverline-280"></a>Causes the argument text to be overlined. - - <br><dt><code>\sqrt[root]{arg}</code><dd><a name="index-_005csqrt-281"></a>Produces the square root of its argument. The -optional argument, <code>root</code>, determines what root to produce, i.e., -the cube root of <code>x+y</code> would be typed as <code>$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$</code>. - - <br><dt><code>\underbrace{text}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cunderbrace-282"></a>Generates text with a brace underneath. - - <br><dt><code>\underline{text}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cunderline-283"></a>Causes the argument text to be underlined. -This command can also be used in paragraph and LR modes. - - <br><dt><code>\vdots</code><dd><a name="index-_005cvdots-284"></a>Produces a vertical ellipsis. - - </dl> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ******* Modes *********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Modes"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.14 Modes</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Modes-285"></a><a name="index-Paragraph-mode-286"></a><a name="index-Math-mode-287"></a><a name="index-Left_002dto_002dright-mode-288"></a><a name="index-LR-mode-289"></a> - - <p>When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three -modes: - - <ul> -<li>Paragraph mode -<li>Math mode -<li>Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short -</ul> - - <p>LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a -different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. -Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when -LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands. - - <p>“Paragraph mode” is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is in when -processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your text into -lines and breaks the lines into pages. LaTeX is in “math mode” when -it's generating a mathematical formula. In “LR mode”, as in paragraph -mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of -words with spaces between them. However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX -keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. -Even if you put a hundred words into an <code>\mbox</code>, LaTeX would keep -typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then -complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line. - - <p>LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an <code>\mbox</code> -command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for -example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box. -There are also several text-producing commands and environments for -making a box that put LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box make by one of -these commands or environments will be called a <code>parbox</code>. When -LaTeX is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in -“inner paragraph mode”. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out -in, is called “outer paragraph mode”. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ***** Page Styles ******* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Page-Styles"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Modes">Modes</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.15 Page Styles</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Styles_002c-page-290"></a><a name="index-Page-styles-291"></a> -The <code>\documentclass</code> command determines the size and position of -the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>: Generate a title page. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a>: Set the style used for page numbers. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>: Change the headings/footings style. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cthispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a>: Change the headings/footings style for this page. -</ul> - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \maketitle **** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmaketitle"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.1 \maketitle</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Title-making-292"></a><a name="index-_005cmaketitle-293"></a> -<code>\maketitle</code> - - <p>The <code>\maketitle</code> command generates a title on a separate title page -- except in the <code>article</code> class, where the title normally goes at -the top of the first page. Information used to produce the title is -obtained from the following declarations: - - <p>See <a href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>, for the commands to give the information. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cauthor">\author</a>: Who wrote this stuff? -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cdate">\date</a>: The date the document was created. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a>: A special form of footnote. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005ctitle">\title</a>: How to set the document title. -</ul> - -<!-- *********** --> -<!-- * \author * --> -<!-- *********** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cauthor"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cdate">\date</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.2 \author</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cauthor-294"></a><a name="index-Author_002c-for-titlepage-295"></a> -<code>\author{names}</code> - - <p>The <code>\author</code> command declares the author(s), where <code>names</code> is -a list of authors separated by <code>\and</code> commands. Use <code>\\</code> to -separate lines within a single author's entry – for example, to give -the author's institution or address. - -<!-- *********** --> -<!-- ** \date ** --> -<!-- *********** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cdate"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cauthor">\author</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.3 \date</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cdate-296"></a><a name="index-Date_002c-for-titlepage-297"></a> -<code>\date{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\date</code> command declares <i>text</i> to be the document's date. With -no <code>\date</code> command, the current date is used. - -<!-- *********** --> -<!-- * \thanks * --> -<!-- *********** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cthanks"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ctitle">\title</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cdate">\date</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.4 \thanks</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cthanks-298"></a><a name="index-Thanks_002c-for-titlepage-299"></a> -<code>\thanks{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\thanks</code> command produces a <code>\footnote</code> to the title. - -<!-- *********** --> -<!-- * \title ** --> -<!-- *********** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ctitle"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.5 \title</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005ctitle-300"></a><a name="index-Title_002c-for-titlepage-301"></a> -<code>\title{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\title</code> command declares <code>text</code> to be the title. Use -<code>\\</code> to tell LaTeX where to start a new line in a long title. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- * \pagenumbering * --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cpagenumbering"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.6 \pagenumbering</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cpagenumbering-302"></a><a name="index-Page-numbering-303"></a> -<code>\pagenumbering{num_style}</code> - - <p>Specifies the style of page numbers. Possible values of <code>num_style</code> are: - - <ul> -<li><code>arabic</code> - Arabic numerals -<li><code>roman</code> - Lowercase Roman numerals -<li><code>Roman</code> - Uppercase Roman numerals -<li><code>alph</code> - Lowercase letters -<li><code>Alph</code> - Uppercase letters -</ul> - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \pagestyle **** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cpagestyle"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cthispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.7 \pagestyle</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cpagestyle-304"></a> -<code>\pagestyle{option}</code> - - <p>The <code>\pagestyle</code> command changes the style from the current page on -throughout the remainder of your document. - - <p>The valid options are: - - <ul> -<li><code>plain</code> - Just a plain page number. -<li><code>empty</code> - Produces empty heads and feet - no page numbers. -<li><code>headings</code> - Puts running headings on each page. The document -style specifies what goes in the headings. -<li><code>myheadings</code> - You specify what is to go in the heading with the -<code>\markboth</code> or the <code>\markright</code> commands. -</ul> - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cmarkboth">\markboth</a>: Set left and right headings. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cmarkright">\markright</a>: Set right heading only. -</ul> - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \markboth ** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmarkboth"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmarkright">\markright</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.8 \markboth</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmarkboth-305"></a> -<pre class="example"> \markboth{left head}{right head} -</pre> - <p>The <code>\markboth</code> command is used in -conjunction with the page style <code>myheadings</code> for setting -both the left and the right heading. You should note that a “left-hand -heading” is generated by the last <code>\markboth</code> command before the -end of the page, while a “right-hand heading” is generated by the first -<code>\markboth</code> or <code>\markright</code> that comes on the page if there is -one, otherwise by the last one before the page. - -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- ** \markright ** --> -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmarkright"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmarkboth">\markboth</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.9 \markright</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmarkright-306"></a> -<pre class="example"> \markright{right head} -</pre> - <p>The <code>\markright</code> command is used in conjunction with the page style -<code>myheadings</code> for setting the right heading, leaving the left -heading unchanged. You should note that a “left-hand heading” is -generated by the last <code>\markboth</code> command before the end of the -page, while a “right-hand heading” is generated by the first -<code>\markboth</code> or <code>\markright</code> that comes on the page if there is -one, otherwise by the last one before the page. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- * \thispagestyle * --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cthispagestyle"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.10 \thispagestyle</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cthispagestyle-307"></a> -<code>\thispagestyle{option}</code> - - <p>The <code>\thispagestyle</code> command works in the same manner as the -<code>\pagestyle</code> command except that it changes the style for the -current page only. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ***** Sectioning ******** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Sectioning"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.16 Sectioning</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Sectioning-308"></a><a name="index-_005cchapter-309"></a><a name="index-_005csubsubsection-310"></a><a name="index-_005csubsection-311"></a><a name="index-_005cparagraph-312"></a><a name="index-_005csubparagraph-313"></a> -Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units. - - <ul> -<li><code>\part</code> -<li><code>\chapter</code> (report and book class only) -<li><code>\section</code> -<li><code>\subsection</code> -<li><code>\subsubsection</code> -<li><code>\paragraph</code> -<li><code>\subparagraph</code> -</ul> - - <p>All sectioning commands take the same general form, i.e., - - <p><code>\chapter[optional]{title}</code> - - <p>In addition to providing the heading in the text, the mandatory argument -of the sectioning command can appear in two other places: - - <ol type=1 start=1> -<li>The table of contents -<li>The running head at the top of the page - </ol> - - <p>You may not want the same thing to appear in these other two places as -appears in the text heading. To handle this situation, the sectioning -commands have an <code>optional</code> argument that provides the text for -these other two purposes. - - <p>All sectioning commands have <code>*</code>-forms that print a <i>title</i>, -but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the table of -contents. - - <p><a name="index-_005cappendix-314"></a><a name="index-Appendix_002c-creating-315"></a> -<code>\appendix</code> - - <p>The <code>\appendix</code> command changes the way sectional units are -numbered. The <code>\appendix</code> command generates no text and does not -affect the numbering of parts. -The normal use of this command is something like - -<pre class="example"> \chapter{The First Chapter} - ... - \appendix - \chapter{The First Appendix} -</pre> - <!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** Spaces & Boxes ***** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Spaces-_0026-Boxes"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.17 Spaces & Boxes</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Spaces-316"></a><a name="index-Boxes-317"></a> -All the predefined length parameters (see <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a>) can be -used in the arguments of the box-making commands. - -</li></ul> -<p>Horizontal space -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cdotfill">\dotfill</a>: Stretchable horizontal dots. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005chfill">\hfill</a>: Stretchable horizontal space. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005chrulefill">\hrulefill</a>: Stretchable horizontal rule. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005chspace">\hspace</a>: Fixed horizontal space. -Vertical space -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a>: Fixed vertical space. -<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005cbigskip">\bigskip</a>: Fixed vertical space. -<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005cmedskip">\medskip</a>: Fixed vertical space. -<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005csmallskip">\smallskip</a>: Fixed vertical space. -<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005cvfill">\vfill</a>: Stretchable vertical space. -<li><a href="#_005cvspace">\vspace</a>: Fixed vertical space. -Boxes -<li><a href="#_005cfbox">\fbox</a>: Framebox. -<li><a href="#_005cframebox">\framebox</a>: Framebox, adjustable position. -<li><a href="#lrbox">lrbox</a>: An environment like \sbox. -<li><a href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>: Box, adjustable position. -<li><a href="#_005cmbox">\mbox</a>: Box. -<li><a href="#_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a>: Declare a name for saving a box. -<li><a href="#_005cparbox">\parbox</a>: Box with text in paragraph mode. -<li><a href="#_005craisebox">\raisebox</a>: Raise or lower text. -<li><a href="#_005crule">\rule</a>: Lines and squares. -<li><a href="#_005csavebox">\savebox</a>: Like \makebox, but save the text for later use. -<li><a href="#_005csbox">\sbox</a>: Like \mbox, but save the text for later use. -<li><a href="#_005cusebox">\usebox</a>: Print saved text. -</ul> - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \dotfill *** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cdotfill"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chfill">\hfill</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.1 \dotfill</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cdotfill-318"></a> -The <code>\dotfill</code> command produces a “rubber length” that produces dots -instead of just spaces. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \hfill ***** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005chfill"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chrulefill">\hrulefill</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cdotfill">\dotfill</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.2 \hfill</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005chfill-319"></a> -The <code>\hfill</code> fill command produces a “rubber length” which can -stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with spaces. - -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- ** \hrulefill ** --> -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005chrulefill"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chspace">\hspace</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chfill">\hfill</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.3 \hrulefill</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005chrulefill-320"></a> -The <code>\hrulefill</code> fill command produces a “rubber length” which can -stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal -rule. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \hspace **** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005chspace"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chrulefill">\hrulefill</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.4 \hspace</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005chspace-321"></a> -<code>\hspace[*]{length}</code> - - <p>The <code>\hspace</code> command adds horizontal space. The length of the -space can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e., -points, inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space -with an <code>\hspace</code> command. Adding negative space is like -backspacing. - - <p>LaTeX removes horizontal space that comes at the end of a line. If you -don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional <code>*</code> -argument. Then the space is never removed. - -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- ** \addvspace ** --> -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005caddvspace"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cbigskip">\bigskip</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chspace">\hspace</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.5 \addvspace</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005caddvspace-322"></a><a name="index-Vertical-space_002c-inserting-323"></a><a name="index-Space_002c-inserting-vertical-324"></a> -<code>\addvspace{length}</code> - - <p>The <code>\addvspace</code> command normally adds a vertical space of height -length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same -point in the output by a previous <code>\addvspace</code> command, then this -command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length -of the total vertical space equal to <code>length</code>. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \bigskip *** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cbigskip"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmedskip">\medskip</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.6 \bigskip</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cbigskip-325"></a> -The <code>\bigskip</code> command is equivalent to -<code>\vspace{bigskipamount}</code> where <code>bigskipamount</code> is determined -by the document class. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \medskip *** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmedskip"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csmallskip">\smallskip</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cbigskip">\bigskip</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.7 \medskip</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmedskip-326"></a> -The <code>\medskip</code> command is equivalent to -<code>\vspace{medskipamount}</code> where <code>medskipamount</code> is determined -by the document class. - -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- ** \smallskip ** --> -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csmallskip"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvfill">\vfill</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmedskip">\medskip</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.8 \smallskip</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csmallskip-327"></a> -<code>\smallskip</code> - - <p>The <code>\smallskip</code> command is equivalent to -<code>\vspace{smallskipamount}</code> where <code>smallskipamount</code> is -determined by the document class. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \vfill ***** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cvfill"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvspace">\vspace</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csmallskip">\smallskip</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.9 \vfill</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cvfill-328"></a> -The <code>\vfill</code> fill command produces a rubber length which can -stretch or shrink vertically. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \vspace **** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cvspace"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfbox">\fbox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cvfill">\vfill</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.10 \vspace</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cvspace-329"></a> -<code>\vspace[*]{length}</code> - - <p>The <code>\vspace</code> command adds vertical space. The length of the space -can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e., points, -inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space with an -<code>\vspace</code> command. - - <p>LaTeX removes vertical space that comes at the end of a page. If you -don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional <code>*</code> -argument. Then the space is never removed. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \fbox ****** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cfbox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cframebox">\framebox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cvspace">\vspace</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.11 \fbox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cfbox-330"></a> -<code>\fbox{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\fbox</code> command is exactly the same as the <code>\mbox</code> -command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that -it creates. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \framebox ** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cframebox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#lrbox">lrbox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfbox">\fbox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.12 \framebox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cframebox-331"></a> -<code>\framebox[width][position]{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\framebox</code> command is exactly the same as the <code>\makebox</code> -command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that -it creates. - - <p>The framebox command produces a rule of thickness <code>\fboxrule</code>, and -leaves a space <code>\fboxsep</code> between the rule and the contents of the -box. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** lrbox **** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="lrbox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cframebox">\framebox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.13 lrbox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-lrbox-332"></a> -<code>\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}</code> - - <p>This is the environment form of <code>\sbox</code>. - - <p>The text inside the environment is saved in the box <code>cmd</code>, which -must have been declared with <code>\newsavebox</code>. - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- ** \makebox ** --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmakebox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmbox">\mbox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#lrbox">lrbox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.14 \makebox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmakebox-333"></a> -<code>\makebox[width][position]{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\makebox</code> command creates a box just wide enough to contain -the <code>text</code> specified. The width of the box is specified by the -optional <code>width</code> argument. The position of the text within the box -is determined by the optional <code>position</code> argument. - - <ul> -<li><code>c</code> — centred (default) -<li><code>l</code> — flushleft -<li><code>r</code> — flushright -<li><code>s</code> — stretch from left to right margin. The text must contain -stretchable space for this to work. -</ul> - - <p>See <a href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \mbox ****** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmbox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.15 \mbox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmbox-334"></a> -<code>\mbox{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\mbox</code> command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text -created by its argument. - - <p>Use this command to prevent text from being split across lines. - -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- ** \newsavebox * --> -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewsavebox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cparbox">\parbox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmbox">\mbox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.16 \newsavebox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewsavebox-335"></a> -<code>\newsavebox{cmd}</code> - - <p>Declares <code>cmd</code>, which must be a command name that is not already -defined, to be a bin for saving boxes. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \parbox **** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cparbox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005craisebox">\raisebox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.17 \parbox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cparbox-336"></a> -<code>\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}</code> - - <p>A <code>parbox</code> is a box whose contents are created in <code>paragraph</code> -mode. The <code>\parbox</code> has two mandatory arguments: - - <ul> -<li><code>width</code> - specifies the width of the parbox, and -<li><code>text</code> - the text that goes inside the parbox. -</ul> - - <p>LaTeX will position a <code>parbox</code> so its centre lines up with the centre of -the text line. The optional <i>position</i> argument allows you -to line up either the top or bottom line in the parbox (default is top). - - <p>If the <i>height</i> argument is not given, the box will have the natural -height of the text. - - <p>The <i>inner-pos</i> argument controls the placement of the text inside the -box. If it is not specified, <i>position</i> is used. - - <ul> -<li><code>t</code> — text is placed at the top of the box. -<li><code>c</code> — text is centred in the box. -<li><code>b</code> — text is placed at the bottom of the box. -<li><code>s</code> — stretch vertically. The text must contain -vertically stretchable space for this to work. -</ul> - - <p>A <code>\parbox</code> command is used for a parbox containing a small piece -of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use -any of the paragraph-making environments inside a <code>\parbox</code> -argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones containing a -paragraph-making environment, you should use a <code>minipage</code> -environment See <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \raisebox ** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005craisebox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005crule">\rule</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cparbox">\parbox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.18 \raisebox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005craisebox-337"></a> -<code>\raisebox{distance}[extend-above][extend-below]{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\raisebox</code> command is used to raise or lower text. The first -mandatory argument specifies how high the text is to be raised (or -lowered if it is a negative amount). The text itself is processed in -<code>LR mode</code>. - - <p>Sometimes it's useful to make LaTeX think something has a different -size than it really does - or a different size than LaTeX would -normally think it has. The <code>\raisebox</code> command lets you tell -LaTeX how tall it is. - - <p>The first optional argument, <code>extend-above</code>, makes LaTeX think -that the text extends above the line by the amount specified. The -second optional argument, <code>extend-below</code>, makes LaTeX think that -the text extends below the line by the amount specified. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \rule ****** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005crule"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csavebox">\savebox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005craisebox">\raisebox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.19 \rule</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005crule-338"></a> -<code>\rule[raise-height]{width}{thickness}</code> - - <p>The <code>\rule</code> command is used to produce horizontal lines. The -arguments are defined as follows: - - <ul> -<li><code>raise-height</code> - specifies how high to raise the rule (optional) -<li><code>width</code> - specifies the length of the rule (mandatory) -<li><code>thickness</code> - specifies the thickness of the rule (mandatory) -</ul> - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \savebox *** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csavebox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csbox">\sbox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005crule">\rule</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.20 \savebox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csavebox-339"></a> -<pre class="example"> \savebox{cmd}[width][pos]{text} -</pre> - <p>This command typeset <code>text</code> in a box just as for <code>\makebox</code>. -However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in bin -<code>cmd</code>, which must have been declared with <code>\newsavebox</code>. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \sbox ****** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csbox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cusebox">\usebox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csavebox">\savebox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.21 \sbox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csbox-340"></a> -<code>\sbox{text}</code> - - <p>This commands typeset <code>text</code> in a box just as for <code>\mbox</code>. -However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in bin -<code>cmd</code>, which must have been declared with <code>\newsavebox</code>. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \usebox **** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cusebox"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csbox">\sbox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.22 \usebox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cusebox-341"></a> -<code>\usebox{cmd}</code> - - <p>Prints the box most recently saved in bin <code>cmd</code> by a -<code>\savebox</code> command. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ** Special Characters *** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Special-Characters"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.18 Special Characters</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Special-Characters-342"></a><a name="index-Characters_002c-special-343"></a><a name="index-Reserved-Characters-344"></a><a name="index-Characters_002c-reserved-345"></a> -The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called -“special printing characters”, or simply “special characters”. - -<pre class="example"> # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { } -</pre> - <p>Whenever you put one of these special characters into your file, you are -doing something special. If you simply want the character to be printed -just as any other letter, include a <code>\</code> in front of the character. -For example, <code>\$</code> will produce <code>$</code> in your output. - - <p>One exception to this rule is the <code>\</code> itself because <code>\\</code> has -its own special meaning. A <code>\</code> is produced by typing -<code>$\backslash$</code> in your file. - - <p>Also, <code>\~</code> means `place a tilde accent over the following letter', -so you will probably want to use <code>\verb</code> instead. - - <p><a name="index-_005cbackslash-346"></a><a name="index-_005csymbol-347"></a><a name="index-Accessing-any-character-of-a-font-348"></a> -In addition, you can access any character of a font once you know its -number by using the <code>\symbol</code> command. For example, the character -used for displaying spaces in the <code>\verb*</code> command has the code -decimal 32, so it can be typed as <code>\symbol{32}</code>. - - <p>You can also specify octal numbers with <code>'</code> or hexadecimal numbers -with <code>"</code>, so the previous example could also be written as -<code>\symbol{'40}</code> or <code>\symbol{"20}</code>. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ** Splitting the Input ** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Splitting-the-Input"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting & Ending</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.19 Splitting the Input</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Splitting-the-input-file-349"></a><a name="index-Input-file_002c-splitting-350"></a> - - <p>A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole -input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into -several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use, -there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type -when you run LaTeX. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cinclude">\include</a>: Conditionally include a file. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a>: Determine which files are included. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cinput">\input</a>: Unconditionally include a file. -</ul> - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \include *** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cinclude"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.19.1 \include</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cinclude-351"></a> -<code>\include{file}</code> - - <p>The <code>\include</code> command is used in conjunction with the -<code>\includeonly</code> command for selective inclusion of files. The -<code>file</code> argument is the first name of a file, denoting -<span class="file">file.tex</span>. If <code>file</code> is one the file names in the file list -of the <code>\includeonly</code> command or if there is no <code>\includeonly</code> -command, the <code>\include</code> command is equivalent to - -<pre class="example"> \clearpage \input{file} \clearpage -</pre> - <p>except that if the file <span class="file">file.tex</span> does not exist, then a warning -message rather than an error is produced. If the file is not in the -file list, the <code>\include</code> command is equivalent to <code>\clearpage</code>. - - <p>The <code>\include</code> command may not appear in the preamble or in a file -read by another <code>\include</code> command. - -<!-- ******************* --> -<!-- ** \includeonly *** --> -<!-- ******************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cincludeonly"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cinput">\input</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cinclude">\include</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.19.2 \includeonly</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cincludeonly-352"></a> -<code>\includeonly{</code><i>file_list</i><code>}</code> - - <p>The <code>\includeonly</code> command controls which files will be read in by -an <code>\include</code> command. <i>file_list</i> should be a comma-separated -list of filenames. Each filename must match exactly a filename specified -in a <code>\include</code> command. This command can only appear in the -preamble. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \input ***** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cinput"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.19.3 \input</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cinput-353"></a> -<code>\input{file}</code> - - <p>The <code>\input</code> command causes the indicated <code>file</code> to be read and -processed, exactly as if its contents had been inserted in the current -file at that point. The file name may be a complete file name with -extension or just a first name, in which case the file <span class="file">file.tex</span> -is used. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- *** Starting & Ending *** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Starting-_0026-Ending"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.20 Starting & Ending</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Starting-_0026-Ending-354"></a><a name="index-Ending-_0026-Starting-355"></a> -Your input file must contain the following commands as a minimum: - -<pre class="example"> \documentclass{class} - \begin{document} - ... your text goes here ... - \end{document} -</pre> - <p>where the <code>class</code> selected is one of the valid classes for LaTeX. -See <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a>, (and see <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>), for details of the -various document classes available locally. - - <p>You may include other LaTeX commands between the <code>\documentclass</code> -and the <code>\begin{document}</code> commands (i.e., in the `preamble'). - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- *** Table of Contents *** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Table-of-Contents"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting & Ending</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.21 Table of Contents</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Table-of-Contents_002c-creating-356"></a> - - <p>A table of contents is produced with the -<code>\tableofcontents</code> -<a name="index-_005ctableofcontents-357"></a>command. You put the command right where you want the table of contents -to go; LaTeX does the rest for you. It produces a heading, but it does -not automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the -table of contents, include a <code>\newpage</code> command after the -<code>\tableofcontents</code> command. - - <p>There are similar commands -<code>\listoffigures</code> -<a name="index-_005clistoffigures-358"></a>and -<code>\listoftables</code> -<a name="index-_005clistoftables-359"></a> for producing a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. -Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents. - - <p>NOTE: If you want any of these items to be generated, you cannot have -the -<code>\nofiles</code> -<a name="index-_005cnofiles-360"></a>command in your document. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a>: Add an entry to table of contents etc. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005caddtocontents">\addtocontents</a>: Add text directly to table of contents file etc. -</ul> - -<!-- ******************** --> -<!-- * \addcontentsline * --> -<!-- ******************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005caddcontentsline"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005caddtocontents">\addtocontents</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.21.1 \addcontentsline</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005caddcontentsline-361"></a> -<code>\addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}</code> - - <p>The <code>\addcontentsline</code> command adds an entry to the specified list -or table where: - - <ul> -<li><code>file</code> is the extension of the file on which information is to be -written: <code>toc</code> (table of contents), <code>lof</code> (list of figures), -or <code>lot</code> (list of tables). -<li><code>sec_unit</code> controls the formatting of the entry. It should be one -of the following, depending upon the value of the file argument: - <ol type=1 start=1> -<li><code>toc</code> — the name of the sectional unit, such as part or subsection. -<li><code>lof</code> — figure -<li><code>lot</code> — table - </ol> -<li><code>entry</code> is the text of the entry. -</ul> - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- * \addtocontents * --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005caddtocontents"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.21.2 \addtocontents</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005caddtocontents-362"></a> -<code>\addtocontents{file}{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\addtocontents</code> command adds text (or formatting commands) directly -to the file that generates the table of contents or list of figures or -tables. - - <ul> -<li><code>file</code> is the extension of the file on which information is to be -written: <code>toc</code> (table of contents), <code>lof</code> (list of figures), -or <code>lot</code> (list of tables). -<li><code>text</code> is the information to be written. -</ul> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- * Terminal Input/Output * --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Terminal-Input_002fOutput"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.22 Terminal Input/Output</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Input_002fOutput-363"></a><a name="index-Terminal-Input_002fOutput-364"></a> - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005ctypein">\typein</a>: Read text from the terminal. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005ctypeout">\typeout</a>: Write text to the terminal. -</ul> - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- * \typein **** --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ctypein"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ctypeout">\typeout</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.22.1 \typein</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005ctypein-365"></a> -<code>\typein[cmd]{msg}</code> - - <p>Prints <code>msg</code> on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and wait for -you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the <code>cmd</code> -argument is missing, the typed input is processed as if it had been -included in the input file in place of the <code>\typein</code> command. If -the <code>cmd</code> argument is present, it must be a command name. This -command name is then defined or redefined to be the typed input. - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- * \typeout *** --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ctypeout"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ctypein">\typein</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.22.2 \typeout</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005ctypeout-366"></a> -<code>\typeout{msg}</code> - - <p>Prints <code>msg</code> on the terminal and in the <code>log</code> file. Commands -in <code>msg</code> that are defined with <code>\newcommand</code> or -<code>\renewcommand</code> are replaced by their definitions before being -printed. - - <p>LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as -a single space and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to -<code>msg</code>. A <code>\space</code> command in <code>msg</code> causes a single space -to be printed. A <code>^^J</code> in <code>msg</code> prints a newline. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ***** Typefaces ********* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Typefaces"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.23 Typefaces</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Typefaces-367"></a><a name="index-Fonts-368"></a> -The <code>typeface</code> is specified by giving the “size” and “style”. A -typeface is also called a “font”. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#Styles">Styles</a>: Select roman, italics etc. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#Sizes">Sizes</a>: Select point size. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a>: Commands for wizards. -</ul> - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- ** Styles **** --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Styles"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Sizes">Sizes</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.23.1 \Styles</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Font-Styles-369"></a><a name="index-Typeface-Styles-370"></a><a name="index-Styles-of-text-371"></a> - - <p>The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX. - - <p>These commands are used like <code>\textit{italics text}</code>. The -corresponding command in parenthesis is the “declaration form”, which -takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the -next type style command or the end of the current group. - - <p>The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say -<code>\sffamily\bfseries</code> to get sans serif boldface. - - <p>You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; e.g. -<code>\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}</code>. - - <dl> -<dt><code>\textrm (\rmfamily)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextrm-372"></a><a name="index-_005crmfamily-373"></a>Roman. -<br><dt><code>\textit (\itshape)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextit-374"></a><a name="index-_005citshape-375"></a><br><dt><code>\emph</code><dd><a name="index-_005cemph-376"></a>Emphasis (toggles between \textit and \textrm). -<br><dt><code>\textmd (\mdseries)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextmd-377"></a><a name="index-_005cmdseries-378"></a>Medium weight (default). The opposite of boldface. -<br><dt><code>\textbf (\bfseries)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextbf-379"></a><a name="index-_005cbfseries-380"></a>Boldface. -<br><dt><code>\textup (\upshape)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextup-381"></a><a name="index-_005cupshape-382"></a>Upright (default). The opposite of slanted. -<br><dt><code>\textsl (\slshape)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextsl-383"></a><a name="index-_005cslshape-384"></a>Slanted. -<br><dt><code>\textsf (\sffamily)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextsf-385"></a><a name="index-_005csffamily-386"></a>Sans serif. -<br><dt><code>\textsc (\scshape)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextsc-387"></a><a name="index-_005cscshape-388"></a>Small caps. -<br><dt><code>\texttt (\ttfamily)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctexttt-389"></a><a name="index-_005cttfamily-390"></a>Typewriter. -<br><dt><code>\textnormal (\normalfont)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextnormal-391"></a><a name="index-_005cnormalfont-392"></a>Main document font. -<br><dt><code>\mathrm</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathrm-393"></a>Roman, for use in math mode. -<br><dt><code>\mathbf</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathbf-394"></a>Boldface, for use in math mode. -<br><dt><code>\mathsf</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathsf-395"></a>Sans serif, for use in math mode. -<br><dt><code>\mathtt</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathtt-396"></a>Typewriter, for use in math mode. -<br><dt><code>\mathit</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathit-397"></a>Italics, for use in math mode, e.g. variable names with several letters. -<br><dt><code>\mathnormal</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathnormal-398"></a>For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration. -<br><dt><code>\mathcal</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathcal-399"></a>`Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode. -</dl> - - <p>In addition, the command -<code>\mathversion{bold}</code> -<a name="index-_005cmathversion-400"></a>can be used for switching to bold letters and symbols in -formulas. <code>\mathversion{normal}</code> restores the default. - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- ** Sizes ***** --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Sizes"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Styles">Styles</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.23.2 Sizes</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Font-Sizes-401"></a><a name="index-Typeface-Sizes-402"></a><a name="index-Sizes-of-text-403"></a> - - <p>The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. - - <p>The commands as listed here are "declaration forms". The scope of the -declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of -the current group. - - <p>You can also use the environment form of these commands; e.g. -<code>\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}</code>. - - <dl> -<dt><code>\tiny</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctiny-404"></a> -<br><dt><code>\scriptsize</code><dd><a name="index-_005cscriptsize-405"></a> -<br><dt><code>\footnotesize</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfootnotesize-406"></a> -<br><dt><code>\small</code><dd><a name="index-_005csmall-407"></a> -<br><dt><code>\normalsize</code><dd><a name="index-_005cnormalsize-408"></a>(default) - - <br><dt><code>\large</code><dd><a name="index-_005clarge-409"></a> -<br><dt><code>\Large</code><dd><a name="index-_005cLarge-410"></a> -<br><dt><code>\LARGE</code><dd><a name="index-_005cLARGE-411"></a> -<br><dt><code>\huge</code><dd><a name="index-_005chuge-412"></a> -<br><dt><code>\Huge</code><dd><a name="index-_005cHuge-413"></a></dl> - -<!-- ******************************** --> -<!-- ** Low-level font commands ***** --> -<!-- ******************************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Low_002dlevel-font-commands"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Sizes">Sizes</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.23.3 Low-level font commands</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Low_002dlevel-font-commands-414"></a><a name="index-Font-commands_002c-low_002dlevel-415"></a> -These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and -packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available -ones. For full details, you should consult Chapter 7 of <cite>The LaTeX -Companion</cite>. - - <dl> -<dt><code>\fontencoding{enc}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontencoding-416"></a>Select font encoding. Valid encodings include <code>OT1</code> and <code>T1</code>. - - <br><dt><code>\fontfamily{family}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontfamily-417"></a>Select font family. Valid families include: - - <ul> -<li><code>cmr</code> for Computer Modern Roman -<li><code>cmss</code> for Computer Modern Sans Serif -<li><code>cmtt</code> for Computer Modern Typewriter -</ul> - - <p>and numerous others. - - <br><dt><code>\fontseries{series}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontseries-418"></a>Select font series. Valid series include: - - <ul> -<li><code>m</code> Medium (normal) -<li><code>b</code> Bold -<li><code>c</code> Condensed -<li><code>bc</code> Bold condensed -<li><code>bx</code> Bold extended -</ul> - - <p>and various other combinations. - - <br><dt><code>\fontshape{shape}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontshape-419"></a>Select font shape. Valid shapes are: - - <ul> -<li><code>n</code> Upright (normal) -<li><code>it</code> Italic -<li><code>sl</code> Slanted (oblique) -<li><code>sc</code> Small caps -<li><code>ui</code> Upright italics -<li><code>ol</code> Outline -</ul> - - <p>The two last shapes are not available for most font families. - - <br><dt><code>\fontsize{size}{skip}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontsize-420"></a>Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to; the -second is the <code>\baselineskip</code> to use. The unit of both parameters -defaults to pt. A rule of thumb is that the baselineskip should be 1.2 -times the font size. - - <br><dt><code>\selectfont</code><dd><a name="index-_005cselectfont-421"></a>The changes made by calling the four font commands described above do -not come into effect until <code>\selectfont</code> is called. - - <br><dt><code>\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cusefont-422"></a>Equivalent to calling <code>\fontencoding</code>, <code>\fontfamily</code>, -<code>\fontseries</code> and <code>\fontshape</code> with the given parameters, followed by <code>\selectfont</code>. -</dl> - -<!-- **************************************** --> -<!-- ************* PARAMETERS *************** --> -<!-- **************************************** --> -<!-- LEVEL1 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Parameters"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Concept-Index">Concept Index</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Commands">Commands</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h2 class="chapter">3 Parameters</h2> - -<p>The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; TeX -uses <span class="file">.tex</span> as a default file extension. If you omit the input file -entirely, TeX accepts input from the terminal. You specify command -options by supplying a string as a parameter to the command; e.g. - - <p><code>latex ``\scrollmode\input foo.tex''</code> - - <p>will process <span class="file">foo.tex</span> without pausing after every error. - - <p>Output files are always created in the current directory. When you fail -to specify an input file name, TeX bases the output names on the file -specification associated with the logical name TEX_OUTPUT, typically -<code>texput.log</code>. - -<!-- *************************** --> -<!-- ******* INDICES ******** --> -<!-- *************************** --> -<!-- LEVEL1 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Concept-Index"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Command-Index">Command Index</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Parameters">Parameters</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h2 class="unnumbered">Concept Index</h2> - -<ul class="index-cp" compact> -<li><a href="#index-Accessing-any-character-of-a-font-348">Accessing any character of a font</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Aligning-Equations-73">Aligning Equations</a>: <a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Appendix_002c-creating-315">Appendix, creating</a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Arrays_002c-math-60">Arrays, math</a>: <a href="#array">array</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-article-class-41">article class</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Author_002c-for-titlepage-295">Author, for titlepage</a>: <a href="#_005cauthor">\author</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Bibliography_002c-creating-_0028automatically_0029-157">Bibliography, creating (automatically)</a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Bibliography_002c-creating-_0028manually_0029-151">Bibliography, creating (manually)</a>: <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-BibTeX_002c-using-156">BibTeX, using</a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-book-class-43">book class</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Boxes-317">Boxes</a>: <a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Cc-list-199">Cc list</a>: <a href="#_005ccc">\cc</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Centering-text-65">Centering text</a>: <a href="#_005ccentering">\centering</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Centering-text_002c-environment-for-63">Centering text, environment for</a>: <a href="#center">center</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Characters_002c-reserved-345">Characters, reserved</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Characters_002c-special-343">Characters, special</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Classes-of-document-40">Classes of document</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Commands_002c-defining-new-ones-28">Commands, defining new ones</a>: <a href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Computer-programs_002c-typesetting-170">Computer programs, typesetting</a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Counters_002c-a-list-of-3">Counters, a list of</a>: <a href="#Counters">Counters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Counters_002c-creating-11">Counters, creating</a>: <a href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Counters_002c-getting-the-value-of-20">Counters, getting the value of</a>: <a href="#_005cvalue">\value</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Counters_002c-setting-17">Counters, setting</a>: <a href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Creating-letters-196">Creating letters</a>: <a href="#Letters">Letters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Creating-pictures-106">Creating pictures</a>: <a href="#picture">picture</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Creating-tables-142">Creating tables</a>: <a href="#table">table</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Cross-referencing-21">Cross referencing</a>: <a href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Cross-referencing-using-page-number-24">Cross referencing using page number</a>: <a href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Cross-referencing-using-section-number-26">Cross referencing using section number</a>: <a href="#_005cref">\ref</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Date_002c-for-titlepage-297">Date, for titlepage</a>: <a href="#_005cdate">\date</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Defining-a-new-command-29">Defining a new command</a>: <a href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Defining-new-environments-32">Defining new environments</a>: <a href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Defining-new-fonts-38">Defining new fonts</a>: <a href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Defining-new-theorems-35">Defining new theorems</a>: <a href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Displaying-quoted-text-125">Displaying quoted text</a>: <a href="#quote">quote</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Displaying-quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation-122">Displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation</a>: <a href="#quotation">quotation</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Document-Classes-39">Document Classes</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Enclosed-material-203">Enclosed material</a>: <a href="#_005cencl">\encl</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Ending-_0026-Starting-355">Ending & Starting</a>: <a href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting & Ending</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Enlarge-current-page-226">Enlarge current page</a>: <a href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Environments-57">Environments</a>: <a href="#Environments">Environments</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Environments_002c-defining-31">Environments, defining</a>: <a href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Equations_002c-aligning-72">Equations, aligning</a>: <a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Equations_002c-environment-for-76">Equations, environment for</a>: <a href="#equation">equation</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-exponent-260">exponent</a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Figures_002c-footnotes-in-103">Figures, footnotes in</a>: <a href="#minipage">minipage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Flushing-a-page-224">Flushing a page</a>: <a href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Font-commands_002c-low_002dlevel-415">Font commands, low-level</a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Font-Sizes-401">Font Sizes</a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Font-Styles-369">Font Styles</a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Fonts-368">Fonts</a>: <a href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Fonts_002c-new-commands-for-37">Fonts, new commands for</a>: <a href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Footnotes-in-figures-102">Footnotes in figures</a>: <a href="#minipage">minipage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Footnotes_002c-creating-175">Footnotes, creating</a>: <a href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Formatting-Text-66">Formatting Text</a>: <a href="#_005ccentering">\centering</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Formulae_002c-environment-for-77">Formulae, environment for</a>: <a href="#equation">equation</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Formulae_002c-maths-253">Formulae, maths</a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Global-options-49">Global options</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Greek-letters-267">Greek letters</a>: <a href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Hyphenation_002c-defining-229">Hyphenation, defining</a>: <a href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Hyphenation_002c-forcing-220">Hyphenation, forcing</a>: <a href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Indent_002c-forcing-244">Indent, forcing</a>: <a href="#_005cindent">\indent</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Indent_002c-suppressing-246">Indent, suppressing</a>: <a href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Input-file_002c-splitting-350">Input file, splitting</a>: <a href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Input_002fOutput-363">Input/Output</a>: <a href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Inserting-figures-79">Inserting figures</a>: <a href="#figure">figure</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Justification_002c-ragged-left-93">Justification, ragged left</a>: <a href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Justification_002c-ragged-right-87">Justification, ragged right</a>: <a href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Labelled-lists_002c-creating-68">Labelled lists, creating</a>: <a href="#description">description</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-LaTeX-overview-2">LaTeX overview</a>: <a href="#Overview">Overview</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Layout-commands-51">Layout commands</a>: <a href="#Layout">Layout</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Left_002djustifying-text-86">Left-justifying text</a>: <a href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Left_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for-82">Left-justifying text, environment for</a>: <a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Left_002dto_002dright-mode-288">Left-to-right mode</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-adding-to-185">Lengths, adding to</a>: <a href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-defining-a-new-181">Lengths, defining a new</a>: <a href="#_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-defining-and-using-179">Lengths, defining and using</a>: <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-predefined-189">Lengths, predefined</a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-setting-value-of-183">Lengths, setting value of</a>: <a href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-letter-class-44">letter class</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Letters-195">Letters</a>: <a href="#Letters">Letters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Letters_002c-ending-201">Letters, ending</a>: <a href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Letters_002c-starting-208">Letters, starting</a>: <a href="#_005copening">\opening</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Line-Breaking-215">Line Breaking</a>: <a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Line-breaks-231">Line breaks</a>: <a href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lines-in-tables-144">Lines in tables</a>: <a href="#tabular">tabular</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lining-text-up-in-columns-using-tab-stops-128">Lining text up in columns using tab stops</a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lining-text-up-in-tables-145">Lining text up in tables</a>: <a href="#tabular">tabular</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lists-of-items-97">Lists of items</a>: <a href="#itemize">itemize</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lists-of-items_002c-generic-100">Lists of items, generic</a>: <a href="#list">list</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lists-of-items_002c-numbered-70">Lists of items, numbered</a>: <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Loading-additional-packages-48">Loading additional packages</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Low_002dlevel-font-commands-414">Low-level font commands</a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-LR-mode-289">LR mode</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Making-a-title-page-163">Making a title page</a>: <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Making-paragraphs-241">Making paragraphs</a>: <a href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Margin-Notes-249">Margin Notes</a>: <a href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Math-Formulae-252">Math Formulae</a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Math-mode-287">Math mode</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Math-mode_002c-entering-254">Math mode, entering</a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Math-mode_002c-spacing-269">Math mode, spacing</a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Maths-Miscellany-274">Maths Miscellany</a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Maths-symbols-265">Maths symbols</a>: <a href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Minipage_002c-creating-a-104">Minipage, creating a</a>: <a href="#minipage">minipage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Modes-285">Modes</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Multicolumn-text-56">Multicolumn text</a>: <a href="#_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-New-line_002c-starting-218">New line, starting</a>: <a href="#_005c_005c">\\</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-New-line_002c-starting-_0028paragraph-mode_0029-233">New line, starting (paragraph mode)</a>: <a href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-New-Page-235">New Page</a>: <a href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Notes-in-the-margin-250">Notes in the margin</a>: <a href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Options_002c-global-50">Options, global</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Overview-of-LaTeX-1">Overview of LaTeX</a>: <a href="#Overview">Overview</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Packages_002c-loading-47">Packages, loading</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Page-break_002c-forcing-239">Page break, forcing</a>: <a href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Page-Breaking-214">Page Breaking</a>: <a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Page-Formatting-216">Page Formatting</a>: <a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Page-numbering-303">Page numbering</a>: <a href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Page-styles-291">Page styles</a>: <a href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Paragraph-mode-286">Paragraph mode</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Paragraph_002c-starting-a-new-248">Paragraph, starting a new</a>: <a href="#_005cpar">\par</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Paragraphs-242">Paragraphs</a>: <a href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Pictures_002c-creating-107">Pictures, creating</a>: <a href="#picture">picture</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Poetry_002c-an-environment-for-174">Poetry, an environment for</a>: <a href="#verse">verse</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Predefined-lengths-190">Predefined lengths</a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Programs_002c-typesetting-169">Programs, typesetting</a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation_002c-displaying-121">Quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying</a>: <a href="#quotation">quotation</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Quoted-text_002c-displaying-124">Quoted text, displaying</a>: <a href="#quote">quote</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Ragged-left-text-92">Ragged left text</a>: <a href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Ragged-left-text_002c-environment-for-89">Ragged left text, environment for</a>: <a href="#flushright">flushright</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Ragged-right-text-85">Ragged right text</a>: <a href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Ragged-right-text_002c-environment-for-83">Ragged right text, environment for</a>: <a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Remarks-in-the-margin-251">Remarks in the margin</a>: <a href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-report-class-42">report class</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Reserved-Characters-344">Reserved Characters</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Right_002djustifying-text-94">Right-justifying text</a>: <a href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Right_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for-90">Right-justifying text, environment for</a>: <a href="#flushright">flushright</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Sectioning-308">Sectioning</a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Simulating-typed-text-167">Simulating typed text</a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Sizes-of-text-403">Sizes of text</a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Space_002c-inserting-vertical-324">Space, inserting vertical</a>: <a href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Spaces-316">Spaces</a>: <a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Spacing_002c-within-Math-mode-268">Spacing, within Math mode</a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Special-Characters-342">Special Characters</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Splitting-the-input-file-349">Splitting the input file</a>: <a href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Starting-_0026-Ending-354">Starting & Ending</a>: <a href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting & Ending</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Starting-on-a--right_002dhand-page-222">Starting on a right-hand page</a>: <a href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Styles-of-text-371">Styles of text</a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Styles_002c-page-290">Styles, page</a>: <a href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Subscript-262">Subscript</a>: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts & Superscripts</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Superscript-261">Superscript</a>: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts & Superscripts</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Symbols-266">Symbols</a>: <a href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Tab-stops_002c-using-127">Tab stops, using</a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Table-of-Contents_002c-creating-356">Table of Contents, creating</a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Tables_002c-creating-141">Tables, creating</a>: <a href="#table">table</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Terminal-Input_002fOutput-364">Terminal Input/Output</a>: <a href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Thanks_002c-for-titlepage-299">Thanks, for titlepage</a>: <a href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Theorems_002c-defining-34">Theorems, defining</a>: <a href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Theorems_002c-typesetting-161">Theorems, typesetting</a>: <a href="#theorem">theorem</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Title-making-292">Title making</a>: <a href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Title-pages_002c-creating-164">Title pages, creating</a>: <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Title_002c-for-titlepage-301">Title, for titlepage</a>: <a href="#_005ctitle">\title</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Typed-text_002c-simulating-168">Typed text, simulating</a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Typeface-Sizes-402">Typeface Sizes</a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Typeface-Styles-370">Typeface Styles</a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Typefaces-367">Typefaces</a>: <a href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Using-BibTeX-155">Using BibTeX</a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Variables_002c-a-list-of-4">Variables, a list of</a>: <a href="#Counters">Counters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Verbatim-text-172">Verbatim text</a>: <a href="#_005cverb">\verb</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Vertical-space_002c-inserting-323">Vertical space, inserting</a>: <a href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></li> -</ul><!-- LEVEL1 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Command-Index"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Concept-Index">Concept Index</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h2 class="unnumbered">Command Index</h2> - - - -<ul class="index-fn" compact> -<li><a href="#index-_0024-259"><code>$</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_0021-273"><code>\!</code></a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_0027-_0028tabbing_0029-134"><code>\' (tabbing)</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_0028-255"><code>\(</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_0029-256"><code>\)</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_002b-132"><code>\+</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_002c-272"><code>\,</code></a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029-219"><code>\- (hyphenation)</code></a>: <a href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_002d-_0028tabbing_0029-133"><code>\- (tabbing)</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_003b-270"><code>\;</code></a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_003c-131"><code>\<</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_003d-129"><code>\=</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_003e-130"><code>\></code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_005b-257"><code>\[</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_005c-217"><code>\\</code></a>: <a href="#_005c_005c">\\</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_005d-258"><code>\]</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_0060-_0028tabbing_0029-135"><code>\` (tabbing)</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ca-139"><code>\a</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005caddcontentsline-361"><code>\addcontentsline</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005caddress-197"><code>\address</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddress">\address</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005caddtocontents-362"><code>\addtocontents</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddtocontents">\addtocontents</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005caddtocounter-5"><code>\addtocounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddtocounter">\addtocounter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005caddtolength-184"><code>\addtolength</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005caddvspace-322"><code>\addvspace</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cAlph-7"><code>\Alph</code></a>: <a href="#_005calph">\alph</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005calph-6"><code>\alph</code></a>: <a href="#_005calph">\alph</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cappendix-314"><code>\appendix</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005carabic-8"><code>\arabic</code></a>: <a href="#_005carabic">\arabic</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cauthor-294"><code>\author</code></a>: <a href="#_005cauthor">\author</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cbackslash-346"><code>\backslash</code></a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cbegin-58"><code>\begin</code></a>: <a href="#Environments">Environments</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cbfseries-380"><code>\bfseries</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cbibitem-152"><code>\bibitem</code></a>: <a href="#_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cbibliography-159"><code>\bibliography</code></a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cbibliographystyle-158"><code>\bibliographystyle</code></a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cbigskip-325"><code>\bigskip</code></a>: <a href="#_005cbigskip">\bigskip</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ccaption-80"><code>\caption</code></a>: <a href="#figure">figure</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ccc-198"><code>\cc</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccc">\cc</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ccdots-275"><code>\cdots</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ccentering-64"><code>\centering</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccentering">\centering</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cchapter-309"><code>\chapter</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ccircle-108"><code>\circle</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccircle">\circle</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ccite-153"><code>\cite</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccite">\cite</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ccleardoublepage-221"><code>\cleardoublepage</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cclearpage-223"><code>\clearpage</code></a>: <a href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ccline-146"><code>\cline</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccline">\cline</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cclosing-200"><code>\closing</code></a>: <a href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cCOLON-271"><code>\COLON</code></a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cdashbox-109"><code>\dashbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cdate-296"><code>\date</code></a>: <a href="#_005cdate">\date</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cddots-276"><code>\ddots</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cdepth-193"><code>\depth</code></a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cdocumentclass-45"><code>\documentclass</code></a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cdotfill-318"><code>\dotfill</code></a>: <a href="#_005cdotfill">\dotfill</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cemph-376"><code>\emph</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cencl-202"><code>\encl</code></a>: <a href="#_005cencl">\encl</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cend-59"><code>\end</code></a>: <a href="#Environments">Environments</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cenlargethispage-225"><code>\enlargethispage</code></a>: <a href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfbox-330"><code>\fbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfbox">\fbox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cflushbottom-52"><code>\flushbottom</code></a>: <a href="#_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfnsymbol-9"><code>\fnsymbol</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfnsymbol">\fnsymbol</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfontencoding-416"><code>\fontencoding</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfontfamily-417"><code>\fontfamily</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfontseries-418"><code>\fontseries</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfontshape-419"><code>\fontshape</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfontsize-420"><code>\fontsize</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfootnote-176"><code>\footnote</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfootnotemark-177"><code>\footnotemark</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfootnotesize-406"><code>\footnotesize</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfootnotetext-178"><code>\footnotetext</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfrac-277"><code>\frac</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cframe-110"><code>\frame</code></a>: <a href="#_005cframe">\frame</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cframebox-331"><code>\framebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cframebox">\framebox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cframebox-111"><code>\framebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfussy-227"><code>\fussy</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cheight-192"><code>\height</code></a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005chfill-319"><code>\hfill</code></a>: <a href="#_005chfill">\hfill</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005chline-147"><code>\hline</code></a>: <a href="#_005chline">\hline</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005chrulefill-320"><code>\hrulefill</code></a>: <a href="#_005chrulefill">\hrulefill</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005chspace-321"><code>\hspace</code></a>: <a href="#_005chspace">\hspace</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cHuge-413"><code>\Huge</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005chuge-412"><code>\huge</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005chyphenation-228"><code>\hyphenation</code></a>: <a href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cinclude-351"><code>\include</code></a>: <a href="#_005cinclude">\include</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cincludeonly-352"><code>\includeonly</code></a>: <a href="#_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cindent-243"><code>\indent</code></a>: <a href="#_005cindent">\indent</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cinput-353"><code>\input</code></a>: <a href="#_005cinput">\input</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005citem-96"><code>\item</code></a>: <a href="#itemize">itemize</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005citshape-375"><code>\itshape</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ckill-136"><code>\kill</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005clabel-22"><code>\label</code></a>: <a href="#_005clabel">\label</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cLARGE-411"><code>\LARGE</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cLarge-410"><code>\Large</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005clarge-409"><code>\large</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cldots-278"><code>\ldots</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005clefteqn-74"><code>\lefteqn</code></a>: <a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cline-112"><code>\line</code></a>: <a href="#_005cline">\line</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005clinebreak-230"><code>\linebreak</code></a>: <a href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005clinethickness-113"><code>\linethickness</code></a>: <a href="#_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005clistoffigures-358"><code>\listoffigures</code></a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005clistoftables-359"><code>\listoftables</code></a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005clocation-204"><code>\location</code></a>: <a href="#_005clocation">\location</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmakebox-333"><code>\makebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029-114"><code>\makebox (picture)</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmakelabels-205"><code>\makelabels</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmaketitle-293"><code>\maketitle</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmarkboth-305"><code>\markboth</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmarkboth">\markboth</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmarkright-306"><code>\markright</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmarkright">\markright</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmathbf-394"><code>\mathbf</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmathcal-399"><code>\mathcal</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmathit-397"><code>\mathit</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmathnormal-398"><code>\mathnormal</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmathrm-393"><code>\mathrm</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmathsf-395"><code>\mathsf</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmathtt-396"><code>\mathtt</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmathversion-400"><code>\mathversion</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmbox-334"><code>\mbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmbox">\mbox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmdseries-378"><code>\mdseries</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmedskip-326"><code>\medskip</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmedskip">\medskip</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmulticolumn-148"><code>\multicolumn</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmultiput-115"><code>\multiput</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmultiput">\multiput</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cname-206"><code>\name</code></a>: <a href="#_005cname">\name</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewcommand-27"><code>\newcommand</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewcounter-10"><code>\newcounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewenvironment-30"><code>\newenvironment</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewfont-36"><code>\newfont</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewlength-180"><code>\newlength</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewline-232"><code>\newline</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewpage-234"><code>\newpage</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewsavebox-335"><code>\newsavebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewtheorem-33"><code>\newtheorem</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnocite-154"><code>\nocite</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnocite">\nocite</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnofiles-360"><code>\nofiles</code></a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnoindent-245"><code>\noindent</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnolinebreak-236"><code>\nolinebreak</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnolinebreak">\nolinebreak</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnopagebreak-237"><code>\nopagebreak</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnopagebreak">\nopagebreak</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnormalfont-392"><code>\normalfont</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnormalsize-408"><code>\normalsize</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005conecolumn-53"><code>\onecolumn</code></a>: <a href="#_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005copening-207"><code>\opening</code></a>: <a href="#_005copening">\opening</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005coval-116"><code>\oval</code></a>: <a href="#_005coval">\oval</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005coverbrace-279"><code>\overbrace</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005coverline-280"><code>\overline</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cpagebreak-238"><code>\pagebreak</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cpagenumbering-302"><code>\pagenumbering</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cpageref-23"><code>\pageref</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cpagestyle-304"><code>\pagestyle</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cpar-247"><code>\par</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpar">\par</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cparagraph-312"><code>\paragraph</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cparbox-336"><code>\parbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cparbox">\parbox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cpoptabs-138"><code>\poptabs</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cps-209"><code>\ps</code></a>: <a href="#_005cps">\ps</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cpushtabs-137"><code>\pushtabs</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cput-117"><code>\put</code></a>: <a href="#_005cput">\put</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005craggedbottom-54"><code>\raggedbottom</code></a>: <a href="#_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005craggedleft-91"><code>\raggedleft</code></a>: <a href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005craggedright-84"><code>\raggedright</code></a>: <a href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005craisebox-337"><code>\raisebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005craisebox">\raisebox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cref-25"><code>\ref</code></a>: <a href="#_005cref">\ref</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005crefstepcounter-12"><code>\refstepcounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005crmfamily-373"><code>\rmfamily</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cRoman-14"><code>\Roman</code></a>: <a href="#_005croman">\roman</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005croman-13"><code>\roman</code></a>: <a href="#_005croman">\roman</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005crule-338"><code>\rule</code></a>: <a href="#_005crule">\rule</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csavebox-339"><code>\savebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005csavebox">\savebox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csbox-340"><code>\sbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005csbox">\sbox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cscriptsize-405"><code>\scriptsize</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cscshape-388"><code>\scshape</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cselectfont-421"><code>\selectfont</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csetcounter-16"><code>\setcounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csetlength-182"><code>\setlength</code></a>: <a href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csettodepth-186"><code>\settodepth</code></a>: <a href="#_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csettoheight-187"><code>\settoheight</code></a>: <a href="#_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csettowidth-188"><code>\settowidth</code></a>: <a href="#_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csffamily-386"><code>\sffamily</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cshortstack-118"><code>\shortstack</code></a>: <a href="#_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csignature-210"><code>\signature</code></a>: <a href="#_005csignature">\signature</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csloppy-240"><code>\sloppy</code></a>: <a href="#_005csloppy">\sloppy</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cslshape-384"><code>\slshape</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csmall-407"><code>\small</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csmallskip-327"><code>\smallskip</code></a>: <a href="#_005csmallskip">\smallskip</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csqrt-281"><code>\sqrt</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cstartbreaks-211"><code>\startbreaks</code></a>: <a href="#_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cstepcounter-15"><code>\stepcounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cstopbreaks-212"><code>\stopbreaks</code></a>: <a href="#_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csubparagraph-313"><code>\subparagraph</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csubsection-311"><code>\subsection</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csubsubsection-310"><code>\subsubsection</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csymbol-347"><code>\symbol</code></a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctableofcontents-357"><code>\tableofcontents</code></a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctelephone-213"><code>\telephone</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctelephone">\telephone</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextbf-379"><code>\textbf</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextit-374"><code>\textit</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextmd-377"><code>\textmd</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextnormal-391"><code>\textnormal</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextrm-372"><code>\textrm</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextsc-387"><code>\textsc</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextsf-385"><code>\textsf</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextsl-383"><code>\textsl</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctexttt-389"><code>\texttt</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextup-381"><code>\textup</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cthanks-298"><code>\thanks</code></a>: <a href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cthispagestyle-307"><code>\thispagestyle</code></a>: <a href="#_005cthispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctiny-404"><code>\tiny</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctitle-300"><code>\title</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctitle">\title</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctoday-165"><code>\today</code></a>: <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctotalheight-194"><code>\totalheight</code></a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cttfamily-390"><code>\ttfamily</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctwocolumn-55"><code>\twocolumn</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctypein-365"><code>\typein</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctypein">\typein</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctypeout-366"><code>\typeout</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctypeout">\typeout</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cunderbrace-282"><code>\underbrace</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cunderline-283"><code>\underline</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cupshape-382"><code>\upshape</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cusebox-341"><code>\usebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cusebox">\usebox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cusecounter-18"><code>\usecounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cusefont-422"><code>\usefont</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cusepackage-46"><code>\usepackage</code></a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cvalue-19"><code>\value</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvalue">\value</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cvdots-284"><code>\vdots</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cvector-119"><code>\vector</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvector">\vector</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cverb-171"><code>\verb</code></a>: <a href="#_005cverb">\verb</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cvfill-328"><code>\vfill</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvfill">\vfill</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cvline-149"><code>\vline</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvline">\vline</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cvspace-329"><code>\vspace</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvspace">\vspace</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cwidth-191"><code>\width</code></a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005e-264"><code>^</code></a>: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts & Superscripts</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005f-263"><code>_</code></a>: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts & Superscripts</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-array-61"><code>array</code></a>: <a href="#array">array</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-center-62"><code>center</code></a>: <a href="#center">center</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-description-67"><code>description</code></a>: <a href="#description">description</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-enumerate-69"><code>enumerate</code></a>: <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-eqnarray-71"><code>eqnarray</code></a>: <a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-equation-75"><code>equation</code></a>: <a href="#equation">equation</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-figure-78"><code>figure</code></a>: <a href="#figure">figure</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-flushleft-81"><code>flushleft</code></a>: <a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-flushright-88"><code>flushright</code></a>: <a href="#flushright">flushright</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-itemize-95"><code>itemize</code></a>: <a href="#itemize">itemize</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-letter-98"><code>letter</code></a>: <a href="#letter">letter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-list-99"><code>list</code></a>: <a href="#list">list</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-lrbox-332"><code>lrbox</code></a>: <a href="#lrbox">lrbox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-minipage-101"><code>minipage</code></a>: <a href="#minipage">minipage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-picture-105"><code>picture</code></a>: <a href="#picture">picture</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-quotation-120"><code>quotation</code></a>: <a href="#quotation">quotation</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-quote-123"><code>quote</code></a>: <a href="#quote">quote</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-tabbing-126"><code>tabbing</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-table-140"><code>table</code></a>: <a href="#table">table</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-tabular-143"><code>tabular</code></a>: <a href="#tabular">tabular</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-thebibliography-150"><code>thebibliography</code></a>: <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-theorem-160"><code>theorem</code></a>: <a href="#theorem">theorem</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-titlepage-162"><code>titlepage</code></a>: <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-verbatim-166"><code>verbatim</code></a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-verse-173"><code>verse</code></a>: <a href="#verse">verse</a></li> - </ul> -<div class="contents"> -<h2>Table of Contents</h2> -<ul> -<li><a name="toc_Overview" href="#Overview">1 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide</a> -<li><a name="toc_Commands" href="#Commands">2 Commands</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#Counters">2.1 Counters</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005caddtocounter">2.1.1 \addtocounter</a> -<li><a href="#_005calph">2.1.2 \alph</a> -<li><a href="#_005carabic">2.1.3 \arabic</a> -<li><a href="#_005cfnsymbol">2.1.4 \fnsymbol</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnewcounter">2.1.5 \newcounter</a> -<li><a href="#_005crefstepcounter">2.1.6 \refstepcounter</a> -<li><a href="#_005croman">2.1.7 \roman</a> -<li><a href="#_005cstepcounter">2.1.8 \stepcounter</a> -<li><a href="#_005csetcounter">2.1.9 \setcounter</a> -<li><a href="#_005cusecounter">2.1.10 \usecounter</a> -<li><a href="#_005cvalue">2.1.11 \value</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Cross-References">2.2 Cross References</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005clabel">2.2.1 \label</a> -<li><a href="#_005cpageref">2.2.2 \pageref</a> -<li><a href="#_005cref">2.2.3 \ref</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Definitions">2.3 Definitions</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cnewcommand">2.3.1 \newcommand</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnewenvironment">2.3.2 \newenvironment</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnewtheorem">2.3.3 \newtheorem</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnewfont">2.3.4 \newfont</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Document-Classes">2.4 Document Classes</a> -<li><a href="#Layout">2.5 Layout</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cflushbottom">2.5.1 \flushbottom</a> -<li><a href="#_005conecolumn">2.5.2 \onecolumn</a> -<li><a href="#_005craggedbottom">2.5.3 \raggedbottom</a> -<li><a href="#_005ctwocolumn">2.5.4 \twocolumn</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Environments">2.6 Environments</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#array">2.6.1 array</a> -<li><a href="#center">2.6.2 center</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005ccentering">2.6.2.1 \centering</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#description">2.6.3 description</a> -<li><a href="#enumerate">2.6.4 enumerate</a> -<li><a href="#eqnarray">2.6.5 eqnarray</a> -<li><a href="#equation">2.6.6 equation</a> -<li><a href="#figure">2.6.7 figure</a> -<li><a href="#flushleft">2.6.8 flushleft</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005craggedright">2.6.8.1 \raggedright</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#flushright">2.6.9 flushright</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005craggedleft">2.6.9.1 \raggedleft</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#itemize">2.6.10 itemize</a> -<li><a href="#letter">2.6.11 letter</a> -<li><a href="#list">2.6.12 list</a> -<li><a href="#minipage">2.6.13 minipage</a> -<li><a href="#picture">2.6.14 picture</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005ccircle">2.6.14.1 \circle</a> -<li><a href="#_005cdashbox">2.6.14.2 \dashbox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cframe">2.6.14.3 \frame</a> -<li><a href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">2.6.14.4 \framebox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cline">2.6.14.5 \line</a> -<li><a href="#_005clinethickness">2.6.14.6 \linethickness</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">2.6.14.7 \makebox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmultiput">2.6.14.8 \multiput</a> -<li><a href="#_005coval">2.6.14.9 \oval</a> -<li><a href="#_005cput">2.6.14.10 \put</a> -<li><a href="#_005cshortstack">2.6.14.11 \shortstack</a> -<li><a href="#_005cvector">2.6.14.12 \vector</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#quotation">2.6.15 quotation</a> -<li><a href="#quote">2.6.16 quote</a> -<li><a href="#tabbing">2.6.17 tabbing</a> -<li><a href="#table">2.6.18 table</a> -<li><a href="#tabular">2.6.19 tabular</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005ccline">2.6.19.1 \cline</a> -<li><a href="#_005chline">2.6.19.2 \hline</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmulticolumn">2.6.19.3 \multicolumn</a> -<li><a href="#_005cvline">2.6.19.4 \vline</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#thebibliography">2.6.20 thebibliography</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cbibitem">2.6.20.1 \bibitem</a> -<li><a href="#_005ccite">2.6.20.2 \cite</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnocite">2.6.20.3 \nocite</a> -<li><a href="#Using-BibTeX">2.6.20.4 Using BibTeX</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#theorem">2.6.21 theorem</a> -<li><a href="#titlepage">2.6.22 titlepage</a> -<li><a href="#verbatim">2.6.23 verbatim</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cverb">2.6.23.1 \verb</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#verse">2.6.24 verse</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Footnotes">2.7 Footnotes</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cfootnote">2.7.1 \footnote</a> -<li><a href="#_005cfootnotemark">2.7.2 \footnotemark</a> -<li><a href="#_005cfootnotetext">2.7.3 \footnotetext</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Lengths">2.8 Lengths</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cnewlength">2.8.1 \newlength</a> -<li><a href="#_005csetlength">2.8.2 \setlength</a> -<li><a href="#_005caddtolength">2.8.3 \addtolength</a> -<li><a href="#_005csettodepth">2.8.4 \settodepth</a> -<li><a href="#_005csettoheight">2.8.5 \settoheight</a> -<li><a href="#_005csettowidth">2.8.6 \settowidth</a> -<li><a href="#Predefined-lengths">2.8.7 Predefined lengths</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Letters">2.9 Letters</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005caddress">2.9.1 \address</a> -<li><a href="#_005ccc">2.9.2 \cc</a> -<li><a href="#_005cclosing">2.9.3 \closing</a> -<li><a href="#_005cencl">2.9.4 \encl</a> -<li><a href="#_005clocation">2.9.5 \location</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmakelabels">2.9.6 \makelabels</a> -<li><a href="#_005cname">2.9.7 \name</a> -<li><a href="#_005copening">2.9.8 \opening</a> -<li><a href="#_005cps">2.9.9 \ps</a> -<li><a href="#_005csignature">2.9.10 \signature</a> -<li><a href="#_005cstartbreaks">2.9.11 \startbreaks</a> -<li><a href="#_005cstopbreaks">2.9.12 \stopbreaks</a> -<li><a href="#_005ctelephone">2.9.13 \telephone</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">2.10 Line & Page Breaking</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005c_005c">2.10.1 \\</a> -<li><a href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">2.10.2 \-</a> -<li><a href="#_005ccleardoublepage">2.10.3 \cleardoublepage</a> -<li><a href="#_005cclearpage">2.10.4 \clearpage</a> -<li><a href="#_005cenlargethispage">2.10.5 \enlargethispage</a> -<li><a href="#_005cfussy">2.10.6 \fussy</a> -<li><a href="#_005chyphenation">2.10.7 \hyphenation</a> -<li><a href="#_005clinebreak">2.10.8 \linebreak</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnewline">2.10.9 \newline</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnewpage">2.10.10 \newpage</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnolinebreak">2.10.11 \nolinebreak</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnopagebreak">2.10.12 \nopagebreak</a> -<li><a href="#_005cpagebreak">2.10.13 \pagebreak</a> -<li><a href="#_005csloppy">2.10.14 \sloppy</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Making-Paragraphs">2.11 Making Paragraphs</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cindent">2.11.1 \indent</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnoindent">2.11.2 \noindent</a> -<li><a href="#_005cpar">2.11.3 \par</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Margin-Notes">2.12 Margin Notes</a> -<li><a href="#Math-Formulae">2.13 Math Formulae</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">2.13.1 Subscripts & Superscripts</a> -<li><a href="#Math-Symbols">2.13.2 Math Symbols</a> -<li><a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">2.13.3 Spacing in Math Mode</a> -<li><a href="#Math-Miscellany">2.13.4 Math Miscellany</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Modes">2.14 Modes</a> -<li><a href="#Page-Styles">2.15 Page Styles</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cmaketitle">2.15.1 \maketitle</a> -<li><a href="#_005cauthor">2.15.2 \author</a> -<li><a href="#_005cdate">2.15.3 \date</a> -<li><a href="#_005cthanks">2.15.4 \thanks</a> -<li><a href="#_005ctitle">2.15.5 \title</a> -<li><a href="#_005cpagenumbering">2.15.6 \pagenumbering</a> -<li><a href="#_005cpagestyle">2.15.7 \pagestyle</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmarkboth">2.15.8 \markboth</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmarkright">2.15.9 \markright</a> -<li><a href="#_005cthispagestyle">2.15.10 \thispagestyle</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Sectioning">2.16 Sectioning</a> -<li><a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">2.17 Spaces & Boxes</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cdotfill">2.17.1 \dotfill</a> -<li><a href="#_005chfill">2.17.2 \hfill</a> -<li><a href="#_005chrulefill">2.17.3 \hrulefill</a> -<li><a href="#_005chspace">2.17.4 \hspace</a> -<li><a href="#_005caddvspace">2.17.5 \addvspace</a> -<li><a href="#_005cbigskip">2.17.6 \bigskip</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmedskip">2.17.7 \medskip</a> -<li><a href="#_005csmallskip">2.17.8 \smallskip</a> -<li><a href="#_005cvfill">2.17.9 \vfill</a> -<li><a href="#_005cvspace">2.17.10 \vspace</a> -<li><a href="#_005cfbox">2.17.11 \fbox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cframebox">2.17.12 \framebox</a> -<li><a href="#lrbox">2.17.13 lrbox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmakebox">2.17.14 \makebox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmbox">2.17.15 \mbox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnewsavebox">2.17.16 \newsavebox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cparbox">2.17.17 \parbox</a> -<li><a href="#_005craisebox">2.17.18 \raisebox</a> -<li><a href="#_005crule">2.17.19 \rule</a> -<li><a href="#_005csavebox">2.17.20 \savebox</a> -<li><a href="#_005csbox">2.17.21 \sbox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cusebox">2.17.22 \usebox</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Special-Characters">2.18 Special Characters</a> -<li><a href="#Splitting-the-Input">2.19 Splitting the Input</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cinclude">2.19.1 \include</a> -<li><a href="#_005cincludeonly">2.19.2 \includeonly</a> -<li><a href="#_005cinput">2.19.3 \input</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">2.20 Starting & Ending</a> -<li><a href="#Table-of-Contents">2.21 Table of Contents</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005caddcontentsline">2.21.1 \addcontentsline</a> -<li><a href="#_005caddtocontents">2.21.2 \addtocontents</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">2.22 Terminal Input/Output</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005ctypein">2.22.1 \typein</a> -<li><a href="#_005ctypeout">2.22.2 \typeout</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Typefaces">2.23 Typefaces</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#Styles">2.23.1 \Styles</a> -<li><a href="#Sizes">2.23.2 Sizes</a> -<li><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">2.23.3 Low-level font commands</a> -</li></ul> -</li></ul> -<li><a name="toc_Parameters" href="#Parameters">3 Parameters</a> -<li><a name="toc_Concept-Index" href="#Concept-Index">Concept Index</a> -<li><a name="toc_Command-Index" href="#Command-Index">Command Index</a> -</li></ul> -</div> - -</body></html> - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e0ccd6d4546..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex2e.html b/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex2e.html deleted file mode 100644 index db830bbde27..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex2e.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6090 +0,0 @@ -<html lang="en"> -<head> -<title>Untitled</title> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html"> -<meta name="description" content="Untitled"> -<meta name="generator" content="makeinfo 4.7"> -<link title="Top" rel="top" href="#Top"> -<link href="http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/" rel="generator-home" title="Texinfo Homepage"> -<!-- -This file documents LaTeX2e, a document preparation system. LaTeX2e is a -macro package for TeX. - -This is edition 1.6 of the LaTeX2e documentation, and is for the Texinfo -that is distributed as part of Version 19 of GNU Emacs. It uses version -2.134 or later of the texinfo.tex input file. - -This is translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The -pre-translation version was written by George D. Greenwade of Sam -Houston State University. - -The LaTeX 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore <stg@dcs.ed.ac.uk>. - -The LaTeX2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen -<bullestock@dk-online.dk>. - -Copyright 1988,1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc. -Copyright 1994-1996 Torsten Martinsen. - -Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of -this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice -are preserved on all copies. - - -Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this -manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire -resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission -notice identical to this one. - -Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual -into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions, -except that the sections entitled ``Distribution'' and ``General Public -License'' may be included in a translation approved by the author instead -of in the original English.--> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css"> -<style type="text/css"><!-- - pre.display { font-family:inherit } - pre.format { font-family:inherit } - pre.smalldisplay { font-family:inherit; font-size:smaller } - pre.smallformat { font-family:inherit; font-size:smaller } - pre.smallexample { font-size:smaller } - pre.smalllisp { font-size:smaller } - span.sc { font-variant:small-caps } - span.roman { font-family: serif; font-weight: normal; } ---></style> -</head> -<body> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Top"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Overview">Overview</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#dir">(dir)</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#dir">(dir)</a> -<br> -</div> - - <p>LaTeX2e is a document preparation system implemented as a macro package -for Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program. - - <p>LaTeX was originally conceived by Leslie Lamport. - - <p>This is edition 1.6 of the LaTeX2e documentation. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#Overview">Overview</a>: What is LaTeX? -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#Commands">Commands</a>: Commands within a LaTeX document. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#Parameters">Parameters</a>: The command line. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#Command-Index">Command Index</a>: An alphabetical list of LaTeX commands. -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#Concept-Index">Concept Index</a>: An alphabetical list of concepts. - - </ul> - -<!-- **************************************** --> -<!-- ************** OVERVIEW **************** --> -<!-- **************************************** --> -<!-- LEVEL1 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Overview"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Commands">Commands</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Top">Top</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h2 class="chapter">1 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide</h2> - -<p><a name="index-Overview-of-LaTeX-1"></a><a name="index-LaTeX-overview-2"></a> -The LaTeX command typesets a file of text using the TeX program and the -LaTeX Macro package for TeX. To be more specific, it processes an input -file containing the text of a document with interspersed commands that -describe how the text should be formatted. It produces at least three -files as output: - - <ol type=1 start=1> -<li>A “Device Independent”, or <span class="file">.dvi</span> file. This contains commands that -can be translated into commands for a variety of output devices. You -can view the output of LaTeX by using a program such as <code>xdvi</code>, -which actually uses the <span class="file">.dvi</span> file. -<li>A “transcript” or <span class="file">.log</span> file that contains summary information and -diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input file. -<li>An “auxiliary” or <span class="file">.aux</span> file. This is used by LaTeX itself, for -things such as sectioning. - </ol> - - <p>For a description of what goes on inside TeX, you should consult -<cite>The TeXbook</cite> by Donald E. Knuth, ISBN 0-201-13448-9, published -jointly by the American Mathematical Society and Addison-Wesley -Publishing Company. - - <p>For a description of LaTeX, you should consult: - - <p><cite>LaTeX: A Document Preparation System</cite>, by Leslie Lamport, -Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 2nd edition, 1994. - - <p><cite>The LaTeX Companion</cite>, by Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, and -Alexander Samarin, Addison-Wesley, 1994. - -<!-- **************************************** --> -<!-- ************** COMMANDS **************** --> -<!-- **************************************** --> -<!-- LEVEL1 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Commands"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Parameters">Parameters</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Overview">Overview</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h2 class="chapter">2 Commands</h2> - -<p>A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of a -<code>\</code> followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single -non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets, <code>[]</code>, are -optional while arguments contained in braces, <code>{}</code>, are required. - - <p>NOTE: LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case -unless explicitly directed to do otherwise. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#Counters">Counters</a>: Internal counters used by LaTeX. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>: Automatic referencing. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>: Define your own commands etc. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a>: Some of the various classes available. -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#Environments">Environments</a>: Such as enumerate & itemize. -<li><a accesskey="6" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>: How to produce footnotes. -<li><a accesskey="7" href="#Layout">Layout</a>: Controlling the page layout. -<li><a accesskey="8" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>: The length commands. -<li><a accesskey="9" href="#Letters">Letters</a>: The letter class. -<li><a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a>: How to insert pagebreaks etc. -<li><a href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>: Paragraph commands. -<li><a href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a>: Putting remarks in the margin. -<li><a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>: How to create mathematical formulae. -<li><a href="#Modes">Modes</a>: Paragraph, Math or LR modes. -<li><a href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>: Various styles of page layout. -<li><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a>: How to section properly. -<li><a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a>: All the associated commands. -<li><a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a>: Special reserved characters. -<li><a href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>: Dealing with big files by splitting. -<li><a href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting & Ending</a>: The formal start & end layouts. -<li><a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>: How to create a table of contents. -<li><a href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a>: User interaction. -<li><a href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>: Such as bold, italics etc. -</ul> - -<!-- *************************************** --> -<!-- **** Command's LEVEL2 Starts Here. **** --> -<!-- *************************************** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ******* Counters ******** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Counters"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Commands">Commands</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.1 Counters</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Counters_002c-a-list-of-3"></a><a name="index-Variables_002c-a-list-of-4"></a> -Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The -name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or -command that produces the number, except with no <code>\</code>. (enumi - -enumiv are used for the nested enumerate environment.) Below is a list -of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control -numbering. - -<pre class="example"> part paragraph figure enumi - chapter subparagraph table enumii - section page footnote enumiii - subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv - subsubsection -</pre> - <ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005caddtocounter">\addtocounter</a>: Add a quantity to a counter. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005calph">\alph</a>: Print value of a counter using letters. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005carabic">\arabic</a>: Print value of a counter using numerals. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cfnsymbol">\fnsymbol</a>: Print value of a counter using symbols. -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>: Define a new counter. -<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a>: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. -<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005croman">\roman</a>: Print value of a counter using roman numerals. -<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>: Set the value of a counter. -<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. -<li><a href="#_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a>: Use a specified counter in a list environment. -<li><a href="#_005cvalue">\value</a>: Use the value of a counter in an expression. -</ul> - -<!-- ******************* --> -<!-- ** \addtocounter ** --> -<!-- ******************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005caddtocounter"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005calph">\alph</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Counters">Counters</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.1 \addtocounter</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005caddtocounter-5"></a> -<code>\addtocounter{counter}{value}</code> - - <p>The <code>\addtocounter</code> command increments the <code>counter</code> by the -amount specified by the <code>value</code> argument. The <code>value</code> -argument can be negative. - -<!-- ************ --> -<!-- ** \alph *** --> -<!-- ************ --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005calph"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005carabic">\arabic</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddtocounter">\addtocounter</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.2 \alph</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005calph-6"></a><a name="index-_005cAlph-7"></a> -<code>\alph{counter}</code> - - <p>This command causes the value of the <code>counter</code> to be printed in -alphabetic characters. The <code>\alph</code> command uses lower case -alphabetic alphabetic characters, i.e., <code>a, b, c...</code> while the -<code>\Alph</code> command uses upper case alphabetic characters, i.e., -<code>A, B, C...</code>. - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- ** \arabic *** --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005carabic"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfnsymbol">\fnsymbol</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005calph">\alph</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.3 \arabic</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005carabic-8"></a> -<code>\arabic{counter}</code> - - <p>The <code>\arabic</code> command causes the value of the <code>counter</code> to be -printed in Arabic numbers, i.e., <code>3</code>. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \fnsymbol ** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cfnsymbol"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005carabic">\arabic</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.4 \fnsymbol</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cfnsymbol-9"></a> -<code>\fnsymbol{counter}</code> - - <p>The <code>\fnsymbol</code> command causes the value of the <code>counter</code> to -be printed in a specific sequence of nine symbols that can be used for -numbering footnotes. - - <p>NB. <code>counter</code> must have a value between 1 and 9 inclusive. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- ** \newcounter ** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewcounter"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfnsymbol">\fnsymbol</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.5 \newcounter</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewcounter-10"></a><a name="index-Counters_002c-creating-11"></a> -<code>\newcounter{foo}[counter]</code> - - <p>The <code>\newcounter</code> command defines a new counter named <code>foo</code>. -The counter is initialized to zero. - - <p>The optional argument <code>[counter]</code> causes the counter <code>foo</code> to -be reset whenever the counter named in the optional argument is -incremented. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- ** \refstepcounter ** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005crefstepcounter"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005croman">\roman</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.6 \refstepcounter</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005crefstepcounter-12"></a> -<code>\refstepcounter{counter}</code> - - <p>The <code>\refstepcounter</code> command works like <code>\stepcounter</code> -See <a href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>, except it also defines the current <code>\ref</code> -value to be the result of <code>\thecounter</code>. - -<!-- ************ --> -<!-- ** \roman ** --> -<!-- ************ --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005croman"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.7 \roman</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005croman-13"></a><a name="index-_005cRoman-14"></a> -<code>\roman{counter}</code> - - <p>This command causes the value of the <code>counter</code> to be printed in -Roman numerals. The <code>\roman</code> command uses lower case Roman -numerals, i.e., <code>i, ii, iii...</code>, while the <code>\Roman</code> command -uses upper case Roman numerals, i.e., <code>I, II, III...</code>. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- ** \stepcounter ** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cstepcounter"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005croman">\roman</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.8 \stepcounter</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cstepcounter-15"></a> -<code>\stepcounter{counter}</code> - - <p>The <code>\stepcounter</code> command adds one to the <code>counter</code> and -resets all subsidiary counters. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- ** \setcounter ** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csetcounter"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.9 \setcounter</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csetcounter-16"></a><a name="index-Counters_002c-setting-17"></a> -<code>\setcounter{counter}{value}</code> - - <p>The <code>\setcounter</code> command sets the value of the <code>counter</code> to -that specified by the <code>value</code> argument. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- ** \usecounter ** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cusecounter"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvalue">\value</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.10 \usecounter</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cusecounter-18"></a> -<code>\usecounter{counter}</code> - - <p>The <code>\usecounter</code> command is used in the second argument of the -<code>list</code> environment to allow the counter specified to be used to -number the list items. - -<!-- ************ --> -<!-- ** \value ** --> -<!-- ************ --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cvalue"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.1.11 \value</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cvalue-19"></a><a name="index-Counters_002c-getting-the-value-of-20"></a> -<code>\value{counter}</code> - - <p>The <code>\value</code> command produces the value of the <code>counter</code> named -in the mandatory argument. It can be used where LaTeX expects an -integer or number, such as the second argument of a <code>\setcounter</code> -or <code>\addtocounter</code> command, or in: - -<pre class="example"> \hspace{\value{foo}\parindent} -</pre> - <p>It is useful for doing arithmetic with counters. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** Cross References *** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Cross-References"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Counters">Counters</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.2 Cross References</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Cross-referencing-21"></a> -One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer -the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.” - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005clabel">\label</a>: Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a>: Refer to a page number. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cref">\ref</a>: Refer to a section, figure or similar. -</ul> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \label ************* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005clabel"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.2.1 \label</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005clabel-22"></a> -<code>\label{key}</code> - - <p>A <code>\label</code> command appearing in ordinary text assigns to the -<code>key</code> the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing -inside a numbered environment assigns that number to the <code>key</code>. - - <p>A <code>key</code> can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or -punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are different. - - <p>To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is -common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a -colon. The prefixes conventionally used are - - <ul> -<li><code>cha</code> -for chapters -<li><code>sec</code> -for lower-level sectioning commands -<li><code>fig</code> -for figures -<li><code>tab</code> -for tables -<li><code>eq</code> -for equations -</ul> - - <p>Thus, a label for a figure would look like <code>fig:bandersnatch</code>. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \pageref *********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cpageref"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cref">\ref</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005clabel">\label</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.2.2 \pageref</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cpageref-23"></a><a name="index-Cross-referencing-using-page-number-24"></a> -<code>\pageref{key}</code> - - <p>The <code>\pageref</code> command produces the page number of the place in the -text where the corresponding <code>\label</code> command appears. ie. where -<code>\label{key}</code> appears. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \ref *************** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cref"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.2.3 \ref</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cref-25"></a><a name="index-Cross-referencing-using-section-number-26"></a> -<code>\ref{key}</code> - - <p>The <code>\ref</code> command produces the number of the sectional unit, -equation number, ... of the corresponding <code>\label</code> command. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** Definitions ******** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Definitions"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.3 Definitions</h3> - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a>: Define a new command. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a>: Define a new environment. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a>: Define a new theorem-like environment. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a>: Define a new font name. -</ul> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \newcommand ******** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewcommand"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.3.1 \newcommand</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewcommand-27"></a><a name="index-Commands_002c-defining-new-ones-28"></a><a name="index-Defining-a-new-command-29"></a> -<pre class="example"> \newcommand{cmd}[args]{definition} - \newcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition} - \renewcommand{cmd}[args]{definition} - \renewcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition} -</pre> - <p>These commands define (or redefine) a command. - - <dl> -<dt><code>cmd</code><dd>A command name beginning with a <code>\</code>. For <code>\newcommand</code> it -must not be already defined and must not begin with <code>\end</code>; for -<code>\renewcommand</code> it must already be defined. - - <br><dt><code>args</code><dd>An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of the command -being defined. The default is for the command to have no arguments. - - <br><dt><code>def</code><dd>If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's first -argument is optional. The default value of the optional argument is -<code>def</code>. - - <br><dt><code>definition</code><dd>The text to be substituted for every occurrence of <code>cmd</code>; a -parameter of the form <code>#n</code> in <code>cmd</code> is replaced by the text of -the nth argument when this substitution takes place. - - </dl> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \newenvironment **** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewenvironment"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.3.2 \newenvironment</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewenvironment-30"></a><a name="index-Environments_002c-defining-31"></a><a name="index-Defining-new-environments-32"></a> -<pre class="example"> \newenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef} - \newenvironment{nam}[args][default]{begdef}{enddef} - \renewenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef} -</pre> - <p>These commands define or redefine an environment. - - <dl> -<dt><code>nam</code><dd>The name of the environment. For <code>\newenvironment</code> there must be -no currently defined environment by that name, and the command -<code>\nam</code> must be undefined. For <code>\renewenvironment</code> the -environment must already be defined. - - <br><dt><code>args</code><dd>An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of -the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments. - - <br><dt><code>default</code><dd>If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and <code>default</code> -gives the default value for that argument. - - <br><dt><code>begdef</code><dd>The text substituted for every occurrence of <code>\begin{nam}</code>; a -parameter of the form <code>#n</code> in <code>cmd</code> is replaced by the text of -the nth argument when this substitution takes place. - - <br><dt><code>enddef</code><dd>The text substituted for every occurrence of <code>\end{nam}</code>. It may -not contain any argument parameters. - - </dl> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \newtheorem ******** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewtheorem"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.3.3 \newtheorem</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewtheorem-33"></a><a name="index-Theorems_002c-defining-34"></a><a name="index-Defining-new-theorems-35"></a> -<pre class="example"> \newtheorem{env_name}{caption}[within] - \newtheorem{env_name}[numbered_like]{caption} -</pre> - <p>This command defines a theorem-like environment. - - <dl> -<dt><code>env_name</code><dd>The name of the environment to be defined. A string of letters. It must -not be the name of an existing environment or counter. - - <br><dt><code>caption</code><dd>The text printed at the beginning of the environment, right before the -number. This may simply say “Theorem”, for example. - - <br><dt><code>within</code><dd>The name of an already defined counter, usually of a sectional unit. -Provides a means of resetting the new theorem counter <strong>within</strong> -the sectional unit. - - <br><dt><code>numbered_like</code><dd>The name of an already defined theorem-like environment. - - </dl> - - <p>The <code>\newtheorem</code> command may have at most one optional argument. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \newfont *********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewfont"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.3.4 \newfont</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewfont-36"></a><a name="index-Fonts_002c-new-commands-for-37"></a><a name="index-Defining-new-fonts-38"></a> -<code>\newfont{cmd}{font_name}</code> - - <p>Defines the command name <code>cmd</code>, which must not be currently -defined, to be a declaration that selects the font named -<code>font_name</code> to be the current font. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** Document Classes **** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Document-Classes"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Environments">Environments</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.4 Document Classes</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Document-Classes-39"></a><a name="index-Classes-of-document-40"></a><a name="index-article-class-41"></a><a name="index-report-class-42"></a><a name="index-book-class-43"></a><a name="index-letter-class-44"></a><a name="index-_005cdocumentclass-45"></a> -Valid LaTeX document classes include: - - <ul> -<li>article -<li>report -<li>letter -<li>book -<li>slides -</ul> - - <p>Other document classes are often available. See <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>, for details. -They are selected with the following command: - - <p><code>\documentclass [options] {class}</code> - - <p>All the standard classes (except slides) accept the following options -for selecting the typeface size (10 pt is default): - - <p>10pt, 11pt, 12pt - - <p>All classes accept these options for selecting the paper size (default -is letter): - - <p>a4paper, a5paper, b5paper, letterpaper, legalpaper, executivepaper - - <p>Miscellaneous options: - - <ul> -<li>landscape — selects landscape format. Default is portrait. -<li>titlepage, notitlepage — selects if there should be a separate title -page. -<li>leqno — equation number on left side of equations. Default is right side. -<li>fleqn — displayed formulas flush left. Default is centred. -<li>openbib — use “open” bibliography format. -<li>draft, final — mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a rule. -Default is final. -</ul> - - <p>These options are not available with the slides class: - - <ul> -<li>oneside, twoside — selects one- or twosided layout. Default is -oneside, except for the book class. -<li>openright, openany — determines if a chapter should start on a -right-hand page. Default is openright for book. -<li>onecolumn, twocolumn — one or two columns. Defaults to one column. -</ul> - - <p>The slides class offers the option <code>clock</code> for printing the time at -the bottom of each note. - - <p>If you specify more than one option, they must be separated by a comma. - - <p>Additional packages are loaded by a - - <p><code>\usepackage[options]{pkg}</code> -<a name="index-_005cusepackage-46"></a> -command. If you specify more than one package, they must be separated by -a comma. -<a name="index-Packages_002c-loading-47"></a><a name="index-Loading-additional-packages-48"></a> -Any options given in the <code>\documentclass</code> command that are unknown -by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with -<code>\usepackage</code>. -<a name="index-Global-options-49"></a><a name="index-Options_002c-global-50"></a> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Layout"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<p><a name="index-Layout-commands-51"></a> - -<h3 class="section">2.5 Layout</h3> - -<p>Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a>: Make all text pages the same height. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a>: Use one-column layout. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a>: Allow text pages of differing height. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a>: Use two-column layout. -</ul> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \flushbottom ******* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cflushbottom"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Layout">Layout</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.5.1 \flushbottom</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cflushbottom-52"></a> -The <code>\flushbottom</code> declaration makes all text pages the same -height, adding extra vertical space when necessary to fill out the page. - - <p>This is the standard if twocolumn mode is selected. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \onecolumn ********* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005conecolumn"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Layout">Layout</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.5.2 \onecolumn</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005conecolumn-53"></a> -The <code>\onecolumn</code> declaration starts a new page and produces -single-column output. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \raggedbottom ****** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005craggedbottom"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Layout">Layout</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.5.3 \raggedbottom</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005craggedbottom-54"></a> -The <code>\raggedbottom</code> declaration makes all pages the height of the -text on that page. No extra vertical space is added. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** \twocolumn ********* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ctwocolumn"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Layout">Layout</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.5.4 \twocolumn</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005ctwocolumn-55"></a><a name="index-Multicolumn-text-56"></a> -<code>\twocolumn[text]</code> - - <p>The <code>\twocolumn</code> declaration starts a new page and produces -two-column output. If the optional <code>text</code> argument is present, it -is typeset in one-column mode. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** Environments ******* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Environments"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.6 Environments</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Environments-57"></a><a name="index-_005cbegin-58"></a><a name="index-_005cend-59"></a> -LaTeX provides a number of different paragraph-making environments. -Each environment begins and ends in the same manner. - -<pre class="example"> \begin{environment-name} - . - . - . - \end{environment-name} -</pre> - <ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#array">array</a>: Math arrays. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#center">center</a>: Centred lines. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#description">description</a>: Labelled lists. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>: Numbered lists. -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a>: Sequences of aligned equations. -<li><a accesskey="6" href="#equation">equation</a>: Displayed equation. -<li><a accesskey="7" href="#figure">figure</a>: Floating figures. -<li><a accesskey="8" href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>: Flushed left lines. -<li><a accesskey="9" href="#flushright">flushright</a>: Flushed right lines. -<li><a href="#itemize">itemize</a>: Bulleted lists. -<li><a href="#letter">letter</a>: Letters. -<li><a href="#list">list</a>: Generic list environment. -<li><a href="#minipage">minipage</a>: Miniature page. -<li><a href="#picture">picture</a>: Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles. -<li><a href="#quotation">quotation</a>: Indented environment with paragraph indentation. -<li><a href="#quote">quote</a>: Indented environment with no paragraph indentation. -<li><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a>: Align text arbitrarily. -<li><a href="#table">table</a>: Floating tables. -<li><a href="#tabular">tabular</a>: Align text in columns. -<li><a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>: Bibliography or reference list. -<li><a href="#theorem">theorem</a>: Theorems, lemmas, etc. -<li><a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a>: For hand crafted title pages. -<li><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>: Simulating typed input. -<li><a href="#verse">verse</a>: For poetry and other things. -</ul> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** array ************** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="array"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#center">center</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Environments">Environments</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.1 array</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Arrays_002c-math-60"></a><a name="index-array-61"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{array}{col1col2...coln} - column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ - . - . - . - \end{array} -</pre> - <p>Math arrays are produced with the array environment. It has a single -mandatory argument describing the number of columns and the alignment -within them. Each column, <code>coln</code>, is specified by a single letter -that tells how items in that row should be formatted. - - <ul> -<li><code>c</code> — for centred -<li><code>l</code> — for flush left -<li><code>r</code> — for flush right -</ul> - - <p>Column entries must be separated by an <code>&</code>. Column entries may -include other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array must be terminated -with the string <code>\\</code>. - - <p>Note that the <code>array</code> environment can only be used in math mode, so -normally it is used inside an <code>equation</code> environment. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** center ************* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="center"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#description">description</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#array">array</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.2 center</h4> - -<p><a name="index-center-62"></a><a name="index-Centering-text_002c-environment-for-63"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{center} - Text on line 1 \\ - Text on line 2 \\ - . - . - . - \end{center} -</pre> - <p>The <code>center</code> environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of -lines that are centred within the left and right margins on the current -page. Each line must be terminated with the string <code>\\</code>. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005ccentering">\centering</a>: The declaration form of the <code>center</code> environment. -</ul> - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- ** \centering *** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ccentering"></a>Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#center">center</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.2.1 \centering</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005ccentering-64"></a><a name="index-Centering-text-65"></a><a name="index-Formatting-Text-66"></a> -This declaration corresponds to the <code>center</code> environment. This -declaration can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code> or in -a <code>parbox</code>. The text of a figure or table can be centred on the -page by putting a <code>\centering</code> command at the beginning of the -figure or table environment. - - <p>Unlike the <code>center</code> environment, the <code>\centering</code> command does -not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph -units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the -declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code> command (of an -environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** description ******** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="description"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#center">center</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.3 description</h4> - -<p><a name="index-description-67"></a><a name="index-Labelled-lists_002c-creating-68"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{description} - \item [label] First item - \item [label] Second item - . - . - . - \end{description} -</pre> - <p>The <code>description</code> environment is used to make labelled lists. The -<code>label</code> is bold face and flushed right. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** enumerate ********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="enumerate"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#description">description</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.4 enumerate</h4> - -<p><a name="index-enumerate-69"></a><a name="index-Lists-of-items_002c-numbered-70"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{enumerate} - \item First item - \item Second item - . - . - . - \end{enumerate} -</pre> - <p>The <code>enumerate</code> environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations -can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also -be nested within other paragraph-making environments. - - <p>Each item of an enumerated list begins with an <code>\item</code> command. -There must be at least one <code>\item</code> command within the environment. - - <p>The <code>enumerate</code> environment uses the <code>enumi</code> through -<code>enumiv</code> counters (see <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>). The type of numbering can be -changed by redefining <code>\theenumi</code> etc. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** eqnarray *********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="eqnarray"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#equation">equation</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.5 eqnarray</h4> - -<p><a name="index-eqnarray-71"></a><a name="index-Equations_002c-aligning-72"></a><a name="index-Aligning-Equations-73"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{eqnarray} - math formula 1 \\ - math formula 2 \\ - . - . - . - \end{eqnarray} -</pre> - <p>The <code>eqnarray</code> environment is used to display a sequence of -equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column -<code>array</code> environment, with consecutive rows separated by <code>\\</code> -and consecutive items within a row separated by an <code>&</code>. - - <p>An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a -<code>\nonumber</code> command. - - <p><a name="index-_005clefteqn-74"></a> -The command <code>\lefteqn</code> is used for splitting long formulas across -lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of -zero width. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** equation *********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="equation"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#figure">figure</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.6 equation</h4> - -<p><a name="index-equation-75"></a><a name="index-Equations_002c-environment-for-76"></a><a name="index-Formulae_002c-environment-for-77"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{equation} - math formula - \end{equation} -</pre> - <p>The <code>equation</code> environment centres your equation on the page and places -the equation number in the right margin. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** figure ************* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="figure"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#equation">equation</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.7 figure</h4> - -<p><a name="index-figure-78"></a><a name="index-Inserting-figures-79"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{figure}[placement] - - body of the figure - - \caption{figure title} - \end{figure} -</pre> - <p><a name="index-_005ccaption-80"></a>Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are -usually “floated” to a convenient place, like the top of a page. -Figures will not be split between two pages. - - <p>The optional argument <code>[placement]</code> determines where LaTeX will try -to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly -put a float: - - <ol type=1 start=1> -<li><code>h</code> (Here) - at the position in the text where the figure -environment appears. -<li><code>t</code> (Top) - at the top of a text page. -<li><code>b</code> (Bottom) - at the bottom of a text page. -<li><code>p</code> (Page of floats) - on a separate float page, which is a page -containing no text, only floats. - </ol> - - <p>The standard report and article classes use the default placement -<code>tbp</code>. - - <p>The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, etc. -you wish. The <code>\caption</code> command allows you to title your figure. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** flushleft ********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="flushleft"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#flushright">flushright</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#figure">figure</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.8 flushleft</h4> - -<p><a name="index-flushleft-81"></a><a name="index-Left_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for-82"></a><a name="index-Ragged-right-text_002c-environment-for-83"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{flushleft} - Text on line 1 \\ - Text on line 2 \\ - . - . - . - \end{flushleft} -</pre> - <p>The <code>flushleft</code> environment allows you to create a paragraph -consisting of lines that are flushed left, to the left-hand margin. -Each line must be terminated with the string <code>\\</code>. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a>: The declaration form of the <code>flushleft</code> environment. -</ul> - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- * \raggedright ** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005craggedright"></a>Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#flushleft">flushleft</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.8.1 \raggedright</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005craggedright-84"></a><a name="index-Ragged-right-text-85"></a><a name="index-Left_002djustifying-text-86"></a><a name="index-Justification_002c-ragged-right-87"></a> -This declaration corresponds to the <code>flushleft</code> environment. This -declaration can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code> or in -a <code>parbox</code>. - - <p>Unlike the <code>flushleft</code> environment, the <code>\raggedright</code> command -does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats -paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the -declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code> command (of an -environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** flushright ********* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="flushright"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#itemize">itemize</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.9 flushright</h4> - -<p><a name="index-flushright-88"></a><a name="index-Ragged-left-text_002c-environment-for-89"></a><a name="index-Right_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for-90"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{flushright} - Text on line 1 \\ - Text on line 2 \\ - . - . - . - \end{flushright} -</pre> - <p>The <code>flushright</code> environment allows you to create a paragraph -consisting of lines that are flushed right, to the right-hand margin. -Each line must be terminated with the string <code>\\</code>. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a>: The declaration form of the <code>flushright</code> environment. -</ul> - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- * \raggedleft *** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005craggedleft"></a>Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#flushright">flushright</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.9.1 \raggedleft</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005craggedleft-91"></a><a name="index-Ragged-left-text-92"></a><a name="index-Justification_002c-ragged-left-93"></a><a name="index-Right_002djustifying-text-94"></a> -This declaration corresponds to the <code>flushright</code> environment. This -declaration can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code> or in -a <code>parbox</code>. - - <p>Unlike the <code>flushright</code> environment, the <code>\raggedleft</code> command -does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats -paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the -declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code> command (of an -environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** itemize ************ --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="itemize"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#letter">letter</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#flushright">flushright</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.10 itemize</h4> - -<p><a name="index-itemize-95"></a><a name="index-_005citem-96"></a><a name="index-Lists-of-items-97"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{itemize} - \item First item - \item Second item - . - . - . - \end{itemize} -</pre> - <p>The <code>itemize</code> environment produces a “bulleted” list. Itemizations -can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also -be nested within other paragraph-making environments. - - <p>Each item of an <code>itemized</code> list begins with an <code>\item</code> command. -There must be at least one <code>\item</code> command within the environment. - - <p>The <code>itemize</code> environment uses the <code>itemi</code> through -<code>itemiv</code> counters (see <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>). The type of numbering can be -changed by redefining <code>\theitemi</code> etc. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** letter ************ --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="letter"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#list">list</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#itemize">itemize</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.11 letter</h4> - -<p><a name="index-letter-98"></a> -This environment is used for creating letters. See <a href="#Letters">Letters</a>. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** list *************** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="list"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#minipage">minipage</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#letter">letter</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.12 list</h4> - -<p><a name="index-list-99"></a><a name="index-Lists-of-items_002c-generic-100"></a> -The <code>list</code> environment is a generic environment which is used for -defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in -documents, but often in macros. - -<pre class="example"> \begin{list}{label}{spacing} - \item First item - \item Second item - . - . - . - \end{list} -</pre> - <p>The <code>{label}</code> argument specifies how items should be labelled. -This argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the -label. This argument can and usually does contain other LaTeX commands. - - <p>The <code>{spacing}</code> argument contains commands to change the spacing -parameters for the list. This argument will most often be null, i.e., -<code>{}</code>. This will select all default spacing which should suffice -for most cases. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** minipage *********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="minipage"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#picture">picture</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#list">list</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.13 minipage</h4> - -<p><a name="index-minipage-101"></a><a name="index-Footnotes-in-figures-102"></a><a name="index-Figures_002c-footnotes-in-103"></a><a name="index-Minipage_002c-creating-a-104"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{minipage}[position]{width} - text - \end{minipage} -</pre> - <p>The <code>minipage</code> environment is similar to a <code>\parbox</code> command. -It takes the same optional <code>position</code> argument and mandatory -<code>width</code> argument. You may use other paragraph-making environments -inside a minipage. - - <p>Footnotes in a <code>minipage</code> environment are handled in a way that is -particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A -<code>\footnote</code> or <code>\footnotetext</code> command puts the footnote at -the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it -uses the <code>mpfootnote</code> counter instead of the ordinary -<code>footnote</code> counter See <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>. - - <p>NOTE: Don't put one minipage inside another if you are using footnotes; -they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** picture ************ --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="picture"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#quotation">quotation</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#minipage">minipage</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.14 picture</h4> - -<p><a name="index-picture-105"></a><a name="index-Creating-pictures-106"></a><a name="index-Pictures_002c-creating-107"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset) - . - . - picture commands - . - . - \end{picture} -</pre> - <p>The <code>picture</code> environment allows you to create just about any kind -of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You -tell LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their -coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point and -a minus sign — a number like <code>5</code>, <code>2.3</code> or <code>-3.1416</code>. A -coordinate specifies a length in multiples of the unit length -<code>\unitlength</code>, so if <code>\unitlength</code> has been set to <code>1cm</code>, -then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimetres. You -can change the value of <code>\unitlength</code> anywhere you want, using the -<code>\setlength</code> command, but strange things will happen if you try -changing it inside the picture environment. - - <p>A position is a pair of coordinates, such as <code>(2.4,-5)</code>, specifying -the point with x-coordinate <code>2.4</code> and y-coordinate <code>-5</code>. -Coordinates are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, -which is normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that -when a position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; -the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. - - <p>The <code>picture</code> environment has one mandatory argument, which is a -<code>position</code>. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment -produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this -argument's x- and y-coordinates. - - <p>The <code>picture</code> environment also has an optional <code>position</code> -argument, following the <code>size</code> argument, that can change the -origin. (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not -contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the -coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture -(thereby determining the origin). For example, if <code>\unitlength</code> -has been set to <code>1mm</code>, the command -<pre class="example"> \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20) -</pre> - <p>produces a picture of width 100 millimetres and height 200 -millimetres, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose -upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first -draw a picture, you will omit the optional argument, leaving the origin -at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by -shifting everything, you just add the appropriate optional argument. - - <p>The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the -picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is; -LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or even -off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by LaTeX in determining -how much room to leave for it. - - <p>Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the <code>\put</code> -command. The command -<pre class="example"> \put (11.3,-.3){...} -</pre> - <p>puts the object specified by <code>...</code> in the picture, with its -reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for -various objects will be described below. - - <p>The <code>\put</code> command creates an <dfn>LR box</dfn>. You can put anything -in the text argument of the <code>\put</code> command that you'd put into the -argument of an <code>\mbox</code> and related commands. When you do this, the -reference point will be the lower left corner of the box. - - <p>Picture commands: - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005ccircle">\circle</a>: Draw a circle. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a>: Draw a dashed box. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cframe">\frame</a>: Draw a frame around an object. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>: Draw a box with a frame around it. -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005cline">\line</a>: Draw a straight line. -<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a>: Set the line thickness. -<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>: Draw a box of the specified size. -<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005cmultiput">\multiput</a>: Draw multiple instances of an object. -<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005coval">\oval</a>: Draw an ellipse. -<li><a href="#_005cput">\put</a>: Place an object at a specified place. -<li><a href="#_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a>: Make a pile of objects. -<li><a href="#_005cvector">\vector</a>: Draw a line with an arrow. -</ul> - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \circle ***** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ccircle"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.1 \circle</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005ccircle-108"></a> -<code>\circle[*]{diameter}</code> - - <p>The <code>\circle</code> command produces a circle with a diameter as close to -the specified one as possible. If the <code>*</code>-form of the command is -used, LaTeX draws a solid circle. - - <p>Note that only circles up to 40 pt can be drawn. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \dashbox **** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cdashbox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cframe">\frame</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccircle">\circle</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.2 \dashbox</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cdashbox-109"></a> -Draws a box with a dashed line. - - <p><code>\dashbox{dash_length}(width,height){...}</code> - - <p>The <code>\dashbox</code> has an extra argument which specifies the width of -each dash. A dashed box looks best when the <code>width</code> and -<code>height</code> are multiples of the <code>dash_length</code>. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \frame ****** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cframe"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.3 \frame</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cframe-110"></a> -<code>\frame{...}</code> - - <p>The <code>\frame</code> command puts a rectangular frame around the object -specified in the argument. The reference point is the bottom left -corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the frame and the -object. - -<!-- ************************** --> -<!-- *** \framebox (picture) ** --> -<!-- ************************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cline">\line</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cframe">\frame</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.4 \framebox</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cframebox-111"></a> -<code>\framebox(width,height)[position]{...}</code> - - <p>The <code>\framebox</code> command is exactly the same as the <code>\makebox</code> -command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that -it creates. - - <p>The <code>framebox</code> command produces a rule of thickness -<code>\fboxrule</code>, and leaves a space <code>\fboxsep</code> between the rule -and the contents of the box. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \line ******* --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cline"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.5 \line</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cline-112"></a> -<code>\line(x slope,y slope){length}</code> - - <p>The <code>\line</code> command draws a line of the specified <code>length</code> and -<code>slope</code>. - - <p>Note that LaTeX can only draw lines with slope = x/y, where x and y -have integer values from -6 through 6. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- * \linethickness * --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005clinethickness"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cline">\line</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.6 \linethickness</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005clinethickness-113"></a> -<code>\linethickness{dimension}</code> - - <p>Declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture -environment to be <code>dimension</code>, which must be a positive length. It -does not affect the thickness of slanted lines and circles, or the -quarter circles drawn by <code>\oval</code> to form the corners of an oval. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- *** \makebox (picture) ** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmultiput">\multiput</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.7 \makebox</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029-114"></a> -<code>\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}</code> - - <p>The <code>\makebox</code> command for the picture environment is similar to -the normal <code>\makebox</code> command except that you must specify a -<code>width</code> and <code>height</code> in multiples of <code>\unitlength</code>. - - <p>The optional argument, <code>[position]</code>, specifies the quadrant that -your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: - - <ul> -<li><code>t</code> - Moves the item to the top of the rectangle -<li><code>b</code> - Moves the item to the bottom -<li><code>l</code> - Moves the item to the left -<li><code>r</code> - Moves the item to the right -</ul> - - <p>See <a href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \multiput *** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmultiput"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005coval">\oval</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.8 \multiput</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmultiput-115"></a> -<code>\multiput(x coord,y coord)(delta x,delta y){number of copies}{object}</code> - - <p>The <code>\multiput</code> command can be used when you are putting the same -object in a regular pattern across a picture. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \oval ***** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005coval"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cput">\put</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmultiput">\multiput</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.9 \oval</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005coval-116"></a> -<code>\oval(width,height)[portion]</code> - - <p>The <code>\oval</code> command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The -optional argument, <code>[portion]</code>, allows you to select part of the -oval. - - <ul> -<li><code>t</code> - Selects the top portion -<li><code>b</code> - Selects the bottom portion -<li><code>r</code> - Selects the right portion -<li><code>l</code> - Selects the left portion -</ul> - - <p>Note that the “corners” of the oval are made with quarter circles with -a maximum radius of 20 pt, so large “ovals” will look more like boxes -with rounded corners. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \put ******** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cput"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005coval">\oval</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.10 \put</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cput-117"></a> -<code>\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }</code> - - <p>The <code>\put</code> command places the item specified by the mandatory -argument at the given coordinates. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \shortstack * --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cshortstack"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvector">\vector</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cput">\put</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.11 \shortstack</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cshortstack-118"></a> -<code>\shortstack[position]{... \\ ... \\ ...}</code> - - <p>The <code>\shortstack</code> command produces a stack of objects. The valid -positions are: - - <ul> -<li><code>r</code> - Moves the objects to the right of the stack -<li><code>l</code> - Moves the objects to the left of the stack -<li><code>c</code> - Moves the objects to the centre of the stack (default) -</ul> - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \vector ***** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cvector"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.12 \vector</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cvector-119"></a> -<code>\vector(x slope,y slope){length}</code> - - <p>The <code>\vector</code> command draws a line with an arrow of the specified -length and slope. The <code>x</code> and <code>y</code> values must lie between -4 -and +4, inclusive. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** quotation ********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="quotation"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#quote">quote</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#picture">picture</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.15 quotation</h4> - -<p><a name="index-quotation-120"></a><a name="index-Quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation_002c-displaying-121"></a><a name="index-Displaying-quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation-122"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{quotation} - text - \end{quotation} -</pre> - <p>The margins of the <code>quotation</code> environment are indented on the left -and the right. The text is justified at both margins and there is -paragraph indentation. Leaving a blank line between text produces a new -paragraph. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** quote ************** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="quote"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#tabbing">tabbing</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#quotation">quotation</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.16 quote</h4> - -<p><a name="index-quote-123"></a><a name="index-Quoted-text_002c-displaying-124"></a><a name="index-Displaying-quoted-text-125"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{quote} - text - \end{quote} -</pre> - <p>The margins of the <code>quote</code> environment are indented on the left and -the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank line -between text produces a new paragraph. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** tabbing ************ --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="tabbing"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#table">table</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#quote">quote</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.17 tabbing</h4> - -<p><a name="index-tabbing-126"></a><a name="index-Tab-stops_002c-using-127"></a><a name="index-Lining-text-up-in-columns-using-tab-stops-128"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{tabbing} - text \= more text \= still more text \= last text \\ - second row \> \> more \\ - . - . - . - \end{tabbing} -</pre> - <p>The <code>tabbing</code> environment provides a way to align text in columns. -It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much the way you do -with an ordinary typewriter. - - <p>It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is constant -and known in advance. - - <p>This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the <code>tabular</code> -environment. - - <p>The following commands can be used inside a <code>tabbing</code> enviroment: - - <dl> -<dt><code>\=</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_003d-129"></a> -Sets a tab stop at the current position. - - <br><dt><code>\></code><dd><a name="index-_005c_003e-130"></a> -Advances to the next tab stop. - - <br><dt><code>\<</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_003c-131"></a> -This command allows you to put something to the left of the -local margin without changing the margin. -Can only be used at the start of the line. - - <br><dt><code>\+</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_002b-132"></a> -Moves the left margin of the next and all the -following commands one tab stop to the right. - - <br><dt><code>\-</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_002d-_0028tabbing_0029-133"></a> -Moves the left margin of the next and all the -following commands one tab stop to the left. - - <br><dt><code>\'</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_0027-_0028tabbing_0029-134"></a> -Moves everything that you have typed so far in the -current column, i.e. everything from the most recent <code>\></code>, -<code>\<</code>, <code>\'</code>, <code>\\</code>, or <code>\kill</code> command, to the right -of the previous column, flush against the current column's tab stop. - - <br><dt><code>\`</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_0060-_0028tabbing_0029-135"></a> -Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab -stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last column -because there's no tab stop there. The <code>\`</code> command moves all the -text that follows it, up to the <code>\\</code> or <code>\end{tabbing}</code> -command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing -environment. There must be no <code>\></code> or <code>\'</code> command between -the <code>\`</code> and the command that ends the line. - - <br><dt><code>\kill</code><dd><a name="index-_005ckill-136"></a> -Sets tab stops without producing -text. Works just like <code>\\</code> except that it throws away the -current line instead of producing output for it. The effect of any -<code>\=</code>, <code>\+</code> or <code>\-</code> commands in that line remain in -effect. - - <br><dt><code>\pushtabs</code><dd><a name="index-_005cpushtabs-137"></a> -Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for -temporarily changing tab stop positions in the middle of a -<code>tabbing</code> environment. - - <br><dt><code>\poptabs</code><dd><a name="index-_005cpoptabs-138"></a> -Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last <code>\pushtabs</code>. - - <br><dt><code>\a</code><dd><a name="index-_005ca-139"></a> -In a <code>tabbing</code> environment, the commands <code>\=</code>, <code>\'</code> and -<code>\`</code> do not produce accents as normal. Instead, the commands -<code>\a=</code>, <code>\a'</code> and <code>\a`</code> are used. -</dl> - - <p>This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format: - -<pre class="example"> \begin{tabbing} - function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ - \> begin \= \+ \\ - \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\ - fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\ - else \+ \\ - fact := 1; \-\- \\ - end;\\ - \end{tabbing} -</pre> - <!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** table ************** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="table"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#tabular">tabular</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#tabbing">tabbing</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.18 table</h4> - -<p><a name="index-table-140"></a><a name="index-Tables_002c-creating-141"></a><a name="index-Creating-tables-142"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{table}[placement] - - body of the table - - \caption{table title} - \end{table} -</pre> - <p>Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are -usually “floated” to a convenient place, like the top of a page. -Tables will not be split between two pages. - - <p>The optional argument <code>[placement]</code> determines where LaTeX will try -to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put -a float: - - <ul> -<li><code>h</code> : Here - at the position in the text where the table -environment appears. -<li><code>t</code> : Top - at the top of a text page. -<li><code>b</code> : Bottom - at the bottom of a text page. -<li><code>p</code> : Page of floats - on a separate float page, which is a page -containing no text, only floats. -</ul> - - <p>The standard <code>report</code> and <code>article</code> classes use the default -placement <code>[tbp]</code>. - - <p>The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, etc., -you wish. The <code>\caption</code> command allows you to title your table. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** tabular ************ --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="tabular"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#table">table</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.19 tabular</h4> - -<p><a name="index-tabular-143"></a><a name="index-Lines-in-tables-144"></a><a name="index-Lining-text-up-in-tables-145"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols} - column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ - . - . - . - \end{tabular} -</pre> - <p>or - -<pre class="example"> \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols} - column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ - . - . - . - \end{tabular*} -</pre> - <p>These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of -items, aligned vertically in columns. The mandatory and optional -arguments consist of: - - <dl> -<dt><code>width</code><dd>Specifies the width of the <code>tabular*</code> environment. There must be -rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the specified -width. -<br><dt><code>pos</code><dd>Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre of -the environment. - - <ul> -<li><code>t</code> - align on top row -<li><code>b</code> - align on bottom row -</ul> - - <br><dt><code>cols</code><dd>Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the -following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and -intercolumn material. - - <ul> -<li><code>l</code> - A column of left-aligned items. -<li><code>r</code> - A column of right-aligned items. -<li><code>c</code> - A column of centred items. -<li><code>|</code> - A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment. -<li><code>@{text}</code> - This inserts <code>text</code> in every row. An @-expression -suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any -desired space between the inserted text and the adjacent items must be -included in text. An <code>\extracolsep{wd}</code> command in an -@-expression causes an extra space of width <code>wd</code> to appear to the -left of all subsequent columns, until countermanded by another -<code>\extracolsep</code> command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this -extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An -<code>\extracolsep</code> command can be used only in an @-expression in the -<code>cols</code> argument. -<li><code>p{wd}</code> - Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of -width <code>wd</code>, as if it were the argument of a <code>\parbox[t]{wd}</code> -command. However, a <code>\\</code> may not appear in the item, except in the -following situations: - <ol type=1 start=1> -<li>inside an environment like <code>minipage</code>, <code>array</code>, or <code>tabular</code>. -<li>inside an explicit <code>\parbox</code>. -<li>in the scope of a <code>\centering</code>, <code>\raggedright</code>, or <code>\raggedleft</code> -declaration. The latter declarations must appear inside braces or an -environment when used in a <code>p</code>-column element. - </ol> -<li><code>*{num}{cols}</code> - Equivalent to <code>num</code> copies of -<code>cols</code>, where <code>num</code> is any positive integer and <code>cols</code> is -any list of column-specifiers, which may contain another -<code>*-expression</code>. - - </ul> - - </dl> - - <p>These commands can be used inside a <code>tabular</code> environment: - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005ccline">\cline</a>: Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005chline">\hline</a>: Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a>: Make an item spanning several columns. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cvline">\vline</a>: Draw a vertical line. -</ul> - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \cline **** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ccline"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chline">\hline</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#tabular">tabular</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.19.1 \cline</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005ccline-146"></a> -<code>\cline{i-j}</code> - - <p>The <code>\cline</code> command draws horizontal lines across the columns -specified, beginning in column <code>i</code> and ending in column <code>j</code>, -which are identified in the mandatory argument. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \hline **** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005chline"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccline">\cline</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#tabular">tabular</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.19.2 \hline</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005chline-147"></a> -The <code>\hline</code> command will draw a horizontal line the width of the -table. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and -between the rows of the table. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- ** \multicolumn * --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmulticolumn"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvline">\vline</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chline">\hline</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#tabular">tabular</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.19.3 \multicolumn</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmulticolumn-148"></a> -<code>\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\multicolumn</code> is used to make an entry that spans several -columns. The first mandatory argument, <code>cols</code>, specifies the -number of columns to span. The second mandatory argument, <code>pos</code>, -specifies the formatting of the entry; <code>c</code> for centred, <code>l</code> -for flushleft, <code>r</code> for flushright. The third mandatory argument, -<code>text</code>, specifies what text is to make up the entry. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \vline **** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cvline"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#tabular">tabular</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.19.4 \vline</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cvline-149"></a> -The <code>\vline</code> command will draw a vertical line extending the full -height and depth of its row. An <code>\hfill</code> command can be used to -move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an -@-expression. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** thebibliography **** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="thebibliography"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#theorem">theorem</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#tabular">tabular</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.20 thebibliography</h4> - -<p><a name="index-thebibliography-150"></a><a name="index-Bibliography_002c-creating-_0028manually_0029-151"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label} - \bibitem[label]{cite_key} - . - . - . - \end{thebibliography} -</pre> - <p>The <code>thebibliography</code> environment produces a bibliography or -reference list. In the <code>article</code> class, this reference list is -labelled “References”; in the <code>report</code> class, it is labelled -“Bibliography”. - - <ul> -<li><code>widest-label</code>: Text that, when printed, is approximately as wide -as the widest item label produces by the <code>\bibitem</code> commands. -</ul> - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a>: Specify a bibliography item. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005ccite">\cite</a>: Refer to a bibliography item. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cnocite">\nocite</a>: Include an item in the bibliography. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a>: Automatic generation of bibliographies. -</ul> - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \bibitem **** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cbibitem"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ccite">\cite</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.20.1 \bibitem</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cbibitem-152"></a> -<code>\bibitem[label]{cite_key}</code> - - <p>The <code>\bibitem</code> command generates an entry labelled by <code>label</code>. -If the <code>label</code> argument is missing, a number is generated as the -<code>label</code>, using the <code>enumi</code> counter. The <code>cite_key</code> is -any sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing -a comma. This command writes an entry on the <span class="file">.aux</span> file -containing <code>cite_key</code> and the item's <code>label</code>. When this -<span class="file">.aux</span> file is read by the <code>\begin{document}</code> command, the -item's <code>label</code> is associated with <code>cite_key</code>, causing the -reference to <code>cite_key</code> by a <code>\cite</code> command to produce the -associated <code>label</code>. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \cite ******* --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ccite"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnocite">\nocite</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.20.2 \cite</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005ccite-153"></a> -<code>\cite[text]{key_list}</code> - - <p>The <code>key_list</code> argument is a list of citation keys. This command -generates an in-text citation to the references associated with the keys -in <code>key_list</code> by entries on the <span class="file">.aux</span> file read by the -<code>\begin{document}</code> command. - - <p>The optional <code>text</code> argument will appear after the citation, -i.e. <code>\cite[p. 2]{knuth}</code> might produce `[Knuth, p. 2]'. - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \nocite ***** --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnocite"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccite">\cite</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.20.3 \nocite</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnocite-154"></a> -<code>\nocite{key_list}</code> - - <p>The <code>\nocite</code> command produces no text, but writes <code>key_list</code>, -which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the <span class="file">.aux</span> file. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- *** Using BibTeX ***** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Using-BibTeX"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnocite">\nocite</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.20.4 Using BibTeX</h5> - -<p><a name="index-Using-BibTeX-155"></a><a name="index-BibTeX_002c-using-156"></a><a name="index-Bibliography_002c-creating-_0028automatically_0029-157"></a><a name="index-_005cbibliographystyle-158"></a><a name="index-_005cbibliography-159"></a> -If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if -you need a bibliography of more than a couple of titles) to maintain -your bibliography, you don't use the <code>thebibliography</code> -environment. Instead, you include the lines - -<pre class="example"> \bibliographystyle{style} - \bibliography{bibfile} -</pre> - <p>where <code>style</code> refers to a file <code>style.bst</code>, which defines how -your citations will look. The standard styles distributed with BibTeX -are: - - <dl> -<dt><code>alpha</code><dd>Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of -publication. -<br><dt><code>plain</code><dd>Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric. -<br><dt><code>unsrt</code><dd>Like <code>plain</code>, but entries are in order of citation. -<br><dt><code>abbrv</code><dd>Like <code>plain</code>, but more compact labels. -</dl> - - <p>In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored to the -demands of various publications. - - <p>The argument to <code>\bibliography</code> refers to the file -<code>bibfile.bib</code>, which should contain your database in BibTeX -format. Only the entries referred to via <code>\cite</code> and <code>\nocite</code> -will be listed in the bibliography. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** theorem ************ --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="theorem"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#titlepage">titlepage</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.21 theorem</h4> - -<p><a name="index-theorem-160"></a><a name="index-Theorems_002c-typesetting-161"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{theorem} - theorem text - \end{theorem} -</pre> - <p>The <code>theorem</code> environment produces “Theorem x” in boldface followed -by your theorem text. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** titlepage ********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="titlepage"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#theorem">theorem</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.22 titlepage</h4> - -<p><a name="index-titlepage-162"></a><a name="index-Making-a-title-page-163"></a><a name="index-Title-pages_002c-creating-164"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{titlepage} - text - \end{titlepage} -</pre> - <p>The <code>titlepage</code> environment creates a title page, i.e. a page with no -printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page to be -numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. The -<code>\today</code> command comes in handy for title pages. -<a name="index-_005ctoday-165"></a> -Note that you can use the <code>\maketitle</code> (see <a href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>) command to -produce a standard title page. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** verbatim *********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="verbatim"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#verse">verse</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#titlepage">titlepage</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.23 verbatim</h4> - -<p><a name="index-verbatim-166"></a><a name="index-Simulating-typed-text-167"></a><a name="index-Typed-text_002c-simulating-168"></a><a name="index-Programs_002c-typesetting-169"></a><a name="index-Computer-programs_002c-typesetting-170"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{verbatim} - text - \end{verbatim} -</pre> - <p>The <code>verbatim</code> environment is a paragraph-making environment that -gets LaTeX to print exactly what you type in. It turns LaTeX into a -typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same effect that -they would on a typewriter. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cverb">\verb</a>: The macro form of the <code>verbatim</code> environment. -</ul> - -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- *** \verb ******* --> -<!-- ***************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cverb"></a>Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#verbatim">verbatim</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.23.1 \verb</h5> - -<p><a name="index-_005cverb-171"></a><a name="index-Verbatim-text-172"></a> - - <p><code>\verb char literal_text char</code> - - <p><code>\verb*char literal_text char</code> - - <p>Typesets <code>literal_text</code> exactly as typed, including special -characters and spaces, using a typewriter (<code>\tt</code>) type style. -There may be no space between <code>\verb</code> or <code>\verb*</code> and -<code>char</code> (space is shown here only for clarity). The <code>*-form</code> -differs only in that spaces are printed - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** verse ************** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="verse"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.6.24 verse</h4> - -<p><a name="index-verse-173"></a><a name="index-Poetry_002c-an-environment-for-174"></a> -<pre class="example"> \begin{verse} - text - \end{verse} -</pre> - <p>The <code>verse</code> environment is designed for poetry, though you may find -other uses for it. - - <p>The margins are indented on the left and the right. Separate the lines -of each stanza with <code>\\</code>, and use one or more blank lines to -separate the stanzas. - -<!-- ************************************ --> -<!-- **** LEVEL2 Starts Here again. **** --> -<!-- ************************************ --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** Footnotes ********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Footnotes"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Layout">Layout</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Environments">Environments</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.7 Footnotes</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Footnotes_002c-creating-175"></a> -Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be -produced with one command, the <code>\footnote</code> command. They can also -be produced with two commands, the <code>\footnotemark</code> and the -<code>\footnotetext</code> commands. See the specific command for information -on why you would use one over the other. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cfootnote">\footnote</a>: Insert a footnote. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a>: Insert footnote mark only. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</a>: Insert footnote text only. -</ul> - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \footnote ******* --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cfootnote"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.7.1 \footnote</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cfootnote-176"></a> -<code>\footnote[number]{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\footnote</code> command places the numbered footnote <code>text</code> at -the bottom of the current page. The optional argument, <code>number</code>, -is used to change the default footnote number. This command can only be -used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you cannot use it in sectioning -commands like <code>\chapter</code>, in figures, tables or in a <code>tabular</code> -environment. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \footnotemark *** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cfootnotemark"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfootnote">\footnote</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.7.2 \footnotemark</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cfootnotemark-177"></a> -The <code>\footnotemark</code> command puts the footnote <code>number</code> in the -text. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. The text of -the footnote is supplied by the <code>\footnotetext</code> command. - - <p>This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote markers -referring to the same footnote by using - - <p><code>\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]</code> - - <p>after the first <code>\footnote</code> command. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \footnotetext *** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cfootnotetext"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.7.3 \footnotetext</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cfootnotetext-178"></a> -<code>\footnotetext[number]{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\footnotetext</code> command produces the <code>text</code> to be placed -at the bottom of the page. This command can come anywhere after the -<code>\footnotemark</code> command. The <code>\footnotetext</code> command must -appear in outer paragraph mode. - - <p>The optional argument, <code>number</code>, is used to change the default -footnote number. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ******* Lengths ********* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Lengths"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Letters">Letters</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Layout">Layout</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.8 Lengths</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Lengths_002c-defining-and-using-179"></a> -A <code>length</code> is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a -length as an argument. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cnewlength">\newlength</a>: Define a new length. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a>: Set the value of a length. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a>: Add a quantity to a length. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a>: Set a length to the depth of something. -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a>: Set a length to the height of something. -<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a>: Set a length to the width of something. -<li><a accesskey="7" href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a>: Lengths that are, like, predefined. -</ul> - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \newlength ****** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewlength"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.8.1 \newlength</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewlength-180"></a><a name="index-Lengths_002c-defining-a-new-181"></a> -<code>\newlength{\gnat}</code> - - <p>The <code>\newlength</code> command defines the mandatory argument, -<code>\gnat</code>, as a <code>length</code> command with a value of <code>0in</code>. An -error occurs if a <code>\gnat</code> command already exists. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \setlength ****** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csetlength"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewlength">\newlength</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.8.2 \setlength</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csetlength-182"></a><a name="index-Lengths_002c-setting-value-of-183"></a> -<code>\setlength{\gnat}{length}</code> - - <p>The <code>\setlength</code> command is used to set the value of a -<code>length</code> command. The <code>length</code> argument can be expressed in -any terms of length LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (<code>in</code>), -millimetres (<code>mm</code>), points (<code>pt</code>), etc. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \addtolength **** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005caddtolength"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.8.3 \addtolength</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005caddtolength-184"></a><a name="index-Lengths_002c-adding-to-185"></a> -<code>\addtolength{\gnat}{length}</code> - - <p>The <code>\addtolength</code> command increments a “length command” by the -amount specified in the <code>length</code> argument. It can be a negative -amount. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \settodepth ***** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csettodepth"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.8.4 \settodepth</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csettodepth-186"></a> -<code>\settodepth{\gnat}{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\settodepth</code> command sets the value of a <code>length</code> command -equal to the depth of the <code>text</code> argument. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \settoheight ***** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csettoheight"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.8.5 \settoheight</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csettoheight-187"></a> -<code>\settoheight{\gnat}{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\settoheight</code> command sets the value of a <code>length</code> command -equal to the height of the <code>text</code> argument. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- **** \settowidth ***** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csettowidth"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.8.6 \settowidth</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csettowidth-188"></a> -<code>\settowidth{\gnat}{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\settowidth</code> command sets the value of a <code>length</code> command -equal to the width of the <code>text</code> argument. - -<!-- ***************************** --> -<!-- **** Predefined lengths ***** --> -<!-- ***************************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Predefined-lengths"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.8.7 Predefined lengths</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Lengths_002c-predefined-189"></a><a name="index-Predefined-lengths-190"></a> -<code>\width</code> -<a name="index-_005cwidth-191"></a> -<code>\height</code> -<a name="index-_005cheight-192"></a> -<code>\depth</code> -<a name="index-_005cdepth-193"></a> -<code>\totalheight</code> -<a name="index-_005ctotalheight-194"></a> -These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making -commands See <a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a>. They specify the natural width etc. of -the text in the box. <code>\totalheight</code> equals <code>\height</code> + -<code>\depth</code>. To make a box with the text stretched to double the -natural size, e.g., say - - <p><code>\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}</code> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ******* Letters ********* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Letters"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.9 Letters</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Letters-195"></a><a name="index-Creating-letters-196"></a> -You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and business. The -<code>letter</code> document class is designed to make a number of letters at -once, although you can make just one if you so desire. - - <p>Your <span class="file">.tex</span> source file has the same minimum commands as the other -document classes, i.e., you must have the following commands as a -minimum: - -<pre class="example"> \documentclass{letter} - \begin{document} - ... letters ... - \end{document} -</pre> - <p>Each letter is a <code>letter</code> environment, whose argument is the name -and address of the recipient. For example, you might have: - -<pre class="example"> \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St. - \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA} - ... - \end{letter} -</pre> - <p>The letter itself begins with the <code>\opening</code> command. The text of -the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input. Commands that -make no sense in a letter, like <code>\chapter</code>, do not work. The letter -closes with a <code>\closing</code> command. - - <p>After the <code>closing</code>, you can have additional material. The -<code>\cc</code> command produces the usual “cc: ...”. There's also a similar -<code>\encl</code> command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands, -use <code>\\</code> to separate the items. - - <p>These commands are used with the <code>letter</code> class: - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005caddress">\address</a>: Your return address. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005ccc">\cc</a>: Cc list. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a>: Saying goodbye. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cencl">\encl</a>: List of enclosed material. -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005clocation">\location</a>: Your organisation's address. -<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a>: Making address labels. -<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005cname">\name</a>: Your name, for the return address. -<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005copening">\opening</a>: Saying hello. -<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005cps">\ps</a>: Adding a postscript. -<li><a href="#_005csignature">\signature</a>: Your signature. -<li><a href="#_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a>: Allow page breaks. -<li><a href="#_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a>: Disallow page breaks. -<li><a href="#_005ctelephone">\telephone</a>: Your phone number. -</ul> - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- ** \address ** --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005caddress"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ccc">\cc</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Letters">Letters</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.1 \address</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005caddress-197"></a> -<code>\address{Return address}</code> - - <p>The return address, as it should appear on the letter and the envelope. -Separate lines of the address should be separated by <code>\\</code> commands. -If you do not make an <code>\address</code> declaration, then the letter will -be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard letterhead. -(See <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>, for details on your local implementation). If you -give an <code>\address</code> declaration, then the letter will be formatted -as a personal letter. - -<!-- ************* --> -<!-- ** \cc ****** --> -<!-- ************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ccc"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddress">\address</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.2 \cc</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005ccc-198"></a><a name="index-Cc-list-199"></a> -<code>\cc{Kate Schechter\\Rob McKenna}</code> - - <p>Generate a list of other persons the letter was sent to. Each name is -printed on a separate line. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \closing ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cclosing"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cencl">\encl</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccc">\cc</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.3 \closing</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cclosing-200"></a><a name="index-Letters_002c-ending-201"></a> -<code>\closing{text}</code> - - <p>The letter closes with a <code>\closing</code> command, i.e., -<pre class="example"> \closing{Best Regards,} -</pre> - <!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \encl ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cencl"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005clocation">\location</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.4 \encl</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cencl-202"></a><a name="index-Enclosed-material-203"></a> -<code>\encl{CV\\Certificates}</code> - - <p>Generate a list of enclosed material. - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- * \location ** --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005clocation"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cencl">\encl</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.5 \location</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005clocation-204"></a> -<code>\location{address}</code> - - <p>This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only appears -if the <code>firstpage</code> pagestyle is selected. - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- * \makelabels * --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmakelabels"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cname">\name</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005clocation">\location</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.6 \makelabels</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmakelabels-205"></a> -<code>\makelabels{number}</code> - - <p>If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create a sheet of -address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \name ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cname"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005copening">\opening</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.7 \name</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cname-206"></a> -<code>\name{June Davenport}</code> - - <p>Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return -address. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \opening ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005copening"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cps">\ps</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cname">\name</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.8 \opening</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005copening-207"></a><a name="index-Letters_002c-starting-208"></a> -<code>\opening{text}</code> - - <p>The letter begins with the <code>\opening</code> command. The mandatory -argument, <code>text</code>, is whatever text you wish to start your letter, -i.e., -<pre class="example"> \opening{Dear Joe,} -</pre> - <!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \ps ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cps"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csignature">\signature</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005copening">\opening</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.9 \ps</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cps-209"></a> -<code>\ps</code> - - <p>Use this command before a postscript. - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- * \signature * --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csignature"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cps">\ps</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.10 \signature</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csignature-210"></a> -<code>\signature{Harvey Swick}</code> - - <p>Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the -space for your signature. Items that should go on separate lines should -be separated by <code>\\</code> commands. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \startbreaks ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cstartbreaks"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csignature">\signature</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.11 \startbreaks</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cstartbreaks-211"></a> -<code>\startbreaks</code> - - <p>Used after a <code>\stopbreaks</code> command to allow page breaks again. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \stopbreaks ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cstopbreaks"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ctelephone">\telephone</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.12 \stopbreaks</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cstopbreaks-212"></a> -<code>\stopbreaks</code> - - <p>Inhibit page breaks until a <code>\startbreaks</code> command occurs. - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- * \telephone * --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ctelephone"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.9.13 \telephone</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005ctelephone-213"></a> -<code>\telephone{number}</code> - - <p>This is your telephone number. This only appears if the -<code>firstpage</code> pagestyle is selected. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- * Line & Page Breaking ** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Line-_0026-Page-Breaking"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Letters">Letters</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.10 Line & Page Breaking</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Page-Breaking-214"></a><a name="index-Line-Breaking-215"></a><a name="index-Page-Formatting-216"></a> -The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to -translate your input file into a string of glyphs and spaces. To -produce a printed document, this string must be broken into lines, and -these lines must be broken into pages. In some environments, you do the -line breaking yourself with the <code>\\</code> command, but LaTeX usually -does it for you. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005c_005c">\\</a>: Start a new line. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a>: Insert explicit hyphenation. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a>: Start a new right-hand page. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a>: Start a new page. -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a>: Enlarge the current page a bit. -<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a>: Be fussy about line breaking. -<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a>: Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word. -<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a>: Break the line. -<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a>: Break the line prematurely. -<li><a href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a>: Start a new page. -<li><a href="#_005cnolinebreak">\nolinebreak</a>: Don't break the current line. -<li><a href="#_005cnopagebreak">\nopagebreak</a>: Don't make a page break here. -<li><a href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a>: Please make a page break here. -<li><a href="#_005csloppy">\sloppy</a>: Be sloppy about line breaking. -</ul> - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ****** \\ ******** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005c_005c"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.1 \\</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005c_005c-217"></a><a name="index-New-line_002c-starting-218"></a> -<code>\\[*][extra-space]</code> - - <p>The <code>\\</code> command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an -optional argument, <code>extra-space</code>, that specifies how much extra -vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a -negative amount. - - <p>The <code>\\*</code> command is the same as the ordinary <code>\\</code> command -except that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line. - -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- ** \- (hyphenation) ** --> -<!-- ********************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005c_005c">\\</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.2 \-</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029-219"></a><a name="index-Hyphenation_002c-forcing-220"></a> -The <code>\-</code> command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that -point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find all -correct hyphenation points. The <code>\-</code> command is used for the -exceptional cases. - - <p>Note that when you insert <code>\-</code> commands in a word, the word will -only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation -points that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen. - -<!-- ******************** --> -<!-- * \cleardoublepage * --> -<!-- ******************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ccleardoublepage"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.3 \cleardoublepage</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005ccleardoublepage-221"></a><a name="index-Starting-on-a--right_002dhand-page-222"></a> -The <code>\cleardoublepage</code> command ends the current page and causes all -figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. -In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand -(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \clearpage **** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cclearpage"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.4 \clearpage</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cclearpage-223"></a><a name="index-Flushing-a-page-224"></a> -The <code>\clearpage</code> command ends the current page and causes all -figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \enlargethispage ** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cenlargethispage"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.5 \enlargethispage</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cenlargethispage-225"></a><a name="index-Enlarge-current-page-226"></a> -<code>\enlargethispage{size}</code> - - <p><code>\enlargethispage*{size}</code> - - <p>Enlarge the <code>\textheight</code> for the current page by the specified -amount; e.g. <code>\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}</code> will allow one -additional line. - - <p>The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as -much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit -<code>\pagebreak</code>. - -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cfussy"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.6 \fussy</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cfussy-227"></a> -<code>\fussy</code> - - <p>This declaration (which is the default) makes TeX more fussy about line -breaking. This can avoids too much space between words, but may produce -overfull boxes. - - <p>This command cancels the effect of a previous <code>\sloppy</code> command. <a href="#_005csloppy">\sloppy</a> - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \hyphenation ** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005chyphenation"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.7 \hyphenation</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005chyphenation-228"></a><a name="index-Hyphenation_002c-defining-229"></a> -<code>\hyphenation{words}</code> - - <p>The <code>\hyphenation</code> command declares allowed hyphenation points, -where <code>words</code> is a list of words, separated by spaces, in which -each hyphenation point is indicated by a <code>-</code> character. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \linebreak **** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005clinebreak"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.8 \linebreak</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005clinebreak-230"></a><a name="index-Line-breaks-231"></a> -<code>\linebreak[number]</code> - - <p>The <code>\linebreak</code> command tells LaTeX to break the current line at -the point of the command. With the optional argument, <code>number</code>, -you can convert the <code>\linebreak</code> command from a demand to a -request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the -number, the more insistent the request is. - - <p>The <code>\linebreak</code> command causes LaTeX to stretch the line so it -extends to the right margin. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \newline ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewline"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.9 \newline</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewline-232"></a><a name="index-New-line_002c-starting-_0028paragraph-mode_0029-233"></a> -The <code>\newline</code> command breaks the line right where it is. It can -only be used in paragraph mode. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \newpage ****** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewpage"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnolinebreak">\nolinebreak</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.10 \newpage</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewpage-234"></a><a name="index-New-Page-235"></a> -The <code>\newpage</code> command ends the current page. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- * \nolinebreak *** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnolinebreak"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnopagebreak">\nopagebreak</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.11 \nolinebreak</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnolinebreak-236"></a> -<code>\nolinebreak[number]</code> - - <p>The <code>\nolinebreak</code> command prevents LaTeX from breaking the current -line at the point of the command. With the optional argument, -<code>number</code>, you can convert the <code>\nolinebreak</code> command from a -demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The -higher the number, the more insistent the request is. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \nopagebreak ** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnopagebreak"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnolinebreak">\nolinebreak</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.12 \nopagebreak</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnopagebreak-237"></a> -<code>\nopagebreak[number]</code> - - <p>The <code>\nopagebreak</code> command prevents LaTeX from breaking the current -page at the point of the command. With the optional argument, -<code>number</code>, you can convert the <code>\nopagebreak</code> command from a -demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The -higher the number, the more insistent the request is. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \pagebreak **** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cpagebreak"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csloppy">\sloppy</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnopagebreak">\nopagebreak</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.13 \pagebreak</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cpagebreak-238"></a><a name="index-Page-break_002c-forcing-239"></a> -<code>\pagebreak[number]</code> - - <p>The <code>\pagebreak</code> command tells LaTeX to break the current page at -the point of the command. With the optional argument, <code>number</code>, -you can convert the <code>\pagebreak</code> command from a demand to a -request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the -number, the more insistent the request is. - -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csloppy"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.10.14 \sloppy</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csloppy-240"></a> -<code>\sloppy</code> - - <p>This declaration makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. This can -prevent overfull boxes, but may leave too much space between words. - - <p>Lasts until a <code>\fussy</code> command is issued. <a href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a>. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- *** Making Paragraphs *** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Making-Paragraphs"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.11 Making Paragraphs</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Making-paragraphs-241"></a><a name="index-Paragraphs-242"></a> -A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines — lines not -containing even a <code>%</code>. A blank line should not appear where a new -paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of -a sectioning command. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cindent">\indent</a>: Indent this paragraph. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a>: Do not indent this paragraph. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cpar">\par</a>: Another way of writing a blank line. -</ul> - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \indent ******* --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cindent"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.11.1 \indent</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cindent-243"></a><a name="index-Indent_002c-forcing-244"></a> -<code>\indent</code> - - <p>This produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of the -paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph indentation where it -would otherwise be suppressed. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \noindent ***** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnoindent"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpar">\par</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cindent">\indent</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.11.2 \noindent</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnoindent-245"></a><a name="index-Indent_002c-suppressing-246"></a> -<code>\noindent</code> - - <p>When used at the beginning of the paragraph, it suppresses the paragraph -indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \par ********** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cpar"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.11.3 \par</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cpar-247"></a><a name="index-Paragraph_002c-starting-a-new-248"></a> -Equivalent to a blank line; often used to make command or environment -definitions easier to read. - -<!-- ******************** --> -<!-- *** Margin Notes *** --> -<!-- ******************** --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Margin-Notes"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.12 Margin Notes</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Margin-Notes-249"></a><a name="index-Notes-in-the-margin-250"></a><a name="index-Remarks-in-the-margin-251"></a> -The command <code>\marginpar[left]{right}</code> creates a note in the margin. -The first line will be at the same height as the line in the text where -the <code>\marginpar</code> occurs. - - <p>When you only specify the mandatory argument <code>right</code>, the text will -be placed - - <ul> -<li>in the right margin for one-sided layout -<li>in the outside margin for two-sided layout -<li>in the nearest margin for two-column layout. -</ul> - - <p>By issuing the command <code>\reversemarginpar</code>, you can force the marginal -notes to go into the opposite (inside) margin. - - <p>When you specify both arguments, <code>left</code> is used for the left -margin, and <code>right</code> is used for the right margin. - - <p>The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable -hyphenation by prefixing the first word with a <code>\hspace{0pt}</code> -command. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** Math Formulae ****** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Math-Formulae"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Modes">Modes</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.13 Math Formulae</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Math-Formulae-252"></a><a name="index-Formulae_002c-maths-253"></a><a name="index-Math-mode_002c-entering-254"></a><a name="index-_005c_0028-255"></a><a name="index-_005c_0029-256"></a><a name="index-_005c_005b-257"></a><a name="index-_005c_005d-258"></a><a name="index-_0024-259"></a> -There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode: - - <dl> -<dt><code>math</code><dd>For Formulae that appear right in the text. -<br><dt><code>displaymath</code><dd>For Formulae that appear on their own line. -<br><dt><code>equation</code><dd>The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation -number in the right margin. -</dl> - - <p>The <code>math</code> environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, -but the <code>displaymath</code> and <code>equation</code> environments can be used -only in paragraph mode. The <code>math</code> and <code>displaymath</code> -environments are used so often that they have the following short forms: - -<pre class="example"> \(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math} - - \[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath} -</pre> - <p>In fact, the <code>math</code> environment is so common that it has an even -shorter form: - -<pre class="example"> $ ... $ instead of \(...\) -</pre> - <p><a name="index-exponent-260"></a> - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts & Superscripts</a>: Also known as exponent or index. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a>: Various mathematical squiggles. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a>: Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a>: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else. -</ul> - -<!-- ***************************** --> -<!-- * Subscripts & Superscripts * --> -<!-- ***************************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.13.1 Subscripts & Superscripts</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Superscript-261"></a><a name="index-Subscript-262"></a><a name="index-_005f-263"></a><a name="index-_005e-264"></a> -To get an expression <i>exp</i> to appear as a subscript, you just type -<code>_{</code><i>exp</i><code>}</code>. To get <i>exp</i> to appear as a superscript, you type -<code>^{</code><i>exp</i><code>}</code>. LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of -that stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing when -something has both a subscript and a superscript. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** Math Symbols ** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Math-Symbols"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts & Superscripts</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.13.2 Math Symbols</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Maths-symbols-265"></a><a name="index-Symbols-266"></a><a name="index-Greek-letters-267"></a> - -<!-- ************************ --> -<!-- * Spacing in Math Mode * --> -<!-- ************************ --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Spacing-in-Math-Mode"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.13.3 Spacing in Math Mode</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Spacing_002c-within-Math-mode-268"></a><a name="index-Math-mode_002c-spacing-269"></a> - - <p>In a <code>math</code> environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and puts -in the spacing that it thinks is best. LaTeX formats mathematics the -way it's done in mathematics texts. If you want different spacing, -LaTeX provides the following four commands for use in math mode: - - <p><a name="index-_005c_003b-270"></a><a name="index-_005cCOLON-271"></a><a name="index-_005c_002c-272"></a><a name="index-_005c_0021-273"></a> - <ol type=1 start=1> -<li><code>\;</code> - a thick space -<li><code>\:</code> - a medium space -<li><code>\,</code> - a thin space -<li><code>\!</code> - a negative thin space - </ol> - -<!-- ******************* --> -<!-- * Math Miscellany * --> -<!-- ******************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Math-Miscellany"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.13.4 Math Miscellany</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Maths-Miscellany-274"></a> - <dl> -<dt><code>\cdots</code><dd><a name="index-_005ccdots-275"></a>Produces a horizontal ellipsis where the dots are raised to the centre -of the line. - - <br><dt><code>\ddots</code><dd><a name="index-_005cddots-276"></a>Produces a diagonal ellipsis. - - <br><dt><code>\frac{num}{den}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfrac-277"></a>Produces the fraction <code>num</code> divided by <code>den</code>. - - <br><dt><code>\ldots</code><dd><a name="index-_005cldots-278"></a>Produces an ellipsis. This command works in -any mode, not just math mode. - - <br><dt><code>\overbrace{text}</code><dd><a name="index-_005coverbrace-279"></a>Generates a brace over text. - - <br><dt><code>\overline{text}</code><dd><a name="index-_005coverline-280"></a>Causes the argument text to be overlined. - - <br><dt><code>\sqrt[root]{arg}</code><dd><a name="index-_005csqrt-281"></a>Produces the square root of its argument. The -optional argument, <code>root</code>, determines what root to produce, i.e., -the cube root of <code>x+y</code> would be typed as <code>$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$</code>. - - <br><dt><code>\underbrace{text}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cunderbrace-282"></a>Generates text with a brace underneath. - - <br><dt><code>\underline{text}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cunderline-283"></a>Causes the argument text to be underlined. -This command can also be used in paragraph and LR modes. - - <br><dt><code>\vdots</code><dd><a name="index-_005cvdots-284"></a>Produces a vertical ellipsis. - - </dl> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ******* Modes *********** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Modes"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.14 Modes</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Modes-285"></a><a name="index-Paragraph-mode-286"></a><a name="index-Math-mode-287"></a><a name="index-Left_002dto_002dright-mode-288"></a><a name="index-LR-mode-289"></a> - - <p>When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three -modes: - - <ul> -<li>Paragraph mode -<li>Math mode -<li>Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short -</ul> - - <p>LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a -different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. -Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when -LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands. - - <p>“Paragraph mode” is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is in when -processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your text into -lines and breaks the lines into pages. LaTeX is in “math mode” when -it's generating a mathematical formula. In “LR mode”, as in paragraph -mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of -words with spaces between them. However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX -keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. -Even if you put a hundred words into an <code>\mbox</code>, LaTeX would keep -typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then -complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line. - - <p>LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an <code>\mbox</code> -command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for -example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box. -There are also several text-producing commands and environments for -making a box that put LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box make by one of -these commands or environments will be called a <code>parbox</code>. When -LaTeX is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in -“inner paragraph mode”. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out -in, is called “outer paragraph mode”. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ***** Page Styles ******* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Page-Styles"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Modes">Modes</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.15 Page Styles</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Styles_002c-page-290"></a><a name="index-Page-styles-291"></a> -The <code>\documentclass</code> command determines the size and position of -the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>: Generate a title page. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a>: Set the style used for page numbers. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>: Change the headings/footings style. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cthispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a>: Change the headings/footings style for this page. -</ul> - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \maketitle **** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmaketitle"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.1 \maketitle</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Title-making-292"></a><a name="index-_005cmaketitle-293"></a> -<code>\maketitle</code> - - <p>The <code>\maketitle</code> command generates a title on a separate title page -- except in the <code>article</code> class, where the title normally goes at -the top of the first page. Information used to produce the title is -obtained from the following declarations: - - <p>See <a href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>, for the commands to give the information. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cauthor">\author</a>: Who wrote this stuff? -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cdate">\date</a>: The date the document was created. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a>: A special form of footnote. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005ctitle">\title</a>: How to set the document title. -</ul> - -<!-- *********** --> -<!-- * \author * --> -<!-- *********** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cauthor"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cdate">\date</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.2 \author</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cauthor-294"></a><a name="index-Author_002c-for-titlepage-295"></a> -<code>\author{names}</code> - - <p>The <code>\author</code> command declares the author(s), where <code>names</code> is -a list of authors separated by <code>\and</code> commands. Use <code>\\</code> to -separate lines within a single author's entry – for example, to give -the author's institution or address. - -<!-- *********** --> -<!-- ** \date ** --> -<!-- *********** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cdate"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cauthor">\author</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.3 \date</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cdate-296"></a><a name="index-Date_002c-for-titlepage-297"></a> -<code>\date{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\date</code> command declares <i>text</i> to be the document's date. With -no <code>\date</code> command, the current date is used. - -<!-- *********** --> -<!-- * \thanks * --> -<!-- *********** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cthanks"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ctitle">\title</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cdate">\date</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.4 \thanks</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cthanks-298"></a><a name="index-Thanks_002c-for-titlepage-299"></a> -<code>\thanks{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\thanks</code> command produces a <code>\footnote</code> to the title. - -<!-- *********** --> -<!-- * \title ** --> -<!-- *********** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ctitle"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.5 \title</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005ctitle-300"></a><a name="index-Title_002c-for-titlepage-301"></a> -<code>\title{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\title</code> command declares <code>text</code> to be the title. Use -<code>\\</code> to tell LaTeX where to start a new line in a long title. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- * \pagenumbering * --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cpagenumbering"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.6 \pagenumbering</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cpagenumbering-302"></a><a name="index-Page-numbering-303"></a> -<code>\pagenumbering{num_style}</code> - - <p>Specifies the style of page numbers. Possible values of <code>num_style</code> are: - - <ul> -<li><code>arabic</code> - Arabic numerals -<li><code>roman</code> - Lowercase Roman numerals -<li><code>Roman</code> - Uppercase Roman numerals -<li><code>alph</code> - Lowercase letters -<li><code>Alph</code> - Uppercase letters -</ul> - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- ** \pagestyle **** --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cpagestyle"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cthispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.7 \pagestyle</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cpagestyle-304"></a> -<code>\pagestyle{option}</code> - - <p>The <code>\pagestyle</code> command changes the style from the current page on -throughout the remainder of your document. - - <p>The valid options are: - - <ul> -<li><code>plain</code> - Just a plain page number. -<li><code>empty</code> - Produces empty heads and feet - no page numbers. -<li><code>headings</code> - Puts running headings on each page. The document -style specifies what goes in the headings. -<li><code>myheadings</code> - You specify what is to go in the heading with the -<code>\markboth</code> or the <code>\markright</code> commands. -</ul> - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cmarkboth">\markboth</a>: Set left and right headings. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cmarkright">\markright</a>: Set right heading only. -</ul> - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \markboth ** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmarkboth"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmarkright">\markright</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.8 \markboth</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmarkboth-305"></a> -<pre class="example"> \markboth{left head}{right head} -</pre> - <p>The <code>\markboth</code> command is used in -conjunction with the page style <code>myheadings</code> for setting -both the left and the right heading. You should note that a “left-hand -heading” is generated by the last <code>\markboth</code> command before the -end of the page, while a “right-hand heading” is generated by the first -<code>\markboth</code> or <code>\markright</code> that comes on the page if there is -one, otherwise by the last one before the page. - -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- ** \markright ** --> -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- LEVEL4 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmarkright"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmarkboth">\markboth</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.9 \markright</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmarkright-306"></a> -<pre class="example"> \markright{right head} -</pre> - <p>The <code>\markright</code> command is used in conjunction with the page style -<code>myheadings</code> for setting the right heading, leaving the left -heading unchanged. You should note that a “left-hand heading” is -generated by the last <code>\markboth</code> command before the end of the -page, while a “right-hand heading” is generated by the first -<code>\markboth</code> or <code>\markright</code> that comes on the page if there is -one, otherwise by the last one before the page. - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- * \thispagestyle * --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cthispagestyle"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.15.10 \thispagestyle</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cthispagestyle-307"></a> -<code>\thispagestyle{option}</code> - - <p>The <code>\thispagestyle</code> command works in the same manner as the -<code>\pagestyle</code> command except that it changes the style for the -current page only. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ***** Sectioning ******** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Sectioning"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.16 Sectioning</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Sectioning-308"></a><a name="index-_005cchapter-309"></a><a name="index-_005csubsubsection-310"></a><a name="index-_005csubsection-311"></a><a name="index-_005cparagraph-312"></a><a name="index-_005csubparagraph-313"></a> -Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units. - - <ul> -<li><code>\part</code> -<li><code>\chapter</code> (report and book class only) -<li><code>\section</code> -<li><code>\subsection</code> -<li><code>\subsubsection</code> -<li><code>\paragraph</code> -<li><code>\subparagraph</code> -</ul> - - <p>All sectioning commands take the same general form, i.e., - - <p><code>\chapter[optional]{title}</code> - - <p>In addition to providing the heading in the text, the mandatory argument -of the sectioning command can appear in two other places: - - <ol type=1 start=1> -<li>The table of contents -<li>The running head at the top of the page - </ol> - - <p>You may not want the same thing to appear in these other two places as -appears in the text heading. To handle this situation, the sectioning -commands have an <code>optional</code> argument that provides the text for -these other two purposes. - - <p>All sectioning commands have <code>*</code>-forms that print a <i>title</i>, -but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the table of -contents. - - <p><a name="index-_005cappendix-314"></a><a name="index-Appendix_002c-creating-315"></a> -<code>\appendix</code> - - <p>The <code>\appendix</code> command changes the way sectional units are -numbered. The <code>\appendix</code> command generates no text and does not -affect the numbering of parts. -The normal use of this command is something like - -<pre class="example"> \chapter{The First Chapter} - ... - \appendix - \chapter{The First Appendix} -</pre> - <!-- ************************* --> -<!-- **** Spaces & Boxes ***** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Spaces-_0026-Boxes"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.17 Spaces & Boxes</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Spaces-316"></a><a name="index-Boxes-317"></a> -All the predefined length parameters (see <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a>) can be -used in the arguments of the box-making commands. - -</li></ul> -<p>Horizontal space -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cdotfill">\dotfill</a>: Stretchable horizontal dots. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005chfill">\hfill</a>: Stretchable horizontal space. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005chrulefill">\hrulefill</a>: Stretchable horizontal rule. -<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005chspace">\hspace</a>: Fixed horizontal space. -Vertical space -<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a>: Fixed vertical space. -<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005cbigskip">\bigskip</a>: Fixed vertical space. -<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005cmedskip">\medskip</a>: Fixed vertical space. -<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005csmallskip">\smallskip</a>: Fixed vertical space. -<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005cvfill">\vfill</a>: Stretchable vertical space. -<li><a href="#_005cvspace">\vspace</a>: Fixed vertical space. -Boxes -<li><a href="#_005cfbox">\fbox</a>: Framebox. -<li><a href="#_005cframebox">\framebox</a>: Framebox, adjustable position. -<li><a href="#lrbox">lrbox</a>: An environment like \sbox. -<li><a href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>: Box, adjustable position. -<li><a href="#_005cmbox">\mbox</a>: Box. -<li><a href="#_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a>: Declare a name for saving a box. -<li><a href="#_005cparbox">\parbox</a>: Box with text in paragraph mode. -<li><a href="#_005craisebox">\raisebox</a>: Raise or lower text. -<li><a href="#_005crule">\rule</a>: Lines and squares. -<li><a href="#_005csavebox">\savebox</a>: Like \makebox, but save the text for later use. -<li><a href="#_005csbox">\sbox</a>: Like \mbox, but save the text for later use. -<li><a href="#_005cusebox">\usebox</a>: Print saved text. -</ul> - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \dotfill *** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cdotfill"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chfill">\hfill</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.1 \dotfill</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cdotfill-318"></a> -The <code>\dotfill</code> command produces a “rubber length” that produces dots -instead of just spaces. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \hfill ***** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005chfill"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chrulefill">\hrulefill</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cdotfill">\dotfill</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.2 \hfill</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005chfill-319"></a> -The <code>\hfill</code> fill command produces a “rubber length” which can -stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with spaces. - -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- ** \hrulefill ** --> -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005chrulefill"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chspace">\hspace</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chfill">\hfill</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.3 \hrulefill</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005chrulefill-320"></a> -The <code>\hrulefill</code> fill command produces a “rubber length” which can -stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal -rule. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \hspace **** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005chspace"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chrulefill">\hrulefill</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.4 \hspace</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005chspace-321"></a> -<code>\hspace[*]{length}</code> - - <p>The <code>\hspace</code> command adds horizontal space. The length of the -space can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e., -points, inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space -with an <code>\hspace</code> command. Adding negative space is like -backspacing. - - <p>LaTeX removes horizontal space that comes at the end of a line. If you -don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional <code>*</code> -argument. Then the space is never removed. - -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- ** \addvspace ** --> -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005caddvspace"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cbigskip">\bigskip</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chspace">\hspace</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.5 \addvspace</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005caddvspace-322"></a><a name="index-Vertical-space_002c-inserting-323"></a><a name="index-Space_002c-inserting-vertical-324"></a> -<code>\addvspace{length}</code> - - <p>The <code>\addvspace</code> command normally adds a vertical space of height -length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same -point in the output by a previous <code>\addvspace</code> command, then this -command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length -of the total vertical space equal to <code>length</code>. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \bigskip *** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cbigskip"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmedskip">\medskip</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.6 \bigskip</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cbigskip-325"></a> -The <code>\bigskip</code> command is equivalent to -<code>\vspace{bigskipamount}</code> where <code>bigskipamount</code> is determined -by the document class. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \medskip *** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmedskip"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csmallskip">\smallskip</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cbigskip">\bigskip</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.7 \medskip</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmedskip-326"></a> -The <code>\medskip</code> command is equivalent to -<code>\vspace{medskipamount}</code> where <code>medskipamount</code> is determined -by the document class. - -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- ** \smallskip ** --> -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csmallskip"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvfill">\vfill</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmedskip">\medskip</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.8 \smallskip</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csmallskip-327"></a> -<code>\smallskip</code> - - <p>The <code>\smallskip</code> command is equivalent to -<code>\vspace{smallskipamount}</code> where <code>smallskipamount</code> is -determined by the document class. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \vfill ***** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cvfill"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvspace">\vspace</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csmallskip">\smallskip</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.9 \vfill</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cvfill-328"></a> -The <code>\vfill</code> fill command produces a rubber length which can -stretch or shrink vertically. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \vspace **** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cvspace"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfbox">\fbox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cvfill">\vfill</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.10 \vspace</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cvspace-329"></a> -<code>\vspace[*]{length}</code> - - <p>The <code>\vspace</code> command adds vertical space. The length of the space -can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e., points, -inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space with an -<code>\vspace</code> command. - - <p>LaTeX removes vertical space that comes at the end of a page. If you -don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional <code>*</code> -argument. Then the space is never removed. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \fbox ****** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cfbox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cframebox">\framebox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cvspace">\vspace</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.11 \fbox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cfbox-330"></a> -<code>\fbox{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\fbox</code> command is exactly the same as the <code>\mbox</code> -command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that -it creates. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \framebox ** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cframebox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#lrbox">lrbox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfbox">\fbox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.12 \framebox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cframebox-331"></a> -<code>\framebox[width][position]{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\framebox</code> command is exactly the same as the <code>\makebox</code> -command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that -it creates. - - <p>The framebox command produces a rule of thickness <code>\fboxrule</code>, and -leaves a space <code>\fboxsep</code> between the rule and the contents of the -box. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** lrbox **** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="lrbox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cframebox">\framebox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.13 lrbox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-lrbox-332"></a> -<code>\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}</code> - - <p>This is the environment form of <code>\sbox</code>. - - <p>The text inside the environment is saved in the box <code>cmd</code>, which -must have been declared with <code>\newsavebox</code>. - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- ** \makebox ** --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmakebox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmbox">\mbox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#lrbox">lrbox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.14 \makebox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmakebox-333"></a> -<code>\makebox[width][position]{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\makebox</code> command creates a box just wide enough to contain -the <code>text</code> specified. The width of the box is specified by the -optional <code>width</code> argument. The position of the text within the box -is determined by the optional <code>position</code> argument. - - <ul> -<li><code>c</code> — centred (default) -<li><code>l</code> — flushleft -<li><code>r</code> — flushright -<li><code>s</code> — stretch from left to right margin. The text must contain -stretchable space for this to work. -</ul> - - <p>See <a href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \mbox ****** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cmbox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.15 \mbox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cmbox-334"></a> -<code>\mbox{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\mbox</code> command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text -created by its argument. - - <p>Use this command to prevent text from being split across lines. - -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- ** \newsavebox * --> -<!-- **************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cnewsavebox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cparbox">\parbox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmbox">\mbox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.16 \newsavebox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cnewsavebox-335"></a> -<code>\newsavebox{cmd}</code> - - <p>Declares <code>cmd</code>, which must be a command name that is not already -defined, to be a bin for saving boxes. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \parbox **** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cparbox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005craisebox">\raisebox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.17 \parbox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cparbox-336"></a> -<code>\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}</code> - - <p>A <code>parbox</code> is a box whose contents are created in <code>paragraph</code> -mode. The <code>\parbox</code> has two mandatory arguments: - - <ul> -<li><code>width</code> - specifies the width of the parbox, and -<li><code>text</code> - the text that goes inside the parbox. -</ul> - - <p>LaTeX will position a <code>parbox</code> so its centre lines up with the centre of -the text line. The optional <i>position</i> argument allows you -to line up either the top or bottom line in the parbox (default is top). - - <p>If the <i>height</i> argument is not given, the box will have the natural -height of the text. - - <p>The <i>inner-pos</i> argument controls the placement of the text inside the -box. If it is not specified, <i>position</i> is used. - - <ul> -<li><code>t</code> — text is placed at the top of the box. -<li><code>c</code> — text is centred in the box. -<li><code>b</code> — text is placed at the bottom of the box. -<li><code>s</code> — stretch vertically. The text must contain -vertically stretchable space for this to work. -</ul> - - <p>A <code>\parbox</code> command is used for a parbox containing a small piece -of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use -any of the paragraph-making environments inside a <code>\parbox</code> -argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones containing a -paragraph-making environment, you should use a <code>minipage</code> -environment See <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \raisebox ** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005craisebox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005crule">\rule</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cparbox">\parbox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.18 \raisebox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005craisebox-337"></a> -<code>\raisebox{distance}[extend-above][extend-below]{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\raisebox</code> command is used to raise or lower text. The first -mandatory argument specifies how high the text is to be raised (or -lowered if it is a negative amount). The text itself is processed in -<code>LR mode</code>. - - <p>Sometimes it's useful to make LaTeX think something has a different -size than it really does - or a different size than LaTeX would -normally think it has. The <code>\raisebox</code> command lets you tell -LaTeX how tall it is. - - <p>The first optional argument, <code>extend-above</code>, makes LaTeX think -that the text extends above the line by the amount specified. The -second optional argument, <code>extend-below</code>, makes LaTeX think that -the text extends below the line by the amount specified. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \rule ****** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005crule"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csavebox">\savebox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005craisebox">\raisebox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.19 \rule</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005crule-338"></a> -<code>\rule[raise-height]{width}{thickness}</code> - - <p>The <code>\rule</code> command is used to produce horizontal lines. The -arguments are defined as follows: - - <ul> -<li><code>raise-height</code> - specifies how high to raise the rule (optional) -<li><code>width</code> - specifies the length of the rule (mandatory) -<li><code>thickness</code> - specifies the thickness of the rule (mandatory) -</ul> - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \savebox *** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csavebox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csbox">\sbox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005crule">\rule</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.20 \savebox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csavebox-339"></a> -<pre class="example"> \savebox{cmd}[width][pos]{text} -</pre> - <p>This command typeset <code>text</code> in a box just as for <code>\makebox</code>. -However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in bin -<code>cmd</code>, which must have been declared with <code>\newsavebox</code>. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \sbox ****** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005csbox"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cusebox">\usebox</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csavebox">\savebox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.21 \sbox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005csbox-340"></a> -<code>\sbox{text}</code> - - <p>This commands typeset <code>text</code> in a box just as for <code>\mbox</code>. -However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in bin -<code>cmd</code>, which must have been declared with <code>\newsavebox</code>. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \usebox **** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cusebox"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csbox">\sbox</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.17.22 \usebox</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cusebox-341"></a> -<code>\usebox{cmd}</code> - - <p>Prints the box most recently saved in bin <code>cmd</code> by a -<code>\savebox</code> command. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ** Special Characters *** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Special-Characters"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.18 Special Characters</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Special-Characters-342"></a><a name="index-Characters_002c-special-343"></a><a name="index-Reserved-Characters-344"></a><a name="index-Characters_002c-reserved-345"></a> -The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called -“special printing characters”, or simply “special characters”. - -<pre class="example"> # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { } -</pre> - <p>Whenever you put one of these special characters into your file, you are -doing something special. If you simply want the character to be printed -just as any other letter, include a <code>\</code> in front of the character. -For example, <code>\$</code> will produce <code>$</code> in your output. - - <p>One exception to this rule is the <code>\</code> itself because <code>\\</code> has -its own special meaning. A <code>\</code> is produced by typing -<code>$\backslash$</code> in your file. - - <p>Also, <code>\~</code> means `place a tilde accent over the following letter', -so you will probably want to use <code>\verb</code> instead. - - <p><a name="index-_005cbackslash-346"></a><a name="index-_005csymbol-347"></a><a name="index-Accessing-any-character-of-a-font-348"></a> -In addition, you can access any character of a font once you know its -number by using the <code>\symbol</code> command. For example, the character -used for displaying spaces in the <code>\verb*</code> command has the code -decimal 32, so it can be typed as <code>\symbol{32}</code>. - - <p>You can also specify octal numbers with <code>'</code> or hexadecimal numbers -with <code>"</code>, so the previous example could also be written as -<code>\symbol{'40}</code> or <code>\symbol{"20}</code>. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ** Splitting the Input ** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Splitting-the-Input"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting & Ending</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.19 Splitting the Input</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Splitting-the-input-file-349"></a><a name="index-Input-file_002c-splitting-350"></a> - - <p>A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole -input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into -several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use, -there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type -when you run LaTeX. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cinclude">\include</a>: Conditionally include a file. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a>: Determine which files are included. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cinput">\input</a>: Unconditionally include a file. -</ul> - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \include *** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cinclude"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.19.1 \include</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cinclude-351"></a> -<code>\include{file}</code> - - <p>The <code>\include</code> command is used in conjunction with the -<code>\includeonly</code> command for selective inclusion of files. The -<code>file</code> argument is the first name of a file, denoting -<span class="file">file.tex</span>. If <code>file</code> is one the file names in the file list -of the <code>\includeonly</code> command or if there is no <code>\includeonly</code> -command, the <code>\include</code> command is equivalent to - -<pre class="example"> \clearpage \input{file} \clearpage -</pre> - <p>except that if the file <span class="file">file.tex</span> does not exist, then a warning -message rather than an error is produced. If the file is not in the -file list, the <code>\include</code> command is equivalent to <code>\clearpage</code>. - - <p>The <code>\include</code> command may not appear in the preamble or in a file -read by another <code>\include</code> command. - -<!-- ******************* --> -<!-- ** \includeonly *** --> -<!-- ******************* --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cincludeonly"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cinput">\input</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cinclude">\include</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.19.2 \includeonly</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cincludeonly-352"></a> -<code>\includeonly{</code><i>file_list</i><code>}</code> - - <p>The <code>\includeonly</code> command controls which files will be read in by -an <code>\include</code> command. <i>file_list</i> should be a comma-separated -list of filenames. Each filename must match exactly a filename specified -in a <code>\include</code> command. This command can only appear in the -preamble. - -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- ** \input ***** --> -<!-- *************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005cinput"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.19.3 \input</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005cinput-353"></a> -<code>\input{file}</code> - - <p>The <code>\input</code> command causes the indicated <code>file</code> to be read and -processed, exactly as if its contents had been inserted in the current -file at that point. The file name may be a complete file name with -extension or just a first name, in which case the file <span class="file">file.tex</span> -is used. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- *** Starting & Ending *** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Starting-_0026-Ending"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.20 Starting & Ending</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Starting-_0026-Ending-354"></a><a name="index-Ending-_0026-Starting-355"></a> -Your input file must contain the following commands as a minimum: - -<pre class="example"> \documentclass{class} - \begin{document} - ... your text goes here ... - \end{document} -</pre> - <p>where the <code>class</code> selected is one of the valid classes for LaTeX. -See <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a>, (and see <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>), for details of the -various document classes available locally. - - <p>You may include other LaTeX commands between the <code>\documentclass</code> -and the <code>\begin{document}</code> commands (i.e., in the `preamble'). - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- *** Table of Contents *** --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Table-of-Contents"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting & Ending</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.21 Table of Contents</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Table-of-Contents_002c-creating-356"></a> - - <p>A table of contents is produced with the -<code>\tableofcontents</code> -<a name="index-_005ctableofcontents-357"></a>command. You put the command right where you want the table of contents -to go; LaTeX does the rest for you. It produces a heading, but it does -not automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the -table of contents, include a <code>\newpage</code> command after the -<code>\tableofcontents</code> command. - - <p>There are similar commands -<code>\listoffigures</code> -<a name="index-_005clistoffigures-358"></a>and -<code>\listoftables</code> -<a name="index-_005clistoftables-359"></a> for producing a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. -Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents. - - <p>NOTE: If you want any of these items to be generated, you cannot have -the -<code>\nofiles</code> -<a name="index-_005cnofiles-360"></a>command in your document. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a>: Add an entry to table of contents etc. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005caddtocontents">\addtocontents</a>: Add text directly to table of contents file etc. -</ul> - -<!-- ******************** --> -<!-- * \addcontentsline * --> -<!-- ******************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005caddcontentsline"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005caddtocontents">\addtocontents</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.21.1 \addcontentsline</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005caddcontentsline-361"></a> -<code>\addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}</code> - - <p>The <code>\addcontentsline</code> command adds an entry to the specified list -or table where: - - <ul> -<li><code>file</code> is the extension of the file on which information is to be -written: <code>toc</code> (table of contents), <code>lof</code> (list of figures), -or <code>lot</code> (list of tables). -<li><code>sec_unit</code> controls the formatting of the entry. It should be one -of the following, depending upon the value of the file argument: - <ol type=1 start=1> -<li><code>toc</code> — the name of the sectional unit, such as part or subsection. -<li><code>lof</code> — figure -<li><code>lot</code> — table - </ol> -<li><code>entry</code> is the text of the entry. -</ul> - -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- * \addtocontents * --> -<!-- ****************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005caddtocontents"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.21.2 \addtocontents</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005caddtocontents-362"></a> -<code>\addtocontents{file}{text}</code> - - <p>The <code>\addtocontents</code> command adds text (or formatting commands) directly -to the file that generates the table of contents or list of figures or -tables. - - <ul> -<li><code>file</code> is the extension of the file on which information is to be -written: <code>toc</code> (table of contents), <code>lof</code> (list of figures), -or <code>lot</code> (list of tables). -<li><code>text</code> is the information to be written. -</ul> - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- * Terminal Input/Output * --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Terminal-Input_002fOutput"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.22 Terminal Input/Output</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Input_002fOutput-363"></a><a name="index-Terminal-Input_002fOutput-364"></a> - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005ctypein">\typein</a>: Read text from the terminal. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005ctypeout">\typeout</a>: Write text to the terminal. -</ul> - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- * \typein **** --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ctypein"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ctypeout">\typeout</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.22.1 \typein</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005ctypein-365"></a> -<code>\typein[cmd]{msg}</code> - - <p>Prints <code>msg</code> on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and wait for -you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the <code>cmd</code> -argument is missing, the typed input is processed as if it had been -included in the input file in place of the <code>\typein</code> command. If -the <code>cmd</code> argument is present, it must be a command name. This -command name is then defined or redefined to be the typed input. - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- * \typeout *** --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="_005ctypeout"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ctypein">\typein</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.22.2 \typeout</h4> - -<p><a name="index-_005ctypeout-366"></a> -<code>\typeout{msg}</code> - - <p>Prints <code>msg</code> on the terminal and in the <code>log</code> file. Commands -in <code>msg</code> that are defined with <code>\newcommand</code> or -<code>\renewcommand</code> are replaced by their definitions before being -printed. - - <p>LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as -a single space and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to -<code>msg</code>. A <code>\space</code> command in <code>msg</code> causes a single space -to be printed. A <code>^^J</code> in <code>msg</code> prints a newline. - -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- ***** Typefaces ********* --> -<!-- ************************* --> -<!-- LEVEL2 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Typefaces"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h3 class="section">2.23 Typefaces</h3> - -<p><a name="index-Typefaces-367"></a><a name="index-Fonts-368"></a> -The <code>typeface</code> is specified by giving the “size” and “style”. A -typeface is also called a “font”. - -<ul class="menu"> -<li><a accesskey="1" href="#Styles">Styles</a>: Select roman, italics etc. -<li><a accesskey="2" href="#Sizes">Sizes</a>: Select point size. -<li><a accesskey="3" href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a>: Commands for wizards. -</ul> - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- ** Styles **** --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Styles"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Sizes">Sizes</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.23.1 \Styles</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Font-Styles-369"></a><a name="index-Typeface-Styles-370"></a><a name="index-Styles-of-text-371"></a> - - <p>The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX. - - <p>These commands are used like <code>\textit{italics text}</code>. The -corresponding command in parenthesis is the “declaration form”, which -takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the -next type style command or the end of the current group. - - <p>The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say -<code>\sffamily\bfseries</code> to get sans serif boldface. - - <p>You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; e.g. -<code>\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}</code>. - - <dl> -<dt><code>\textrm (\rmfamily)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextrm-372"></a><a name="index-_005crmfamily-373"></a>Roman. -<br><dt><code>\textit (\itshape)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextit-374"></a><a name="index-_005citshape-375"></a><br><dt><code>\emph</code><dd><a name="index-_005cemph-376"></a>Emphasis (toggles between \textit and \textrm). -<br><dt><code>\textmd (\mdseries)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextmd-377"></a><a name="index-_005cmdseries-378"></a>Medium weight (default). The opposite of boldface. -<br><dt><code>\textbf (\bfseries)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextbf-379"></a><a name="index-_005cbfseries-380"></a>Boldface. -<br><dt><code>\textup (\upshape)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextup-381"></a><a name="index-_005cupshape-382"></a>Upright (default). The opposite of slanted. -<br><dt><code>\textsl (\slshape)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextsl-383"></a><a name="index-_005cslshape-384"></a>Slanted. -<br><dt><code>\textsf (\sffamily)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextsf-385"></a><a name="index-_005csffamily-386"></a>Sans serif. -<br><dt><code>\textsc (\scshape)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextsc-387"></a><a name="index-_005cscshape-388"></a>Small caps. -<br><dt><code>\texttt (\ttfamily)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctexttt-389"></a><a name="index-_005cttfamily-390"></a>Typewriter. -<br><dt><code>\textnormal (\normalfont)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextnormal-391"></a><a name="index-_005cnormalfont-392"></a>Main document font. -<br><dt><code>\mathrm</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathrm-393"></a>Roman, for use in math mode. -<br><dt><code>\mathbf</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathbf-394"></a>Boldface, for use in math mode. -<br><dt><code>\mathsf</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathsf-395"></a>Sans serif, for use in math mode. -<br><dt><code>\mathtt</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathtt-396"></a>Typewriter, for use in math mode. -<br><dt><code>\mathit</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathit-397"></a>Italics, for use in math mode, e.g. variable names with several letters. -<br><dt><code>\mathnormal</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathnormal-398"></a>For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration. -<br><dt><code>\mathcal</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathcal-399"></a>`Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode. -</dl> - - <p>In addition, the command -<code>\mathversion{bold}</code> -<a name="index-_005cmathversion-400"></a>can be used for switching to bold letters and symbols in -formulas. <code>\mathversion{normal}</code> restores the default. - -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- ** Sizes ***** --> -<!-- ************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Sizes"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Styles">Styles</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.23.2 Sizes</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Font-Sizes-401"></a><a name="index-Typeface-Sizes-402"></a><a name="index-Sizes-of-text-403"></a> - - <p>The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. - - <p>The commands as listed here are "declaration forms". The scope of the -declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of -the current group. - - <p>You can also use the environment form of these commands; e.g. -<code>\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}</code>. - - <dl> -<dt><code>\tiny</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctiny-404"></a> -<br><dt><code>\scriptsize</code><dd><a name="index-_005cscriptsize-405"></a> -<br><dt><code>\footnotesize</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfootnotesize-406"></a> -<br><dt><code>\small</code><dd><a name="index-_005csmall-407"></a> -<br><dt><code>\normalsize</code><dd><a name="index-_005cnormalsize-408"></a>(default) - - <br><dt><code>\large</code><dd><a name="index-_005clarge-409"></a> -<br><dt><code>\Large</code><dd><a name="index-_005cLarge-410"></a> -<br><dt><code>\LARGE</code><dd><a name="index-_005cLARGE-411"></a> -<br><dt><code>\huge</code><dd><a name="index-_005chuge-412"></a> -<br><dt><code>\Huge</code><dd><a name="index-_005cHuge-413"></a></dl> - -<!-- ******************************** --> -<!-- ** Low-level font commands ***** --> -<!-- ******************************** --> -<!-- LEVEL3 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Low_002dlevel-font-commands"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Sizes">Sizes</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h4 class="subsection">2.23.3 Low-level font commands</h4> - -<p><a name="index-Low_002dlevel-font-commands-414"></a><a name="index-Font-commands_002c-low_002dlevel-415"></a> -These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and -packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available -ones. For full details, you should consult Chapter 7 of <cite>The LaTeX -Companion</cite>. - - <dl> -<dt><code>\fontencoding{enc}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontencoding-416"></a>Select font encoding. Valid encodings include <code>OT1</code> and <code>T1</code>. - - <br><dt><code>\fontfamily{family}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontfamily-417"></a>Select font family. Valid families include: - - <ul> -<li><code>cmr</code> for Computer Modern Roman -<li><code>cmss</code> for Computer Modern Sans Serif -<li><code>cmtt</code> for Computer Modern Typewriter -</ul> - - <p>and numerous others. - - <br><dt><code>\fontseries{series}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontseries-418"></a>Select font series. Valid series include: - - <ul> -<li><code>m</code> Medium (normal) -<li><code>b</code> Bold -<li><code>c</code> Condensed -<li><code>bc</code> Bold condensed -<li><code>bx</code> Bold extended -</ul> - - <p>and various other combinations. - - <br><dt><code>\fontshape{shape}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontshape-419"></a>Select font shape. Valid shapes are: - - <ul> -<li><code>n</code> Upright (normal) -<li><code>it</code> Italic -<li><code>sl</code> Slanted (oblique) -<li><code>sc</code> Small caps -<li><code>ui</code> Upright italics -<li><code>ol</code> Outline -</ul> - - <p>The two last shapes are not available for most font families. - - <br><dt><code>\fontsize{size}{skip}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontsize-420"></a>Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to; the -second is the <code>\baselineskip</code> to use. The unit of both parameters -defaults to pt. A rule of thumb is that the baselineskip should be 1.2 -times the font size. - - <br><dt><code>\selectfont</code><dd><a name="index-_005cselectfont-421"></a>The changes made by calling the four font commands described above do -not come into effect until <code>\selectfont</code> is called. - - <br><dt><code>\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cusefont-422"></a>Equivalent to calling <code>\fontencoding</code>, <code>\fontfamily</code>, -<code>\fontseries</code> and <code>\fontshape</code> with the given parameters, followed by <code>\selectfont</code>. -</dl> - -<!-- **************************************** --> -<!-- ************* PARAMETERS *************** --> -<!-- **************************************** --> -<!-- LEVEL1 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Parameters"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Concept-Index">Concept Index</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Commands">Commands</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h2 class="chapter">3 Parameters</h2> - -<p>The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; TeX -uses <span class="file">.tex</span> as a default file extension. If you omit the input file -entirely, TeX accepts input from the terminal. You specify command -options by supplying a string as a parameter to the command; e.g. - - <p><code>latex ``\scrollmode\input foo.tex''</code> - - <p>will process <span class="file">foo.tex</span> without pausing after every error. - - <p>Output files are always created in the current directory. When you fail -to specify an input file name, TeX bases the output names on the file -specification associated with the logical name TEX_OUTPUT, typically -<code>texput.log</code>. - -<!-- *************************** --> -<!-- ******* INDICES ******** --> -<!-- *************************** --> -<!-- LEVEL1 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Concept-Index"></a>Next: <a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Command-Index">Command Index</a>, -Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Parameters">Parameters</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h2 class="unnumbered">Concept Index</h2> - -<ul class="index-cp" compact> -<li><a href="#index-Accessing-any-character-of-a-font-348">Accessing any character of a font</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Aligning-Equations-73">Aligning Equations</a>: <a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Appendix_002c-creating-315">Appendix, creating</a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Arrays_002c-math-60">Arrays, math</a>: <a href="#array">array</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-article-class-41">article class</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Author_002c-for-titlepage-295">Author, for titlepage</a>: <a href="#_005cauthor">\author</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Bibliography_002c-creating-_0028automatically_0029-157">Bibliography, creating (automatically)</a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Bibliography_002c-creating-_0028manually_0029-151">Bibliography, creating (manually)</a>: <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-BibTeX_002c-using-156">BibTeX, using</a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-book-class-43">book class</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Boxes-317">Boxes</a>: <a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Cc-list-199">Cc list</a>: <a href="#_005ccc">\cc</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Centering-text-65">Centering text</a>: <a href="#_005ccentering">\centering</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Centering-text_002c-environment-for-63">Centering text, environment for</a>: <a href="#center">center</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Characters_002c-reserved-345">Characters, reserved</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Characters_002c-special-343">Characters, special</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Classes-of-document-40">Classes of document</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Commands_002c-defining-new-ones-28">Commands, defining new ones</a>: <a href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Computer-programs_002c-typesetting-170">Computer programs, typesetting</a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Counters_002c-a-list-of-3">Counters, a list of</a>: <a href="#Counters">Counters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Counters_002c-creating-11">Counters, creating</a>: <a href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Counters_002c-getting-the-value-of-20">Counters, getting the value of</a>: <a href="#_005cvalue">\value</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Counters_002c-setting-17">Counters, setting</a>: <a href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Creating-letters-196">Creating letters</a>: <a href="#Letters">Letters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Creating-pictures-106">Creating pictures</a>: <a href="#picture">picture</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Creating-tables-142">Creating tables</a>: <a href="#table">table</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Cross-referencing-21">Cross referencing</a>: <a href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Cross-referencing-using-page-number-24">Cross referencing using page number</a>: <a href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Cross-referencing-using-section-number-26">Cross referencing using section number</a>: <a href="#_005cref">\ref</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Date_002c-for-titlepage-297">Date, for titlepage</a>: <a href="#_005cdate">\date</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Defining-a-new-command-29">Defining a new command</a>: <a href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Defining-new-environments-32">Defining new environments</a>: <a href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Defining-new-fonts-38">Defining new fonts</a>: <a href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Defining-new-theorems-35">Defining new theorems</a>: <a href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Displaying-quoted-text-125">Displaying quoted text</a>: <a href="#quote">quote</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Displaying-quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation-122">Displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation</a>: <a href="#quotation">quotation</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Document-Classes-39">Document Classes</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Enclosed-material-203">Enclosed material</a>: <a href="#_005cencl">\encl</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Ending-_0026-Starting-355">Ending & Starting</a>: <a href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting & Ending</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Enlarge-current-page-226">Enlarge current page</a>: <a href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Environments-57">Environments</a>: <a href="#Environments">Environments</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Environments_002c-defining-31">Environments, defining</a>: <a href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Equations_002c-aligning-72">Equations, aligning</a>: <a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Equations_002c-environment-for-76">Equations, environment for</a>: <a href="#equation">equation</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-exponent-260">exponent</a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Figures_002c-footnotes-in-103">Figures, footnotes in</a>: <a href="#minipage">minipage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Flushing-a-page-224">Flushing a page</a>: <a href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Font-commands_002c-low_002dlevel-415">Font commands, low-level</a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Font-Sizes-401">Font Sizes</a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Font-Styles-369">Font Styles</a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Fonts-368">Fonts</a>: <a href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Fonts_002c-new-commands-for-37">Fonts, new commands for</a>: <a href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Footnotes-in-figures-102">Footnotes in figures</a>: <a href="#minipage">minipage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Footnotes_002c-creating-175">Footnotes, creating</a>: <a href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Formatting-Text-66">Formatting Text</a>: <a href="#_005ccentering">\centering</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Formulae_002c-environment-for-77">Formulae, environment for</a>: <a href="#equation">equation</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Formulae_002c-maths-253">Formulae, maths</a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Global-options-49">Global options</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Greek-letters-267">Greek letters</a>: <a href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Hyphenation_002c-defining-229">Hyphenation, defining</a>: <a href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Hyphenation_002c-forcing-220">Hyphenation, forcing</a>: <a href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Indent_002c-forcing-244">Indent, forcing</a>: <a href="#_005cindent">\indent</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Indent_002c-suppressing-246">Indent, suppressing</a>: <a href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Input-file_002c-splitting-350">Input file, splitting</a>: <a href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Input_002fOutput-363">Input/Output</a>: <a href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Inserting-figures-79">Inserting figures</a>: <a href="#figure">figure</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Justification_002c-ragged-left-93">Justification, ragged left</a>: <a href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Justification_002c-ragged-right-87">Justification, ragged right</a>: <a href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Labelled-lists_002c-creating-68">Labelled lists, creating</a>: <a href="#description">description</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-LaTeX-overview-2">LaTeX overview</a>: <a href="#Overview">Overview</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Layout-commands-51">Layout commands</a>: <a href="#Layout">Layout</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Left_002djustifying-text-86">Left-justifying text</a>: <a href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Left_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for-82">Left-justifying text, environment for</a>: <a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Left_002dto_002dright-mode-288">Left-to-right mode</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-adding-to-185">Lengths, adding to</a>: <a href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-defining-a-new-181">Lengths, defining a new</a>: <a href="#_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-defining-and-using-179">Lengths, defining and using</a>: <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-predefined-189">Lengths, predefined</a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-setting-value-of-183">Lengths, setting value of</a>: <a href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-letter-class-44">letter class</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Letters-195">Letters</a>: <a href="#Letters">Letters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Letters_002c-ending-201">Letters, ending</a>: <a href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Letters_002c-starting-208">Letters, starting</a>: <a href="#_005copening">\opening</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Line-Breaking-215">Line Breaking</a>: <a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Line-breaks-231">Line breaks</a>: <a href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lines-in-tables-144">Lines in tables</a>: <a href="#tabular">tabular</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lining-text-up-in-columns-using-tab-stops-128">Lining text up in columns using tab stops</a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lining-text-up-in-tables-145">Lining text up in tables</a>: <a href="#tabular">tabular</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lists-of-items-97">Lists of items</a>: <a href="#itemize">itemize</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lists-of-items_002c-generic-100">Lists of items, generic</a>: <a href="#list">list</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Lists-of-items_002c-numbered-70">Lists of items, numbered</a>: <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Loading-additional-packages-48">Loading additional packages</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Low_002dlevel-font-commands-414">Low-level font commands</a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-LR-mode-289">LR mode</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Making-a-title-page-163">Making a title page</a>: <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Making-paragraphs-241">Making paragraphs</a>: <a href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Margin-Notes-249">Margin Notes</a>: <a href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Math-Formulae-252">Math Formulae</a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Math-mode-287">Math mode</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Math-mode_002c-entering-254">Math mode, entering</a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Math-mode_002c-spacing-269">Math mode, spacing</a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Maths-Miscellany-274">Maths Miscellany</a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Maths-symbols-265">Maths symbols</a>: <a href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Minipage_002c-creating-a-104">Minipage, creating a</a>: <a href="#minipage">minipage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Modes-285">Modes</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Multicolumn-text-56">Multicolumn text</a>: <a href="#_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-New-line_002c-starting-218">New line, starting</a>: <a href="#_005c_005c">\\</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-New-line_002c-starting-_0028paragraph-mode_0029-233">New line, starting (paragraph mode)</a>: <a href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-New-Page-235">New Page</a>: <a href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Notes-in-the-margin-250">Notes in the margin</a>: <a href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Options_002c-global-50">Options, global</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Overview-of-LaTeX-1">Overview of LaTeX</a>: <a href="#Overview">Overview</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Packages_002c-loading-47">Packages, loading</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Page-break_002c-forcing-239">Page break, forcing</a>: <a href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Page-Breaking-214">Page Breaking</a>: <a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Page-Formatting-216">Page Formatting</a>: <a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line & Page Breaking</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Page-numbering-303">Page numbering</a>: <a href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Page-styles-291">Page styles</a>: <a href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Paragraph-mode-286">Paragraph mode</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Paragraph_002c-starting-a-new-248">Paragraph, starting a new</a>: <a href="#_005cpar">\par</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Paragraphs-242">Paragraphs</a>: <a href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Pictures_002c-creating-107">Pictures, creating</a>: <a href="#picture">picture</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Poetry_002c-an-environment-for-174">Poetry, an environment for</a>: <a href="#verse">verse</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Predefined-lengths-190">Predefined lengths</a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Programs_002c-typesetting-169">Programs, typesetting</a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation_002c-displaying-121">Quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying</a>: <a href="#quotation">quotation</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Quoted-text_002c-displaying-124">Quoted text, displaying</a>: <a href="#quote">quote</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Ragged-left-text-92">Ragged left text</a>: <a href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Ragged-left-text_002c-environment-for-89">Ragged left text, environment for</a>: <a href="#flushright">flushright</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Ragged-right-text-85">Ragged right text</a>: <a href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Ragged-right-text_002c-environment-for-83">Ragged right text, environment for</a>: <a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Remarks-in-the-margin-251">Remarks in the margin</a>: <a href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-report-class-42">report class</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Reserved-Characters-344">Reserved Characters</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Right_002djustifying-text-94">Right-justifying text</a>: <a href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Right_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for-90">Right-justifying text, environment for</a>: <a href="#flushright">flushright</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Sectioning-308">Sectioning</a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Simulating-typed-text-167">Simulating typed text</a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Sizes-of-text-403">Sizes of text</a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Space_002c-inserting-vertical-324">Space, inserting vertical</a>: <a href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Spaces-316">Spaces</a>: <a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces & Boxes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Spacing_002c-within-Math-mode-268">Spacing, within Math mode</a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Special-Characters-342">Special Characters</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Splitting-the-input-file-349">Splitting the input file</a>: <a href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Starting-_0026-Ending-354">Starting & Ending</a>: <a href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting & Ending</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Starting-on-a--right_002dhand-page-222">Starting on a right-hand page</a>: <a href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Styles-of-text-371">Styles of text</a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Styles_002c-page-290">Styles, page</a>: <a href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Subscript-262">Subscript</a>: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts & Superscripts</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Superscript-261">Superscript</a>: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts & Superscripts</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Symbols-266">Symbols</a>: <a href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Tab-stops_002c-using-127">Tab stops, using</a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Table-of-Contents_002c-creating-356">Table of Contents, creating</a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Tables_002c-creating-141">Tables, creating</a>: <a href="#table">table</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Terminal-Input_002fOutput-364">Terminal Input/Output</a>: <a href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Thanks_002c-for-titlepage-299">Thanks, for titlepage</a>: <a href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Theorems_002c-defining-34">Theorems, defining</a>: <a href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Theorems_002c-typesetting-161">Theorems, typesetting</a>: <a href="#theorem">theorem</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Title-making-292">Title making</a>: <a href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Title-pages_002c-creating-164">Title pages, creating</a>: <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Title_002c-for-titlepage-301">Title, for titlepage</a>: <a href="#_005ctitle">\title</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Typed-text_002c-simulating-168">Typed text, simulating</a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Typeface-Sizes-402">Typeface Sizes</a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Typeface-Styles-370">Typeface Styles</a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Typefaces-367">Typefaces</a>: <a href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Using-BibTeX-155">Using BibTeX</a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Variables_002c-a-list-of-4">Variables, a list of</a>: <a href="#Counters">Counters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Verbatim-text-172">Verbatim text</a>: <a href="#_005cverb">\verb</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-Vertical-space_002c-inserting-323">Vertical space, inserting</a>: <a href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></li> -</ul><!-- LEVEL1 --> -<div class="node"> -<p><hr> -<a name="Command-Index"></a>Previous: <a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Concept-Index">Concept Index</a>, -Up: <a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a> -<br> -</div> - -<!-- node-name, next, previous, up --> -<h2 class="unnumbered">Command Index</h2> - - - -<ul class="index-fn" compact> -<li><a href="#index-_0024-259"><code>$</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_0021-273"><code>\!</code></a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_0027-_0028tabbing_0029-134"><code>\' (tabbing)</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_0028-255"><code>\(</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_0029-256"><code>\)</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_002b-132"><code>\+</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_002c-272"><code>\,</code></a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029-219"><code>\- (hyphenation)</code></a>: <a href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_002d-_0028tabbing_0029-133"><code>\- (tabbing)</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_003b-270"><code>\;</code></a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_003c-131"><code>\<</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_003d-129"><code>\=</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_003e-130"><code>\></code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_005b-257"><code>\[</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_005c-217"><code>\\</code></a>: <a href="#_005c_005c">\\</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_005d-258"><code>\]</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005c_0060-_0028tabbing_0029-135"><code>\` (tabbing)</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ca-139"><code>\a</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005caddcontentsline-361"><code>\addcontentsline</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005caddress-197"><code>\address</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddress">\address</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005caddtocontents-362"><code>\addtocontents</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddtocontents">\addtocontents</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005caddtocounter-5"><code>\addtocounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddtocounter">\addtocounter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005caddtolength-184"><code>\addtolength</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005caddvspace-322"><code>\addvspace</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cAlph-7"><code>\Alph</code></a>: <a href="#_005calph">\alph</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005calph-6"><code>\alph</code></a>: <a href="#_005calph">\alph</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cappendix-314"><code>\appendix</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005carabic-8"><code>\arabic</code></a>: <a href="#_005carabic">\arabic</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cauthor-294"><code>\author</code></a>: <a href="#_005cauthor">\author</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cbackslash-346"><code>\backslash</code></a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cbegin-58"><code>\begin</code></a>: <a href="#Environments">Environments</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cbfseries-380"><code>\bfseries</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cbibitem-152"><code>\bibitem</code></a>: <a href="#_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cbibliography-159"><code>\bibliography</code></a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cbibliographystyle-158"><code>\bibliographystyle</code></a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cbigskip-325"><code>\bigskip</code></a>: <a href="#_005cbigskip">\bigskip</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ccaption-80"><code>\caption</code></a>: <a href="#figure">figure</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ccc-198"><code>\cc</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccc">\cc</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ccdots-275"><code>\cdots</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ccentering-64"><code>\centering</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccentering">\centering</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cchapter-309"><code>\chapter</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ccircle-108"><code>\circle</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccircle">\circle</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ccite-153"><code>\cite</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccite">\cite</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ccleardoublepage-221"><code>\cleardoublepage</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cclearpage-223"><code>\clearpage</code></a>: <a href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ccline-146"><code>\cline</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccline">\cline</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cclosing-200"><code>\closing</code></a>: <a href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cCOLON-271"><code>\COLON</code></a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cdashbox-109"><code>\dashbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cdate-296"><code>\date</code></a>: <a href="#_005cdate">\date</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cddots-276"><code>\ddots</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cdepth-193"><code>\depth</code></a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cdocumentclass-45"><code>\documentclass</code></a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cdotfill-318"><code>\dotfill</code></a>: <a href="#_005cdotfill">\dotfill</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cemph-376"><code>\emph</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cencl-202"><code>\encl</code></a>: <a href="#_005cencl">\encl</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cend-59"><code>\end</code></a>: <a href="#Environments">Environments</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cenlargethispage-225"><code>\enlargethispage</code></a>: <a href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfbox-330"><code>\fbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfbox">\fbox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cflushbottom-52"><code>\flushbottom</code></a>: <a href="#_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfnsymbol-9"><code>\fnsymbol</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfnsymbol">\fnsymbol</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfontencoding-416"><code>\fontencoding</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfontfamily-417"><code>\fontfamily</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfontseries-418"><code>\fontseries</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfontshape-419"><code>\fontshape</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfontsize-420"><code>\fontsize</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfootnote-176"><code>\footnote</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfootnotemark-177"><code>\footnotemark</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfootnotesize-406"><code>\footnotesize</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfootnotetext-178"><code>\footnotetext</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfrac-277"><code>\frac</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cframe-110"><code>\frame</code></a>: <a href="#_005cframe">\frame</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cframebox-111"><code>\framebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cframebox-331"><code>\framebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cframebox">\framebox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cfussy-227"><code>\fussy</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cheight-192"><code>\height</code></a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005chfill-319"><code>\hfill</code></a>: <a href="#_005chfill">\hfill</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005chline-147"><code>\hline</code></a>: <a href="#_005chline">\hline</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005chrulefill-320"><code>\hrulefill</code></a>: <a href="#_005chrulefill">\hrulefill</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005chspace-321"><code>\hspace</code></a>: <a href="#_005chspace">\hspace</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005chuge-412"><code>\huge</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cHuge-413"><code>\Huge</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005chyphenation-228"><code>\hyphenation</code></a>: <a href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cinclude-351"><code>\include</code></a>: <a href="#_005cinclude">\include</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cincludeonly-352"><code>\includeonly</code></a>: <a href="#_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cindent-243"><code>\indent</code></a>: <a href="#_005cindent">\indent</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cinput-353"><code>\input</code></a>: <a href="#_005cinput">\input</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005citem-96"><code>\item</code></a>: <a href="#itemize">itemize</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005citshape-375"><code>\itshape</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ckill-136"><code>\kill</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005clabel-22"><code>\label</code></a>: <a href="#_005clabel">\label</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cLarge-410"><code>\Large</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005clarge-409"><code>\large</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cLARGE-411"><code>\LARGE</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cldots-278"><code>\ldots</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005clefteqn-74"><code>\lefteqn</code></a>: <a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cline-112"><code>\line</code></a>: <a href="#_005cline">\line</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005clinebreak-230"><code>\linebreak</code></a>: <a href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005clinethickness-113"><code>\linethickness</code></a>: <a href="#_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005clistoffigures-358"><code>\listoffigures</code></a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005clistoftables-359"><code>\listoftables</code></a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005clocation-204"><code>\location</code></a>: <a href="#_005clocation">\location</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmakebox-333"><code>\makebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029-114"><code>\makebox (picture)</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmakelabels-205"><code>\makelabels</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmaketitle-293"><code>\maketitle</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmarkboth-305"><code>\markboth</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmarkboth">\markboth</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmarkright-306"><code>\markright</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmarkright">\markright</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmathbf-394"><code>\mathbf</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmathcal-399"><code>\mathcal</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmathit-397"><code>\mathit</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmathnormal-398"><code>\mathnormal</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmathrm-393"><code>\mathrm</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmathsf-395"><code>\mathsf</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmathtt-396"><code>\mathtt</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmathversion-400"><code>\mathversion</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmbox-334"><code>\mbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmbox">\mbox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmdseries-378"><code>\mdseries</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmedskip-326"><code>\medskip</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmedskip">\medskip</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmulticolumn-148"><code>\multicolumn</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cmultiput-115"><code>\multiput</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmultiput">\multiput</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cname-206"><code>\name</code></a>: <a href="#_005cname">\name</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewcommand-27"><code>\newcommand</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewcounter-10"><code>\newcounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewenvironment-30"><code>\newenvironment</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewfont-36"><code>\newfont</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewlength-180"><code>\newlength</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewline-232"><code>\newline</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewpage-234"><code>\newpage</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewsavebox-335"><code>\newsavebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnewtheorem-33"><code>\newtheorem</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnocite-154"><code>\nocite</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnocite">\nocite</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnofiles-360"><code>\nofiles</code></a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnoindent-245"><code>\noindent</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnolinebreak-236"><code>\nolinebreak</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnolinebreak">\nolinebreak</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnopagebreak-237"><code>\nopagebreak</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnopagebreak">\nopagebreak</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnormalfont-392"><code>\normalfont</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cnormalsize-408"><code>\normalsize</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005conecolumn-53"><code>\onecolumn</code></a>: <a href="#_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005copening-207"><code>\opening</code></a>: <a href="#_005copening">\opening</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005coval-116"><code>\oval</code></a>: <a href="#_005coval">\oval</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005coverbrace-279"><code>\overbrace</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005coverline-280"><code>\overline</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cpagebreak-238"><code>\pagebreak</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cpagenumbering-302"><code>\pagenumbering</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cpageref-23"><code>\pageref</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cpagestyle-304"><code>\pagestyle</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cpar-247"><code>\par</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpar">\par</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cparagraph-312"><code>\paragraph</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cparbox-336"><code>\parbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cparbox">\parbox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cpoptabs-138"><code>\poptabs</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cps-209"><code>\ps</code></a>: <a href="#_005cps">\ps</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cpushtabs-137"><code>\pushtabs</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cput-117"><code>\put</code></a>: <a href="#_005cput">\put</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005craggedbottom-54"><code>\raggedbottom</code></a>: <a href="#_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005craggedleft-91"><code>\raggedleft</code></a>: <a href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005craggedright-84"><code>\raggedright</code></a>: <a href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005craisebox-337"><code>\raisebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005craisebox">\raisebox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cref-25"><code>\ref</code></a>: <a href="#_005cref">\ref</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005crefstepcounter-12"><code>\refstepcounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005crmfamily-373"><code>\rmfamily</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005croman-13"><code>\roman</code></a>: <a href="#_005croman">\roman</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cRoman-14"><code>\Roman</code></a>: <a href="#_005croman">\roman</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005crule-338"><code>\rule</code></a>: <a href="#_005crule">\rule</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csavebox-339"><code>\savebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005csavebox">\savebox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csbox-340"><code>\sbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005csbox">\sbox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cscriptsize-405"><code>\scriptsize</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cscshape-388"><code>\scshape</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cselectfont-421"><code>\selectfont</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csetcounter-16"><code>\setcounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csetlength-182"><code>\setlength</code></a>: <a href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csettodepth-186"><code>\settodepth</code></a>: <a href="#_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csettoheight-187"><code>\settoheight</code></a>: <a href="#_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csettowidth-188"><code>\settowidth</code></a>: <a href="#_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csffamily-386"><code>\sffamily</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cshortstack-118"><code>\shortstack</code></a>: <a href="#_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csignature-210"><code>\signature</code></a>: <a href="#_005csignature">\signature</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csloppy-240"><code>\sloppy</code></a>: <a href="#_005csloppy">\sloppy</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cslshape-384"><code>\slshape</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csmall-407"><code>\small</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csmallskip-327"><code>\smallskip</code></a>: <a href="#_005csmallskip">\smallskip</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csqrt-281"><code>\sqrt</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cstartbreaks-211"><code>\startbreaks</code></a>: <a href="#_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cstepcounter-15"><code>\stepcounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cstopbreaks-212"><code>\stopbreaks</code></a>: <a href="#_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csubparagraph-313"><code>\subparagraph</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csubsection-311"><code>\subsection</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csubsubsection-310"><code>\subsubsection</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005csymbol-347"><code>\symbol</code></a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctableofcontents-357"><code>\tableofcontents</code></a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctelephone-213"><code>\telephone</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctelephone">\telephone</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextbf-379"><code>\textbf</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextit-374"><code>\textit</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextmd-377"><code>\textmd</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextnormal-391"><code>\textnormal</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextrm-372"><code>\textrm</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextsc-387"><code>\textsc</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextsf-385"><code>\textsf</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextsl-383"><code>\textsl</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctexttt-389"><code>\texttt</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctextup-381"><code>\textup</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cthanks-298"><code>\thanks</code></a>: <a href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cthispagestyle-307"><code>\thispagestyle</code></a>: <a href="#_005cthispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctiny-404"><code>\tiny</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctitle-300"><code>\title</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctitle">\title</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctoday-165"><code>\today</code></a>: <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctotalheight-194"><code>\totalheight</code></a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cttfamily-390"><code>\ttfamily</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctwocolumn-55"><code>\twocolumn</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctypein-365"><code>\typein</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctypein">\typein</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005ctypeout-366"><code>\typeout</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctypeout">\typeout</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cunderbrace-282"><code>\underbrace</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cunderline-283"><code>\underline</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cupshape-382"><code>\upshape</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cusebox-341"><code>\usebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cusebox">\usebox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cusecounter-18"><code>\usecounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cusefont-422"><code>\usefont</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cusepackage-46"><code>\usepackage</code></a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cvalue-19"><code>\value</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvalue">\value</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cvdots-284"><code>\vdots</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cvector-119"><code>\vector</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvector">\vector</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cverb-171"><code>\verb</code></a>: <a href="#_005cverb">\verb</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cvfill-328"><code>\vfill</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvfill">\vfill</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cvline-149"><code>\vline</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvline">\vline</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cvspace-329"><code>\vspace</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvspace">\vspace</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005cwidth-191"><code>\width</code></a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005e-264"><code>^</code></a>: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts & Superscripts</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-_005f-263"><code>_</code></a>: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts & Superscripts</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-array-61"><code>array</code></a>: <a href="#array">array</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-center-62"><code>center</code></a>: <a href="#center">center</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-description-67"><code>description</code></a>: <a href="#description">description</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-enumerate-69"><code>enumerate</code></a>: <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-eqnarray-71"><code>eqnarray</code></a>: <a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-equation-75"><code>equation</code></a>: <a href="#equation">equation</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-figure-78"><code>figure</code></a>: <a href="#figure">figure</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-flushleft-81"><code>flushleft</code></a>: <a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-flushright-88"><code>flushright</code></a>: <a href="#flushright">flushright</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-itemize-95"><code>itemize</code></a>: <a href="#itemize">itemize</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-letter-98"><code>letter</code></a>: <a href="#letter">letter</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-list-99"><code>list</code></a>: <a href="#list">list</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-lrbox-332"><code>lrbox</code></a>: <a href="#lrbox">lrbox</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-minipage-101"><code>minipage</code></a>: <a href="#minipage">minipage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-picture-105"><code>picture</code></a>: <a href="#picture">picture</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-quotation-120"><code>quotation</code></a>: <a href="#quotation">quotation</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-quote-123"><code>quote</code></a>: <a href="#quote">quote</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-tabbing-126"><code>tabbing</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-table-140"><code>table</code></a>: <a href="#table">table</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-tabular-143"><code>tabular</code></a>: <a href="#tabular">tabular</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-thebibliography-150"><code>thebibliography</code></a>: <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-theorem-160"><code>theorem</code></a>: <a href="#theorem">theorem</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-titlepage-162"><code>titlepage</code></a>: <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-verbatim-166"><code>verbatim</code></a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li> -<li><a href="#index-verse-173"><code>verse</code></a>: <a href="#verse">verse</a></li> - </ul> -<div class="contents"> -<h2>Table of Contents</h2> -<ul> -<li><a name="toc_Overview" href="#Overview">1 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide</a> -<li><a name="toc_Commands" href="#Commands">2 Commands</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#Counters">2.1 Counters</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005caddtocounter">2.1.1 \addtocounter</a> -<li><a href="#_005calph">2.1.2 \alph</a> -<li><a href="#_005carabic">2.1.3 \arabic</a> -<li><a href="#_005cfnsymbol">2.1.4 \fnsymbol</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnewcounter">2.1.5 \newcounter</a> -<li><a href="#_005crefstepcounter">2.1.6 \refstepcounter</a> -<li><a href="#_005croman">2.1.7 \roman</a> -<li><a href="#_005cstepcounter">2.1.8 \stepcounter</a> -<li><a href="#_005csetcounter">2.1.9 \setcounter</a> -<li><a href="#_005cusecounter">2.1.10 \usecounter</a> -<li><a href="#_005cvalue">2.1.11 \value</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Cross-References">2.2 Cross References</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005clabel">2.2.1 \label</a> -<li><a href="#_005cpageref">2.2.2 \pageref</a> -<li><a href="#_005cref">2.2.3 \ref</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Definitions">2.3 Definitions</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cnewcommand">2.3.1 \newcommand</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnewenvironment">2.3.2 \newenvironment</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnewtheorem">2.3.3 \newtheorem</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnewfont">2.3.4 \newfont</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Document-Classes">2.4 Document Classes</a> -<li><a href="#Layout">2.5 Layout</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cflushbottom">2.5.1 \flushbottom</a> -<li><a href="#_005conecolumn">2.5.2 \onecolumn</a> -<li><a href="#_005craggedbottom">2.5.3 \raggedbottom</a> -<li><a href="#_005ctwocolumn">2.5.4 \twocolumn</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Environments">2.6 Environments</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#array">2.6.1 array</a> -<li><a href="#center">2.6.2 center</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005ccentering">2.6.2.1 \centering</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#description">2.6.3 description</a> -<li><a href="#enumerate">2.6.4 enumerate</a> -<li><a href="#eqnarray">2.6.5 eqnarray</a> -<li><a href="#equation">2.6.6 equation</a> -<li><a href="#figure">2.6.7 figure</a> -<li><a href="#flushleft">2.6.8 flushleft</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005craggedright">2.6.8.1 \raggedright</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#flushright">2.6.9 flushright</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005craggedleft">2.6.9.1 \raggedleft</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#itemize">2.6.10 itemize</a> -<li><a href="#letter">2.6.11 letter</a> -<li><a href="#list">2.6.12 list</a> -<li><a href="#minipage">2.6.13 minipage</a> -<li><a href="#picture">2.6.14 picture</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005ccircle">2.6.14.1 \circle</a> -<li><a href="#_005cdashbox">2.6.14.2 \dashbox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cframe">2.6.14.3 \frame</a> -<li><a href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">2.6.14.4 \framebox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cline">2.6.14.5 \line</a> -<li><a href="#_005clinethickness">2.6.14.6 \linethickness</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">2.6.14.7 \makebox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmultiput">2.6.14.8 \multiput</a> -<li><a href="#_005coval">2.6.14.9 \oval</a> -<li><a href="#_005cput">2.6.14.10 \put</a> -<li><a href="#_005cshortstack">2.6.14.11 \shortstack</a> -<li><a href="#_005cvector">2.6.14.12 \vector</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#quotation">2.6.15 quotation</a> -<li><a href="#quote">2.6.16 quote</a> -<li><a href="#tabbing">2.6.17 tabbing</a> -<li><a href="#table">2.6.18 table</a> -<li><a href="#tabular">2.6.19 tabular</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005ccline">2.6.19.1 \cline</a> -<li><a href="#_005chline">2.6.19.2 \hline</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmulticolumn">2.6.19.3 \multicolumn</a> -<li><a href="#_005cvline">2.6.19.4 \vline</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#thebibliography">2.6.20 thebibliography</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cbibitem">2.6.20.1 \bibitem</a> -<li><a href="#_005ccite">2.6.20.2 \cite</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnocite">2.6.20.3 \nocite</a> -<li><a href="#Using-BibTeX">2.6.20.4 Using BibTeX</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#theorem">2.6.21 theorem</a> -<li><a href="#titlepage">2.6.22 titlepage</a> -<li><a href="#verbatim">2.6.23 verbatim</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cverb">2.6.23.1 \verb</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#verse">2.6.24 verse</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Footnotes">2.7 Footnotes</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cfootnote">2.7.1 \footnote</a> -<li><a href="#_005cfootnotemark">2.7.2 \footnotemark</a> -<li><a href="#_005cfootnotetext">2.7.3 \footnotetext</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Lengths">2.8 Lengths</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cnewlength">2.8.1 \newlength</a> -<li><a href="#_005csetlength">2.8.2 \setlength</a> -<li><a href="#_005caddtolength">2.8.3 \addtolength</a> -<li><a href="#_005csettodepth">2.8.4 \settodepth</a> -<li><a href="#_005csettoheight">2.8.5 \settoheight</a> -<li><a href="#_005csettowidth">2.8.6 \settowidth</a> -<li><a href="#Predefined-lengths">2.8.7 Predefined lengths</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Letters">2.9 Letters</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005caddress">2.9.1 \address</a> -<li><a href="#_005ccc">2.9.2 \cc</a> -<li><a href="#_005cclosing">2.9.3 \closing</a> -<li><a href="#_005cencl">2.9.4 \encl</a> -<li><a href="#_005clocation">2.9.5 \location</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmakelabels">2.9.6 \makelabels</a> -<li><a href="#_005cname">2.9.7 \name</a> -<li><a href="#_005copening">2.9.8 \opening</a> -<li><a href="#_005cps">2.9.9 \ps</a> -<li><a href="#_005csignature">2.9.10 \signature</a> -<li><a href="#_005cstartbreaks">2.9.11 \startbreaks</a> -<li><a href="#_005cstopbreaks">2.9.12 \stopbreaks</a> -<li><a href="#_005ctelephone">2.9.13 \telephone</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">2.10 Line & Page Breaking</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005c_005c">2.10.1 \\</a> -<li><a href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">2.10.2 \-</a> -<li><a href="#_005ccleardoublepage">2.10.3 \cleardoublepage</a> -<li><a href="#_005cclearpage">2.10.4 \clearpage</a> -<li><a href="#_005cenlargethispage">2.10.5 \enlargethispage</a> -<li><a href="#_005cfussy">2.10.6 \fussy</a> -<li><a href="#_005chyphenation">2.10.7 \hyphenation</a> -<li><a href="#_005clinebreak">2.10.8 \linebreak</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnewline">2.10.9 \newline</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnewpage">2.10.10 \newpage</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnolinebreak">2.10.11 \nolinebreak</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnopagebreak">2.10.12 \nopagebreak</a> -<li><a href="#_005cpagebreak">2.10.13 \pagebreak</a> -<li><a href="#_005csloppy">2.10.14 \sloppy</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Making-Paragraphs">2.11 Making Paragraphs</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cindent">2.11.1 \indent</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnoindent">2.11.2 \noindent</a> -<li><a href="#_005cpar">2.11.3 \par</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Margin-Notes">2.12 Margin Notes</a> -<li><a href="#Math-Formulae">2.13 Math Formulae</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">2.13.1 Subscripts & Superscripts</a> -<li><a href="#Math-Symbols">2.13.2 Math Symbols</a> -<li><a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">2.13.3 Spacing in Math Mode</a> -<li><a href="#Math-Miscellany">2.13.4 Math Miscellany</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Modes">2.14 Modes</a> -<li><a href="#Page-Styles">2.15 Page Styles</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cmaketitle">2.15.1 \maketitle</a> -<li><a href="#_005cauthor">2.15.2 \author</a> -<li><a href="#_005cdate">2.15.3 \date</a> -<li><a href="#_005cthanks">2.15.4 \thanks</a> -<li><a href="#_005ctitle">2.15.5 \title</a> -<li><a href="#_005cpagenumbering">2.15.6 \pagenumbering</a> -<li><a href="#_005cpagestyle">2.15.7 \pagestyle</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmarkboth">2.15.8 \markboth</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmarkright">2.15.9 \markright</a> -<li><a href="#_005cthispagestyle">2.15.10 \thispagestyle</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Sectioning">2.16 Sectioning</a> -<li><a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">2.17 Spaces & Boxes</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cdotfill">2.17.1 \dotfill</a> -<li><a href="#_005chfill">2.17.2 \hfill</a> -<li><a href="#_005chrulefill">2.17.3 \hrulefill</a> -<li><a href="#_005chspace">2.17.4 \hspace</a> -<li><a href="#_005caddvspace">2.17.5 \addvspace</a> -<li><a href="#_005cbigskip">2.17.6 \bigskip</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmedskip">2.17.7 \medskip</a> -<li><a href="#_005csmallskip">2.17.8 \smallskip</a> -<li><a href="#_005cvfill">2.17.9 \vfill</a> -<li><a href="#_005cvspace">2.17.10 \vspace</a> -<li><a href="#_005cfbox">2.17.11 \fbox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cframebox">2.17.12 \framebox</a> -<li><a href="#lrbox">2.17.13 lrbox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmakebox">2.17.14 \makebox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cmbox">2.17.15 \mbox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cnewsavebox">2.17.16 \newsavebox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cparbox">2.17.17 \parbox</a> -<li><a href="#_005craisebox">2.17.18 \raisebox</a> -<li><a href="#_005crule">2.17.19 \rule</a> -<li><a href="#_005csavebox">2.17.20 \savebox</a> -<li><a href="#_005csbox">2.17.21 \sbox</a> -<li><a href="#_005cusebox">2.17.22 \usebox</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Special-Characters">2.18 Special Characters</a> -<li><a href="#Splitting-the-Input">2.19 Splitting the Input</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005cinclude">2.19.1 \include</a> -<li><a href="#_005cincludeonly">2.19.2 \includeonly</a> -<li><a href="#_005cinput">2.19.3 \input</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">2.20 Starting & Ending</a> -<li><a href="#Table-of-Contents">2.21 Table of Contents</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005caddcontentsline">2.21.1 \addcontentsline</a> -<li><a href="#_005caddtocontents">2.21.2 \addtocontents</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">2.22 Terminal Input/Output</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#_005ctypein">2.22.1 \typein</a> -<li><a href="#_005ctypeout">2.22.2 \typeout</a> -</li></ul> -<li><a href="#Typefaces">2.23 Typefaces</a> -<ul> -<li><a href="#Styles">2.23.1 \Styles</a> -<li><a href="#Sizes">2.23.2 Sizes</a> -<li><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">2.23.3 Low-level font commands</a> -</li></ul> -</li></ul> -<li><a name="toc_Parameters" href="#Parameters">3 Parameters</a> -<li><a name="toc_Concept-Index" href="#Concept-Index">Concept Index</a> -<li><a name="toc_Command-Index" href="#Command-Index">Command Index</a> -</li></ul> -</div> - -</body></html> - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex2e.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex2e.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8f8a41d1728..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex2e.pdf +++ /dev/null |